For Quotation: General Technical Requirement FOR Electrical

SEQ.
07
24.MAY.2022
FOR QUOTATION
F 2021.11.04 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN
E 2021.09.17 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN
D 2021.08.25 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN
C 2021.07.26 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN
B 2021.06.29 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN
A - ISSUE FOR INFORMATION - - -
REV DATE DESCRIPTION DESIGNED CHECKED APPROVED
PROJECT :
QUANG TRACH 1 THERMAL POWER PLANT
EMPLOYER :
CONSULTANT :
CONTRACTOR :
DESIGNED BY DATE TITLE :
S.H.LEE 2021.09.17 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

CHECKED BY DATE FOR
ELECTRICAL
S.H.LEE 2021.09.17
APPROVED BY DATE PROJECT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV.

38/2021/QT1-EVNPMB2-
B.G.HAN 2021.09.17 MCHDEC-CC1 QT1-GTR-E-001 F
Revision History
REV. SEQ. ISSUE

REVISED CLAUSE DESCRIPTION REMARK
NO. NO. DATE
F 1 19-NOV-2021 7.4.1.2 – 14) Updated

APPENDIX #1 : 7.3 / 10.2 Updated
2 23-NOV-2021 APPENDIX #1 : 10.3 ~ 10.6 Updated
7.13.3
7.13.8
3 22-DEC-2021
APPENDIX #1 : 6.0, 7.1, 7.3,
Updated
10.7
7.11.5.3 / 7.11.5.4 / 7.11.5.5 /
7.11.12 / 7.11.7.1 / 7.11.7.3 /
4 11-JAN-2022 7.12.5 / 7.12.6.3 / 7.12.6.8 Updated
APPENDIX #1 : 13.0
5 11-FEB-2022 APPENDIX #1 : 9.0 Updated
7.13.3
6 08-APR-2022 Updated
Appendix-1 : 6.0, 9.0, 13.0
7 24-MAY-2022 APPENDIX #1 : 7.0 Updated
QUANG TRACH I THERMAL POWER PLANT
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL REV.F
VOLUME 5-PART 2- CHAPTER VII-SECTION 7.
GENERATOR AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 6

Scope of Work ..................................................................................................... 6
Codes and Standards ......................................................................................... 10
Electrical system studies ................................................................................... 13
Voltage Distribution and regulation .................................................................. 16
System Configuration Interlocking ................................................................... 18
7.2 GENERATOR AND AUXILIARIES ............................................................ 19
Generator Design............................................................................................... 19
Stator ................................................................................................................. 22
Rotor .................................................................................................................. 23
Generator Earthing ............................................................................................ 24
Generator Condition Monitoring ....................................................................... 26
Generator Excitation ......................................................................................... 28
Electrical Synchronizing Facilities.................................................................... 38
Generator Cooling ............................................................................................. 41
Temperature Measurement ................................................................................ 44
Generator Current and voltage Transformers ............................................... 45
Generator Neutral Earthing Transformers .................................................... 47
Generator Fire Protection ............................................................................. 49
7.3 500KV EHV OVERHEAD LINE .................................................................. 50
General Information .......................................................................................... 50
Line conductor................................................................................................... 52
Overhead ground wire ....................................................................................... 53
Factory Acceptance Tests.................................................................................. 54
Requirements for Materials ............................................................................... 55
System Description, Characteristics and Operating Conditions ....................... 56
500kV Current Transformer .............................................................................. 57
500kV Voltage Transformer ............................................................................. 58
500kV Surge Arresters ...................................................................................... 58
500kV Insulator Unit .................................................................................... 59
7.4 POWER TRANSFORMERS ......................................................................... 60
General Technical Requirements for Transformers .......................................... 60
Generator Step Up Transformer (GSUT) .......................................................... 77
Unit Auxiliary Transformer (UAT)................................................................... 80
Auxiliary Transformer (Dry type power transformer) ...................................... 81
Part 2 – Chapter VII – Section 7 – Generator and electrical equipment page 1 of 255
7.5 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER (GCB).............................................. 82
General .............................................................................................................. 82
Generator Circuit Breaker parameter requirements .......................................... 83
7.6 ISOLATED PHASE BUSBAR (IPB) ............................................................ 92
General .............................................................................................................. 92
Scope of supply and specification ..................................................................... 93
7.7 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR (EDG).......................................... 98
General .............................................................................................................. 98
Type of Plant ..................................................................................................... 98
Design and Selection ......................................................................................... 98
Rating ................................................................................................................ 99
Operating Philosophy ...................................................................................... 100
In-Service Testing ........................................................................................... 101
D.C. Auxiliaries for the Diesel Generators ..................................................... 101
Extent of Supply .............................................................................................. 101
Particulars of Plant .......................................................................................... 102
7.8 PROTECTION AND METERING SYSTEM ........................................... 117
General ............................................................................................................ 117
500kV EHV OHL protection .......................................................................... 125
Generator Protection ....................................................................................... 126
Unit Overall differential Protection (87O) ...................................................... 130
Generator Step-Up Transformer Protection .................................................... 130
Unit Auxiliary Transformer Protection ........................................................... 132
Auxiliary Power Transformers protection....................................................... 134
Emergency Diesel Generator Protection ......................................................... 135
11 kV Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary and Station) ................................ 135
400 V Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary and Station) ........................... 137
400 V Motor Control Centre (Unit Auxiliary and Station Services).......... 138
Motor Protection ......................................................................................... 138
Revenue/Tariff Metering ............................................................................ 139
Measurement system .................................................................................. 142
Drawings to be provided by the Contractor during the Contract ............... 142
7.9 AC SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 143
General ............................................................................................................ 143
Medium Voltage Switchboards (11kV) .......................................................... 144
Low Voltage Switchboards, Motor control center (400/230 V) ..................... 150
Medium and Low voltage switchboard control and supplies.......................... 154
7.10 DC AND UPS SYSTEM ............................................................................... 156
DC system................................................................................................... 156
UPS system ................................................................................................. 164
Tests ............................................................................................................ 168
Requirements for Battery Rooms ............................................................... 169
Battery Installation Safety Requirements ................................................... 169
Drawings to be provided by the Contractor during the Contractor ............ 170
7.11 CABLING, WIRING, CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM ............................... 171
Standards .................................................................................................... 171
Scope of work ............................................................................................. 171
Planning and Setting Out of Work ............................................................. 171
Cable management system (CMS) ............................................................. 172
Cable – manufacture ................................................................................... 173
Cable – Installation ..................................................................................... 177
Cables - Termination .................................................................................. 183
Testing of Cables after Installation............................................................. 185
Fire and smoke stopping ............................................................................. 185
Wiring and its Accessories ...................................................................... 186
Terminal Block........................................................................................ 189
Power and Control Cables....................................................................... 190
Information to be provided...................................................................... 193
7.12 EARTHING, LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ............................ 193
Applicable standards................................................................................... 193
General........................................................................................................ 193
Methods of installation ............................................................................... 195
Below grade earthing system ...................................................................... 195
Above grade earthing system ..................................................................... 197
Specific earthing conditions ....................................................................... 198
Lightning protection system ....................................................................... 202
7.13 MOTORS ....................................................................................................... 203
General........................................................................................................ 203
Relevant standards ...................................................................................... 203
Duty, rating and motor clarification. .......................................................... 203
Insulation systems ...................................................................................... 205
Windings ..................................................................................................... 205
Stator ........................................................................................................... 206
Rotor ........................................................................................................... 206
Motor enclosure and cooling ...................................................................... 207
Bearings ...................................................................................................... 207
Anti-Condensation Heaters ..................................................................... 207
Winding temperature detectors ............................................................... 208
General construction ............................................................................... 208
Terminal Boxes - General ....................................................................... 208
Power cable terminal boxes and terminals .............................................. 209
Secondary Terminal Boxes and Terminals ............................................. 209
Brushgear, Sliprings and Commutators .................................................. 210
Name plate............................................................................................... 210
7.13.18 Motor Starting Current………………………………………………….210
7.13.19 Motor Speed Protection………………………………………...……….210
7.14 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER ........................................................... 210
General........................................................................................................ 210
General requirements on lighting ............................................................... 212
Illuminated Exit Signs and emergency lightings ........................................ 214
Small power and maintenance box (Single and Three phase supply) ........ 215
Other requirements. .................................................................................... 216
Distribution board ....................................................................................... 217
7.15 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM ..................................................... 217
General and standards................................................................................. 217
Description.................................................................................................. 218
Design criteria............................................................................................. 218
Protection voltage ....................................................................................... 219
Designed lifetime ........................................................................................ 219
Galvanic Anode/Impressed Current Systems ............................................. 219
Voltage reference points ............................................................................. 220
Control and Instrumentation ....................................................................... 220
Portable testing equipment ......................................................................... 221
Auxiliary protection ................................................................................ 221
Interconnection cables ............................................................................. 221
Underground pipework auxiliary cathodic protection system ................ 222
7.16 TEST AND INSPECTION ........................................................................... 223
General........................................................................................................ 223
Generator and auxiliaries ............................................................................ 224
500kV EHV Overhead line ........................................................................ 233
Power Transformers ................................................................................... 235
Generator Circuit Breaker (GCB)............................................................... 237
Isolated Phase Busbar (IPB) ....................................................................... 239
Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) .......................................................... 240
Protection and metering system.................................................................. 241
AC system (11kV switchgears and 400/230V Switchboards) ................... 242
DC and UPS system ................................................................................ 243
Cabling, wiring, cable support system .................................................... 244
Earthing, lightning protection system ..................................................... 245
Motor ....................................................................................................... 246
Lighting and small power........................................................................ 247
Cathodic protection system ..................................................................... 248
Current Transformer/ Voltage Transformer ............................................ 249
Surge Arrester ......................................................................................... 249
Auxiliary Power Consumption ................................................................ 250
7.17 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS ................................................... 250
General........................................................................................................ 250
Essential Spares .......................................................................................... 251
Optional Spares........................................................................................... 253
Special and Maintenance Tools .................................................................. 254
Consumables ............................................................................................... 255
[APPENDIX]
1. ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA
2.
7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Scope of Work
This Section of the Specification details the technical requirement for the
electrical plant and equipment systems to be designed, manufactured, factory
tested, inspected, supplied, delivered, unloaded at Site, installed, tested,
commissioned and guaranteed by the Bidder/Contractor as part of this Contract
to ensure the safe, efficient and reliable operation of the Plant.
Training on Site, and/or in the manufacturer’s works for the Owner shall also
be included for major items of electrical plant and systems.
The scope of work also includes and refer to Electrical System at: Volume 2-
Part 2-Chapter 7-Section 1 (P2C7S1)- General Technical Requirements
The scope of work further includes the supply of all necessary documentation
to fully describe the plant and equipment as finally put to work including but
not limited to:
(1) Design Calculations,
(2) Operational Characteristics,
(3) General Arrangement Drawings,
(4) ITP and Method of Installation, Commissioning procedure
(5) Fixing Details,
(6) Single Line Diagrams,
(7) Schematic, Logic Diagrams,
(8) Wiring Tables,
(9) Cable Schedules,
(10) Equipment Schedules,
(11) Technical Literature,
(12) Type Test Certificates,
(13) Factory Acceptance Test (FAT),
(14) Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
(15) Operating and Maintenance Manuals, Catalogues
(16) Shop/ Manufacturer’s Drawing and document
(17) As-built drawings and document (including setting value, …)
Moreover, documentation submitted during the various phases of the Project
(e.g.: design, manufacture, installation, commissioning) shall clearly identify
any modifications carried out at that time by an approved method subject to the
approval of the Engineer (e.g.: clouds with an adjacent revision number in a
triangle and an explanation in the drawings revision box)
The scope of electrical plant and equipment shall include all requirements to
fully complete the Power Plant regardless of whether these requirements are
specified herein or not including Site Construction Power and Commissioning
Power ready for commercial operation.
The Bidder shall also be responsible under the Contract for the design and sizing
of the whole and every portion of the proposed electrical plant and any items
which are missing from this Request for Proposal but which can be inferred to
be necessary for the safe, efficient and reliable operation of the Plant shall be
deemed to be included by the Bidder in the Bid price.
The Contractor shall supply complete electric equipment and associated
auxiliaries including but not limited to the following:
a) 500kV EHV Overhead Line Connections from the Generator Step-Up
Transformer Gantry to the 500kV EHV Switchyard Gantries via
intermediate tower (or gantries) fully complete in all respects
b) Two generators, neutral earthing transformers and auxiliaries.
c) Two generator circuit breakers (GCB) and auxiliaries
d) Isolated Phase Busduct (IPB), support system and auxiliaries.
e) Two Generator Step-Up transformers with OLTC and auxiliaries.
f) All Unit Auxiliary Transformer (UAT) with OLTC and auxiliaries
g) All 11kV Switchgears & MCC
h) All 400V switchboards & MCC
i) 11kV Non-Segregated Phase Busduct and Busduct Support System.
j) 400V Non-Segregated Phase Busduct & Busduct Support System
(Shall be applied at appropriated location if required)
k) All 11kV and 400V motors
l) Protection system (Generator Protection, Generator Step-Up Transformer
Protection, Unit Auxiliary Transformer Protection, 500kV EHV Overhead
Line Protection, Other Protection Relay Panels )
m) Low Voltage Auxiliary Transformer
n) 220V DC, batteries, chargers
o) 400/230V UPS.
p) 400V Emergency Diesel Generator system
q) Cabling and Cable support system
r) Lighting and small power system
s) Earthing and lightning protection
t) Cathodic Protection System.
u) Synchronization System.
v) Tariff Metering System.
w) Metering and Measuring System.
x) Etc.
All 500kV EHV electrical plant and equipment supplied for this Project shall
fully comply with the following requirements of the associated Transmission
System:
The following information for 500kV EHV system shall be considered:
500kV EHV System
Description
(Solidly Grounded)
Nominal System Voltage 500kV
Maximum System Voltage 550kV
Minimum System Voltage 450kV
Short-Circuit Level 50kA/1s
Required creepage distance for outdoor shall be 31mm/kV according to IEC
60137. Larger clearances may be required due to polluted environment
influences such as salt atmosphere, high humidity areas to ensure the safety
clearance.
Only equipment which has been fully type tested by a recognised and approved
international testing centre with independent witnessing will be considered and
all relevant type test certificates shall be included by the Bidder in the Bid as
evidence.
In no case shall equipment be dispatched from the manufacturer's works prior
to completion of the Routine Factory Tests in accordance with the requirements
of the appropriate codes and standards as amended and supplemented by this
Request for Proposal and the prior submission and approval of the Factory Test
Report by the Engineer.
The Engineer reserves the right to attend all tests and the Bidder will be required
as part of the Contract to give at least two (2) months prior notice of all such
tests accompanied with the manufacturers Factory Test Protocol documentation
which shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
The Bidder shall form a design group with a mixture of expert knowledge in the
electrical systems in coal fired power plant to carry out all design activities of
contract program.
The Bidder shall submit details of the make-up of the engineering team as well
as resumes of personnel to be provided and demonstrate their capabilities in
these processes. The Bidder's design group shall meet on a regular basis with
Owner at site or at other mutually agreed location in Vietnam.
Owner will review and comment on the Bidder's design proposals. The Bidder
shall prepare the final design documents and drawings which includes the
product of all the design activities which shall become the design reference.
The Bidder shall develop and submit for Owner approval his standards for Coal
Fired power plant electrical systems. Submission of the Bidder's standard's does
not waive the obligation of the Bidder to further develop these standards at his
own expense if Owner determine to be deficient compared to international best
practice for Coal Fired power plant design.
Switchgear rooms, relay rooms, electronic rooms and control rooms shall all be
air conditioned and where these rooms are continuously manned and/or where
the equipment in these rooms is essential for the continuous and reliable
operation of the Power Plant.
The CTs, VTs and meter for tariff metering system shall be sampled, verified
and calibrated in accordance with the appropriate test Codes and Standards by
an approved independent testing authority in the local country (Circular No.
23/2013/TT-BKHCN dated September 26th 2013 issued by Ministry of Science
and Technology and current relevant regulation)
Electrical equipment shall be verified the technical safety by an approved
independent testing authority in the local country (Circular No. 33/2015/TT-
BCT dated November 27th 2015 issued by The Ministry of Industry and Trade
and current relevant regulation)
The color of Busbars, Cables shall be complied with the Viet Nam Standards
 Vietnam Electrical Equipment Regulation 2006 (Part I)
 Circular No. 40/2009/TT-BCT of Ministry of Industry and Trade dated 31
December 2009 regarding the National Technical Codes (Volume 7)
 TCXD 9207-2012 “Installation of electrical wiring in dwellings and public
building- Design standard”
The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with, EVNNPT/CPMB,
EVNNPT/PTC2 to negotiate, design, provide and complete the connection
interface between Quang Trach I and 500kV Switchyard for synchronization,
control, protection relay coordination, house load, interlocking, status of
(500kV CB, 500kV DS, 500kV ES, 500kV CVT ), communication and
SCADA…. The documents for terminal point shall be included at least
(construction drawing of terminal point, layout, conductors, wirings, fiber-
optical cable connection, Fiber Optic Media Converter, Junction Box, Method
statement for installation, connection, protection relay coordination,
interlocking, control, communication,..)
Based on the documents as listed below, the Contractor shall be responsible for
contacting these agencies (EVNNPT, EVNEPTC, NLDC) to update,
supplement the specifications of the relevant equipment, modification
concerned (if any) in this section and complete the necessary
procedures/requirements before power receiving / power energizing:
 Grid connection Agreement No.2097/EVNNPT-TTĐN on June 07th, 2017
signed between National Power Transmission Corporation (EVNNPT) and
Thermal Power Project Management Board No.2 (Current name is Vietnam
Electricity Power Project Management Board No.2 - EVNPMB2);
 Tariff Metering Agreement No. 1012/EPTC-KT&CNTT-KDBĐ on March
26th, 2018 signed between Electricity Power Trading Company (EVNEPTC)
and TPMB2 (Current name is EVNPMB2);
 SCADA/EMS and Communication Agreement No. 215/ĐĐQG-CN+PT on
31st January 2018 signed between National Load Dispatch Centre (NLDC-
A0) and TPMB2 (Current name is EVNPMB2).
Protection relay and automation Agreement shall be approved by NLDC. The
Contractor shall make a report of above mentioned agreement and submit to
NLDC (with the support of the owner) for approval. Getting NLDC’s approval
is the Contractor‘s scope of work.
Codes and Standards
The Work shall be designed, manufactured, erected and tested according to the
current relevant codes, standards, accident prevention regulations and legal
regulations.
All Materials, Plant and Works carried out including calculation sheets,
drawings, quality and class of goods, methods of inspection, constructional
peculiarities of equipment and parts and acceptances of partial plants, as far as
these are beyond the special requirements of the Specifications, shall comply in
every respect with the relevant technical codes.
The Contractor must comply with the current relevant compulsory Vietnamese
codes and standards, International standards, comprises the following standards:
 IEC 60038 Standard Voltages
 IEC 60076 Power transformer
 IEC 60214 On Load Tap Changer (OLTC)
 IEC 60296 Specification for unused Mineral Insulating Oils for
Transformers and Switchgear
 IEC 60345 Guide on On – Load for Oil – typed transformer.
 IEC 60551 Determination of transformer sound level
 IEC 60542 Application Guide for On-Load Tap-Changers
 IEC 60056 High-voltage alternating-current circuit-breakers
 IEC 60470 HV AC Contactors and Contactor-Based Motor-Starters.
 IEC 60420 and IEC 62271-105 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear -
Part 105: Alternating current switch-fuse combinations
 IEC 60408 LV air circuit breaker, DS, ES and fuse combination.
 IEC 60129 DS and Earthing switches.
 IEC 60298 AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated
voltages above 1kV and up to and including 52kV
 IEC 62271 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear
 IEC 61439 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
 IEC 60898 Electrical accessories- Circuit-breakers for
overcurrent protection for household and similar installations
 IEC 60282 HV fuses
 IEC 60269 LV fuses
 IEC 60787 Application guide for the selection of fuse-links of high-
voltage fuses for transformer circuit application
 IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
 IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
 IEC 60034 Rotating electrical machines
 IEC 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other
non-acid electrolytes
 IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
 IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories
for rated voltages. form 1kV top to 30kV
 IEC 61386 Conduit system for cable management
 IEC 60889 Hard-drawn aluminum wire for overhead line conductors
 IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded
conductors
 IEC 60888 Zinc coated wires for overhead line conductors.
 IEC 61395 Overhead electrical conductors - Creep test procedures for
stranded conductors
 IEC 61394 Characteristics of greases for aluminum, aluminum alloy
and steel bare conductors"
 IEC 61232 Aluminum-clad steel wires for electrical purposes
 IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded
conductors
stranded conductors
 IEC 60076-1 Power transfomer
 IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1 000 V
 IEC 60168 Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic
material or glass for systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000 V
 IEC 60273 Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post insulators for
systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000 V.
 IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
 IEC 61869-1 Instrument transformers - Part 1: General requirements
 IEC 61869-2 Instrument transformers - Part 2: Additional requirements
for current transformers
for inductive voltage transformers
for capacitor voltage transformers
 IEC 60551 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels
 IEC 60726 Dry- type Power Transformer
 IEC 60947 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear.
 IEC 61439.1 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
 IEC 60408 Low Voltage Air Break Switches, Air Break Disconnectors,
Air Break Switch Disconnectors and Fuse Combination Units.
 IEC 60269.1 Low Voltage fuses - General Requirements
 IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures
 IEC 60255 Electrical Relays
 IEEE-Std 80-2000: “Guide for safety in AC Grounding System”
 IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring earth resistivity, ground impedance & earth
surface potential of a ground system
 IEEE C37.23 Standard for metal-enclosed bus
 IEEE C37.013 Standard for AC high-voltage generator circuit breaker rated
on a symmetrical current basis
 IEEE C62.92 Guide for the application of neutral grounding in electrical
utility systems. Part II - Grounding of synchronous generator systems
 Circular No 25/2016/TT-BCT of Ministry of Industry and Trade dated 30
November 2016 regarding to the Regulations on Electricity Transmission
system
 Vietnam Electrical Equipment Regulation 2006 (Part I, II, III, IV)
 Decision No. 1232/QĐ-EVN dated on 21 Dec, 2011" Regulation of Metering
Management at Terminal Point for Tariff metering points.
December 2015 regarding to the Regulation on Power metering in Power
system
 Circular No. 23/2013/TT-BKHCN dated 26th September, 2013 Regulation
Calibration, verification and testing for group 2 measuring instruments
 TCXD 9385-2012 “Protection of Structures Against Lightning - Guide for
design, inspection and maintenance
December 2009 regarding the National Technical Codes (Volume 5,6,7)
February 2011 regarding the National Technical Code for Testing,
Acceptance Test for Power Facility (Volume 8)
 Decision No. 52/QĐ-ĐTĐL dated on 04 August 2015 regarding the
procedure for measurement of Generator Characteristic of Coal Thermal
Power Plant in the Vietnam Competitive Generation Market
 Decision No 1361/QĐ-EVN dated 07th November 2018 regarding the Test
and Commissioning Procedure for Surge Arrester/ Lightning Arrester
and Commissioning Procedure for AC Circuit Breaker
and Commissioning Procedure for Earthing system
 Decision No 25/QĐ-ĐTĐL dated 26th March 2019 issued by Electricity
Regulatory Authority of Vietnam (ERAV) regarding Testing procedure and
Testing supervision
Electrical system studies
All studies, design calculations and equipment sizing calculations shall be

submitted by the Bidder for review and approval by the Owner and they shall
be carried out and submitted in sufficient time so that changes to the proposed
design and/or electrical plant and equipment can be carried out if required by
the Owner
The Bidder may use computer aided techniques to perform electrical system
studies, design calculations and equipment sizing calculations to confirm the
viability of the proposed electrical design under steady state and transient
conditions.
The software license registry sheet for electrical calculation shall be submitted
to Owner for information to ensure the copyright software.
The electrical studies, design calculations and equipment sizing calculations
shall include, but shall not be limited to the following:
Short-circuit study
Short-Circuit Studies shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the latest
edition of IEC60909 to determine the maximum symmetrical and peak
asymmetrical three phase and single phase short-circuit currents which can
occur at the Generator, MV busbars and LV busbars.
The studies shall be based on the switchgear short-circuit rating at the 500kV
EHV Switchyard and shall include the full effect of the fault current contribution
from electrical machines.
The studies shall be carried out for the worst-case fault condition which can
occur at the Generator, MV and LV busbars (i.e.: the plant configuration would
produce the highest fault level) and with the 400V Emergency Diesel Genset
connected in parallel service.
Where actual impedance values are not known the impedance values used in the
studies shall be reduced in accordance with the applicable negative tolerance in
the relevant IEC standards.
The studies shall demonstrate that the worst case maximum symmetrical and
peak asymmetrical short-circuit currents which can occur together with a safety
margin of ten (10) percent is less than the proposed symmetrical and peak
asymmetrical fault ratings for the offered equipment.
Short-Circuit Studies shall also be carried out to establish the minimum 2-phase
and minimum 1-phase short-circuit currents which can occur for selecting the
settings of protective devices and for protection co-ordination purposes.
Earthing system study
An Earthing System Design Study shall be carried out strictly in accordance
with the latest edition of IEEE 80, IEEE 665 and Viet Nam Standards to
determine (i) the minimum permissible conductor size for above and below
grade earthing system conductors (ii) the required quantity of above and below
grade earthing system conductors (iii) the tolerable step voltage (iv) the
tolerable touch voltage (v) the maximum step voltage (vi) the maximum mesh
(touch) voltage and (vii) grounding resistance.
The study shall demonstrate that with the proposed above and below grade
earthing system design and the worst case single phase short-circuit current that
can occur that the tolerable step and touch voltages are not exceeded anywhere
within the boundary of the Power Plant and within 1 meter distance at outside
area of the boundary fence.
A design margin of not less than ten (10) percent shall apply throughout.
Following completion of the installation the Bidder will be required as part of
the Contract to carry out tests on Site to verify the results of the design
calculations and in the event that the tolerable step and/or tolerable touch
voltages are exceeded to install additional earthing conductors and/or earthing
rods as appropriate to reduce the measured values below the tolerable safe
values making due allowance for the aforementioned design margin.
Load Flow Study (Voltage Drop/Voltage Dip Study)
Load Flow Studies shall be carried out for all the critical system conditions that
can occur. The load flow studies shall include all branch power flows (i.e.:
MW’s, MVAr’s and MVA) and the resulting voltage levels at all switchboard
busbars and at selected critical MV and LV motor drives.
The voltage variation at each switchboard busbar shall also be included and
based on the foregoing recommendations shall be made for transformer on-load
and transformer off-circuit tapping steps and tapping ranges for approval by the
Owner.
The studies shall demonstrate that under the worst case operating conditions for
the Unit and Station MV and LV power distribution systems that the voltage at
the terminals of consumers lies well within the tolerance allowed by the
equipment Manufacturer’s and in no case exceeds 0.90Un - 1.10Un for steady
state conditions and 0.85Un for transient conditions (i.e.: largest motor starting)
with all other normally running loads and motors in service at full nameplate
rating and with all transformers on their rated tap.
Load consumption calculation for unit and station auxiliary system must be
detailed in this stage.
Cable Sizing Study
Cable Sizing Studies shall be carried out to determine:
 The minimum power cable size for short-circuit current based on the tripping
time of the back-up protective device.
 The minimum power cable size for load current based on the consumer full
nameplate rating and type of installation.
 The minimum power cable size for voltage drop/dip based on the consumer
full nameplate rating and route length.
The studies shall demonstrate that under all operating conditions the proposed
power cables can carry full rated current continuously and short-circuit current
for the total clearing time of the back-up protective device without exceeding
the maximum permissible operating temperature for the cable.
The studies shall also demonstrate that the power cables are adequately sized to
maintain the terminal voltage at consumers within the required tolerances.
Protection Coordination Study
A Protection Co-ordination Study shall be carried out to select the settings for
all Unit and Station protective devices and to ensure that with the selected
settings and under all fault conditions that the protective devices will operate
correctly to clear the fault while at the same time disconnecting the minimum
number of plant items.
The protection relay system shall ensure: selectivity, speed, sensitivity,
reliability, simplicity, economy to release the fault and miss-operation
The report shall include a comprehensive description of the proposed relay types
and their setting ranges. Full details of the supplying CT, CVT and VT
parameters together with supporting evidence and calculations to confirm their
adequacy for use with the proposed relays shall also be included.
Frequency Limits
The Facility must be capable of operation at frequencies below:
Frequency Range (Hz) Minimum Sustainable Operation
46.0 to 47.5 No requirement
>47.5 to 48.0 10 min
>48.0 to <49 30 min
49 to 51 Continuous
>51 to 51.5 30 min
>51.5 to 52 01 min
For further information, please see Circular 25/2016/TT-BCT
Voltage Distribution and regulation
The Main Generator is connected by an Isolated Phase Bus duct to the Generator
Circuit Breaker input terminals and connected via Generator Step up
Transformer and 500kV EHV Overhead Line to 500kV Switchyard supplied by
EVN. The Generators shall be synchronized to the 500kV grid by the GCBs or
500kV line Circuit Breakers.
The output terminals of the Generator Circuit Breaker are connected by an
Isolated Phase Busduct (IPB) to:
 Low voltage terminal of the GSUT
 High voltage (HV) terminals of the UAT
 High voltage terminal of the Excitation Transformer
The HV terminals of the GSUT are connected to the 500kV switchyard by
overhead ACSR conductors strung from the power facility to 500kV switchyard.
Neutral of Generator shall be connected to earthing by Neutral Grounding
Transformer / Resistor Cubicle of Generator.
The High voltage side of Unit Transformer shall be connected to the tap-off of
Isolated Phase Busduct. Low voltage terminal of the UATs is connected to 11kV
Unit switchgear bus via busduct. The 11kV MV Unit Switchgears shall be
supplied from their respective Unit Auxiliary Transformers. The 11kV MV
Common Switchgears shall be supplied from their respective 11kV Unit
switchgear bus via busduct or cable. Each 11kV Bus section shall be supplied
from two (02) respective power supply.
The 400V Unit switchgears shall be supplied from the respective 11kV Unit
switchgears via 11kV /0.42kV dry type transformer. Inter-connector circuit-
breakers and/or coupler circuit-breakers between the 400V Unit switchboards
shall normally be open
The 400V Auxiliary Switchboards and the 400V Station Auxiliary
Switchboards shall be supplied from the 11kV Station Auxiliary Switchgears
through their respective 11kV /0.42kV dry type transformer. Inter-connector
circuit-breakers and/or coupler circuit-breakers between the 400V Auxiliary
Switchboards and the 400V Station Auxiliary Switchboards shall normally be
open.
The 400V, 3 phase Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) is provided to supply
safe shut down loads for shutting down both units simultaneously. The EDG
power shall supplies for each essential bus.
The rating parameters and plant specifications based on IEC Standards and that
voltage levels of 11kV and 400 V be adopted as follows:
 11kV, 3 phase, 3 wire for motors rated from including 200 kW and for bulk
power distribution;
 400 V, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire for motors rated less than 200 kW and for other
3 phase loads;
 230 V A.C, 2 wire for small loads requiring single phase power;
 400/230 V A.C. UPS for essential control circuits and emergency drives.
 220VDC, 2 wire for control circuit.
In the event of any substantial increase in auxiliary system loading (for example
the installation of a Flue Gas Desulphurization system), the following
conditions must be met after inclusion of the additional load:
 Voltage regulation - Stating largest 11 kV motor with full auxiliary load (one
unit plus half the station load) must maintain a minimum of 85% of
switchgear rated fault level under all system operating conditions.
 Actual 11 kV circuit breaker and busbar currents shall not exceed 95% of
their ratings.
 The Unit Auxiliaries Transformers shall have a maximum rating of 60 MVA.
In the design requires transformer ratings more than this figure a higher
voltage system design is to be submitted for approval by Owner.
 Under steady-state conditions the voltage may vary between ± 5% of nominal
voltage.
 The voltage drop at equipment load terminals due to cable impedance shall
be a maximum of 5% of nominal voltage.
 During the starting of large motors, longest motors, short-term voltage
excursions of up to 10% may be experienced at the source of supply. The
total allowable voltage drop at equipment load terminals under these
conditions including cable impedance volt drop shall be limited to 15% of
nominal voltage. Especially, Contractor shall be responsible to calculate the
cable and other necessary solution to ensure the stability and safety operation
of Coal Ship Unloader (CSU) at Coal jetty during the starting of motors to
avoid the voltage drop exceed the allowable value and trip CSU.
 Contractor shall be responsible to calculate and consider the conditions as
power cable cross-section, spare capacity, starting solutions,… to ensure the
total voltage drop at equipment load terminals within allowable range as well
as do not impact the normal operation of other electrical equipment/system
of Quang Trach I Power Plant during the starting of large motors, longest
motors as Circulating water pump motor (CWP), Condensate water pump
motor, Forced draft fans (FDF) & Induced draft fans (IDF) & Primary air
fans (PAF) motors,…
Primary features of the a.c. system are as follows:
a) 11kV system resistance earthed (to limit fault damage)
b) 400V system solidly earthed (necessary for reliable protection)
c) One 400V emergency power (diesel generator) supply system is required to
protect each boiler/turbine-generator plant and to maintain essential power
necessary for the safety of personnel in the event of loss of normal AC
supplies. The prospective capacity of diesel generator is 1000kW for each
Unit which will be calculated in detailed design phase. The diesel generators
will be rated for the shutdown requirements of the generating unit.
d) The impedance of each transformer shall be such that voltage regulation
shall be within the specified limits. “Voltage Distribution and Regulation”
and shall be such that the fault withstand capability of its connected
equipment is not exceeded.
The Auxiliary Power consumption load of each Unit is 7.49% at RO
System Configuration Interlocking
The configuration of the 11 kV and 400 V networks shall be constrained by

electrical interlocking and functional switching arrangements achieved through
the ICMS system to meet the following requirements.
11kV System:
No paralleling operation permitted between any of the two supply points to the
system i.e. the system shall be constrained to run as single radial transformer
supplies so that fault levels applied to the 11 kV system are held well within the
11 kV switchgear short circuit rating at all times. The only exception is when it
is required to parallel supplies temporarily to take one supply out of service for
maintenance reasons.
400 V System:
The system is configured to operate within the switchgear short circuit rating
subjected firstly to the transformers running as single radial supplies. Secondly
fault rating allowance is included to permit a single diesel generator to operate
in parallel with a single transformer supply.
These limitations shall be achieved through ICMS logic to the 400V switchgear
as follows:
 No paralleling supplies.
 Synchronisation of Diesel Generator to be permitted on its own circuit
breaker only
Automatic Switching
ICMS shall be accomplished the following interlock system for under voltage
protection of unit 11kV switchgear & 400V switchboard.
(1) To trip the Unit 11kV switchgear & 400V Switchboard incoming circuit
breakers.
(2) To close emergency switchboard bus section circuit breaker.
(3) If the above switching does not affect supply restoration (e.g. due to total
power station A.C. supplies having been lost) initiate automatically the
start and run up the Diesel Generator making it available for operator
connection to Essential supplies.
(4) The bidder should incorporate an ID (Intelligent Device) with functions
such as fast transfer, in-phase transfer and slow transfer as a minimum
requirement.
(5) The 11kV distribution system shall be provided with High Speed Transfer
System (HSTS) and 400V distribution system shall be provided with
logical Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) to ensure reliability operation of
electrical equipment.
(6) In general the Transfer Systems shall include (i) manual transfer facilities
(ii) automatic fast transfer facilities and (iii) automatic slow transfer
facilities. The manual transfer facility is required for scheduled supervised
transfers of power supply for maintenance purposes whilst the automatic
transfer facilities are required to transfer power supplies in the event of a
fault (e.g.: feeding transformer fault). The design and the proposed transfer
system equipment shall be subject to approval by the Owner and shall be
such that an automatic fast break-before-make transfer operation does not
result in the loss of a Unit or a reduction in generated MW
(7) A safety interlocking scheme shall be provided to prevent the closing of
circuit-breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches under unsafe
conditions. The interlocking philosophy shall be subject to approval by the
Owner and shall use a recognized and approved key interlocking system.
The interlocking system hard wired using electro-magnetic solenoids with
fail safe design shall be provided as and where appropriate.
Safety interlocking schemes shall be provided for at least the following areas
and associated equipment:
 Generator Circuit-Breakers;
 11kV MV Switchgear;
 400V LV Switchgear;
 400V Emergency Diesel Generator;
 Other locations as required.
7.2 GENERATOR AND AUXILIARIES
Generator Design
The generator shall be of the horizontal, three phase synchronous machine, with
rotating field, cylindrical rotor and totally enclosed, shall be designed and
manufactured to comply with this Specification, IEC 60034-3 and the relevant
other parts of IEC 60034, and shall be suitable in every respect for operation in
the Vietnamese supply system in accordance with the specified conditions
which follow, including the applied standards.
 IEC 60034 Rotating Electrical Machines
 IEC60085 Electrical insulation—Thermal classification
 IEC 60146 Semiconductor Converters
 IEC 62053 Electricity metering equipment
 Circular No. 25/2016/TT-BCT dated November 30, 2016 by the Ministry of
Industry and Trade..
 And other current relevant standards.
Generator auxiliaries.
The generator comprises of, but is not limited to the following associated
devices:
 Excitation system, Excitation-Transformer.
 Supervisor and Direct-online Control System
 Automatic Voltage Regulator System (AVR)
 Lightning Arrester (LA) or Surge Arrester (SA).
 Main generator racking panel (and other equipment)
 Generator cooling devices, including the noise filter and the noise decreasing
device to assigned level
 All the connecting cables
 Internal wiring, include wiring to the correlative clamp rows of all the
supplied boards.
 The terminals of wires connecting to the outgoing feeders by IPB.
 Current transformers and voltage transformers used for metering, electric
meters must meet the Precision level obeyed to current Vietnamese
regulations, IEC 61869 Standard, IEC 62053 standard or other correlating
standards.
Generator Protection equipment.
 Auxiliary devices
 Starting up devices, start – up motors associated with required devices to
drive the generator to start – up speed.
 Current transformers and metering voltage transformers, rectifiers,
measuring meters system, cables and other correlating devices to fully meet
the operation requirements of the plant.
 Heat sensors for sensing the generator temperature.
 Sensors to detect vibration at the terminals of coils and glandings Internal
discharge monitoring system
 Generator heaters.
 Hydro-producing station with dry – making system, pipelines system and
parts connecting to generator
 Oil-glanding system.
 Protection system to prevent the Sub- Synchronous Resonance (SSR)
 Automatic and manual network synchronizing devices.
 All other electrical devices to ensure for the operation of the generators.
Rating
The generator shall be continuously rated to enable Gross Output of 648.8 MW
and a Net Output of 600 MW (delivery to power grid) after deduction of
excitation power and corresponding Auxiliary power load under the following
conditions:
 0.85 Lagging Power Factor
 0.9 Leading Power Factor.
Characteristics
The generator shall be designed to have the following characteristics:
 A short circuit ratio of not less than 0.5.
 A direct axis transient reactance (saturated) should not be less than 19% and
ensure that total impedances of generator and generator transformer must be
complied with Circular 25/2016/TT-BCT are at least 40%.
 The overload ability of Generator is 1.5 rating current in at least 30 sec.
 Industrial withstand voltage: 50kV
 Lightning impulse withstand voltage 125kV
These limits shall not be exceeded when the applicable tolerances are
considered. The applicable tolerances shall not be greater than that allowed by
IEC 60034-3.
A generator capability curve is required to be provided during the Contract
showing expected generator MW/MVAR operating limits at rated hydrogen
pressure (or TEAC) and lower.
Rated speed: 3000 rpm, corresponding to 50Hz frequency
Insulation class: F
Temperature raising range is B level
Excitation system: static excitation.
Voltage and Frequency
(1) The generator shall be rated for 50 Hz operation. The generator shall be
designed to remain operation in the range of 47.5 Hz to 52Hz
(2) Preferred value for generator voltage is 23.5kV but it may be nominated by the
Bidder to optimize the design of all equipment operating at generator voltage.
Note: The auxiliary power system design calculations and

equipment voltage (including transformer and tap
changer) have been based on a voltage of 22kV
(preferred value) or follow generator voltage to
optimize design. The Contractor must review power
system design and equipment specification to suit.
(3) The generator and generator transformer tap changer will be operated to
maintain at the HV busbars a scheduled voltage which will be varied from time
to time. Steady-state generator terminal voltage will vary continuously within a
range of plus and minus 5% of rated voltage at any output within the generator
capability, to satisfy these HV conditions.
Stator
Casing
(1) The casing of the stator shall be of fabricated construction gas-tight, and
sufficiently robust to withstand the maximum forces set up in the event of an
explosion of a hydrogen and air mixture in the casing.
(2) Access into the generator casing for inspection of stator end windings shall be
by removal of bolted covers and shall not require the removal of coolers or other
ancillary equipment.
(3) Liquid drains shall be provided from the casing, suitably enlarged, and
connected to plates bolted to the generator frame so that on disconnection of
any external drain there will be a hand hole for clearing material which may
lodge in the internal drain. Liquid detectors, fitted with alarm contacts, shall be
fitted in each separate drain and not in a common line.
(4) It is acceptable for the casing and core to be separate or integral according to
suitability for transport and heavy lift arrangements.
Core
(1) The stator core shall be made up of high permeability low loss stampings,
bonded and tightly clamped together to reduce noise and vibration to a
practicable minimum. Attention shall be given to the prevention of excessive
100 Hz vibration being transmitted to the generator casing, foundations, pipes
or associated equipment. The Contractor shall provide a description of the
bonding used to prevent vibration of the end teeth, during the Contract.
(2) Should the proposed method of transport require a beam to be threaded through
the bore of the stator core then the full length of the bore shall be lined with a
tube of leatheroid or similar material to prevent damage to the laminations
during insertion and removal of the beam, and during transport.
Winding
(1) The winding shall be of an approved type in which replacement of a damaged

portion is practicable. The winding insulation shall be of Class F temperature
classification and of adequate thickness to withstand the voltage stresses which
may occur in service. The part of the coil passing through the core slots shall be
varnished with insulating varnish, or have some other type of insulating layer,
to distribute in a uniform manner, the voltage gradient, to eliminate potential
differences between the slot walls and the coil surfaces. Details shall be given
during the contract on details of the winding and of the insulating materials
proposed. The limit of winding insulation temperature rise shall not
exceed that nominated in IEC 60034-1 for Class B insulation.
(2) The winding shall be effectively braced and blocked to withstand short circuits
at the terminals under any operating condition and to prevent vibration which
may lead to gas leakage. Materials liable to shrink in the course of time and on
heating shall not be used for packing and wedging, and the general construction
of the stator and the bracing of the winding overhaul shall be such as to provide
adequate cooling surface and avoid "hot sports".
(3) Provision shall be made for preventing the formation of condensation during
shutdown periods.
Terminals
The windings shall be star connected and the ends of each phase of the stator
windings shall be brought to terminals accessible from a space in the foundation
block. Adequate provision shall be made in the design of the foundation block
for accommodation of the metering, protective and other current transformers
required for operating the unit. It may be taken that the current transformers will
not be in contact with the terminals and will be supported independently of the
generator. Creepage distances shall be equivalent to those specified in IEC
60137 for medium polluted atmospheres as defined in IEC 60815.
The windings must be in star configuration, and the terminals of each stator
phase winding must be conducted to connection boxes on racks. All the (6)
connection points for each generator must be able to be taken apart from the
generator and can link with outside connections. Generator connection boxes
will be installed below stator. Connection boxes must be non – ferrous material
type to hinder overheating because of Foucault currents. Three supporting
porcelains must be installed for the either side of phase line and neutral and
concurrently, supporting porcelains of voltage/current transformer required for
measuring devices, protection relays and AVR must be designed.
Connection to Busbars and Earthing Transformer
(1) On the line side, provision shall be made for disconnection of the generator from
the phase isolated busbars to enable the establishment of safety clearances
between the two plants during high voltage testing of either.
(2) On the star point side, provision shall be made for disconnecting the star point
from the generator terminals to enable the establishment of safety clearances
between the generator and the earthing transformer and to enable testing of
individual phase windings.
Rotor
Winding
The design of the rotor shall be such that earth and interturn faults in the
windings will not occur in service. Insulation shall be of Class F temperature
classification. The limit of winding insulation temperature rise shall not exceed
that nominated in IEC 60034-1 for Class B insulation.
The Contractor shall incorporate all latest design features to avoid permanent
deformation of the winding during service. Packing blocks used in the rotor
winding shall be of approved material and entirely suitable for the high
temperatures and mechanical forces occurring in large rotors. Attention shall be
given to the insulating and securing of the rotor winding connection leads to
avoid vibration and the possible failure of either the lead or its insulation.
Shaft
(1) The rotor shall be made of one solid forging with high mechanical strength
characteristics. The forging shall be fully examined by radiographic and
ultrasonic techniques to determine its soundness.
(2) The Contractor shall incorporate suitable features in the rotor design to reduce
the variation in rotor stiffness about the direct and quadrature axes, and thus
minimize the resultant twice-per-revolution vibration levels. During the contract,
design calculations shall be furnished to show that a rotor critical speed will not
exist in the region of twice rated speed.
(3) The shaft shall have a reference mark of known relationship to the location of
the magnetic poles which can be detected in-service for synchronism of shaft
position with portable test equipment. The mark shall be located such that it is
always accessible notwithstanding shaft expansion and provision shall be made
for mounting of a detecting device.
Slip Rings
Slip rings where necessary shall be mounted on the shaft in a separate enclosure
at the outboard end of the generator.
Generator Earthing
Neutral Point
The generator stator winding, which will be star connected, shall be suitable for
earthing through a single-phase distribution-type double-wound transformer,
the secondary winding of which will be shunted by a non-inductive resistance.
The Bidder shall supply details of the capacitance to earth of the stator windings,
which is necessary for selection a final resistance value, as part of the
commissioning report. The Bidder shall nominate the expected value of
capacitance.
Casing
(1) Earthing terminals or bolts shall be provided at two positions on the stator
bedplate for earthing the generator casing. These positions shall be connected
at two different locations on the station earthing system.
(2) Major turbine generator components shall be electrically bonded together and
connected to the generator earth terminal to provide a low impedance return
path for possible radio frequency (RF) voltage transients generated by thyristor
switching in the generator static excitation circuit.
Turbine/Generator Shaft Voltage/Current Control
(1) The shaft shall be earthed at one position between LP turbine and generator
bearings by suitable multiple (at least two) shaft earthing devices.
(2) The shaft earthing devices shall be protected from the effects of oil, dust, steam
and other contaminants.
(3) Each shaft earthing device shall have 0.01 to 0.1 Ω in-service contact resistance
to the shaft at the rated speed and within permissible shaft vibration levels.
(4) The contact element of each shaft earthing device shall be able to be replaced
with the generator in service without safety risk either to a person or to the
machine.
(5) Each shaft earthing device shall be connected to the turbine/generator earth
bonding conductors or lower bearing case via suitably sized low impedance
current measuring shunt.
(6) The generator outboard bearings and preferably HP turbine bearing No. 1 shall
be electrically insulated from the generator earth.
(7) Shaft voltage test terminals grouped in one single easily accessible location shall
be provided for checking the voltages and insulation integrity for the following:
(a) Insulated bearings
(b) Insulated hydrogen seals
(c) Insulated oil piping
(d) Other insulated components as necessary.
(e) Shaft voltages shall be measuring during the commissioning of Unit.
(8) A continuous on-line shaft earthing monitor shall be provided as a integral part
of the shaft earthing system.
The monitor shall measure earthing current and shaft voltage, and display these
at a local panel adjacent to the generator. It shall also activate at least one "clean"
changeover alarm contact.
(9) A "Shaft Earthing Abnormal" alarm, displayed in the Central Control Room
(CCR), shall be generated for the following conditions:
(a) "Loss of power supply" to the monitor
(b) "Shaft earthing current low" (deterioration of shaft earthing device)
(c) "Shaft insulation low" (loss of insulation integrity)
Each alarm condition above shall be indicated by local LED and shall latch the
local manually resettable alarm contact.
The monitor shall have an analogue 4-20 mA output for each parameter
displayed on the local panel.
Analogue outputs shall be displayed in the CCR (CCR).
(10) The Bidder shall provide details of shaft voltage/current control scheme
monitors the bearing insulation, shaft coupling insulation, shaft earthing devices
and the like during the contract.
Generator Condition Monitoring
The Bidder shall provide the following generator condition monitoring

equipment.
The Bidder shall describe the monitoring equipment to be supplied during the
Contract
Core Monitor
The core monitor shall be of the type which samples hydrogen gas for the
presence of particulates arising from severe overheating of the core and other
machine components and raises an alarm.
The alarm shall be raised in the CCR.
Rotor Shorted Turns Detection Coil
The detection coil only shall be fitted to the generator with wiring brought out
to terminals to enable connection of monitoring equipment as required.
Monitoring equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor and shall raise an
alarm in the CCR.
End winding Vibration Sensors
Sensors only shall be fitted to the stator end windings at both ends of the
generator with wiring brought out to terminals to enable connection of
monitoring equipment as required. Monitoring equipment shall be supplied by
the Contractor and shall raise an alarm in the CCR.
High Speed Electronic Fault Recorder
High Speed Electronic Fault Recorder shall be for transient fault recording of
electrical parameters.
Generator On-line partial discharge (OLPD) monitoring system
(1) General
Each Generator shall be equipped one (01) completed set of Generator on-line
partial discharge monitoring system for generator stator, generator rotor and
generator stator end-winding vibration monitoring system. The system shall be
designed in accordance with NEMA, IEC and any other relevant codes and
standards.
This system shall be composed of sensors, data acquisition units, software,
control system.
All cables including signal cables and communication cables and required
installation materials shall be provided
On-line partial discharge monitoring system shall detect the abnormal
conditions in the electrical insulation system and monitor partial discharge
activity in generator stator windings and vibrations in generator end windings
to monitor continuously the Surface Discharge, Internal Discharge,… and
vibration in generator. The system shall generate alarms in case of excessive
partial discharge or end winding vibrations (EWV). The system should have the
capability to acquire partial discharge patterns and determine partial discharge
quantities as apparent charge, quadratic rate and average discharge current for
each phase.
The system shall be standalone type with facility for storage of trend data and
patterns, The system shall have facility to download patterns and trends on to
PC or LAN, visualization software, noise suppression circuitry for input and
signal transfer.
(2) The system shall include at least the following equipment and comply with the
following requirements:
 Sensor shall be detected the abnormal conditions on the surface discharge,
internal discharge,…vibration in generator.
 Alert levels of increase in Partial Discharges and vibration in generator shall
be recommended to monitor.
 The local analyzer shall be a micro-processor based unit with ﬁltering
&conditioning of the partial discharge signal. The local analyzer shall include
a local keyboard and display for direct checking of the status of monitored
equipment and itself. The cabinet shall be provided. It will be mounted in the
NEMA 4 enclosure.
 One (1) computer with a LCD monitor (24 inches) and one (1) logging
printer,… shall be provided to indicate abnormal and alarm status of Partial
Discharges and vibration in generator .
 All analyzers shall be connected to the computer for local monitoring and
shall also be connected to the Distributed Control System (DCS)/ Integrated
Control & Monitoring System (ICMS) for the remote monitoring.
 The special software required for partial discharge analyzing shall be
provided together with the system. The monitor settings and configurations
shall be available for changing by operator.
 Software and on-site training in the use of the software and using the
analyzing shall be provided.
 A11 data will be recorded in the local analyzer, will be available to be
downloaded to the computer, and shall be suitable for examination of
historical data.
Operation Manual, Technical Specification for Generator On-line partial
discharge (OLPD) monitoring shall be provided.
Generator Excitation
General
Equipment for the complete excitation requirements of the generator shall be
provided; including all excitation transformers, thyristor bridges, field
suppression equipment, excitation control equipment and all connections
between these items.
The required excitation system shall be of a static system in which the excitation
power is provided by a transformer connected to the generator side of the
generator circuit breaker and controlled by a thyristor bridge.
A withdrawable type SF6 or vacuum circuit breaker metal clad switch gear shall
be provided between the excitation transformer and the thyristor cubicle...
The design of the withdrawable type circuit breaker metal clad switch gear shall
be such that the status of the contacts can be seen to confirm electrical isolation.
The excitation system shall be of a static converter directly supplying the
generator rotor field. Its power source is derived from an excitation transformer
which is connected to the generator side of the generator circuit breaker (GCB)
via a Isolated Phase Busbar (IPB).
The excitation system is self-exciting, using DC “flashing” either from the 220V
dc Station battery or from the 400V Station supply to build up the initial field.
The excitation system shall comply with the requirements of Circular No.
25/2016/TT-BCT of Ministry of Industry and Trade dated 30 November 2016
Regulations on Electricity Transmission system
Performance
When Generator terminal voltage operation in the range of range from 80 to
120% of rate voltage and frequency in the range of 47.5 Hz to 52Hz:
(1) The ceiling level of field voltage shall be at least 2 times the maximum
continuous rating of field voltage, for stator voltages between 0.6 and 1.0 per
unit of rated value.
(2) The excitation system offered shall be of the high initial response type, with a
response ratio such that excitation increases from rated load excitation voltage
1.0 pu to a voltage greater than 2 pu in 0.1 sec in response to a step change in
generator terminal voltage of 2.5%.
The excitation system will be designed to be capable of enduring 110% of rated
value (when the generator is full load).The forced exciting voltage is not small
then 2-time the rated exciting voltage value to ensure maintaining stability in
the event of large voltage falling because of short – circuit at generator poles or
at high – voltage network, to ensure the precision cutting of the generator
protection system and the high voltage networking protection system.
(3) The excitation system shall be capable of providing the peak power required for
operation at ceiling voltage level.
(4) This requirement is based on an operating duty cycle of: rated output for a
sustained period, then ceiling voltage for 10 seconds, then return to rated output
for a sustained period.
(5) When the generator terminal voltage ranges from 80 to 120% of rated voltage
and system frequency ranges from 47.5 to 52Hz, the field excitation system of
the generator should be able to increase excitation voltage and current to 2.0 PU
of the rated value in a maximum of 0.1 sec.
(6) Changing speed of field excitation voltage should not be less than 2.0 times
compared to rated voltage/second when the generator is running at rated
capacity.
The Bidder shall provide, during the Contract, performance details and
preferably test curves for the design of excitation system offered.Static
Thyristors Excitation System
(1) Thyristors
(a) The Thyristor Bridge shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60146.
(b) A three-phase fully-controlled thyristor bridge shall be provided with sufficient
redundancy to permit operation of the generator at full excitation power with
20% of the thyristors failed in any set of parallel paths i.e. arm of the bridge. It
shall be possible to either replace faulty thyristors with the generator in service,
or the extent of thyristor redundancy shall be sufficient, having regard to their
reliability, to permit full excitation power without replacing thyristors more
often than once every 8000 hours.
Sufficient redundancy shall be included in the thyristor cooling system to ensure
that a single failure will not prevent the achievement of continuous 100%
generator rated output.
(c) The Bidder shall provide, during the Contract, a description of what measures
are taken to prevent damage to the Thyristor Bridge in the following situations
(and any others as applicable) and what tests are performed to confirm the
effectiveness of these measures.
 A short-circuit at the generator slip rings at excitation ceiling voltage
 The overload occurring with a sudden short-circuit at the generator
terminals
 High voltage across the bridge due to reverse excitation current
 Non-uniform current distribution between thyristors
(2) Excitation Transformer

(a) A power transformer shall be provided to supply the power requirements of the
excitation system under all operating conditions. This transformer shall be a
three- phase dry type natural air cooled and manufactured to the appropriate IEC
standard for indoor installation.
The design of excitation transformer shall consider the additional stray and eddy
current losses generated by the harmonics supplied to the load. The Bidder shall
calculate the extra losses due to harmonics by reference to ANSI/IEEE C57.110
The Bidder shall nominate the expected demand for excitation power (MVA) at
rated generator output.
(b) Not withstanding the protection schemes specified in this Specification, the
Contractor shall state any further protection which he feels is necessary for the
safe operation of the transformer. The protection shall not mal-operate under
any operating condition.
Technical characteristic:
 Type: 3 phase, 50Hz, dry-type, step down transformer.
 Wiring connection type: As per Manufacturer’s standards
 Power: follows the demand of the excitation system.
 Rate voltage: Ugen/Uet
 Lightning impulse voltage: 125kV.
 Power frequency voltage testing: 3kV
 Tap changer: +2x2,5% (no-load tap changer-manually)
(3) Slip rings and Brush gear

(a) The slip rings and brush gear shall be of proven design and, in addition to the
requirements of IEC 60034, shall comply with the limits of temperature set out
in BS 4999: Part 101 Table III.
The Bidder shall nominate the expected slip ring temperature at generator rated
output.
The Bidder shall describe how the generator will be tested to determine that this
limit is not exceeded.
(b) The Contractor shall nominate and guarantee the wear rates of the slip rings and
brushes with the generator operating at continuous maximum rating. These wear
rates shall be such that brush gear maintenance is not required more frequently
than every 8000 hours of turbo-generator operation. The Contractor shall supply
certificates and his experience list to demonstrate that the slip rings and brush
gear meet these requirements.
(c) The brush pressure shall not require adjustment between the time of installation
and the time of replacement of the brush. The construction shall permit safe and
convenient replacement of the brushes with the generator in service. Suitable
interlocking shall be provided so that the brush gear enclosure covers of only
one polarity can be opened at any one time. The Contractor shall provide details
of the provisions for safeguarding personnel engaged on "in service" brush
replacement. Bolted connections shall be if it will permit the polarity at the slip
rings to be reversed.
(4) Field Suppression
A main field circuit breaker complying with IEC60947 Parts 1 and 2, and a non-
inductive resistor shall be provided for generator de-excitation. The circuit
breaker can break the field current under the most onerous operating conditions.
On opening the breaker, the field winding shall be short-circuited through the
resistor which shall ensure that the rotor winding voltage remains adequately
below its test voltage. The field circuit breaker shall have two trip coils which
are electrically and mechanically independent.
Supervision
Equipment shall be provided for detection of a generator rotor earth fault and
measurement of generator rotor field voltage and current. The field voltage and
current measurements will be computer monitored and used to compute field
winding temperature. The Bidder shall provide during the contract details of the
fault detection and voltage and current measuring equipment.
Construction and Reliability
The excitation control system shall provide completely reliable and stable
automatic regulation of the generator excitation. The excitation control
equipment must consist of an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) (with power
factor controller) and Power System Stabilizer (PSS).
(1) Technology
The regulator shall be microprocessor based.
(2) Duplication of Automatic Control and Manual Control

Dual channel auto with a power system stabiliser for each channel is required.
Manual control from CCR and local control are also required. Failure of both
automatic voltage regulators shall cause a transfer to manual and the generator
shall remain in service. Power supplies for the AVR will be derived from the
excitation transformer.
A full description of the AVR including the operation of functional units is to
be provided by the Bidder.
The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) shall have two completely independent
reference, amplifier and control circuits, henceforth called Channel 1 and
Channel 2 respectively. Duplication shall include connection to separate
secondary windings of the generator stator voltage transformers and to separate
current transformers.
Associated with each Channel shall be a manual excitation current regulator,
which shall be interfaced with the automatic excitation regulator.
(3) Operation of Duplicate Circuits

The aim of having duplicate regulators is to ensure that generator excitation
remains under automatic control, notwithstanding a single failure in the control
system.
In the following requirements, it is assumed that the two Channels will operate
on the duty/standby principle, although alternative principles such as
master/slave will be considered provided they achieve the same aim.
The normal condition of operation when the generator is connected to the
system will be for excitation to be under automatic voltage control of the
selected Duty Channel, with the Standby Channel being also selected to
automatic mode. If the Duty Channel in automatic mode fails, control will be
transferred "bump less" to the Standby Channel (automatic mode). If the
Standby Channel automatic control subsequently fails, control shall be
transferred to the Standby Channel manual controller if available, otherwise
excitation shall trip.
If the Standby Channel (in either automatic or manual mode) is unavailable
when the Duty Channel automatic control fails, control shall be transferred to
the Duty Channel manual controller if available, otherwise excitation shall trip.
The Bidder shall provide a description of what abnormal conditions will cause
excitation to trip.
The equipment shall be designed and constructed to facilitate maintenance of
one Channel while the other remains in service.
If operating on the duty/standby principle, the standby circuit shall be
continuously monitored so that any abnormality is alarmed and causes lockout
of transfer to that circuit.
The status of each Channel and whether it is controlling excitation shall be
indicated in the CCR. Selection of which Channel is controlling excitation and
its mode (automatic or manual) of operation shall also be available from the
CCR.
Characteristics
The excitation control system shall have the following characteristics:
(1) Sensitivity
The excitation system shall give its maximum or minimum output with
variations in generator terminal voltage of not greater than ±2.5% from set point.
(2) Regulation
The regulator shall maintain the generator terminal voltage within limits of
±0.5% of required value between no load and full load over a range of
frequencies of 47.5 to 52 Hz.
(3) Range of Control

The regulator shall be capable of automatically controlling the generator
terminal voltage between the limits of 95% and 105% of rated voltage under all
conditions of generator operation, when there is no contribution from any of the
Supplementary Control circuits.
(4) Stability and Damping
It is intended that the excitation control system will be adjusted so that, with the
generator operating on open circuit at rated voltage a step change in the AVR
input equivalent to a step change of either +2.5% or -2.5% terminal voltage,
shall result in an oscillation in field voltage with a settling time of less than 1.5
seconds.
(The settling time of a quantity is defined here as the time interval from the
instant of the step change until the resulting oscillation settles to less than ±10%
of the maximum induced change.)
It is also intended that the excitation control system will be adjusted to maintain
stable operation of the generator for a ±0.5% step change in terminal voltage
with the machine operating at all loads and power factors within its capability
limits.
The under excited capability limit shown on this drawing is based on a
theoretical model with the generator connected to an infinite bus bar through a
reactance of 0.5 pu (on rated MVA of the generator) and with rated voltage
maintained at the generator terminals (achieved by adjustment of the infinite
bus bar). The criterion of stability is a settling time of less than 5 seconds in
generator terminal voltage and rotor angle oscillations.
To achieve these requirements, the Contractor will carry out necessary
calculations before Site commissioning, of the required setting values within the
range of adjustment provided. The Contractor will co-operate in implementing
these settings and in carrying out tests to verify that the required performance is
attained.
(5) Low and High Frequency Operation

The regulator shall function satisfactorily at system frequencies between
47.5 Hz and 52 Hz.
Supplementary Controls
(1) The output of the excitation regulator shall be varied in accordance with the
requirements of at least the following supplementary control circuits.
(2) Automatic Run-up and run-down

On closing the field switch during run-up of the generator, excitation shall be
applied proportional to speed and increased until minimum set point voltage is
achieved at not less than 95% normal speed. At the end of the excitation raising
sequence, excitation shall be under automatic voltage regulator control.
The run-down sequence shall ensure that excitation is controlled so as not to
overflux any transformers which may be connected to the generator.
(3) Reactive Power and Voltage Control

(a) Provision shall be made to allow the operator to select separate reactive limits
for each generator for the reactive power sharing task, and the sharing to be
apportioned accordingly. Control of the set point of each generator shall be
selectable by the operator either to the ICMS or to individual unit set point
reference.
If the control system fails, control shall revert to individual control of each
generator set point, the outputs retaining the values they had at the time of
failure.
Provision shall be made for the following inputs and outputs from each unit:
Inputs: stator voltage, power output, reactive power output, 500kV bus
bar voltage, generator step up transformer tap setting
Outputs: voltage set point, provision for generator transformer tap setting.
(b) Reactance drop compensation shall be included in the AVR circuits as a
secondary means of minimizing changes in Quang Trach 500 kV busbar voltage
level during changes in station reactive power demand.
The compensation shall be proportional to the reactive power output (or
alternatively, quadrature component of stator current) of the generator and
adjusted to a setting to be advised by Owner.
(4) Stabilizing Controls

Stabilizing signals, derived from generator power output and/or terminal
frequency and/or rotor speed shall be provided to enhance the damping of
generator and power system oscillations over the frequency range 0.2 to 2.0 Hz.
These shall be provided on both channels. The Contractor shall provide details
of the stabilizing signals used. A compensating circuit separate from
compensation of the voltage feedback path shall be provided. If more than one
stabilizing signal is provided, separate compensating circuits are to be provided
for each.
On the output of any stabilizer circuit, in the frequency range below 100 hertz,
the total measured noise components shall be less than 0.1% peak to peak. This
measurement shall be made with a flat compensation characteristic and the
transducer gain adjusted to the following:
Stabilizer Gain
Frequency: 20 (pu equivalent terminal voltage/pu frequency)
Speed: 20 (pu equivalent terminal voltage/pu speed)
Power: 01 (pu equivalent terminal voltage/pu MVA)
The lag time constant of any speed, frequency or power transducer used as a
feedback into the AVR should be less than 40 ms (as measured through the
relevant stabilizer circuit, with compensation adjusted for flat response).
If a rotor speed based stabilizing signal is offered, the Contractor shall include
details of any torsional interaction induced by the stabilizer (s) and of any
special devices provided to avoid torsional oscillations. Analysis is to be
included to demonstrate the performance of the AVR at the torsional
frequencies.
The compensation circuits shall provide for the following gain and phase
adjustments of the stabilizing signals:
 Gain range 0-6,000 pu open circuit excitation volts per pu speed or frequency
or range 0-100 pu open circuit excitation volts per 100 MW.
 Washout filter (high pass; at least three per stabilizing signal):
 0 to 10 seconds adjustable
 Lead/lag compensation (at least three per stabilising signal):
 0 to 1 second lead and lag, independently adjustable
(5) Over-Excitation Limit (OEL)

The regulator shall incorporate an over-excitation limiter to restrict the period
of operation of the generator beyond its continuous over-excited capability. The
limit action shall have a time inverse characteristic corresponding to a small
margin from the short time capability of the generator rotor and excitation
system, and shall return operation to continuous rating. It shall operate smoothly,
and without causing hunting. Its operation shall be alarmed in the CCR.
(6) Under-Excitation Limit (UEL)

The regulator shall incorporate an under-excitation limiter to prevent operation
of the generator while under AVR control beyond a characteristic line in the
form of the locus of points on the MW versus MVAR capability diagram. The
limiter shall operate smoothly, and without causing hunting. Its operation shall
be alarmed in the CCR.
(7) Stabilizer Output Monitoring

The Bid Proposal shall demonstrate that the stabilizer failure detection circuit
does not operate inadvertently during system disturbances, particularly during
the recovery of system frequency after loss of generation elsewhere in the
system.
(8) Automatic Follow-up Device (AFU)

To ensure a smooth change-over from the AUTO to the MAN and vice-versa
an automatic follow-up shall be provided.
(9) Power System Stabilizer (PSS)

The power system stabilizer is proposed to improve the dynamic stability limit
of the power system when the synchronous generator is in parallel operation
with other generators on this system. The power system stabilizer can counteract
the system instability when detected through the action of the static excitation
system. Also a power system stabilizer allows the generator having a wider
range of reactive power capability.
The use of a power system stabilizer is common in modern power station design
for generators of rating of 30MW and above. The Bidder/Contractor shall
demonstrate that the stabilizer failure detection circuit does not operate
inadvertently during system disturbances, particularly during the recovery of
system frequency after loss of generation elsewhere in the system.
PSS Requirements:
 PSS shall be capacity to provide the phase compensation corresponding to
0.2-2Hz, the phase angle of transfer function of excitation system shall be
within ±30 degree
 The PSS output limit shall be set at lead ±5% of Generator voltage
 Gain factor of PSS shall be set to the Gain Margin of PSS in the range of 6dB
~10dB
(10) Other functions (such as P/Q limitter, Stator current limiter, V/Hz,…) shall be
supplied.
P/Q limiter is used to prevent the generator from entering the unsteady operation
area. The limit curve may be set such that five reactive power values are
corresponding to five active power levels respectively (i.e. P=0%, P=25%,
P=50%, P=75%, P=100%).
Supplementary Protection
The following supplementary protections are to be provided and their operation
alarmed.
(1) Generator voltage transformer Failure Protection

The excitation control system shall incorporate means of detecting generator
voltage transformer failure. If such a failure is associated with the Duty Channel
in automatic voltage control mode. If failure is associated with the Standby
Channel, an alarm shall be raised and standby automatic control shall be
excluded from the normal control transfer sequence. This facility shall not
operate for low terminal voltage conditions arising from a fault on the system.
If both channels fail, control shall be transferred to manual.
(2) Rotor Over-Current Protection

If with the duty channel in automatic control, its over-excitation limiter fails to
operate as designed to prevent overheating of the rotor, a protective function
shall operate to transfer control. If subsequently, with the standby channel in
automatic control, its over excitation limiter also fails to operate, a protective
function shall operate to a further of transfer control.
It should be noted that, in addition to the protective functions described above
related to detection of limiter failure, excitation overcurrent protection is also to
be provided, with which these functions should be graded.
(3) Overvoltage/ Overfluxing (V/Hz) Protection

Protection shall be provided against stator overvoltage and generator
overfluxing. The Contractor shall provide the philosophy of the offered
overfluxing protection scheme, including co-ordination with any excitation
limiting function associated with run-up and shut-down of the generator.
This function is used to prevent oversaturation of the magnetic flux density
of synchronous generator. Compared with the reference voltage, the reference
voltage depends on the generator frequency at actual voltage value of
generator. If the actual voltage exceeds the reference value, a timer will be
triggered. After adjustable time delay is completed, if the voltage still fails to
reach the allowable value, the trip signal will be triggered
(4) Under excitation Protection

If with the duty channel in automatic control, it’s under excitation limiter fails
to operate as designed to prevent pole slipping, a protective function shall
operate to transfer control. If subsequently, with the standby channel in
automatic control, its under excitation limiter also fails to operate, a protective
function shall operate to a further of transfer control.
It should be noted that, in addition to the protective functions described above
related to detection of limiter failure, loss of field protection is also to be
provided, with which these functions should be graded.
Manual Excitation Control
The manual control shall meet the following additional requirements:
(1) Follow-up
Equipment shall be provided to cause the manual excitation control to match
the excitation level determined by the in-service automatic control. This is to
ensure that a changeover from automatic to manual control, under steady state
conditions, will generally take place without perceptible transients while
operating in the generator capability range where manual control is stable.
Similarly, while under manual control, a facility shall be provided to match the
automatic level of excitation with the manual level, so that a transfer to
automatic control will take place without perceptible transients.
(2) Manual Restrictive Limit

A facility shall be provided to prevent the manual controller operating point
from following the in-service automatic controller operating point beyond a
characteristic line known as the Manual Restrictive Limit, in the form of a locus
of points on the MW versus MVAR capability diagram. If protective transfer
from automatic to manual control occurs while automatic is operating beyond
the characteristic curve, it is acceptable that there be an immediate increase in
excitation current and hence MVAR lagging output to bring the operating point
with the characteristic curve.
A facility shall be provided to prevent an operator reducing excitation current
using a manual excitation controller beyond the characteristic curve described
in (a). Further, if excitation is under manual control and the MW output is
increased, a facility shall be provided which ensures that the manual operating
point remains within the characteristic curve.
Test Facilities
(1) To facilitate performance testing of the AVR and for future investigations,
quantities shall be made available for measurement at the excitation cubicle.
The quantities shall include the following and may taken the form of analogue
signals or outputs from the digital software:
e) Generator stator voltage and current
f) Generator three-phase real and reactive generator power output
g) Generator rotor voltage and current
h) Instantaneous speed of the rotor (if speed is used as a power system
stabilizer input)
i) Any other signal used by the Contractor as a feedback in the AVR
j) Intermediate signals at key points in the AVR block diagram
(2) Analogue transducers (if any) required for processing primary signals shall be
mounted in the excitation cubicle and have a time constant (lag) of less than 20
milliseconds.
Sources for Generator Voltage Signals
The generator voltage signal for each AVR Channel shall be derived from two
physically separate V.T.s. Each V.T. shall be separately connected to the phase
isolated busbars and secondary wiring shall run in separate cables to the
respective channels to minimize the possibility of a single event crippling both
automatic regulators.
Performance Data
(1) The Contractor shall provide a block diagram so that it shows the gains, time
constants, delays, limits and saturation of the excitation system as designed.
Where these can be varied, ranges and recommended values are to be shown.
Frequency response curves (Bode or Nygquist) of each block with the
recommended settings are also required. The Contractor shall at appropriate
times resubmit the block diagram amended to show the parameters and limits
obtained during testing and again to show those which apply to the excitation
system after it has been commissioned.
(2) Sample chart records of step response measurements made on machines having
similar AVR control shall be provided during the contract.
(3) A curve shall be submitted during the contract showing the estimated
time/voltage characteristic of the generator under AVR control immediately
after full load has been rejected, by opening of the generator circuit breaker.
Electrical Synchronizing Facilities
One set of automatic and manual synchronizing equipment will be provided for
the generating unit and the generators can be synchronized with electric network
by both circuit breaker located on the 500kV side of the generator transformer
and the generator circuit breaker.
(1) Synchronizing Equipment

To allow manual synchronizing, each unit will have the following hardwired
equipment as part of the unit control desk.
a) Dual voltmeter
b) Dual frequency meter
c) Synchroscope
d) Circuit breaker close pushbutton
The circuit breaker close button will be “hard-wired” to the circuit breaker close
coil via the unit synchronizing panel to minimize and define the time delay
between its operation and the closure of the circuit breaker.
The automatic synchronizing equipment and check synchronizing equipment
will be located at the generator protection panels of the generating unit and will
include:
 Auto synchronizer.
 Manual check synchronizing relay
 Check synchronizing guard relay
 Circuit breaker and hardwired panel equipment selection relays (driven by
ICMS)
The circuit breaker close output of the automatic synchronizer will be “hard-
wired” to the circuit breaker close coil to minimize the time delay between the
synchronizer’s operation and the closure of the circuit breaker.
The guard relay is associated with the check synchronizing relay. It prevents the
check synchronizing relay from closing the circuit breaker, when conditions are
acceptable, if the operator has pressed and held the button before the acceptable
conditions are met. It forces the operator to make the decision to close, rather
than allowing the check synchronizing relay to decide.
The check synchronizing relay shall have facilities to allow closure if voltage is
absent on one side.
Selection of a particular circuit breaker for synchronizing will be made via the
ICMS
(2) Redundancy
Redundancy in automatic synchronizing circuits will be provided by a correct
selection of auto-synchronizing equipment as follows:
 Either Two automatic synchronizer functions or two check synchronizing
functions are contained in the one relay case. Each automatic synchronizer
will be checked by a check synchronizing function and operation of either
synchronizer will close the circuit breaker.
 Two separate relays and each relay shall have automatic synchronizing
function and a check synchronizing function. The operation of either
synchronizer will close the breaker
(3) Manual Synchronizing

Manual synchronizing will be available for the following circuit breakers:
 500kV Circuit Breakers
 11kV Unit– Station Tie Breakers
 22kV Generator Circuit Breaker
 11kV Unit Incoming Circuit Breakers
 11kV Station Incoming Circuit Breakers
(4) Automatic Synchronizing

Automatic synchronizing facilities will be provided for the 22kV Generator
Circuit Breaker (GCB), the 500 kV Generator Circuit Breaker, but not for the
11 kV circuit breakers. Lack of provision of automatic synchronizing at the 11
kV level is because under normal auxiliary system configuration, where the unit
is connected to the common 500 kV switchyard, changes to turbine governor
set point and generator excitation set point will not be able to significantly
change the voltage magnitude or phase angle on either side of an open circuit
breaker. Consequently automatic synchronizing, which requires control of these
variables cannot be used.
(5) Synchronization at 500kV CB of 500kV Switchyard

 The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with EVN NPT to design,
provide, install and complete the electrical interface between 500kV
Switchyard and Quang Trach I TPP. The cable shall be installed along the
cable trench from Quang Trach I to 500kV Switchyard and connect to the
Interface Terminal Box (ITB) for connecting the signals.
 Two (02) Interface Terminal Box will be installed in Control Room of 500kV
Switchyard. All signal for synchronization, house load, interlocking, status
of (500kV CB, 500kV DS, 500kV ES, 500kV CVT) from 500kV Switchyard
shall be connected to the ITB.
 Scope of Quang Trach I TPP:
 Provide the conduits/trays/ladders/supports/cable trench from Quang Trach I
TPP to 500kV Switchyard terminal point.
 Provide the cable and necessary accessories, installation, connection and testing
works from Quang Trach I TPP to 500kV Switchyard (including to 500kV
equipment)
 Provide the Interface Terminal Box (ITB) and necessary accessories
At Interface Terminal Box shall be equipped one Control Switch to permit
synchronization from 500kV Switchyard or Quang Trach I TPP. 500kV CB will
be only permitted to synchronize from Quang Trach I TPP side after accepted
from 500kV Switchyard operator.
The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with NPT to design, provide
and complete the connection interface between Quang Trach I and 500kV
Switchyard for synchronization, house load, interlocking, status of (500kV CB,
500kV DS, 500kV ES, 500kV CVT ).
Generator Cooling
Cooling System
Core and Rotor: direct hydrogen
Stator Conductor: water
Totally Enclosed Water Air Cooled can be offered as an option.
Generator cooling systems shall be provided to maintain the temperature of the
various parts of the generator within the limits required by IEC60034 at
continuous rated output.
The complete equipment requirements for the following shall be provided:
 Hydrogen cooling system,
 Hydrogen seals and seal oil system,
 Stator cooling system,
 Brush gear ventilation system,
 Generator casing purging
The equipment shall include all necessary pumps, valves, piping, reservoirs,
make-up tanks, filters, heat exchangers, instrumentation and ancillary
equipment.
Hydrogen Cooling System
(1) A hydrogen cooling surface system shall be required at both end of generator
shell to maintain the hydrogen temperatures within IEC60034 specified limits.
The hydrogen gas is forcedly circulated through coolers by cooling fans
coaxially fitted with shaft of generator. Water for coolers is supplied from cooler
inlet water system via automatic controlled valve.
(2) The generator hydrogen pressure shall be maintained automatically at a set

value which shall be adjustable.
(3) The hydrogen coolers used closed cooling water (demineralized water)
(4) Provision shall be made for any hydrogen leakage into the cooling water system
in service to be detected, alarmed and the rate of leakage measured. The
hydrogen leakage detector shall be provided and installed in suitable
location.The signal will be transferred to DCS for monitoring.
(5) The hydrogen leakage detector shall be provided and installed at generator
outlet terminal.The signal will be transferred to DCS for monitoring
(6) Control equipment shall be provided to automatically maintain generator

coolants at the required temperature by regulation of water flow through the
various coolers.
(7) A covered water head tank shall be provided complete with inlet float valve and
discharge piping and valves.
(8) Any apparatus necessary for the withdrawal of the hydrogen coolers from the
generator casing shall be provided by the Contractor and itemized in the
Essential Tools and Appliances of the Proposal Documents.
(9) Drying equipment shall be provided for removal of moisture from the hydrogen
in the generator. If the equipment uses desiccant, facilities shall be provided for
its regeneration within the equipment without incurring the risk of hydrogen
explosion. Equipment shall be provided for measurement of generator hydrogen
dew point temperature and a signal provided for computer monitoring. In
addition, facilities shall be provided for filling the generator with dry air and for
passing dry air continuously when the generator is open for maintenance.
(10) An indicating and integrating flow meter shall be provided for measurement of
the hydrogen consumption rate of the generator. The range of the meter shall
cover the flow rate for a "tight" generator up to the flow rate at which the unit
must be taken out of service. The Proposal Documents shall state the maximum
rate of hydrogen leakage from the generator as a whole when the generator is at
rated conditions.
The flow meter shall incorporate a transmitter for computer monitoring of gas
consumption rate. Equipment shall also be provided for measurement of the gas
mixture purity of hydrogen in air, hydrogen in carbon dioxide and air in carbon
dioxide and signals provided for computer monitoring.
(11) Details of the source of hydrogen, its source pressure and its source dew point
will be provided by the Contractor.
(12) All necessary hydrogen vent lines shall be provided and shall discharge at least
2000mm above the turbine house roof. All hydrogen piping routes shall avoid
areas subject to a hazard from mechanical or fire damage.
Generator Cooling Board
(1) A generator cooling board shall be provided to accommodate all the equipment
associated with the control and monitoring of the generator cooling and seal oil
systems, but excluding the generator purging system. This shall include control
equipment, purity measurement equipment and instruments as recommended by
the Contractor. The board shall be located on the basement level of the turbine
house.
(2) Intrinsically safe circuits shall be employed in areas where an explosive
atmosphere could occur due to hydrogen leakage.
Hydrogen Seals and Seal Oil System
A seal oil unit shall be provided to contain safely the hydrogen gas within the
generator housing.
Function: the system is provided to prevent hydrogen from leaking out of
generator casing to atmosphere
Normally, the seal oil source is taken from the main lube oil pump upstream of
lube oil control valve. The seal oil pressure in the system is automatically
maintained at a preset point by a seal oil regulator. The seal oil discharged from
sealing packing is routed back to the main oil tank through a set of stabilizing
and degasifying equipment.
(1) In addition to the automatic seal oil regulator, the system shall be equipped with
a manual standby feeding set ensuring the uncorrupted seal oil flow to the
generator hydrogen packing even for a prolonged outage of the unit.
(2) The system shall also be provided with adequate monitoring and protecting
equipment including liquid detectors etc.
(3) Shaft oil seals of a proven reliable design shall be provided. Details of the seals
shall be provided by the Contractor. The seal oil to hydrogen differential
pressure shall be maintained automatically at all pressures up to the maximum
hydrogen pressure, irrespective of the source of seal oil. The system shall be
capable of sealing rated gas pressure in the generator with the turbo-generator
stationary.
(4) 3x100% seal oil pumps (one AC seal oil pump, one AC emergency seal oil
pump and one DC seal oil pump).
(5) Two (2) seal oil coolers shall be provided. These shall be cooled from the
auxiliary cooling water system and shall be parallel on the water side. Adequate
seal oil cooling shall be provided by one (1) cooler in service in case of a cooler
inlet water temperature is low. The two (2) coolers may be paralleled to enable
generator MCR to be achieved in case of temperature is high.
(6) Equipment shall be provided for the treatment of seal oil to removed dissolved
gas to minimize the contamination of hydrogen in the generator.
Generator Casing Purging System
(1) The system shall permit purging the generator of hydrogen using carbon dioxide,
or of carbon dioxide using compressed air, in less than 90 minutes with the
generator stationary.
(2) The characteristics of the carbon dioxide supply shall be provided by the
Contractor.
(3) A panel shall be provided from which all operations necessary for purging the
generator can be carried out. The panel shall accommodate all monitoring
equipment associated with the purging system. The panel shall be located on the
basement level of the turbine house remote from the turbo-generator foundation
block, so that it can be reached safely in the event of a generator fire.
(4) The Contractor shall provide all necessary heating equipment should the carbon
dioxide require warming prior to injection into the generator.
(5) Provision shall be made for a 'visible-break' between the generator and the
sources of hydrogen, carbon dioxide and air to provide proof of isolation before
access is made available for maintenance of the system. The visible breaks may
consist, for instance, of flexible hoses with quick disconnect couplings, or
removable sections of pipe work.
Temperature Measurement
Embedded temperature detectors (ETD), resistance temperature detectors

(RTDs) or thermocouple type, shall be built into the machine for measurement
of temperatures of various active parts, bearings and cooling medium etc. The
minimum requirements are listed below:
 Twelve(12) - Dual element RTD for measurement of the temperature
between coils in the slots
 Twelve(12) - Single element thermocouple (TC)x 2 (2TC/one point) for
stator core which six (6) are located in the end zone.
 Four (4) - Dual element RTDs for measurement of the inlet hydrogen gas
temperature of each cooler.
 Four (4) - Dual element RTDs for measurement of the outlet hydrogen gas
temperature of each cooler.
Two (2) - Dual element RTD for measurement of the inlet and outlet air
temperature from collector ring.
 Two (2) - Dual element thermocouple per one bearing for measurement of
bearing metal temperature.
 One (1) set - Single element thermocouples for stator coil discharge water
temperature measurement. (1 point/one turn of coil)
 Temperature detectors for seal oil, in case seal oil cooler is provided.
All temperature detector leads shall be brought out to a terminal box suitably
located on the either side of the generator frame for easy access. The leads shall
be suitably fastened to the frame to prevent movement and shielded against stray
field. Terminal box enclosure shall be dust & vermin proof and of degree of
protection IP54.
In addition to the ETDs, temperature switches shall be provided as required for
alarm and interlocks.
All the above temperature detectors shall be duplex type. Simplex type Thermo-
couple / RTDs are acceptable with double the numbers.
On-line Monitoring System shall be provided as specified below:
 On-line water temperature monitoring system for stator winding bars: The
processor shall be complete with all software & hardware required to detect
any abnormalities in the temperature at any given generator operating point
and shall be sensitive to generator loads, header water flows, pressure etc.
and shall be possible to exchange information with DCS through suitable
protocol.
 Instrumentation for vibration monitoring system: At least 6 nos. of pickups
at each end of over-hang portion of the winding to be provided,
symmetrically located around the periphery with connection to “Turbine
Supervisory” system. Provision shall be made to connect the same to DCS.
 Instrumentation for liquid leakage detector shall be provided at all the low
level points inside the generator casing including end shields along with
provision for indication and alarm during leakage of liquid in generator.
Generator Current and voltage Transformers
Current transformers (CT’s) and voltage transformers (VT’s) shall be provided

for metering, control and protection functions.
Current transformers in the generator stator winding terminals shall be
consideration to the independent support and electrical clearance.
The CT’s and VT’s used during acceptance testing of the turbo-generator and
for shall be tested in accordance with the appropriate test Codes and Standards.
Current Transformers
(1) All current transformers shall be of the toroidal type suitable for installation at
the following locations:
a) In the ductwork between the generator and generator circuit breaker (GCB),
as close as possible to the GCB
b) On the generator neutral busbar terminals.
c) In the unit transformer busbars.
The secondary windings of all current transformers shall be brought out to
suitable terminals via isolating links for testing.
(2) Adequate supports shall be provided for all current transformers and such
supports shall not use in any way the main busbar, generator terminals nor the
terminals of the earthing transformers. The Contractor shall include in their
drawings detailing the proposed method of mounting current transformers.
(3) All protection and metering current transformers shall be insulated for the
system highest voltage. This system is none effectively earthed.
(4) Interposing CT's shall be mounted adjacent to the main CT's and the leads
between them shall be jointed by brazing. Each interposing CT cubicle shall
contain an anti-condensation heater.
(5) An interposing CT shall not be used in conjunction with a metering CT.
(6) Test links shall be connected into the CT secondary circuits so that only the
external burden is subject to isolation by these links.
Voltage Transformers
(1) The high voltage neutral of the generator voltage transformers shall be isolated
from ground.
(2) The high voltage neutral of the generator transformer voltage transformers shall
be brought out from the tanks and connected by means of an approved cable to
the star point of the generator.
(3) The transformers shall be of the oil immersed, sealed non-breathing type
mounted in sheet steel tanks.
(4) The transformers shall consist of single-phase, fully isolated metal clad units,
comprising single-phase transformers for each phase, connected up as to form
three-phase, star-connected banks and shall be mounted in voltage transformer
cubicles.
(5) Bidders may offer arrangements consisting of either three single-phase metal
clad units (i.e. one per phase) or three units combined into a single
compartmented tank: the star point connections in this case being made via
bushings through the compartment walls, the star point being under oil. The
compartment walls shall be of metal and each compartment shall be entirely
scaled off from the adjacent compartments.
(6) Voltage transformer cubicles shall be provided with two phase isolated
compartments for each phase.
(7) One compartment shall house the VT truck for that phase and the second
compartment may be shared at a later stage by a surge diverter capacitor.
(8) The earthing switch shall be situated in the VT cubicle.

Each compartment shall be fitted with front and rear hinged access doors.
Bidders shall note the clearance available when designing the access doors.
Facility shall be provided for taking oil samples. For this purpose a drain valve
shall be installed.
(9) Fire resistant shutters shall be provided which automatically close over the
apertures in the busbar chambers and over all primary conductors when the
voltage transformer is racked out from the busbar. The shutters shall be provided
with padlocking facility in the closed position. Padlocking shall be easily
accessible with the transformers in the racked-out position.
(10) The transformers shall be of the horizontal withdrawable truck type. The
arrangement shall be such as to enable the operation of racking-out and
replacing a transformer to be done with ease by one operator.
(11) Floor rails shall be provided to prevent damage to the floors of the cubicle while
the trucks are being withdrawn or replaced. The rails shall be zinc plating to a
minimum thickness of 25 microns.
(12) A mechanical locking device shall be provided on each VT truck to secure VT's
against accidental movement in both racked-in and out positions. It shall be
possible to close cubicle doors when VT truck is racked-out and shutters closed.
(13) It is preferred that the high voltage connections to the voltage transformers be
of the spring loaded male and female "spout" type. This insulation shall attain
the specified lightning impulse withstand level (LIWL) without the use of any
ancillary means (e.g. rubber glove). Tenderers shall comment on the method
used to maintain contact with the fixed conductors. Alternatives may be
proposed but in such case full details shall be included in the Bid. Bidders shall
submit test certificates with their offer proving their design obtains the required
LIWL with the VT in the in-service position.
Each compartment or individual tank shall be provided with an approved gas
impulse relay having two normally open contacts, one for tripping and one for
computer input. Each gas impulse relay shall be accessible for inspection and
gas sampling without withdrawing the truck. The secondary fuses shall be
accessible, in safety, with the transformer racked-in and in service. It is
preferred that connection of the secondary wiring to the fixed part of the cubicle
be by withdrawable plug connections. The use of sliding contacts when the VT
is racked into position is unacceptable. All secondary wiring shall be brought
back to the "CT/VT marshalling cubicle"
CT/VT Marshalling Cubicles
(1) A marshalling cubicle for each generator shall house all the secondary wiring
terminals required for the whole installation, together with the current
transformers, current test links, voltage test terminals and all auxiliary apparatus.
(2) Terminals of the same function and voltage shall be grouped together.
Generator Neutral Earthing Transformers
General
(1) Earthing transformers shall be of the single phase distribution type and shall
comply with the requirements of IEC60076 and IEC60726. One transformer for
each generator shall be supplied.
(2) The transformers shall be of the air natural cooling type.
(3) The transformers will normally operate without any appreciable voltage on the
primary circuit.
(4) The transformers shall comply with the following requirements:
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated voltage Primary: Generator line to line voltage
Secondary: Secondary: 400 V
Cooling AN (Enclosed type)
Tapping Not required
System earthing Effectively earthed on HV and LV sides
230 kVA for 1 minute and accordance with earth

Rating
fault clearing time
Impulse test 125 kV peak Power frequency test

HV test voltages
50 kV rms 1 min
(5) The secondary terminals of the transformer shall be wired back to the
marshalling cubicle.
(6) The transformers shall be mounted within the generator foundation blocks.
Wheels are not required on the transformers.
Earthing Resistors
(1) The resistors shall be of the continuous strip type, shall be mechanically
robust, fireproof and mounted in wall or floor mounting weatherproof
enclosures.
(2) The resistors shall comply with the following requirements:
Cooling AN
Frequency 50 Hz
Resistance 2 ohms
Resistance tolerance +5%
Tappings 0.5 ohms to 2 ohms in 0.1 ohm steps
Power factor 0.95 minimum
Insulation test voltage 17 kV rms
(1 min. at 50 Hz)
30 minute current rating on each tap:
0.5 ohm - 551 A 1.3 ohm - 212A
0.6 ohm - 460 A 1.4 ohm - 197A
0.7 ohm - 394 A l.5 ohm - 184A
0.8 ohm - 345 A 1.6 ohm - 173A

0.9 ohm - 307 A 1.7 ohm - 162A
1.0 ohm - 276A 1.8 ohm - 153A
1.1 ohm - 251 A 1.9 ohm - 145 A
1.2 ohm - 230 A 2.0 ohm - 138 A
Temperature rise - 300oC maximum
Temperature co-efficient Not more than 12% change at maximum
of resistance temperature rise
(3) The tappings shall be easily accessible and adjustments shall be made by
alterations to a bolted link arrangement.
(4) A connection diagram plate shall be provided showing clearly the relative
physical positions of the terminals and their markings, together with a table
listing the link connections to be made corresponding to the various resistance
values.
Generator Fire Protection
Fire protection for the generator and related plant apply following clauses:
(1) The carbon dioxide purging system for the generator will be regarded as
providing adequate fire protection for the interior of the generator.
(2) Generator slip ring fire protection equipment shall be provided.

(a) The equipment shall include detectors, nozzles, carbon dioxide injection
equipment, piping, valves, and all other equipment necessary for automatic
operation to facilitate fast extinction of fires (e.g. powered dampers to stop the
entry of make-up air). Facilities shall be provided to safeguard personnel who
may be required to work in or near the areas being protected.
(b) Provision shall be made for operation of the equipment from a remote push
button, and manually at the point of gas control.
(c) The pipe route from the carbon dioxide plant shall be selected to avoid areas
subject to the hazard of mechanical and/or fire damage.
(d) The equipment supplied shall include automatic closing fire dampers with
carbon dioxide pressure-operated release mechanisms in the slip ring enclosure
air inlet and exhaust ducting and in make-up air ducting (where slip rings and
make-up air ducts are applicable).
(3) A system shall be provided for the detection of hydrogen leakage to atmosphere
from the generator. In particular, detectors shall be located to detect leakage in
the region of the rotating hydrogen seals and from the pipe connections below
the generator. The detection of hydrogen leakage shall be alarmed in the fire
detection.
(4) The electrical systems must be designed to minimize the generation of
harmonics and the effects of electrical interference between power and
control/instrumentation circuits, and comply with international requirements on
electromagnetic compatibility.
(5) The Bidder must provide a complete and comprehensive protection system for
the generators/generator transformers/unit auxiliary transformers, transmission
lines and the station electrical distribution systems during the detailed
engineering stage.
The Bidder must undertake the installation of the protection relay panels within
the control room, wiring between panels, and commissioning test of protection
schemes. Protection must be coordinated with Vietnamese Grid Company (i.e
Vietnam National Power Transmission Corporation) in accordance with the grid
codes.
7.3 500KV EHV OVERHEAD LINE
General Information
Scope of work
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's
works, supply and delivery, laying and installation at site, testing and
commissioning of the 500kV equipment (Current Transformer (CT), Voltage
Transformer (VT), Surge Arrester (SA), Insulator ), 500kV Overhead Line
conductor, Optical Ground Wire (OPGW+NMOC/24SM, Fiber Optic Media
Converter, Junction Box…) along with its accessories for the transmissions link
between 500kV Switchyard to Generator Transformers of the Project.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, manufacture, testing at
manufacturer's works, supply and delivery, laying and installation at site of the
500kV Tower and accessories from Quang Trach I to 500kV Switchyard.
The line conductor and its accessories shall be complete with all fittings and
components necessary for its effective working and efficient performance and
satisfactory maintenance under the various operating conditions specified. All
such parts shall be deemed to be included within the scope of supply whether
specifically included or not in these specifications. The successful Bidder shall
not be eligible for extra charges for such accessories.
The specifications covers steel structure components and electrical material
only at power plant's end required for linking 500kV line conductor to 500kV
Switchyard.
The specification also covers the jointing, end termination, testing and
commissioning of the line conductor and accessories at site. Exclusion(s) if any,
shall be brought out clearly and explicitly.
General
The conductor line and accessories furnished under this specification shall
conform to the standards specified under this specification.
The Contractor shall furnish the required instruction manuals as also the detailed
drawings for the cross linked polyethylene cable asked for in this specification..
The Owner would like to conduct the type tests for the present order. The
charges for various type tests shall be quoted separately and these charges shall
be taken for evaluation. The Owner reserve the right to conduct all the type test
or any of the type test as considered necessary.
Unless brought out clearly, the Bidder shall be deemed to conform to this
specification scrupulously. All deviations from this specification shall be
brought out in the schedule of deviations. Any deviation between the
specifications and catalogues or the bid offered if not clearly brought out in the
schedule of deviations will not be considered as valid deviation.
The Bidder shall furnish the following information:
(1) Name of manufacturer & country of manufacture;
(2) Standing of firm as manufacturer of 500kV line conductor and accessories from
power plant to 500kV switchyard's gantry;
(3) Details of testing facilities at manufacturer's works;
(4) Whether manufacturer has technical collaboration with another firm, if so

details regarding the same.
Codes and Standards
The conductors shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with Standards
as indicated as follows:
 IEC 60889, Hard-drawn aluminum wire for overhead line conductors
 IEC 61089, Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded
conductors
 IEC 60888, Zinc coated wires for overhead line conductors.
stranded conductors
 IEC 61394 Characteristics of greases for aluminum, aluminum alloy and steel
bare conductors"
The earthwires shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with Standards
as indicated as follows:
 IEC 61232, Aluminum-clad steel wires for electrical purposes
 ASTM B415-92, Standard Specification for Hard - drawn Aluminum Clad
Steel Wire
 ASTM B416-93 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded
Aluminum-Clad Steel Conductors
 IEC 61089, Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded
conductors
 IEC 61395, Overhead electrical conductors - Creep test procedures for
stranded conductors
The line conductors shall consist of aluminum conductor steel reinforced
(ACSR) of the cross section and having the characteristics as stated in the
ASTM standard B232
The earthwire shall consist of aluminum-clad steel conductor (ACS) of the cross
section and having the characteristics as stated in the ASTM standard B416-93
The conductors shall comply in all respects in accordance with the above
mentioned standards and/or other approved standards.
The steel wires, aluminum-clad steel wires and aluminum wires shall be
preformed so they remain inert when the conductor/earthwire is cut.
The steel cores of conductors shall be covered with an approved grease of
applied mass per unit length, in accordance to IEC 61089, Annex C, figure C2
Line conductor
Surface Conditions
All wires making up the conductor shall be uniform and smooth and shall have
no defects such as points, sharp edges, abrasions or other imperfections that
would tend to increase radio interference and corona losses. The conductors
shall also be free of metal particles and dirt. The make-up and the laying of the
conductor strands shall be such as to produce a conductor free of a tendency to
untwist or spring apart when cut.
The aluminum wire shall of the highest purity commercially obtainable and not
less than 99.5 percent. The contractor shall submit certificates of analyses giving
the percentage and nature of any impurities in the metal of which the wires are
made. Precautions shall be taken during manufacture, storage and erection of
ACSR conductors to prevent the possibility of contamination by copper or other
materials which may adversely affect the aluminum. The individual wires shall
be covered with aluminum. The covering must be smooth of uniform thickness
and free from surface imperfections.
Conductors to be applied in bundles shall be stranded preferably on the same
stranding machine to minimize settling differences. The Supplier shall prove
that the conductors applied at a bundle are manufactured with the same tension-
torque behavior. As there are at present no international standards known, the
Supplier shall propose a test method to be applied, to obtain characteristic values
of the conductor. After approval of the method, the tension-torque characteristic
value of the conductor from each reel/drum shall be recorded and shall be
marked at each reel. During acceptance tests, these values shall be remeasured
for all drums from which samples are taken.
Testing and Inspection
The inspection and testing shall be carried out on individual wires and stranded
conductors in conformity with IEC 61089
The test specimens shall be taken from 2% of the reels for conductors and from
least two reels. The test specimens of component wire before stranding shall be
taken from 10% length so that the following tests can be carried out:
(1) Aluminum wire
 Appearance test
 Diameter Tensile test
 Wrapping test Electric Conductivity
(2) Hot-dip Galvanized Zinc-coating steel wire

 Appearance test
 Torsion test
 Elongation test
 Mass of zinc
(3) Stranded Conductor

 Appearance test
 Construction test
 Weight
 Tensile strength Mass of grease
For each test the contractor shall bear the travel expenses for the Purchaser or
his Representative. Related costs shall be included in the material cost.
For the conductor, the Bidder shall provide certified test reports with the Bid
for:
 A stress-strain type test
 A breaking strength type test
 Test to demonstrate that jointing of individual aluminum wires meets the
requirements of IEC 61089.
 Grease type test
 Creep test
Acceptance of Already Existing Test Reports
In case of existing proven and applicated design of the above testing, certified
results of a previous test may be acceptable, provided that the test results were
adequately documented and test met the test requirements specified herein and
that the conductors and earthwire tested were of the types tendered and specified
for testing.
Overhead ground wire
Surface Conditions
All wires making up the earthwire conductor shall be free of points, sharp edges,
abrasions or other imperfections. The conductor shall also be free of metal
particles and dirt. The make-up and laying of the conductor strands shall be such
as to produce a conductor free of tendency to untwist or spring apart when cut.
The wire strands shall be in close contact. The outermost layer shall be stranded
in the right hand way.
Testing and Inspection
at least two reels. The test specimens of component wire before stranding shall
be taken from 10% length so that the following tests can be carried out:
Hard Drawn Aluminum-Clad Steel wire
 Appearance test
 Diameter
 Tensile test
 Torsion test
 Elongation test
Concentric Lay Stranded Aluminum-Clad Steel Conductor
 Appearance test
 Weight
 Tensile strength
For each test the contractor shall bear the travel expenses for the EMPLOYER
or his Representative. Related costs shall be contained in material prices.
For the earthwire, the Bidder shall provide certified test reports with the Bid for:
 A stress-strain test
 A breaking strength test
 Test to demonstrate that jointing of individual steel wires meets the
requirements of IEC 61089
Acceptance of Already Existing Test Reports
In case of existing proven and applicated design of the above testing, certified
results of a previous test may be acceptable, provided that the test results were
adequately documented and test parameters met the test requirements specified
herein and that the conductors and earthwire tested were of the types tendered
and specified for testing.
Factory Acceptance Tests
All materials are subject to inspection by the Purchaser and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to advise the Purchaser when equipment and materials are
available for inspection.
The Contractor shall carry out the tests specified in accordance with the latest
applicable Standards or Recommendations and such additional tests as in the
opinion of the Purchaser are necessary to determine that the Works comply with
this Specification either under test conditions (in the Manufacturer's Works or
at the destination port) or in ordinary working. Type tests may be omitted at the
discretion of the Purchaser if satisfactory evidence is given of such tests already
been performed on identical equipment.
All materials used shall also be subjected to and shall withstand satisfactorily
such routine tests as are customary in the manufacture of the types of plant or
material included in the Works.
All tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Purchaser and in his
presence, at such reasonable times as he may require, unless agreed otherwise.
As many tests as in the opinion of the Purchaser are possible shall be arranged
together.
The original and 5 copies of test records whether they have been witnessed by
the Purchaser shall be supplied to the Purchaser
Measuring apparatus shall be approved by the Purchaser and if required shall
be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor at an approved laboratory.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper testing of materials supplied
by a sub-Contractor to the same extent as if the work, plant or materials were
completed or supplied by the Contractor himself.
The Contractor shall supply suitable test pieces of all materials as required by
the Purchaser. If required by the Purchaser test specimens shall be prepared for
check testing and forwarded at the expense of the Contractor to an independent
testing authority selected by the Purchaser.
No inspection or passing by the Purchaser of work, plant or materials whether
carried out by the Contractor or sub-Contractor, shall relieve the Contractor
from his liability to complete the Contract works in accordance with the
Contract or exonerate him from any of his guarantees.
Requirements for Materials
Country of Origin of Materials

The informations about Country of Origin of Material must be defined clearly
in Request for Proposal by the Bidder.
(1) Aluminum:
 Aluminum bar or Aluminum thread 9.5mm standard.
 Country of Origin of Aluminum (name and adress of the Manufacturer).
 Before manufacture, the Bidder must submit documents which prove country
of origin of material.
(2) Steel:
 Country of Origin (name of Manufacturer and adress of importer steel
thread/core)
 Before manufacture, the Bidder must submit documents which prove country
of origin of material.
Requirements of quality of aluminum
 Aluminum bar/ingot: Aluminum content 99.7% (minimum)
Steel content 0.2% (maximum)
Silic content 0.1% (maximum)
 Aluminum thread: Conductivity 61.3% (minimum)
Breaking strength 70-170N/mm2
Elongation 4-18%
System Description, Characteristics and Operating Conditions
General
The connection between the Generator Transformer and Switchyard shall be
made by 500kV transmission lines.
The Bidder shall design, supply and installation the gantry steel structure and
towers at power plant's side and other materials to furnish all composition of
these systems.
Conductor Parameters
A brief description of the 500kV system parameters are given hereafter: 500kV
(1) Nominal system voltage : 500kV rms
(2) Highest system voltage : 550kV rms
(3) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage : 1800kV peak
(4) Conductor nominal sectional area : ACSR
(5) System frequency : 50Hz
(6) Number circuit : two
(7) System earthing : Solidly grounded
(8) Rated short time current : 50kA for 1 sec.
(9) One minute power frequency : 710kV rms withstand voltage.

500kV Current Transformer
General
Current transformers shall be of the single-phase, oil immersed, outdoor post
type complying with IEC 61869.
The primary winding of the transformers shall be designed for the rated current
and shall withstand the specified through fault current without damage.
Secondary windings and connected equipment shall be protected against
damage by electrical contact with windings at system voltage as the result of
breakdown of insulation, by the provision of an earthed shield between primary
and secondary windings. This shield shall be earthed at the end closest to the
"P2" primary terminal. The current transformer shall mark clearly the P1, P2
terminal.
Ratings of 500kV Current Transformers as following:
 Highest system voltage: 550 kV
 Rated frequency: 50 Hz
 Accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for measuring is 0.5 and protection
is 5P20:
 The cores of current transformer for revenue metering shall have accuracy
class of 0.2 and shall be separated from other cores complying with
Vietnamese regulation.
 Continuous Overcurrent: 1.5 times of rated primary current
 Insulation level:
 Rated power frequency withstand voltage: 710 kV
 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage: 1800 kV
 Temperature rise : 65K.
General Arrangement
Current transformers shall be suitable for mounting directly on concrete pads
and shall include all necessary supporting steel structures. Anchor bolts shall be
provided and shall be of a type enabling the current transformers to be
positioned without the necessity of jacking over the anchor bolts.
An earthing terminal shall be provided for each piece of equipment to enable
the equipment to be connected to the main earthing system.
500kV Voltage Transformer
General
Voltage transformers shall be of the single-phase, oil immersed, hermetically
sealed, outdoor, capacitor type complying with IEC 60358, IEC 61869.
Ratings of 500kV Capacitive Voltage Transformers:
 Highest system voltage: 550 kV
 Rated voltage factor and rated time : 1.2 (Continuous) / 1.5 (30 seconds)
 Accuracy class (for measuring / for protection): class 0.5 / class 3P
 The cores of voltage transformer for revenue metering shall have accuracy
class of 0.2 and shall be separated from other cores complying with
Vietnamese regulation.
 Accuracy class of voltage transformer core for synchronization system shall
be of 0.2
 Insulation level
 Rated power frequency withstand voltage : 710kV (r.m.s)
 Rated lighting impulse withstand voltage : 1800kV (p)
General Arrangement
Voltage transformers shall be suitable for mounting directly on concrete pads
and shall include all necessary supporting steel structures. Anchor bolts shall be
provided and shall be of a type enabling the voltage transformers to be
positioned without the necessity of jacking over the anchor bolts.
An earthing terminal shall be provided for each piece of equipment to enable
the equipment to be connected to the main earthing system
500kV Surge Arresters
General
The surge arresters shall be of the metal-oxide type without gaps, connected
between phase and earth suitable for outdoor installation, complying with the
requirements of IEC 60099-4.
Ratings of 420 kV Surge Arrests:
 Type: outdoor, ZnO
 Nominal for system voltage: 500 kV
 Maximum system voltage: 550 kV
 Neutral earthing: Directly earthed
 Max continuous operating voltage: 360 kV
 Rated voltage: 420 kV
 Nominal discharge current (8/20μs): 20 kA
 Rated insulation level:
 Rated frequency withstand voltage : 710 kV (r.m.s)
 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage: 1800 kV (peak)
 Creepage distance : 31 mm/kV
General Arrangement
For transformer protection, each set of three surge arresters is to be mounted as
close as possible to the transformer line terminals while at the same time
allowing unimpeded access for the installation and possible subsequent removal
of the transformer.
The arresters shall be complete with supporting structures and a surge counter
for each phase.
The connection from the surge arrester via the surge counter to the substation
earth grid shall be without joints. The earth connection shall be insulated or
screened to protect personnel against transient voltages under surge conditions
500kV Insulator Unit
Suspension Insulator and Tension Insulator

Porcelain insulators shall comply with the requirements of the latest IEC 60185,
IEC 60305.
The suspension insulator and tension insulator required herein shall conform to
the requirement of IEC 60305 “Characteristics of string insulator units of the
cap and pin type” and shall have the following characteristics.
 Colour of glaze: Green or Chocolate brown
 Materials: Toughened glass or porcelain or sillicon rubber
 Minimum creepage distance: 31 mm/kV
Post insulators
The support insulators required herein shall conform to the requirements of IEC
60273 “Solid Core Station Post Insulator” and/or IEC 60168 and shall have the
following characteristics.
 Nominal system voltage: 500 kV
 Colour of glaze: Chocolate brown
 Materials: Porcelain insulator
 Minimum creepage distance: 31 mm/kV
 Minimum flushover voltage:
 Power - frequency wet: 460 kV r.m.s
 Switching Impulse, wet: 1050 kVp
 Lightning Impulse (1.2x50μs): 1800 kV(peak)
7.4 POWER TRANSFORMERS
General Technical Requirements for Transformers
General Requirement of Dry Transformer
(1) Standards
Dry type transformers shall comply with IEC 60726, IEC 60076-11 as well as
the requirements of this specification as appropriate. Its windings with core are
kept within a sealed tank that is pressurized with air.
(2) Windings
(a) Short Circuit Capability
Transformers shall withstand for three seconds without significant mechanical
distortion or electrical failure the maximum fault conditions at any terminal or
any tapping.
(b) Winding Design and Construction
Asbestos shall not be used, in any form in transformers.
The windings shall be of the best modern design.
The windings shall be supported and clamped to withstand the stresses imposed
during normal service, short circuits and transport.
The insulation of the windings and tapping leads shall be suitably reinforced to
withstand voltage surges. Tappings and coils shall be arranged to preserve the
magnetic symmetry of the windings.
(3) Core Construction

The core shall be constructed to withstand without significant deterioration the
stresses imposed by service conditions, transport and ordinary handling during
installation, inspection and repair.
(4) Flux Density

The flux density and general design of the transformer shall be such that at 5%
and 10% over-voltage the RMS no-load current shall not exceed 2.3 times and
5.5 time respectively the value at rated voltage.
Attention shall be paid to the suppression of harmonic voltages, (particularly the
fifth and seventh harmonics) to minimise wave form distortion and to minimise
the possibility of high frequency disturbances, induction effects, or of circulating
currents between the neutral points of different transformers reaching a
magnitude such as to cause interference with communication circuits.
The flux density and ampere turns (B/H) curve is to be supplied for the core
steel to be used. The curve shall cover the range for the voltages specified.
(5) Off Circuit Tap changers/No-load Tap Changers (NLTC)

Off circuit (no load) tap changers shall have an external tap changer adjustment
handle which shall be capable of being padlocked in each separate position.
(6) Seismic Disturbances

All transformers and ancillary equipment shall not be damaged by, and ancillary
devices not be caused to operate by, an earthquake of such magnitude that it
causes an acceleration of 0.1 g.
(7) Current Transformers

The Bidder/Contractor shall provide current transformers as follows :
- Neutral side CT : in transformer enclosure.
- Line side CT : in switchboard side.
(8) Rating and Nameplates Plates

The rating plates shall be of the machine - engraved, black enamel filled,
stainless steel type. Alternatively, chemical engraved plates are acceptable,
providing the depth on engraving is at least 0.25mm.
(9) Foundations
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide all foundations.
(10) Transformers with Converter Loads

(a) Transformers which supply converter loads shall be designed for a system
highest voltage selected from Table 1 of IEC 60726 as follows:
 Calculated the required open-circuit power frequency nominal voltage.
 Add 10% to this value.
 Choose the system highest voltage
(b) The thermal rating of the transformer shall be determined as follows:
 Determine the rms rating of the actual maximum load including all harmonic
currents.
 Nominate a power frequency (50 Hz sine wave) rating calculated according
to the latest version of ANSI/IEEE Standard C57.110.
In the case of precipitator transformers special account shall be taken of the
occurrence of continuous sparking over in the load, in the winding design and
insulation selection. This may necessitate special shielding between the HV and
LV windings. The design principles adopted shall be subject to agreement with
the Owner
General Requirement of Oil Filled Transformer
(1) Standards
Mineral oil filled transformers shall comply with IEC 60076 as well as the
requirements of this specification as appropriate.
(2) Windings
(a) Short Circuit Capability
Transformers shall withstand for three seconds without significant mechanical
distortion or electrical failure the maximum fault conditions at any terminal or
any tapping.
(b) Winding Design and Construction
Asbestos shall not be used, in any form in transformers.
The windings shall be of the best modern design.
The windings shall be supported and clamped to withstand the stresses imposed
during normal service, short circuits and transport.
The insulation of the windings and tapping leads shall be suitably reinforced to
withstand voltage surges. Tappings and coils shall be arranged to preserve the
The conductors shall be free from scale, burrs and splinters and shall have
suitable rounded corners to reduce electrostatic stress concentration. A sample
of the conductor from each reel used for each H.V. winding shall be obtained
for testing. The testing shall be dimensional checks and metallurgical
examination for oxide inclusions and each sample shall satisfy the tolerance set
by the Bidder/Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to be provided with
samples for testing.
All joints between conductors shall be welded or brazed.
The insulation shall be applied to the conductors in a manner that will minimise
the occlusion of air.
No spaces, blocks, strips, washers or barriers shall be affixed to the insulation
on the conductors or turns by any adhesive material, composition or compound.
A detailed description of the concentration of the windings shall be included in
the Bid. Details on the following items are required.
 The method of reinforcing the insulation to withstand voltage surges;
 The manner in which the arrangement of tappings and coils preserves the
 The method adopted for the even distribution of impulse voltage stresses.
This description shall indicate the location and function of any device
employed and its effect on the fault detection methods used in the impulse
withstand tests.
 The techniques used to eliminate corona discharge within the transformer
under normal and test voltages.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide design calculations of forces and stresses
on windings under short circuit conditions.
These shall comprise the following on all windings:
 Forces and stresses.
 Description of the sizing process and winding clamping pressures.
 Basic core dimensions, winding sizes and location and all conductor details.
 Details of winding insulation support structure.
The oil flow through the transformer oil cooled shall be such as not to cause
damage due to streaming electrification. The Bidder/Contractor shall provide
details of design changes limiting the oil speed within the requirements of
transformer under all operation conditions.
(3) Core Construction

The core shall be constructed to withstand without significant deterioration the
stresses imposed by service conditions, transport and ordinary handling during
installation, inspection and repair.
The Bidder/Contractor shall test the value of the interlamination insulation
resistance.
The core insulation shall not be affected significantly by heating, attack by
insulating oil, or ageing. Insulated packets of the core shall be connected to
minimise potential differences between them.
Structural steel supports shall be adequately insulated by materials which will
not be affected by the conditions under which they operate. The
Bidder/Contractor shall state in the Schedules the material he proposes to use.
All structural steel used in the assembly of the cores shall be cleaned of rust and
scale by abrasive blasting before final assembly.
All nuts shall be securely locked in position by approved means.
The cores shall be equipped with lifting arrangements of approved design.
The Bidder/Contractor shall state what precautions will be made to minimise
local heating of the outer packets of core due to the influence of leakage flux
and shall state whether any measurements of local core heating have been made
on a transformer of similar rating.
Neither core bolts nor steel bands shall be used for securing either the core or
the yokes. The Bidder/Contractor shall state the method used in place of core
bolts and steel bands.
Core and frame earthing connections shall be accessible for testing by links
mounted in a terminal box mounted on the top of the tank.
(4) Flux Density
The flux density and general design of the transformer shall be such that at 5%
and 10% over-voltage the RMS no-load current shall not exceed 2.3 times and
5.5 time respectively the value at rated voltage.
Attention shall be paid to the suppression of harmonic voltages, (particularly
the fifth and seventh harmonics) to minimise wave form distortion and to
minimise the possibility of high frequency disturbances, induction effects, or of
circulating currents between the neutral points of different transformers
reaching a magnitude such as to cause interference with communication circuits.
The Bidder/Contractor shall state in the technical schedules the magnitude of
third, fifth, seventh and ninth harmonics that will be present in the exciting
current at rated voltage, 5%, 10% and 35% over-voltage.
Under conditions of load rejection the generator transformer may be subjected
for one minute to a voltage of 135% rated voltage at the low voltage terminals.
The flux density and ampere turn (B/H) curve is to be supplied for the core steel
to be used. The curve shall cover the range for the voltages specified.
(5) Tanks, Conservators, Fittings for Oil Filled Transformers

(a) Tank
The tank shall be of electrically-welded construction suitably stiffened and
braced to prevent distortion or damage under testing and service conditions or
during lifting and handling and of sufficient strength to withstand transport
shock. The tank shall be manufactured from steel. For oil filled transformers the
tanks and conservator can withstand a vacuum of 0.05 torr.
The tank shall be oil-tight to withstand, without leakage, the tests specified in
this specification.
Burrs and sharp edges on plates and tank edges shall be removed.
Means shall be provided for locating the transformer core correctly within the
tank.
Any pockets in the tank which may collect gas shall be connected to the gas
accumulation relay.
(b) Transformer Lid
The lid shall be made from steel and preferably be fabricated with welded joints.
No significant distortion shall occur while the lid is being lifted. It shall be so
designed and constructed as to ensure the elimination of all air pockets during
the oil filling process. The connections between the lid and the conservator shall
be placed to ensure positive and correct operation of the gas accumulation and
oil surge relay upon the formation of gas and/or a sudden movement of oil. The
inside of the tank lid shall present minimum obstruction to the passage of gas
bubbles to the Buchholz relay.
There shall be more than one access hole in the transformer lid to facilitate the
removal and installation of bushings and current transformers and to provide
access to the marshalling box without disturbing the leads. All access hole
covers shall be provided with lifting handles.
All covers and oil pipes shall be secured to the tank by bolts or studs and jointed
with gaskets. Screwed joints shall not be used where oil tightness is required.
The transformer lid may be bolted to the tank with gaskets or welded. If welded
the Bidder/Contractor shall submit details of proposed welding methods.
The transformer lid shall be permanently indented to indicate the transformer
centre lines.
(c) Gaskets
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit details of the proposed materials, surface
treatment and method of location and compression control for the gaskets in all
the oil joints including those between the tank and the lid. The design principle
shall be based on long-term prevention of oil loss with a minimum of 10 years
as the base.
All gaskets shall be impervious to, be unaffected by, and have no harmful effect
on hot transformer oil.
All gasket material shall be non-flammable and not subject to melting at
temperatures likely to be experienced during an oil fire.
(d) Conservator
A fabricated steel oil conservator with welded joints shall be supplied with each
transformer and shall be fitted with the following:
A temperature calibrated oil level gauge, including a low level alarm contact,
shall be arranged to be easily read from ground level.
A “diaphragm” or “bag” to prevent the oil encountering air. This “diaphragm”
is to be inside the conservator and flexible to permit the expansion and
contraction of the oil volume. The diaphragm material shall be suitable for use
in contact with oil, air and ozone. The diaphragm shall be constructed so that it
can withstand, without damage, the stresses it will experience should the oil be
accidentally drained away. The Bidder/Contractor shall provide a means of
detecting and releasing any gas which may collect under the diaphragm.
Separate compartment(s) shall be provided in the conservator to serve the
requirements of the tap changer selector and diverter switches, fitted with
suitably sized silica gel breathers or Drycol device.
The oil conservator shall be supported in a suitable position upon the
transformer tank.
Provision shall be made for topping up the conservator from a position
approximately one metre above ground level.
The oil conservator shall be connected to the transformer by a suitable pipe
attached by a flanged joint to the highest point of the lid of the transformer tank.
In the conservator the pipe shall finish 50 mm above its bottom. Both internal
and external surfaces of the conservator shall be treated to resist corrosion.
One end of the conservator shall be fitted with a flange to which shall be bolted
a plate which can be removed for the purposes of internal inspection and
cleaning. The conservator shall slope downwards towards this end where a
drainpipe shall be fitted. A drain valve shall be fitted to the drainpipe at a height
of one metre above ground level. This pipe shall be additional to the pipe
specified for topping up purposes.
The oil conservator shall be so arranged in relation to the gas and oil surge
protective relay that the oil level in the conservator shall be not less than 75 mm
above the highest point of the relay when the transformer oil is at the minimum
ambient dry bulk air temperature stated in the specification documents.
The maximum oil temperature shall be taken as the permissible temperature rise
of oil as laid down in the Specification above the maximum ambient dry bulb
temperature stated in the specification documents.
The connection pipework between main tank and conservator shall incorporate
suitable isolation valves to allow isolation of the Buchholz relay from the
conservator and main tank and tap changer as applicable.
This is a cylindrical tank mounted on supporting structure on the roof the
transformer main tank. The main function of conservator tank of transformer is
to provide adequate space for expansion of oil inside the transformer.
When transformer is loaded and when ambient temperature rises, the volume of
oil inside transformer increases. A conservator tank of transformer provides
adequate space to this expanded transformer oil. It also acts as a reservoir for
transformer insulating oil.
This is a cylindrical shaped oil container closed from both ends. One large
inspection cover is provided on either side of the container to facilitate
maintenance and cleaning inside of the conservator.
Conservator pipe, i.e. pipe comes from main transformer tank, is projected
inside the conservator from bottom portion. Head of the conservator pipe inside
the conservator is provided with a cap. This pipe is projected as well as provided
with a cap because this design prevents oil sludge and sediment to enter main
tank from conservator. Generally silica gel breather fixing pipe enters the
conservator from top. If it enters from bottom, it should be projected well above
the level of oil inside the conservator. This arrangement ensure that oil does not
enter the silica gel breather even at highest operating level.
When volume of transformer insulating oil increases due to load and ambient
temperature, the vacant space above the oil level inside the conservator is
partially occupied by the expanded oil. Consequently, corresponding quantity
of air of that space is pushed away through breather. On other hand, when load
of transformer decreases, the transformer is switched off and when the ambient
temperature decreases, the oil inside the transformer contracts. This causes
outside air to enter in the conservator tank of transformer through silica gel
breather
(e) Silica gel Breather of Transformer
Whenever electrical power transformer is loaded, the temperature of the
transformer insulating oil increases, consequently the volume of the oil is
increased. As the volume of the oil is increased, the air above the oil level in
conservator will come out. Again at low oil temperature; the volume of the oil
is decreased, which causes the volume of the oil to be decreased which again
causes air to enter into conservator tank.
The natural air always consists of more or less moisture in it and this moisture
can be mixed up with oil if it is allowed to enter into the transformer. The air
moisture should be resisted during entering of the air into the transformer,
because moisture is very harmful for transformer insulation. A silica gel
breather is the most commonly used way of filtering air from moisture.
Silica gel breather for transformer relates to conservator tank by means of
breathing pipe
The silica gel breather of transformer is very simple in the aspect of design. It
is nothing but a pot of silica gel through which, air passes during breathing of
transformer. The silica gel is a very good absorber of moisture. Freshly
regenerated gel is very efficient, it may dry down air to a dew point of below -
40oC. A well maintained silica gel breather will generally operate with a dew
point of -35oC if a large enough quantity of gel has been used. The picture
shows a silica gel breather of transformer.
Silica gel crystal has tremendous capacity of absorbing moisture. When air
passes through these crystals in the breather; the moisture of the air is absorbed
by them. Therefore, the air reaches to the conservator is quite dry, the dust
particles in the air get trapped by the oil in the oil seal cup. The oil in the oil
sealing cup acts as barrier between silica gel crystal and air when there is no
flow of air through silica gel breather. The color of silica gel crystal is dark blue
but, when it absorbs moisture; it becomes pink and they shall be replace. When
there is sufficient difference between the air inside the conservator and the
outside air, the oil level in two components of the oil seal changes until the lower
oil level just reaches the rim of the inverted cup, the air then moves from high
pressure compartment to the low pressure compartment of the oil seal. Both
happen when the oil acts as core filter and removes the dust from the outside air.
(f) Pressure Relief Vent
A vent shall be provided for relieving the tank of excessive pressure in the event
of a fault. The vent shall be as described below or a device like a “Qualitrol”
Pressure relief device. If such device is provided the discharge side shall be
covered so that oil cannot be sprayed beyond the bund area. The
Bidder/Contractor shall indicate release and reset pressures of the pressure relief
device.
The free end of the vent shall be closed from atmosphere by a diaphragm and
the air space between the oil and the diaphragm shall be connected to the
conservator. The bursting pressure of the diaphragm shall be stated on a label
adjacent to the diaphragm.
The lowest point of the diagram shall be above the highest level of oil in the
conservator. The vent shall direct the oil vertically downwards to discharge
within the below the bund wall enclosure provided should the diaphragm burst.
The inlet of the vent pipe shall be in a position where it does not collect gas.
(g) Valves
Valves required for installation, condition monitoring and maintenance shall be
provided.
Oil line connections to the coolers shall be made using valves for isolation of
the coolers.
A sampling valve shall be provided at the bottom of each oil cooler.
All valves used for the fitting of external hoses or for draining purposes shall be
fitted with blank flange plates with gaskets.
All flanges shall be drilled to ISO 7005.
All oil valves having a bore of 25 mm and above shall be of the gate outside
screw type.
(h) Thermometer Pockets
At least two thermometer pockets shall be provided in each transformer lid for
testing purposes. One pocket shall be placed near the edge and one close to the
middle of the lid.
(i) Oil Sampling Points
Oil sampling points shall be provided to sample oil from important locations for
condition monitoring purposes. Each sampling point and valve shall be brought
to a point not greater than one metre above ground level. The oil sampling points
shall be labeled to indicate the source from which the oil is taken. Screwed caps
with captive chains shall be provided on sampling valves
(6) Pressure Gauge

A compound pressure gauge shall be connected to the top of the tank to indicate
the pressure present whilst vacuum filling of the transformer is underway, or if
nitrogen sealing when the oil level has been lowered. The gauge shall be suitable
for a range of 0 to 125 kPa absolute.
The gauge shall be mounted in position between 1.7 and 2 metres above ground
level and the connecting pipe shall be fitted with a cock at its lower end for the
connection of the gauge.
If at any stage following delivery to Site and up to completion of erection ready
for takeover the transformer is to be left stored under nitrogen pressure, the
Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring and maintaining such
pressure.
(7) Buchholz Relays

Each oil filled transformer shall be equipped with an aseismic Buchholz relay.
The device shall be fitted with two independent sets of contacts, one operated
by the accumulation of gas and the other by oil surge.
The oil surge contacts shall be operated only when an oil surge impulse due to
a major fault, is transmitted from the transformer tank to the conservator tank
by a flow of oil through the relay. Low oil level or accumulation of gas within
the relay shall not operate these contacts.
The Buchholz relay shall be fitted with mechanisms using power reed switches
suitable for operation at 220 VDC. And capable of making and breaking a
current of 2 A inductive and of megger testing at 1kV d.c. across open contacts.
The relay shall not be adversely affected or operate spuriously by a reverse flow
of oil, e.g. during oil filling or filtering operations.
Buchholz relay function is based on very simple mechanical phenomenon. It is
mechanically actuated. Whenever there will be a minor internal fault in the
transformer such as an insulation faults between turns, breakdown of core of
transformer, core heating, the transformer insulating oil will be decomposed in
different hydrocarbon gases, CO2 and CO. The gases produced due to
decomposition of transformer insulating oil will accumulate in the upper part
the Buchholz container which causes fall of oil level in it.
Fall of oil level means lowering the position of float and thereby tilting the
mercury switch. The contacts of this mercury switch are closed and an alarm
circuit energized. Sometime due to oil leakage on the main tank air bubbles may
be accumulated in the upper part the Buchholz container which may also cause
fall of oil level in it and alarm circuit will be energized. By collecting the
accumulated gases from the gas release pockets on the top of the relay and by
analyzing them one can predict the type of fault in the transformer.
More severe types of faults, such as short circuit between phases or to earth and
faults in the tap changing equipment, are accompanied by a surge of oil which
strikes the baffle plate and causes the mercury switch of the lower element to
close. This switch energized the trip circuit of the circuit breakers associated
with the transformer and immediately isolate the faulty transformer from the
rest of the electrical power system by inter tripping the circuit breakers
associated with both LV and HV sides of the transformer
The gas accumulation contact shall operate with both low oil level and with
accumulation of air or gas within the relay.
The following items shall be supplied as part of the equipment:
 A suitably graduated clear glass for observation of the quantity of the gases
accumulated.
 Gas testing valves, including a gas sampling device located approximately
1.5 metres above level. The latter device shall permit a clear view of the
accumulated gas and shall allow testing of the gas sample from ground level.
 An oil drainage valve.
 Facilities for testing and operating the contacts during commissioning and
later during plant overhauls.
The device for testing the contacts shall be supplied with a cover for protection
against unauthorised operation and provision shall be made for the attachment
of a seal.
The equipment shall be suitable for outdoor use. Covers, inspection plates,
testing valves, rods, etc., shall be designed to prevent water or moisture from
entering the relay. Attention shall be given to the cover of the relay.
Variation in oil pumping rate or pumping starting stopping shall not cause the
Buchholz relay to operate.
Drain and gas sampling valves shall be fitted with screwed caps to prevent
leakage. The caps shall be attached with brass or other approved corrosion-proof
chain to approved lugs on the transformer tank.
In addition to the screwed caps specified above, the gas sampling device shall
be supplied with a machined gunmetal nozzle which shall be attached to the
body of the device by means of a brass chain. The nozzle shall have a bore of 3
mm, and over a length of 50 mm shall be tapered from 10mm diameter at the
threaded end to 6mm diameter. The nozzle shall have a tapered thread of such
size that it may be substituted for the screwed cap when required for use.
The nozzle will be used to connect the hose of a Buchholz relay test set.
All parts shall be located for easy maintenance, operation and testing.
All the equipment shall operate satisfactorily, without the necessity for any re-
adjustment, within ambient air temperature limits of 0o and 40o and a maximum
transformer oil temperature of 90oC.
The Buchholz relay shall be inserted in a section of pipe between the conservator
and the transformer tank, which pipework shall be sufficiently braced to prevent
the mal-operation of the relay due to mechanical amplification of ground
vibrations during seismic activity. The Buchholz relay shall be positioned so
that the reservoir’s graduated window is as close to the perimeter of the
transformer’s lid on the L.V. side and at the tap changer end as practical. The oil
level in the reservoir is required to be observed from ground level and for any
maintenance to the relay. The position shall give the maximum section clearance
between the H.V. line conductors and the relay but will not prevent the relay
from operating satisfactorily. Non-ferrous or stainless steel nuts and bolts shall
be used to secure the relay to the piping.
An isolating valve shall be fitted in the pipework both sides of the Buchholz
relay to facilitate removal and testing of the relay.
The gas accumulation switch shall be self-resetting upon the release of gas or
air from the relay chamber.
Electrical connections to terminal studs within the relay shall be designed in
such a manner as to prevent terminal looseness and bad contacts developing as
a result of possible distortion or shrinkage of the insulating material used to
support the terminal studs.
The connections between the terminals and the switches shall be carried out in
flexible wires suitable insulated with material which will not be adversely
affected by the insulating oil used in the transformers or by the gases liberated
from this oil due to internal transformer faults.
Electrically separated pairs of terminals shall be provided for each switch circuit
and all such terminals shall be enclosed in a weatherproof housing with facilities
for conduit termination. The terminals for the gas and surge switches shall be
so spaced that the use of a tube spanner on one terminal shall not cause bridging
to an adjacent terminal
(8) Winding Temperature Indicators, Heaters and Fibre Optics.
(a) Each transformer shall be fitted with winding temperature indicators of the type
which operates in conjunction with an associated heater and current transformer.
A removable earth connection shall be provided at one terminal of each current
transformer.
The winding temperature indicator heater systems shall be provided with means
to adjust the heat output of the heater without lowering the oil level in the
transformer. The heater shall be so adjusted that the temperature indicated shall
be the hot spot temperature of the winding.
Each winding temperature indicator assembly shall also be fitted with facilities
for showing the maximum temperature attained and the indicator shall be
arranged for resetting by hand.
Winding temperature indicators shall be fitted with switches with normally open
contacts. The switches shall be adjustable for closing temperatures. Two
contacts shall be cabled back to the ICMS (integrated control and monitoring
system).
(b) Resistance Temperature Detectors (R.T.D.’s)
Each transformer shall be fitted with not less than two platinum resistance
thermometers for remote indication to top oil temperature and for the remote
indication of “hot-spot” winding temperature.
All resistance temperature detectors shall be supplied with integral junction
boxes (heads).
The detector wiring shall be non-magnetic screened.
All resistance temperature detectors shall be of the three-wire type to permit the
power supply voltage to be brought out to the resistance temperature detector
head, thus minimising errors due to lead resistance variations with ambient
temperature changes. Cabling to resistance temperature detectors in pockets
shall be arranged to permit withdrawal of the resistance elements without
disconnecting the leads at the resistance element heads.
All resistance temperature detectors shall meet ± 0.25% accuracy from 0oC to
150oC.
The outputs shall be cabled to the ICMS for trend analysis.
(c) Fibre Optics
Sensors connected by optical fibres shall measure the top oil temperatures and
the hot-spot winding temperatures. Three different measuring points of the top
oil temperature shall be selected and three different measuring points in each
winding shall be monitored, total of 12 points. The Bidder/Contractor shall
indicate on transformer drawing(s) the proposed position where each sensing
point is to be located.
All equipment necessary to convert the reading to a display of the temperature
shall be supplied. The temperature reading display shall be positioned so that it
is near the winding temperature indicators. The provision of selecting the
temperature being measured shall be adjacent to the temperature display.
Provision shall be made to monitor 6 points in the ICMS control system.
(d) Indicating Thermometer
An indicating thermometer of an approved capillary tube type fitted with an
adjustable pointer and alarm contacts suitable for 220V DC. shall be provided
in a thermometer pocket on each transformer to indicate top oil temperature.
The sensing element shall be mounted so that it can be removed from the tank
without lowering the oil level.
Indicating devices on the transformer shall be mounted in such positions that
they are visible to an observer approaching the transformer along the
transformer yard runway or from the front of the auxiliary control cubicle
whichever is applicable. Temperature indicators may be mounted in a
weatherproof cabinet supported by resilient mountings on the transformer tank.
Two contacts of this device shall be cabled back to the ICMS (Refer to B-6).
The measurement systems referred to in paragraphs ii and iii above shall be
connected through 4-20 mA transducers for the purpose for ICMS monitoring.
(e) Temperature Indicator of Transformer
These are generally precision instruments. A temperature indicator of power
transformer is specially designed for protection of transformer in addition to its
temperature indication and cooling control features. That means, this device
performs three functions.
 These instruments indicate instantaneous temperature of oil and windings of
transformer.
 These also record maximum temperature rise of oil and windings.
 These instruments operate high temperature alarm at a predetermined value
of allowable temperature limit.
 Temperature indicators of transformer can also trip the circuit breakers
associated with the power transformer when the temperature of oil or winding
reaches a predetermined limit.
 These devices also control the cooling system of transformer. Switch on the
cooling equipment when the winding attains a preset high temperature and
switch it off when the temperature drops by an established differential.
(f) Types of Temperature Indicator of Transformer
There are mainly two types of temperature indicators used in transformer.
Principally both instruments are the same but, one is used for oil temperature
and the other is used for winding temperature. There is another type of
temperature indicator often used in power transformer, which is little bit
different principally and this is remote temperature indicator. The
types of temperature indicator of transformer are:
 Oil temperature indicator (OTI)
 Winding temperature indicator (WTI)
 Remote temperature indicator (RTI)
(9) Bushings and Terminal Arrangements
Bushings shall comply with IEC 60137.
Transformer bushings of GSUT HV side shall be oil filled and shall have an oil
level gauge and be provided with means for sampling and draining the oil.
Transformer bushings of GSUT LV side and both sides of UAT shall be
porcelain type.
The earth shield of condenser type bushings shall be brought to an external
insulated terminal for dielectric loss angle test purposes. A link shall be
provided by means of which this terminal will be connected to earth during
normal operation.
Bushings shall be permanently sealed to prevent breathing to the atmosphere.
The pollution level of outdoor bushings shall be ‘heavy’ to IEC 60815.
Porcelain insulators shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified
so that the glazing is not relied upon for insulating purposes. The glazing shall
be smooth and hard. Porcelain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner
preferably by means of metal clamping plates with suitable packing material
interposed. Porcelain surfaces intended for mating shall be ground accurately
and free from glazing.
The bushings shall be capable of withstanding the same tests as the transformer.
The bushings shall not cause the production of anomalous oscillograms under
impulse tests.
Up to the time of tests on completion and as may be directed thereafter all
bushings exposed at Site shall be protected against contamination or mechanical
damage using robust coverings which shall envelope each bushing. Coverings
shall be renewed from time to time as may be required to ensure protection of
the bushings.
A bushing like those offered shall have been successfully type tested by a
recognised testing station. Certified copies of the test results shall be supplied.
Those which are available at the time of Request for Proposal shall be included
with the Bid.
A detailed description of the bushings, shall be included with the Bid.
The 500kV bushings shall be provided with adjustable arcing gaps. Dimensions
shall be subject to the approval of Owner.
The phase identity of the bushings shall be clearly identified in a satisfactory
manner using appropriately coloured enamel-filled, machined-engraved
stainless steel labels.
(10) Tap changers

(a) On Load Tap Changers (OLTC)
The tap changers shall be rated so that the load or short-time overload, which
can be placed on the transformer, is not limited by the tap changer.
The tap changer shall be capable of changing taps continuously on full load
without any delay other than the minimum inherent delay in the mechanism
between the completion of one tap change and the commencement of the next.
The diverter switch, and the selector switches shall be readily accessible for
inspection and maintenance.
It shall be possible to drain the diverter switch compartment and any separate
selector switch compartment without lowering the oil in the main tank below
the windings.
Where a tap changer is connected at the neutral end and is arranged for “buck-
boost” operation, the Bidder/Contractor shall state the means used to prevent
transient voltages appearing between the neutral terminal and the station earth
grid during tap changes when the reversing switch is changing from one mode
to the other.
(1) Essential Control Requirements
The tap changer shall be selectable for control from either
 CCR or Remote Tap Control Cubicle
 Local to the transformer.
Normal control will be exercised from the CCR by ICMS. CCR indication shall
be fed through 4-20 mA transducers.
A four-position selector switch located on the auxiliary control cubicle shall be
provided for the control of the tap changer as described below:
OFF - 12 o’clock
Tap changer control circuits disconnected. Tap changing by use of handle at tap
changer is possible.
LOCAL - 3 o’clock
Tap changer operable under pushbutton initiation from the auxiliary control
cubicle.
CCR - 6 o’clock
Tap changer operable under pushbutton initiation in the CCR. Separate “Raise
Tap change in Progress” and “Lower Tap change in Progress” lights and tap
position indicator shall be mounted in the CCR.
PORTABLE PUSHBUTTON STATION - 9 o’clock
Tap changer operable by means of pushbuttons connected to a flexible lead.
The tap changer control shall be arranged for step by step operation.
All tap changer control equipment shall be suitable for operation on a two-wire,
220V DC. supply.
All tap changer motors shall be suitable for operation on a 400V, three-phase,
50 cycle supply.
The Bidder/Contractor shall describe fully the effect on the tap changer offered
should the 400V a.c. and/or 220V DC. supplies be interrupted after the initiation
of a tap change.
(2) Control Equipment
All equipment necessary for the correct operation of the tap changer shall be
provided and shall include but shall not be limited to the following equipment
which shall be enclosed in the tap changer cubicle:
 Operating mechanism including manual operating gear and handle.
 Operating motor or motors.
 Manually reset “range indicator” to indicate the range over which the tap changer
has operated.
 Tap position indicator which shall be readable from outside the cubicle without
opening the cubicle door.
 An operation counter.
 “Tap change in progress” indicating light. This light shall remain illuminated
until the tap change has been completed.
 Limit switches shall be included in both the power and control circuits to prevent
overtravel of the equipment on the extreme “raise” and “lower” limits.
 A safety cut-off switch to isolate the motor controls before the manual operating
handle can be inserted or alternatively a device to prevent the manual operating
handle engaging when the control selector switch is at any position other than
“off”.
 Out-of-step detection relays.
 Terminals
 Cable glands or gland plates
 Wiring
 Anti-condensation heaters
The following equipment associated with the transformer shall be enclosed in
the auxiliary control cubicle:
 Power supply circuit breaker
 Control supply circuit breaker and relate links
 Motor contactors
 Thermal overload relay
 Pushbuttons for local control
 Control selector switch
 Indicating lights and alarm contacts for functions:
 “Tap change in Progress”
 “Tap change Incomplete”
 “Tap changers Out-of-step”
 Control relays
 Supply supervision relays
 Anti-condensation heater/s
 Portable pushbutton station (one for each cubicle)
(b) Automatic Voltage Control/Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)
Automatic Voltage Control shall be provided on the Generator Step Up
Transformers and the Unit Auxiliary Transformers (machine voltage to 11kV)
to maintain the 11kV voltage at the desired level. The tap changer controls shall
be arranged to provide this feature in auto both in the CCR. and local. Selection
switches shall be provided at both locations to permit manual or AVR control
of the tap changers
(11) Cooling Equipment (Oil pump, Fan, Radiator,..)

All cooling equipment transported in the dismantled condition shall be protected
against deterioration by rust, moisture or ingress of foreign material. On
commencement of erection of plant at Site, all transport flanges which are
removed shall be treated, adequately packed to prevent corrosion during storage,
labeled for identification, and returned to the Owner’s Store.
Manually-operated valves shall be supplied for isolation purposes on each side
of each pump. The valves shall be provided with means for locking them in the
open position by means of padlocks. It shall not be necessary to take the cooling
system out of service to operate the valves.
Control of fans shall be by WTI and protection operation for other than the
Generator Transformers. Fans shall be brought in by groups but each fan shall
have a power isolator which in the “OFF” position shall disconnect the signal
“fan overload”.
Oil flow switches providing stable and correct indication of oil flow at both the
minimum and maximum oil flow rates (dependent upon temperature) shall be
provided. Operation of these switches shall cause pump changeover and if both
pumps fail an “URGENT” oil flow alarm in all cases other than the generator
transformer. For the generator transformer total loss of oil flow for 1 minute
shall cause a unit trip.
The status of “ON” and “OFF” for plant items shall be indicated by lamps or
LED’s in the local control cubicle.
The status of changing state of plant shall be recorded by lamps or flags in the
local control cubicle and by signals to the unit computer (events recorder).
Each control circuit shall be monitored by supply supervision relays which shall
have a manually reset flag and bring up an alarm in the CCR.
Each motor shall be protected by an MCCB/MCB and a thermal overload. The
thermal overloads for the Generator Transformer oil pump motors shall be
operated by a current transformer and shall be of the electronic type protection
type.
Each thermal overload shall provide single phasing protection
(12) Bushing Current Transformers
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide current transformers within the
transformers. Details of current transformers are nominated in this Request for
Proposal Document.
(13) Insulating Oil

Insulating oil shall comply with IEC 60296 and shall be P.C.B. free.
Oil specifications for Generator Step Up Transformers and Unit Auxiliary
Transformers, Bushings shall be submitted to Owner for Information
(Manufacturer, Type, Standard, etc.).
(14) Control Cubicle

The transformer shall be supplied with a free standing control cubicle in which
all control equipment shall be housed.
Where duty/standby oil pumps are specified then two 400V power supplies shall
be provided.
Two 220V DC power supplies for control, protection and alarm purposes shall
be supplied to the cubicle.
Local control cubicles shall be mounted on transformer body.
(15) Rating and Nameplates Plates

The rating plates shall be of the machine - engraved, black enamel filled,
stainless steel type
(16) Fire Protection

The Bidder/Contractor shall provide a fire protection system for oil-filled
transformers
Generator Step Up Transformer (GSUT)
General
The impedance of the generator transformer indicated in this Specification is
only the indicative value for system design purposes. The Bidder/ Contractor
shall determine the appropriate impedance value such that voltage distribution,
regulation and fault withstand capability of its connected equipment.
Rating and specification
Standard: IEC 60076
Phases: 3 phase
Type: Three phase, 2 windings transformer, oil immersed
outdoor
Frequency 50Hz
Rating: 780MVA (or depend on generator’s capacity)

HV: 500 kV
LV: 22kV or Generator voltage (Ugen)
HV terminals: Outdoor bushing - heavy pollution level to IEC
standard 60815 and to IEC 60137
HV neutral Outdoor bushing - heavy pollution level to IEC
terminal: standard 60815 and to IEC 60137
LV terminals: Bushing-connected to IPB medium pollution level to
60815 and to IEC 60137
Tap changer: On-load (OLTC) - IEC 60214
Tapping Range: Shall be calculated and confirmed by the
Bidder/Contractor on HV Side according to the
variation voltage of power system ± 8x 1.25%.
Automatically adjust the OLTC of the HV side
Cooling: ONAN/ONAF/OFAF (ODAF) (100% duty with one
cooler unit out of service)
Vector YNd11
Relationship: Direct neutral earthed at the HV side
Earthed:
Insulation Levels: HV Winding
Lightning Impulse 1800 kV
Power frequency 710 kV
HV neutral 38 kV power frequency
LV Terminals: lightning Impulse 125 kV
Power Frequency 50 kV
Transformer IEC 60185,IEC Accuracy: measuring cores:
61869 0.5; Protection cores: 5P20 or
Class X.
Fault levels: 500kV, Ugen Shall be verified by the
Bidder
Sound Level: as per IEC-60551
Generator Step-Up Transformer On-line Oil Analyzing System

Generator Step-Up Transformer (GSUT) shall have one (1) On-line Oil
Analyzing System. The system shall be designed in accordance with NEMA,
IEC, 0210/QĐ-EVNNPT (dated Dec 26th, 2019) and any other relevant codes
and standards.
Following table is minimum required items to be analyzed by 0210/QĐ-
EVNNPT (dated Dec 26th, 2019).
NO. CHEMICALS UNIT DESCRIPTION

1 H2 ppm Hydrogen
2 CO ppm Carbon Monoxide
3 CO2 ppm Carbon Dioxide
4 CH4 ppm Methane
5 C2H2 ppm Acetylene
6 C2H4 ppm Ethylene
7 C2H6 ppm Ethane
8 H2O ppm Water
The system shall include at least the following equipment and comply with the
following requirements:
 The system shall be able to monitor the Oil & Internal temperature
conditioning and Oil circulation pump.
 The local analyzer shall be mounted in a NEMA 4 enclosure.
 The Oil Analyzing Systems shall have One (01) computer with LCD monitor
(24 inch) and one (01) data logging printer shall be provided to indicate the
abnormal status and the fault alarm.
 All analyzers shall be connected to the computer for local monitoring and
shall also be connecting to the Distributed Control System (DCS)/ Integrated
Control & Monitoring System (ICMS) for the remote monitoring.
Communication interface shall be Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP allowing
networking with other devices via TCP/IP protocol
 The special software required shall be provided together with the system. The
software required for modifying by operator shall also be provided. Help and
training software for using the equipment shall also be provided.
 All data shall be recorded in the local analyzer and shall be available to be
downloaded to the computer, and the data shall be suitable for examination
and historical analysis.
 The proposed design and the proposed equipment shall comply with this
Request for Proposal and shall also be subject to approval by the Owner.
 The analyzers shall be connected to a local computer with LCD monitor (24
inches) for local monitoring and shall also be connected to the ICMS for the
remote monitoring.
 The special software required for Generator Step-Up Transformer (GSUT)
On-line Oil Analyzing System shall be provided together with the system.
Generator Step-Up Transformer On-line Partial Discharge monitoring System

(OPTION)
Each GSUT shall have one (01) On-line partial discharge monitoring system;
these systems shall be offered as an option. The system shall be designed in
accordance with NEMA, IEC and any other relevant codes and standards.
The system shall be used for continuous monitoring of Gamma and bushing tan-
delta parameters to assess the condition of the isolation system of the
transformer. It shall include Gamma and bushing tan trending, alarming set
point and correlation to dynamic variables such as: humidity, temperature or
load.
The system shall also include a Universal Partial Discharge Analyzer for further
measuring & analyzing of partial discharge activities on a periodical basis.
All analyzers shall be connected to a local computer with LCD monitor (24
inches) for local monitoring and shall also be connected to the Distributed
Control System (DCS)/ Integrated Control & Monitoring System (ICMS) for
the remote monitoring.
The special software required for GSUT On-line partial discharge monitoring
system shall be provided together with the system
Unit Auxiliary Transformer (UAT)
General
The 22/11kV Unit Auxiliary Transformers shall be three-phase, mineral oil
immersed transformers.
The rating and impedance of the 22/11kV transformer indicated in this
Specification are only the indicative values for system design purposes. The
Contractor shall determine the appropriate values of transformer rating and
impedance such that voltage distribution, regulation and fault withstand
capability of its connected equipment.
The transformer oil shall be mineral type, without oxidation inhibitor and PCB
and can be mixed perfectly with Shell Diala, Nynax Nitro 10XT.
Contractor shall submit the type, origin of oil for Transformer, CT, VT to Owner
for information
Rating and specification
 Standard IEC60076mineral oil filled
 Type Three phase, 2 windings transformer, oil immersed , outdoor
 Phases 3 phases
 Frequency 50Hz
 Rating 60 MVA (or depend on unit’s capacity which is chosen by
Contractor)
 Vector Relationship Dyn1
 Voltages:
HV 22kV (or generator voltage)
LV 11kV
 Cooling: ONAN/ONAF (100% duty with one cooler unit out of service)
 Impedance: Shall be calculated and confirmed by the Bidder/Contractor
 Tap changer: On-load - IEC 60214
 Tapping Range: ±8x1.25%
 Terminals:
HV - Bushings with IPB heavy pollution class to IEC 60815 and to IEC
60137
LV - NSPB
LV neutral - outdoor bushing - heavy pollution class to IEC60815 and to
IEC 60137.
 Insulation Levels:
HV Lightning Impulse 125 kV
LV Lightning Impulse 75 kV
 Sound Level: IEC 60551 standard
 Earthed: neutral point of the LV side (11kV) connects to earth
through resistor
 Fault levels: Shall be verified by the Bidder
Auxiliary Transformer (Dry type power transformer)
The 11kV/400V Low Voltage Auxiliary Transformer (For LV Unit and

Common Load) shall be three-phase, dry type transformers.
The rating and impedance of the 11kV/400V transformers indicated in this
Specification are only the indicative values for system design purposes. The
Contractor shall determine the appropriate values of transformer rating and
impedance such that voltage distribution, regulation and fault withstand
capability of its connected equipment.
Standard: IEC 60726, IEC 60076-11
 Rating: Sizing shall be finalized in engineering phase
(Minimum 15% spare capacity on all transformers rating).
 Vector Relationship: Dyn11
 Type: Cast Resin
 Frequency 50Hz
 Voltages:
HV 11 kV
LV 420 V
 Impedance: Specified by Bidder for each transformer
and switchboard/switchgear
 Tap changer: Off-load
 Tapping Range: 11kV ± 2x2.5%
 Terminals:
HV: Cable box
LV: Bolted directly onto switchboard busbar
 Cooling: AN (Enclosed type)
 Insulation Levels:
HV Lightning impulse 75 kV
LV Power Frequency 3 kV
 Sound Level: IEC 60551 Standard
7.5 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER (GCB)
General
The Generator Circuit Breaker (GCB) shall be provided for each unit and shall
comply with all related standards including, but not limited, to the following
standards:
(1) IEEE Standard C37.013 Standard for AC High Voltage Generator Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current
(2) IEC 60056 & IEC 62271-100 High Voltage Alternating Current Breaker
(3) IEC 60298, IEC62271-200 AC Metal Enclosed Switchgear and Control
gear for Rated Voltage Above l kV up to and including 25kV.
(4) IEC 60694, Common Clauses for High-Voltage Switchgear and Control
gear Standards.
(5) IEC 60529, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
(7) IEC 60233 Checking the insulation distance used for electric device.
(8) Any other relevant standards
The Contractor shall be responsible to design, manufacture, inspect, supply,
delivery, unload at Site, install, test, commission and guarantee the GCB and
auxiliaries for each Unit to ensure the safe, efficient and reliable operation of
the Plant
The circuit-breakers shall be of the three phases, Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6)
gas insulation type. The circuit-breakers shall be of the non-withdrawable type,
totally enclosed inside phase isolated, metal enclosures. The metal enclosures
shall include removable covers for maintenance purposes.
The GCB's shall be complete in every respect and shall include a series circuit
breaker, disconnector switch, generator side earthing switch, transformer side
earthing switch, surge arrester, CT's, VT's and Local Control Kiosk complete
with mimic diagram and all necessary control, monitoring, indication and alarm
annunciation facilities.
The design shall ensure that the rated current of the GCB's and their associated
equipment exceeds the gross output of their respective turbine generator units
at minimum generator voltage, 0.85 power-factor lagging across the operating
ambient temperature range on Site with a design margin of not be less than ten
(10) percent. Characteristic curves of gross turbine generator output and GCB
rated current versus ambient temperature shall be submitted accordingly and
shall be subject to approval by the Owner.
Static and moving gas seals shall be designed to prevent the leakage of gas or
ingress of moisture throughout the service life of the interrupting module.
Where the design is such that leakage could cause gas pressure to fall below that
at which the specified insulating and interrupting capacities can be maintained,
gas pressure monitoring devices shall be incorporated to provide an alarm and
block operation.
Adequate external clearances and surface creepage distances shall be provided
to ensure satisfactory performance under service conditions
Generator Circuit Breaker parameter requirements
Generator Circuit Breaker

The following parameters are required:
Nominal operating voltage Generator voltage (Ugen)
Maximum operating voltage Ugen plus 10%

Type Three phase, sulphur
hexafluoride (SF6) gas
insulation,non-withdrawable
type, metal enclosures, indoor
Frequency 50 Hz
Number of poles 3
Rated continuous current At least Generator rating
Symmetrical breaking current (three-phase) >250 kA (at Ugen-22kV) or
finalized by calculation.
Asymmetrical breaking current (three Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
phase)
Out of phase switching capability To be agreed between Owner
and Bidder
Short time current (1 second) Equivalent to breaking current
Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
Operating duty cycle CO – 30 min – CO
Rated short-circuit making current (1 Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
second)
Short-Time Current Rating Period 1 second
Full wave impulse voltage to ground 125 kV peak (increased if
rated voltage greater than
24kV)
Full wave impulse test voltage 145 kV peak (increased if
across contacts rated voltage greater than
24kV)
Power frequency test voltage across 70 kV (increased if rated
contacts voltage greater than 24kV)
Power frequency test voltage to ground 50 kV (increased if rated

voltage greater than 24kV)
Transient recovery voltage To suit system requirements
Trip coils 02
Control voltage 220VDC
Insulation level F
Disconnector and Earthing switch

The following parameters are required:
Nominal operating voltage Generator voltage
Maximum operating voltage Ugen plus 10%
Frequency 50 Hz
Number of poles 3
Rated continuous current At least generator rating
Rated short-time withstand current Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
Rated short-time making current Refer IEEE Std. C37.013
Power frequency test voltage to ground 50 kV rms (increased if rated
Full wave impulse test voltage to ground 125 kV peak (increased if rated
Power frequency test voltage across contacts 50 kV rms (increased if rated
Full wave impulse test voltage across contacts 145 kV peak (increased if rated
* Departure from IEEE Standard C37.013

Circuit Breakers, Disconnector and Earthing Switches - General Description
(1) The breaker shall be comply with IEEE Std C37.013 Standard for AC High
Voltage Generator Circuit Breaker rated on a Symmetrical Current and
IEC60056 High Voltage Alternating Current Circuit Breaker.
(2) The circuit breaker and isolating switch shall be designed for horizontal
mounting in the phase isolated busbar system.
(3) Each single phase circuit breaker complete with isolating switch and grounding
switches shall be furnished with a separate enclosure to maintain the integrity
of the isolated phase bus ducting. The enclosure shall be a rigid self supporting
structure fabricated from aluminum and suitable for indoor installation. All
contact surfaces shall be silver plated.
(4) The circuit breaker shall be capable of clearing the following faults as well as
normal switching duty associated with large steam driven turbine generator
plant.
a) Fault in Turbine, Generator or between Generator and Generator Circuit
Breaker. Breaker shall isolate generator to ensure continuous power supply
from the 500kV switchyard for the auxiliary system via the GSUT.
b) Fault in GSUT or between GSUT and GCB, between GSUT and 500kV
switchyard.
c) Fault in 500kV switchyard ( in case the 500kV circuit breaker is not tripped
successfully)
d) Fault in UAT and Excitation transformer or between UAT, excitation
transformer and GCB.
e) It shall be possible to obtain full isolation including provision of a visible
break by the inclusion of a built in isolating switch associated with the
circuit breaker.
(5) The isolating switch and circuit breaker shall both be provided with their own
separate grounding switches. Each grounding switch shall be rated for full fault
current closure.
(6) Interlocking (of electrical and mechanical operating systems) is to be provided

between the control cabinet and the isolating switch and circuit breaker to ensure
that the grounding switches can only be operated when the isolating switch and
circuit breaker are locked open and the phase isolated busbars are de energised.
(7) The circuit breakers shall be naturally cooled.
(8) Removable panels shall be provided on all equipment to permit access to all
working parts for maintenance.
(9) A mechanical locking device shall be provided to permit padlocking the breaker
in the open position.
(10) Single phase operation or three phase operation of the three pole assembly will be
applied.
(11) An integral sheet metal control cabinet shall be supplied with instruments and
equipment for controlling, monitoring and indicating the switching operations
of the circuit-breaker, and its associated auxiliaries. The following control and
indicating facilities shall be provided as a minimum:
(a) Local - Off - Remote key operated selector switch.
(b) Local electrical opening and closing facilities.
(c) Remote electrical opening and closing facilities via interposing relays.
(d) Mechanical open and closed indication facilities.
(e) D.C. close and trip coils and an additional D.C. trip coil per pole.
(f) Gas pressure meter for each SF6 filled compartment
(g) Operations counter.
(h) Status of circuit breakers, earthing switches, disconnector switch
(i) Mimic diagram.
 Alarm tableau with first up facility.
 Lamp test push-button.
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
(1) The circuit-breaker operating mechanism shall be of the stored energy type, and
shall have a capacity which is sufficient to perform an open-close-open (O-C-
O) duty without replenishment from any external source. No closing operation
shall be possible without sufficient stored energy in the mechanism to open the
circuit-breaker again.
(2) The operating mechanisms shall be designed such that the circuit-breaker is free
to open immediately the tripping circuit is energised and without the use of any
additional external power. Mechanisms shall be “trip-free” as defined in IEEE
Std C37.013 and shall have an anti-pumping feature. It is recognised that it may
be necessary for contacts to close momentarily prior to opening to ensure
satisfactory current interruption
(3) A direct acting mechanical trip via an emergency push button shall be provided
on each circuit-breaker.
(4) An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided to show

whether the circuit-breaker is open or closed.
(5) Means shall be provided for manual operation and slow closing of the circuit-
breaker for maintenance purposes when the equipment is disconnected and
earthed.
(6) Means shall be provided to prevent the local and remote control apparatus from
being in operation simultaneously.
(7) It shall not be possible without the use of tools to gain access to the tripping
toggle or any part of the mechanism which would permit defeat of the
mechanical tripping feature.
(8) It shall not be possible to render the electrical tripping feature inoperative by
any mechanical locking device.
(9) It shall be possible to complete the closing, tripping and interlock circuits when
the circuit-breaker is isolated to permit operation for test purposes
(10) Single phase operation or three phase operation will be applied to the circuit breaker
operation mechanism.
circuit breaker by means of a single (common) operating rod.
(11) The three phase circuit breaker assembly shall be controlled by one of the
following methods:
(a) Hydraulic operating mechanism,
(b) Stored energy spring charged operating mechanism,
(c) A combination of stored energy spring charged/hydraulic operating mechanism.
(12) The following accessories are to be provided:

(a) Mechanical position indicated marked "ON OFF" visible externally to the
operating mechanism.
(b) Manual mechanical trip, three poles.
(c) Operations counter (one per pole).
(d) Device for manual slow closing and opening during maintenance.
(e) The mechanism and its control circuit shall be such that "pumping" on to a fault
cannot occur if the "close" circuit is energised continuously. It shall also be
assumed for this purpose that the trip signal may be present before the circuit
breaker closes. The mechanism and its control circuit shall be such that the
circuit breaker is trip free as defined in IEC 60056.
Trip Coils
(1) There shall be two (2) circuit-breaker trip coils, preferably supplied from two
(2) different DC sources. Furthermore a fault in the D.C. closing circuit shall
not prevent the tripping of the circuit-breaker. Two electrically and magnetically
separate tripping mechanisms, each operated by a separate trip coil shall be
provided for each circuit breaker. If one tripping mechanism fails or fails to
operate correctly it will not prevent the other mechanism from operating
correctly.
(2) Trip coils shall be suitable for nominal 220V DC. Operation and be capable of
operating within the voltage range of 154V(70%) to 242V DC(110%)
(3) Trip circuit supervision with the circuit-breaker in the open and in the closed
position shall be provided together with local and remote alarm annunciation
facilities
Closing Coil
The closing coil shall be suitable for nominal 220V DC. Operation and be
capable of operating within the voltage range of 187V(85%) to 242V
DC(110%).
Disconnector Switch Operating Mechanism
(1) The generator circuit-breakers shall be fitted with an off-load series

disconnector to permit maintenance of the generator circuit when the generator
step-up transformer/unit auxiliary transformer circuit is energised
(2) The operating mechanism shall be independent of the circuit-breaker and
earthing switch operating mechanisms and in addition to the normal local
electrical open/close control facilities the mechanism shall also be provided
with manual operation facilities for emergency and maintenance purposes.
Mechanical open/closed status indications shall also be provided.
(3) The disconnector shall be interlocked such that it cannot be opened or closed
unless the circuit-breaker is open and viewing windows shall be provided in the
equipment enclosures to facilitate direct observation of the disconnector
position and confirmation of the isolating distance
(4) Single phase operation or three phase operation will be applied to the
Disconnector switch operation mechanism.
(5) The disconnectors shall be operated by a 400V LV, 3 phase motor driven
operating mechanism and the three (3) poles shall be mechanically and
electrically interlocked to ensure that all three (3) poles open and close
simultaneously.
(6) The three-phase Disconnector switch assembly shall be controlled by a 220V

DC.
(7) The three-phase Disconnector switch assembly shall be equipped for emergency
manual operation by means of a hand crank

(a) Mechanical position indicated marked "ON-OFF" visible externally to the
(b) Key interlocking in the closed and open positions.
(c) Interlock to prevent motor operation while Disconnector switch is being
manually operated.
Earthing Switch Operating Mechanism
(1) Earthing switches shall be fitted on both sides of the circuit-breaker to permit
maintenance of both the generator circuit and/or the generator step-up
transformer and unit auxiliary transformer circuit.
(2) The earthing switches shall be operated by a 400V LV, 3 phase motor driven
operating mechanism and the three (3) poles shall be mechanically and
electrically interlocked to ensure that all three (3) poles open and close
simultaneously
(3) The operating mechanism shall be independent of the circuit-breaker and

disconnector operating mechanisms and in addition to the normal local electrical
open/close control facilities the mechanism shall also be provided with manual
operation facilities for emergency and maintenance purposes. Mechanical
open/closed status indications shall also be provided.
(4) The earthing switches shall be interlocked such that they cannot be opened or
closed unless the circuit-breaker and its disconnector are open and viewing
windows shall be provided in the equipment enclosures to facilitate direct
observation of the earth switch position. Interlocking shall also be provided to
prevent the operation of the earthing switches unless the relevant remote
switching devices are open (disconnectors) or withdrawn into the test position
(circuit-breakers).
(5) The three-phase earthing switch assembly shall be controlled by a 220V DC.
(6) The three-phase earthing switch assembly shall be equipped for emergency
manual operation by means of a hand crank.

a) Mechanical position indicated marked "ON-OFF" visible externally to the
b) Key interlocking in the closed and open positions.
c) Interlock to prevent motor operation while earthing switch is being
manually operated.
General Design Considerations
(1) It is required that the construction details and the design of the equipment should
be such that it will continue in reliable service with a minimum of maintenance.
Furthermore, this maintenance should not require that personnel be especially
trained and skilled in the details of this equipment because unusual or sensitive
component designs have been incorporated.
(2) In assessing the generator switchgear offered, close attention will be paid to the
way the following principles of design have been observed.
a) All similar mechanical parts are to be strictly interchangeable without
special adjustment or individual fitting.
b) The assembly of parts shall be easy and simple without requiring special
skill in adjustment of alignment. This requirement is to be provided by
dowels, spigots, counter bores, etc.
c) The design should be such as to avoid as much as possible the necessity of
close tolerances and fits to ensure that the presence of foreign bodies, dust
and moisture or the occurrence of high or low temperatures cannot cause
any maloperation.
d) The performance of the design, particularly that of individual components,
shall be checked not only many times at normal operating conditions, but at
conditions above and below normal to establish the limits at which
equipment fails to operate correctly, thus establishing the safety margin to
allow for variations in manufacture and in service conditions and
maintenance.
e) All mechanical parts and linkages shall be robust, requiring a minimum of
maintenance.
f) Operating forces available from electrical and mechanical sources should be
a suitable multiple of and where possible may times the forces required for
functioning under designed conditions to ensure beyond any doubt that all
elements will operate correctly and reliably for an indefinite period under
minimal maintenance attention, most normal service conditions, and
considering the variations in manufactured materials, workmanship and
tolerances.
g) When components of well-tried designs but with lower operating forces are
to be used at higher operating forces and speeds, the operation should be
thoroughly examined to ensure that the operating margins are still intact
h) Where Bidders offer a design which is generally well-proved in service they
must draw attention to any components which may have had to be modified
recently or which may in fact be newly designed, even though they regard
these as minor components. Changes will not be accepted which in any way
invalidate the type test certification of the whole device in any respect.
i) It is required that the circuit breakers, disconnector switches, earthing
switches and operating mechanism should be of the highest reliability.
j) All rubber components of the circuit breakers should be completely suitable
for their duty and should maintain their effectiveness indefinitely in the case
of joints, gaskets and other such non-working parts. In the case of rubber
parts subject to dynamic stresses, e.g. valve faces, they should also maintain
their effectiveness indefinitely.
However, where they can readily be replaced without replacing the
components in which they are mounted then they should be effective for a
period of at least ten years under service conditions without replacement
and without detriment to circuit breaker operation.
(3) Bidders shall state in their technical description of the generator switchgear
offered such details as are necessary to assess their offer in the light of the above
design, construction and maintenance principles.
(4) A lightning arrester and a surge capacitor at each phase should be provided at
(22kV) line side
Control and Interlocking Philosophy
The control power for circuit breaker, disconnector switch and earthing switch
shall be controlled by 220V DC.
(1) Mechanically latched contactors shall be provided on all controls.
(2) Motors shall be protected by thermal overload protection.
(3) Circuit-breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches shall be provided with an

approved interlocking system which shall ensure safe operation for personnel
and equipment under all service conditions.
(4) The scheme of mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be provided. All
mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be of the preventative type and shall
be arranged to prevent mal-operation of the equipment if the interlock is
defeated.
(5) Electrical interlocks shall be hard wired fail safe design and shall function to
interrupt the operating supply and shall also include for emergency hand
operation. Failure of the electrical supply or its restoration shall not produce or
permit faulty operation.
(6) Mechanical interlocks shall be provided between disconnectors and associated

earthing switches to prevent coincident closure.
(7) Under normal operating conditions and when selected for remote operation the
circuit-breakers shall be closed by their respective synchronising systems and
electrical interlocks shall be provided to prevent the closing of circuit-breakers
on to live connections unless the incoming and running voltages are equal and
in synchronism.
(8) Interlocking shall also be provided such that except under maintenance
conditions, it shall not be possible to close the circuit-breaker unless the
respective series disconnector and HV circuit-breaker are closed.
(9) Simultaneous operation from local and remote shall be prevented by the
provision of a Local/Off/Remote Selector Switch key operated with the key
withdrawable in the remote position only. Except for the circuit-breaker all other
equipment shall be operated locally.
(10) A system of hard wired safety interlocks shall be provided by means of auxiliary
contacts on all necessary remote equipment to prevent (i) the closing of
disconnectors unless all relevent earthing switches are open and (ii) the closing
of earthing switches unless all relevent disconnectors are open and all relevent
MV and LV circuit-breakers withdrawn into the test position. Back reporting
contacts for the status of the circuit-breaker, disconnectors and earthing
switches shall be provided to enable the interlocking of the remote equipments.
In other words the interlocking philosophy implemented shall be a visible break
fail safe interlocking philosophy throughout.
Current transformers (CT)
 The CTs are supplied for measurement and protection relay. The CTs are
installed in separate cubicles.
 The CTs are accordant with IEC 61869 standard. They shall have high
precision level.
Voltage transformers (VT)
 The VTs are supplied for measurement and protection relay. The VTs are put
at fixed position in casing of generator circuit breakers.
 The VTs are accordant with IEC 61869 standard. They shall have high
precision level.
Circuit Breaker Control Cubicle
A control cubicle shall be provided for the generator circuit breakers, isolators
and grounding switches.
Maintenance Equipment and Special Tools
(1) One complete set of all SPECIAL spanners, tools and applicances including
special slings and lifting equipment necessary for maintaining the whole of the
plant including that plant supplied by Subcontractors, shall be provided. The
spanners and tools supplied under this Clause shall be new and shall not be used
during the erection of the plant. A list of such spanners, tools and appliances
shall be given in the appropriate Schedule of the Specification.
(2) The spanners shall include two spanners to fit the nuts of all bolts 25 mm
diameter and over. Grease guns, spanners and tools which are of a size and type
which could be reasonably expected to be readily available to tradesmen are not
required to be provided under this Clause.
Spare Parts
(1) The Bidder shall list in the pricing schedule of the Specification the individual
prices of the spare parts (if any) included in the Bid together with the prices of
all other spare parts that the manufacturer recommends should be held. Unit
prices should be stated and the price given shall be valid for any reasonable
quantity required under the Contract.
(2) The Owner may order all or any number of the parts at its discretion. The
Contractor shall supply the parts selected at the individual prices stated in the
Schedule.
(3) All parts ordered shall be interchangeable and suitable for use in place of
corresponding parts supplied with the plant. They shall comply with the
Specification and shall be suitably marked pr numbered for identification and
prepared for storage in an approved manner to prevent deterioration. Packing
and identification of spare parts shall be in accordance with the requirements of
this Specification.
Consumable spares which will require replacement at intervals of less than 12
months, shall be provided as part of the Contract and the price included in the
Bid. The consumable spares shall be sufficient for one year's normal usage,
where an item is not listed in the appropriate schedule and requires replacement
in less than 12 months from the date of Practical Completion
7.6 ISOLATED PHASE BUSBAR (IPB)
General
The IPB shall be complied with all related standards including, but not limited,
to the following standards:
IEEE C37.23 - Standard for Metal-Enclosed Bus
IEC60071 Part 1 - Insulation Co-Ordination - Definitions, Principles and Rules
IEC60071 Part 2 - Insulation Co-Ordination - Application Guide
BS 159 - Specification for High Voltage Busbars and Busbar Connections
BS 1977 - Specification for High Conductivity Copper Tubes for Electrical
Purposes
BS 2898 - Specification for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys for
Electrical Purposes - Bars, Extruded Round and Sections
IEC600168 - Tests on Indoor and Outdoor Post Insulators of Ceramic Materials
or Glass for Systems with Nominal Voltages Greater than
IEC60137 - Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V
IEC60060 Part 1 - High Voltage Test Techniques - General Definitions and Test
Requirements and Test Requirements
IEC60060 Part 2 - High Voltage Test Techniques - Measuring Systems
ISO 9606-2 - Approval Testing of Welds - Fusion Welding -Aluminum and
Aluminum Alloys
ISO 3777 - Radiograph Inspection of Resistance Spot Welds for Aluminum
and its Alloys - Recommended Practice
ISO 2437 - Recommended Practice for the X-ray Inspection of Fusion Welded
Butt Joints for Aluminum and its Alloys and Magnesium and its
Alloys 5 to 50 mm thick.
Scope of supply and specification
Scope of supply
The Contractor shall responsible to design, manufacture, factory test, inspect,
supply, delivery, unload at Site, install, test, commission and guarantee the
Isolated Phase Busbar (IPB) and auxiliaries for each Unit to ensure the safe,
efficient and reliable operation of the Quang Trach I Thermal Power Plant
Two complete three phase sets of IPB with all supporting insulators and
enclosing ductwork. Also two complete sets of supports, frameworks and
brackets. The set of busbars shall consist of the following sections (for 1 set):
(1) The main busbars between the Generator and its Generator Step Up Transformer
including the flexible connections to the generator terminal stalks and to the
terminals of the GSUT.
(2) The generator star point busbar including the flexible connections to the
generator neutral terminal stalks.
(3) Unit Auxiliary Transformer tee off, including the flexible between the busbars
and the high voltage transformer terminals.
(4) The excitation transformer tee off, including the flexibles between the busbars
and the transformer terminals.
(5) The voltage transformer connections from the main busbars to the voltage
transformer cubicles.
(6) Connections between the following items of plant:

a) Between the star point of the generator and the neutral earthing transformer.
Between the high voltage neutral point of the generator voltage transformers
and the star point of the generator.
b) Earthing connections from all components of the plant supplied under this
Contract to the earthing system.
Busbars
(1) The busbars shall be of the air insulated, self-supporting, isolated phase busbar
type enclosed in weatherproof metal ductwork and shall be naturally cooled.
This shall be achieved with an air delivery and drying system with a delivery
rate matched to a controlled overall bus system air leakage rate. The delivery
capacity shall be sufficient to maintain positive pressure at all times. Sight-glass
ground level water collection points will be provided as a means of monitoring
dryness.
(2) The busbars and ductwork from the foundation block, across the floor of the
turbine house, through the turbine house wall to the transformer terminals, etc.,
shall be supported by means of structures, frameworks and brackets to form a
rigid structure. The busbars shall be of the air insulated, self supporting, phase
isolated
(3) The busbars and ductwork from the foundation block, across the floor of the
turbine house, through the turbine house wall to the transformer terminals, etc.,
shall be supported by means of structures, frameworks and brackets to form a
rigid structure.
(4) The Contractor shall provide weather proof sealing plates where the ductwork
passes through the turbine house wall.
(5) The Contractor shall prevent the transmission of building vibration to the
ductwork as well as allowing for electrical isolation of the ducting.
Electrical Characteristics
(1) The whole of the busbars and connections shall have a current rating of not less
than 110% of rated current of generator. These and all following fault levels are
based on a generator line voltage of 22kV. For any higher generator line voltage
all fault currents will have to be adjusted by the Contractor.
(2) The branch isolated phase busbars between the main isolated phase busbars and
the Unit Auxiliary Transformer 22(Ugen)/11kV are required to have a current
rating of not less than 110% of rated current of these equipment. For any
different generator line voltage all fault currents will have to be adjusted by the
Contractor.
(3) The branch isolated phase busbar between the main isolated phase busbars and
the excitation transformer is required to have a current rating of not less than
110% of rated current of these equipment. For any different generator line
voltage all fault currents will have to be adjusted by the Contractor.
(4) All conductors and conductor details, including the neutral conductor shall be
insulated for a lightning impulse withstand voltage as per IEC60071 Parts 1 and
2.
(5) The IPB must carry the rated current continuously without exceeding the
following temperature limits considering an ambient temperature of 40°C
and duly considering the effect of solar radiation:
 Main conductor: 105°C
 Bus connections: 105°C
 Busduct enclosures and support structures: 80°C
(6) Rated voltage: 1.1 times of generator rated Voltage (Ugen plus 10%);
(7) Rated power frequency withstand voltage: 50kV
(8) Lightning impulse withstand voltage: 125kV
(9) Power frequency test voltage to ground: 50kV
(10) Cooing: Air cooling.
(11) The Bidder shall provide all the details as set out in the Technical Schedules.
Construction
(1) Busbars shall be of copper, aluminum or aluminum alloy and shall comply with
the requirements of BS 159 and BS 1977 or BS 2898 as required.
(2) Allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction of the conductor and
housing due to normal or short circuit temperature rises. The use of sliding joints
in conductors will not be considered. Conductors may be joined together leaving
a suitable expansion clearance and the electrical connection made by means of
bolted flexible conductors.
(3) The connection point to the generator, unit and excitation transformer busbar
Interconnections shall be of the flexible type and these flexible shall be
removable for isolation purposes.
(4) The generator neutral current transformer (GNE), the primary terminals of the
neutral earthing transformer, the neutral cable and bushing and all high voltage
connections between these parts shall be situated in a weatherproof aluminum
casing, the side panels being removable to allow access to the inside of the
casing.
(5) Busbar adaptor plates shall be provided at the terminal points to take up possible
minor misplacement during erection. The adaptor plates shall be drilled on site.
(6) The joining of busbar sections shall be carried out by either bolting or welding.
If bolted, the bolting details shall not be subject to electrolytic action.
(7) All bolts and nuts shall be locked after erection. For electrical conducting
connections all bolts, nuts and washers shall be of non magnetic stainless steel
grade 8.8. Belleville type washers shall be used at joints on the main connections.
(8) All jointing surfaces to copper busbars, intermediate or adaptor plates and
flexible conductors shall be silver plated.
(9) All jointing surfaces on aluminum busbars, intermediate or adaptor plates shall
be greased with Penetrox or other approved contact compound and wire brushed
before bolting up. Different method may be used only if approved by The Owner.
Ductwork
(1) It is preferred that the ductwork be of all welded aluminum construction.

Inspection holes must be provided for maintenance purposes such as
replacement of insulators, and checking of joints between sections of busbars.
(2) The ductwork is to be pressurised to a level sufficient to prevent the ingress of

moisture and foreign particles into the bus duct. The Bidder shall provide all
details in relation to the requirements of the pressurised air system.
(3) Provision shall be made to ensure that water leaks from any source will not
accumulate in the ductwork. Drains shall be provided at all low points of the
ductwork system i.e. voltage transformer cubicles, excitation transformer, unit
auxiliary transformer and generator transformer. Drains shall be of the sealed
type and description shall be given of the provisions made to maintain pressure
within acceptable limits. Each drainage location the drains from each phase shall
drain into a single drainage container located at ground level. The drainage
container shall be made from glass or UV protected plastic and be fitted with a
drain valve.
(4) The ductwork shall be vermin proof.
(5) The enclosure around the generator terminals shall be so arranged that the
current carrying flexible connections and the bushing connections are easily
accessible for inspection and maintenance.
Aluminum Welding
(1) Aluminum welding shall comply with all clauses of ISO 9956-4, ISO 10043 and
ISOTR 11 069.
(2) All butt welds shall be complete penetration butt welds. Backing bars shall be
close fitting, centred at the joint and of sufficient thickness to avoid burn
through. Typical joint details shall be submitted by the Contractor to OWNER
to designate joints for non destructive testing.
Support Structures, Framework and Brackets
(1) Supporting structures shall be of ferrous or non-ferrous construction. Welded

construction is preferred.
(2) They shall be designed to withstand, with ample margin, the thermal stress
arising from the normal full load current and the mechanical and thermal
stresses arising from the maximum fault currents.
(3) It is preferred that no support be taken from the generator block. However, if
the design of the ducting is such that this is necessary, special provision shall be
made for preventing the transmission of vibration from the generator block to
the ducting. The design of anti-vibration mountings shall be submitted to the
Owner for approval.
(4) The temperature of any portion of the supports, etc., (excluding the ductwork)
shall be raised by not more than 40oC measured by thermometer when the bus
is carrying full rated current. If necessary, the Bidder shall provide suitable
magnetic screens to ensure that this temperature rise is not exceeded.
Busbar Support Insulators
(1) Busbar support insulators shall be of the outdoor type.
(2) The Bidder may offer either porcelain or epoxy resin type insulators.
(3) As part of the Bid Proposal, the Bidder shall provide detailed evidence in
relation to the nominated insulator manufacturer for each of the following items:
(a) Previous experience in manufacturing these insulators (detailing respective
clients).
(b) Facilities available for testing to prescribed standards (i.e. type test etc.). If the
manufacturer is unable to conduct certain tests, the tenderer shall nominate the
venue for such testing.
Dished Spring ("Belleville") Washers
(1) All Belleville washers shall be manufactured from suitable spring steel so that
the finished product will have the mechanical properties and as indicated below.
Nominal diameter M16 M12 M10
Outside diameter (mm) 45 max 45 max 35 max

Total height (mm) 6.5 max 6.5 max 4.75 max
(Thickness + dish dimension)
Flattening load (kN) 30,000 22,000 15,000
+ + +
2,000 2,000 2,000
(2) To avoid stress concentration, the internal and external edges shall be rounded
by shot-peening or by other approved method. The washers shall be suitably
heat-treated to avoid hydrogen embrittlement. After the fabrication and heat
treatment, all washers shall be subjected to a suitable cleaning process to
completely remove any grease, rust, scale, dirts, etc.
(3) Irnmediately after cleaning, all washers shall be zinc peened.

7.7 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR (EDG)
General

Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) and auxiliaries for each Unit to provide the
power for safe shutdown of the Unit and maintain the essential load
(essential/emergency load, UPS, emergency lighting,..) for operation in the
event of total power failure of Quang Trach I Thermal Power Plant
Emergency Diesel Generator and its auxiliaries shall be independent operated
and capable meet all power requirements in the Power Plant.
Type of Plant
Two diesel generator sets shall be provided for each Unit. Each diesel generator
set shall be a stationary industrial type installed inside container located outside. The
fuel oil tank, cooling tower and exhaust silencer shall be suitable for outdoor
installation. Both diesel engine and generator with its exciter shall be close
coupled with outboard bearing and mounted on a substantial bedplate.
Design and Selection
(1) Each set and its auxiliaries shall be physically, mechanically and electrically
separate to ensure that no single event can cripple both sets. Similarly, each
diesel generator and its auxiliaries shall be able to operate independently of the
availability of other power station plant.
(2) All auxiliaries shall be selected to give matched performance.
(3) The diesel generator shall be of established manufacture and the model offered
shall be well proven in service with minimum 5 years operating experience.
(4) The design shall be such that overall functional reliability, ease of maintenance
and simplified controls are given due consideration.
(5) Adequate instrumentation for control and monitoring, shall be provided.
(6) All parts shall be easily accessible for operation and maintenance. Where
necessary, the Contractor shall provide all necessary platforms and steps.
(7) Spare parts shall be interchangeable and satisfactory inventories shall be
available.
(8) The Bidder shall describe the type and nature of after sales facilities available
in Vietnam. Consideration will be given to after sales service facilities in the
assessment of bids.
Rating
The Contractor shall determine the rating of the diesel generator based on the
philosophy and parameters described hereafter
 Capacity Power : 1000kW (to be specified by constructor),
 Quantity : 2 sets
 Rated voltage : 400V
 Phase : 3 phase
 Frequency : 50Hz
 Power factor : 0.85
 Rated speed : 1500 rpm
The daily tank shall have sufficient capacity for at least 12 hours of continuous
engine operation at full load. An alarm shall be provided which warns that the
volume of fuel in the day tank is less than this amount.
(1) Each diesel generator set with its auxiliaries shall be capable on its own of
providing electrical power to maintain both of the boiler-turbine units and
associated auxiliary plants together at the power station in a safe condition
following a shut-down under emergency conditions with a margin of at least
10%. A typical case is the loss of all external power supply to the station. The
loads to be supplied by the diesel generators in an island condition shall as a
minimum include the following:
The loads to be supplied by the diesel generators in an island condition shall as
a minimum include the following:
 A.C. turbine turning gear
 A.C. turning gear oil pump ,if the case
 A.C. hydrogen seal oil pump, if the case
 A.C. turbine oil tank vapour extractor
 A.C. main oil pump
 A.C. steam feed pump turning gear
 A.C. steam feed pump oil pump
 A.C. flame scanner fan
 Boiler fans oil pumps
 Gas air heater lube oil pump
 Diesel oil forwarding pump
 Gas air heater main drive
 any other A.C. drives required for a safe shutdown
 battery chargers
 diesel generator auxiliaries
 CCR and control room lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
 Switchyard control room lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
 Stack obstruction lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
 Remote plants emergency lighting (via battery chargers/UPS)
 Fire-fighting system
 HVAC
 Lifts
 Coal and ash plant
 And other loads/system subject to approval by Owner.
Bidder/Contractor will be required to make their own assessment of diesel
generator loads for generator capacity.
(2) For any motor being supplied from the islanded diesel generator, the voltage
drop at the motor terminals during starting shall be no greater than 15% from
the pre-start voltage level.
(3) The frequency drop during the connection of any block of load to the islanded
diesel generator shall not exceed 2.5 Hz of rated.
(4) The Bidder shall describe the loads to be connected to the diesel generators and
submit to the Owner calculation sheets to justify the rating selected.
(5) The Bidder shall guarantee the performance of the diesel generator by
acceptance tests in accordance with ISO 3046/2 and IEC 60034.1.
Operating Philosophy
The diesel generators shall form part of the emergency power supply system
whose purpose is to protect the boiler/turbine-generator plant and to maintain
systems necessary for the safety of personnel in the event of loss of normal a.c.
supplies. In the immediate aftermath of loss of a.c. supplies, plant safety shall
be maintained by d.c. auxiliaries supplied from the 220 V d.c. system. The
batteries will be sized to be capable of maintaining the safety of plant of both
units together without restoration of the battery chargers for 1 hour with one
station batteries available
The diesel generator shall start automatically and excite to rated generator
voltage as soon as possible after loss of normal A.C. supply, then restoring
power supplies to the 400V Emergency bus. The ICMS will initiate
automatically the loading sequence to the A.C. safe shutdown supplies and the
220V battery chargers. Once emergency shutdown supplies are established, the
diesel generator shall maintain voltage and frequency of the island system
within specified ranges while the critical A.C. auxiliaries are re-started to
replace the D.C. shutdown auxiliaries until normal A.C. supplies are restored.
Shutdown of the diesel generator shall not occur automatically on restoration of
normal A.C. supplies, but only by manual operator action.
In-Service Testing
Provision shall be made for testing the diesel generator from the CCR via a
single control command. The aim of the tests is as follows:
 Prove reliable starting. The point in the control system at which the test is
initiated should ensure that as much as possible of the automatic start logic
as possible is included in the test.
 Prove the ability of the diesel generator to successfully respond to step load
changes up to the largest single load both in load addition and load rejection.
 Prove the ability of the diesel generator to continuously supply its maximum
isolated load and its rated output when connected in parallel with the normal
400 V source of supply.
The diesel generator shall have its own controller to enable periodic testing of
the diesel generator following a command to start from the CCR. Shutdown of
the diesel generator shall not occur automatically after the load tests, but only
by manual operator command.
D.C. Auxiliaries for the Diesel Generators
If the Bidder requires d.c. supply to the diesel generator for control purposes,
for the supervisory system, or for the running of its stand-by pumps etc., prior
to establishment of diesel alternator voltage, he shall include in his bid for the
provision of the appropriate battery systems complete with trickle/boost
charging equipment local to the diesel generator.
Extent of Supply
This clause shall be used solely as a guide to the works involved. It no way alters
the responsibility of the Contractor as detailed elsewhere in this Specification.
Each of the diesel generator shall be complete with all necessary associated
ancillary plant, controls and services as follows:
 A starting system capable of starting the diesel engine in any position without
the need to use the barring gear.
 A lubricating oil system with pumps, filters, oil cooler, piping and controls.
 An engine cooling system which does not depend on the operation of cooling
systems elsewhere in the power station and has sufficient capacity to
maintain safe operating temperatures within the specified ambient
temperature range.
 Local and remote control facilities including a diesel generator control
cubicle and diesel generator auxiliary switchboard, both located in the diesel
generator room, together with instrumentation protection and alarms and all
necessary provisions for starting, loading, control and shut down.
 A complete engine air intake system.
 A lagged exhaust system with silencers mounted on separate structure
outside the building and unlagged discharge above the level of the engine
room roof.
 All water, and fuel services.
 A fuel oil day storage tank and complete reticulation for start-up and running
purposes.
 Provision of all appropriate control, protection and alarm signals to the CCR.
 Provision of all necessary or desirable peripheral instrumentation on diesel
generator and auxiliaries, and associated cabling.
 All local power and control cabling.
 Batteries, chargers and d.c. distribution system if applicable.
 Removable guards for any exposed moveable part of the diesel generator or
an auxiliary, for personnel protection.
 Provision for connecting / disconnecting generator neutral point to the station
earth grid.
Particulars of Plant
Diesel Engine
(1) General
The diesel engines offered shall operate on either the 2 or 4 stroke cycle and be
suitable for operating with the same fuel oil used by power station mobile plant.
They shall be of proven design, with a record of successful and low maintenance
performance in the size and configuration offered and with a proven record of
start reliability. The maximum speed of the diesel plant offered shall not be more
than 1,500 rpm. Units are required to be capable of rapid loading.
(2) Barring Gear

Manual barring gear only shall be provided.
(3) Engine Design

The engine shall comply with the requirements of ISO 3046 as applicable. The
engines shall be designed and constructed to achieve low wear rates and low oil
consumption in the cylinders, to give adequate cooling to cylinders and valves
and to minimise dismantling for access to components requiring regular
maintenance.
Bidders are required to set out particulars of the design offered and, where
practicable, substantiate the claims with records of actual engine performance.
It is preferred that the following design features be incorporated:
 Cylinder liners manufactured wholly from a single high quality material with
inherent anti-galling and oil retaining properties with the working surfaces
finished in a manner to enhance these properties. Chrome-plated liners will
not be accepted.
 Piston and ring materials to be fully compatible with the abovementioned
liner properties.
 Inlet and exhaust valves in separate removable cages with renewable guides
fitted to all valve stems.
 Valve, valve seats and valve cage materials selected for operation over a
whole range of engine loading. Valve seats deposited by welding on base
metal will not be accepted.
 A separate fuel pump to each injector is preferred but fuel pumps and
injectors shall be of an approved well proven type and full details shall be
submitted with the Tender.
 Covers over the valve gear shall be of robust construction with strong locking
facilities.
 The engine crank case shall be provided with suitable safety devices to
minimise the possibility of a rapid increase in pressure in the crank case
above the permissible level.
 The engine shall be tested in the maker's works in accordance with ISO 3046-
1 and ISO 3046-2.
(4) Combustion Air

 The pressure charger shall be of an approved make and type and driven by
the exhaust gases. For engines of the two bank construction there shall
preferably be a pressure charger for each bank.
 The air inlet of each pressure charger shall be arranged so that the ingestion
of air borne dust is minimised. The inlet shall incorporate a silencer and filter.
The filter shall be suitable for operation in a heavily dust laden atmosphere
and shall comply with ISO 5011.
 The air filters shall be readily accessible and any necessary platforms and
ladders shall be provided to facilitate easy removal and washing.
(5) Exhaust System

 The exhaust duct from the engine to the silencer shall pass through the side
wall of the building and shall include adequate thermal expansion bellows.
This ducting shall be supported such that no loads are transmitted onto the
turbo-charger casing or onto the building structure.
 The exhaust duct and silencer shall be either hot-dipped galvanized or
alternatively, constructed in stainless steel of adequate thickness to withstand
all structural, thermal and wind loads. Expansion bellows shall be in stainless
steel. Unlagged portions of the exhaust system, if not in stainless steel, shall
be painted externally with approved paint.
 Silencers shall be mounted on independent structures outside the building
and the exhaust piping shall be arranged to discharge above the level of the
building roof.
 The exhaust piping up to and including the silencer shall be lagged and the
section outside the building shall be sheet metal cladded.
(6) Access Requirements

 Adequate platforms and stairways shall be provided to facilitate inspection,
maintenance and overhaul.
 All such platforms and stairways shall be kept well clear of crank case doors
or any other removable items.
 Rung type ladders will not be acceptable.
(7) Vibrations and Noise Level

 To reduce noise levels and vibrations within the diesel generator building,
the sets shall be mounted on resilient mountings.
 These mountings shall preferably be of the steel spring type in combination
with rubber pads and Contractor shall ensure that sufficient mountings are
provided to reduce foundation loadings to an acceptable level.
 The mountings shall be of the adjustable type to equalise the loading and for
levelling purposes to uneven foundations.
 Flexible connections shall be provided between the engine and fuel lines,
exhaust system, radiator air discharge duct, combustion air inlet duct, conduit
for control and power cables and any other externally connected support
systems.
 The Contractor shall be required to support all pipes and ducts on one or both
sides of such flexible connections as necessary.
Lubricating Oil System
(1) General
 The engine shall be provided with a forced lubrication system incorporating
oil pump, oil coolers, filters, oil reservoir, pipework, valves, and instruments.
 If the main oil pump is driven from the engine then facilities shall be provided
for priming the system by a 100% duty electric motor driven pump which
will be arranged to pump for 10 minutes in every hour whilst the diesel is
shut down or at an interval considered sufficient to ensure that the diesel
engine bearings are ready for an instant start. The electric stand-by pump
shall be arranged to start automatically on loss of lubricating oil pressure. A
hand operated priming pump shall also be supplied and fitted for hand
priming purposes.
 The capacity of the lubricating system shall be adequate for the combined
requirements of the diesel engine and generator.
 Where an engine-driven pump is fitted, it is preferred that the pump can be
readily isolated from the engine (without affecting its reliability) so that the
engine may be placed in service on the stand by pump in the event of a failure
of the engine-driven pump only.
 Means shall be provided to collect any lubricating oil likely to leak or drip
from the unit and return it by suitable drains to a collecting point for disposal.
 Bidders shall indicate in the Schedules the guaranteed lubricating oil
consumption in litres per engine hour and the period of running necessary to
achieve stable oil consumption conditions.
 Facilities for draining the lubricating oil from the sump shall be provided.
The Contractor in his offer shall include a description of how the draining
and replenishment is done.
(2) Filters
 At least two lubricating oil filters shall be provided. They shall be suitable
for the nominated grade of oil and be of the total flow type.
 The filters shall preferably be capable of being cleaned by one man without
the use of tools.
 Each filter shall be fitted with a differential gauge and alarm and shall have
interchange valves interlocked to prevent total isolation of the oil filtration
system.
(3) Coolers
 Oil coolers shall preferably be of the tube in shell type and the tube bundle
shall be removable.
 Facilities shall be provided to enable oil from engine sump to be discharged
into drum containers for disposal.
(4) Supply of Lubricating Oil

The Contractor shall provide all necessary lubricating oil and greases for initial
running.
Fuel Oil System
(1) Fuel Supply

The light fuel oil supply for power station mobile plant is received by road
tanker and this oil will be used as diesel fuel.
Each diesel generator day tank shall be supplied from the bulk storage tank, in
an arrangement which automatically maintains enough fuel in the day tank to
achieve the required running time of the diesel generator, when it be required
for emergency power supply.
A local filling branch for each day tank with valve and screw cap shall also be
provided.
(2) Day Tank

 The day tank shall have sufficient capacity for at least 12 hours of continuous
engine operation at full load. An alarm shall be provided which warns that
the volume of fuel in the day tank is less than this amount.
 The tank shall be horizontal mild steel cylindrical welded construction with
plate thickness not less than 4 mm. The design shall be in accordance with
AS 169.
 All necessary fittings and connections as per AS 1692 shall be provided.
 The tank shall be mounted on a platform at a height such as to feed the engine
by gravity. All steelwork, access ladders, platforms for access and
maintenance shall be provided.
 The tank shall be fitted with high and low level switches and an inlet control
valve to automatically maintain the level of the fuel between pre-set levels.
The inlet control valve shall be mounted externally to the tank. A manual by-
pass valve shall be provided around the inlet control valve.
 A remote reading level indicator shall be mounted on the control cubicle.
 The fuel tank shall be enclosed in an oil retaining bund with firewalls. The
inlet and outlet isolating valves shall be located outside the fire walls in a
suitable position for safe access during a fire situation.
 The fuel tank and supply installation shall comply with the requirements of
AS 1940 - "SAA Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code".
(3) Reticulation
 The Contractor shall supply all piping, isolating valves, non return valves,
drains, overflows, air release valves, vents, supports, recirculating valves,
piping, safety devices, alarms and initiating devices necessary for the safe
and convenient operation of the plant.
 The filtering system shall include at least two (2) stages of filters capable of
retaining all particles above five microns in size, and a water separator.
(4) Flow Meter

 An accurate flow meter for measuring the fuel consumption of the diesel
generator shall be provided.
 Indication of the fuel consumption shall be provided on the control panel.
Engine Governor
(1) Governor Operation

 The engine shall be provided with a suitable governor in accordance with
ISO 3046/14 and as specified hereunder to operate steadily at any load within
its rated load.
 The speed governor shall have over speed protection.
 The speed governor shall have a maximum speed regulation of 2-3% through
the full operating range.
 The maximum change of speed expressed as a percentage of the rated speed
on sudden application of the loads shall not exceed 10%.
 The recovery time for temporary disturbance wo within the steady load speed
band at the new load shall not exceed 5 seconds after a change of load of 20%
of the rated load.
 Means shall be provided so that the speed of the engine may be varied
gradually over a range of 5% below rated speed to 5% above rated speed,
either manually at the engine or by means of a speeder motor, or equivalent,
controlled from the diesel generator control cubicle. The speeder gear shall
also be controllable from the CCR.
 The speed-droop characteristics of the governor shall be readily adjustable
both for islanded operation and for parallel operation.
(2) Emergency Governor

A suitable independent emergency governor shall be provided to stop the engine
in case of overspeed, adjustable between 10% and 15% of rated speed.
Starting System
The starting system shall be capable of five attempts at starting in the absence
of external sources of power.
It is expected that the Bidder will offer an electric starting system. However, if
a compressed air is offered, non-return valves shall be fitted to sufficient number
of cylinders to enable the machine to be started from any angular position
without the need to bar the unit.
The Bidder shall provide a description of the starting system offered.
A compressed air starting system shall comply with the following clauses.
(1) Receivers
 Each receiver shall be complete with pressure gauge, alarm contacts, relief
valve, automatic moisture trap and by-pass, isolating and drain valves.
Adequate provision shall be made for internal inspection.
 Each air receiver shall have a storage capacity sufficient to provide the air
required for at least five engine starts without recharging the receiver.
(2) Compressors
 2x100% electric driven compressors should be provided, alternatively one
electric driven compressor and one combustion engine driven mobile
compressor of same rating.
 Each receiver shall be provided with one 400 V a.c. electric motor-driven air
compressor of sufficient capacity to charge the receiver in a period not greater
than 30 minutes. The compressor shall be arranged to automatically maintain
the required air pressure in the receiver.
 All necessary interconnecting pipework in butt welded steel and automatic
drain traps shall be provided.
Cooling System
Cooling of the engine shall be provided by a closed pressurised water system(s)
with pump(s) circulating the water between the engine and a fan cooled radiator.
The water shall be suitably dosed with inhibitor and if appropriate for the range
in ambient temperature, with anti-freeze.
The fan(s) shall be enclosed in a substantial shroud for physical protection of
personnel and for increased efficiency. If the radiator is located within the room,
flexible ducting shall be provided between the radiator and the wall of the
building to ensure that all heated air is directed out of the engine room.
(1) Water Heating

The offer shall include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cooling water
system to maintain the water temperature in the 25oC to 40oC range to facilitate
easy starting of the diesel. A water circulating pump driven by 400 V electric
motor and associated controls shall be included in the system.
(2) Make-Up Water Tank

A make up water tank of adequate capacity shall be provided. It shall be located
at a suitable position giving sufficient head by gravity. The tank shall be
complete with all fittings, inlet ball valve, drain and overflow piping and
isolating valves. Materials used shall be corrosion resistant.
(3) Alternative Cooling System

 The Contractor may offer as an alternative an evaporative type cooling tower
arrangement complete with fans, pumps and all integral pipework.
 In this case the Contractor shall state any improvement in engine output that
may be expected using this method and the amount of make-up water
required.
(4) Pipework and Valves

 The cooling water circulating pipework shall be in solid drawn copper.
 All necessary integral pipework and valves shall be provided and all
necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the piping will be free
from vibration problems. Compression fittings will not be acceptable.
 Pipework shall be installed such that it does not prevent free and easy access
around the diesel generator unit and auxiliaries.
 Lagging and trace heating shall be provided wherever there is a danger of
freezing.
Instrumentation
The plant shall be supplied with all necessary instrumentation for control and
monitoring purposes
(1) All instruments shall be easily accessible.
(2) In addition to local indication, all vital instrumentation and controls shall be
transmitted to and mounted on the Diesel Generator Control Cubicle
(3) All calibrations shall be in metric units.

Generator
(1) General
The generator shall be of the horizontal shaft, brushless, rotating field, solidly
coupled to the diesel engine flywheel, and shall meet the requirements of IEC6
0034 and this Specification.
(2) Rating
The continuous maximum rating of each generator shall match the ISO 3046/1
rating of the engine. The generators shall be designed for the following
conditions:
 Rated voltage 400 V
 Rated frequency 50 Hz
(3) Enclosures
 Generators shall be totally enclosed air circuit air cooled type to IEC
60034-6 with degree of protection to IEC 60034-5 of IP56.
 Exciters shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type to IEC 60034-6 with
degree of protection to and IEC 60034-5 of IP56.
(4) Insulation
Insulation of generators and exciters shall be rated at Class F to IEC 60034,
but the limit of temperature rise shall be that nominated for Class B
insulation.
(5) Stator
 The stator casings shall be of fabricated steel construction, and the stator
core shall be made of high permeability low-loss stampings tightly
clamped to reduce noise and vibration to a minimum.
 The stator windings shall be of copper, star-connected, with all six
terminals brought out. The windings shall be effectively braced and
blocked to withstand, without damage or permanent deformation, the
forces resulting from single or three-phase sudden short circuits at the
terminals. The stator windings shall have full insulation; graded
insulation is not acceptable.
(6) Rotor
 The rotor shall be of the outboard pedestal bearing arrangement with
over-hung exciter. Bearings shall be of the sleeve type with flood or
pressure lubrication from the engine lubricating oil system, fitted with
embedded thermostats for alarm purposes, and sight flow provision in
the oil drain. They shall be insulated.
 Pole and damper windings shall be suitably braced to prevent damage in
service, and damper windings shall be adequately rated for currents due
to transient and/or cyclic irregularity conditions.
(7) Temperature Detectors

 At least three embedded temperature detectors shall be provided in the
generator stator winding, brought out to a common terminal box in the
stator frame in a position accessible during normal operation i.e. separate
from the power cable terminal box and the space heater terminal
 Temperature indication derived from these detectors shall be provided on
the Diesel Generator Control Cubicle. The detectors shall also be used as
a basis for initiating high stator temperature alarms
(8) Space Heaters

Space heaters shall be provided to maintain the generator internal
temperature above dewpoint when the generator is at rest. Terminals for
space heaters shall be separately housed from those for power cable and
instrument cable termination.
Exciter
The exciter shall be of the over-hung brushless type with rotating rectifier
assemblies. Excitation of the exciter may be by permanent magnet generator.
Excitation shall be possible in the absence of normal station a.c. supplies.
Neutral Earthing
Each generator neutral point shall be connected to the station earth grid
through NGR.
Excitation Controller
Each generator shall be provided with a solid-state excitation controller which,
by controlling the field current of the brushless exciter, will provide automatic
regulation of generator terminal voltage with changing load. Manual control of
excitation current shall also be provided as backup to the voltage regulator and
for maintenance purposes.
The excitation controller shall provide for automatic build-up to rated generator
voltage as part of the starting sequence of the diesel generator set. The sequence
shall end with the automatic voltage regulator being in control, in preparation
for synchronizing.
(1) Automatic Excitation Control

The voltage controller shall include at least the following features:
 load drop compensation;
 under and over excitation protection;
(2) Manual Excitation Control

The manual excitation controller shall follow-up the automatic voltage
regulator to ensure “bump less” transfer of control on trip of the automatic
controller.
Diesel Generator Auxiliary Switchboard
Each set shall be provided with a diesel generator auxiliary switchboard which
is physically separate from the other.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided.
Diesel Generator Control Cubicle and Controls
(1) General
Each set shall be provided with a diesel generator control cubicle to be mounted
in the diesel generator room adjacent to the set. The cubicle rating shall be that
applicable to a switchboard in the same location. The diesel generator control
cubicles shall contain all the controls, alarms and indication for the whole of
each set, with certain functions repeated in the CCR.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided.
(2) Diesel Generator Controls

The following controls shall be provided on the diesel generator control
cubicles:
 local/remote (CCR) control selector switch (with key lock)
 test start diesel generator: initiation of automatic start and run-up sequence
and excite the generator to rated voltage
 run diesel engine only: start engine and run-up to rated speed
 excite generator: establish generator rated voltage ready for manual
synchronising
 normal stop
 emergency stop, which shall also trip the diesel generator circuit breaker and
excitation
 A.V.R. voltage raise/lower
 Governor speed raise/lower
 A.V.R. auto/manual selector switch
 Excitation manual raise/lower
 Generator circuit breaker open/close
 Synchroscope on/off (also provides an interlock to enable closure of
generator circuit breaker)
 Anti-condensation heaters on/off
 Jacket water heaters on/off
(3) Diesel Generator Indication - Control Cubicle

The diesel generator control cubicles shall include the following minimum
indication:
 generator power output (kW)
 generator reactive power output (kVAR, centre zero meter)
 generator frequency (Hz)
 generator voltage (V)
 400 V Station Switchboard voltage
 generator current (A each phase, via selector switch)
 synchroscope
 generator kWh - Meter
 hours run meter
 exciter field voltage (V)
 exciter field current (A)
 generator bearing temperatures
 generator winding temperatures
 shaft speed (rpm)
 day fuel oil tank level
 fuel consumption indicator
 lube oil pressure
 lube oil temperature
 jacket water temperature
 engine exhaust temperature
 intake air cooler temperature
 air receiver pressure
 battery charge current (A)
(4) Diesel Engine Indication - Local to Engine

In addition to the above the Bidder shall nominate in his bid the locations and
number of instruments he will be providing for local indication. Such gauges
shall be of sufficient number for monitoring the status of the plant and shall
include the following:
 Cooling water inlet and outlet pressure and temperature
 Lubricating oil inlet and outlet pressure and temperature
 Differential pressure across lube oil and fuel oil filter
 Compressed air pressure
 Jacket water outlet temperature of each cylinder
 Intake and exhaust gas temperature
 Bearing temperature
(5) Plant Status Indication, and Alarm Annunciation

The philosophy and style of display of plant status and the annunciation of
alarms associated with the diesel generators shall be consistent with that applied
to plant controlled from the CCR to avoid confusion on the part of the operators
as to what a display indicates.
The status of any plant which may be unavailable for automatic start of the
diesel generator shall be indicated on the Diesel Generator Control Cubicle to
provide the operator with sufficient information to assess the overall status of
the plant without having to inspect equipment individually. Unavailability for
automatic start or remote control shall be indicated in the CCR.
Each diesel generator shall have its own annunciator system mounted in the
diesel generator control cubicle, and incorporating “first-up fault” indication. It
may be part of the sequence control system. All necessary equipment shall be
included to enable repetition of a “general alarm” in the CCR. Allowance to
enable up to 20% additional alarms to be added shall be provided.
An audible alarm shall be provided in each diesel generator control room, to be
operative only when the diesel generator is under local control.
The operation of any diesel generator protective device shall be individually
alarmed.
(6) CCR (CCR)
The Contractor shall provide in the CCR all the remote control and
instrumentation meters, indicating lights and pushbuttons required to operate
the diesel generator from that location.
The following list is included as a guide. The Contractor shall state in his offer
what facilities he recommends providing for safe, reliable, automatic and
manual starting and operation.
 Control
 Control level: diesel generator shall be capable of starting/stopping from
equipment/local control panel/DCS.
 Automatic/Manual start selection: automatic start on loss of supply to the Station
400 V Switchboard bus section to which the diesel generator is connected ready
for synchronising and closing onto the 400 V Station Switchboard; manual start
as described below.
 Manual start diesel generator: initiation of automatic start and run-up sequence
ready for synchronising and closing onto the 400 V Station Switchboard by the
operator
 Stop diesel generator
 Governor speed raise/lower
 A.V.R. voltage raise/lower
 Manual excitation voltage raise/lower
 A.V.R./manual excitation selection
 Open/close generator circuit breaker
 Synchronising plug: to connect synchroscope and enable circuit breaker closing
circuit
 Indication
 Generator power output (kW)
 Generator reactive power output (kVAR, centre zero)
 Generator frequency (Hz)
 Generator voltage (V)
 Station 400 V Switchboard busbar voltage (v)
 Synchroscope
 Generator current (A)
 Diesel engine speed (rpm)
 Lubricating oil pressure (kPa)
 Jacket water temperature (C)
 Battery voltages
 Status
 Diesel ready to load
 Limit of excitation adjustment reached
 Limit of governor speed adjustment reached
 Diesel generator unavailable (conditions monitored to be listed)
 Generator reactive power limiter operating
 Excitation high
 Alarms
 Diesel generator general alarm
 Lubricating oil pressure low
 Lubricating oil temperature high
 Jacket water temperature high
 Diesel failed to start/shut-down
 Diesel generator overload
 Battery failed.
(7) Control Circuit Supply Supervision

Control supplies shall be monitored and undervoltage alarms raised if they are
absent.
Generator Protection
The Contractor shall provide at least the following generator protections:
 Differential
 Overcurrent
 Earth fault
 Over Voltage
 Under voltage
 Over/Under frequency
 Reverse power
 Thermal overload
 Loss of Excitation.
 etc
All protections listed above shall trip the 400 V circuit breaker (the lock out
relay shall also be provided this circuit breaker), generator excitation and the
diesel engine and raise an alarm, except for thermal overload which shall alarm
only.
The Bidder shall describe the proposed generator protections.
Test links shall be provided in current and voltage input circuits to electrical
protection relays. Trip isolation links or other means of providing isolation of
in-service protection relays for test shall be provided.
Batteries
(1) If batteries are required, they shall be of the valve regulated lead acid (VRLA)
batteries complying with IEC 60896 and shall be provided with 100% rated duty
float/boost chargers. The batteries shall be sized to supply at least five black
starts and in addition one black shut-down without the need for recharging.
Under normal operation the chargers shall supply the required d.c. load and at
the same time automatically float charge the battery to keep it fully charged
within the correct voltage limits.
(2) Selection of boost charge shall be manual, and controlled by a preset timing
switch. The boost charge shall be such that the time for recharging the battery
from the discharged condition to 90% of the fully charged condition, and at the
same time supplying the d.c. load requirements, does not exceed eight hours.
(3) Chargers shall be of the natural cooled type.

Fire Protection
Fire protection for the diesel generator and associated plant shall comply with
the requirements and the relevant NFPA Code.
The Bidder shall provide fire detection devices for the diesel generator and
associated plant and alarm status feedbacks to the CCR
Painting and Finishing
Painting and finishing for the diesel generator and associated plant shall comply
with the requirements
(1) Platforms, Walkways, Stairs and Ladders

The Contractor shall provide all necessary platforms, galleries and stairways
required for access to all parts of the plant requiring inspection and maintenance.
Such access facilities shall include the tops of all engine cylinders, engine
controls and instruments, fuel tank, make-up water tank and cooling tower fan.
Piping
Piping shall generally comply with the Specification and shall be of butt welded
construction. Flanged joints shall be used only for connection to equipment,
valves and fittings. Screwed joints and compression type joints shall not be used
for fuel, lubricating oil and compressed air supply. Copper piping shall not be
used for fuel or lubricating oil services.
Piping shall be neatly arranged and adequately supported. The Contractor shall
submit detailed arrangement drawings of all pipework for approval by the
Owner before erection at Site.
Valves
Valves shall conform to the Specification.
Valves shall have flanged end connection. Screwed valves shall not be used
unless specifically approved. Valves for air, water, fuel and lubricating oil
services shall be globe or gate type.
All valves shall be provided with a valve number and nameplate inscription
approved by the Owner.
7.8 PROTECTION AND METERING SYSTEM
General
Control and relay protection system of electrical equipment of the project shall
be designed to meet the Viet Nam standards, EVN regulation as well as
specified International Standards. Control and relay protection system shall be
designed according to follow:
Part I, II, III, IV Vietnam Electrical Equipment Regulation 2006
Decision Coordination and Control Procedure for the

No.1198/QĐ-EVN Protection Relay Setting Calculation
Decision Regulation on technical standard of Integrated

No.2896/QĐ-EVN- Control System, protection configuration, technical
KTLĐ-TĐ specification of relay protection for Overhead line,
Transformer Substation
IEC 60255 (all parts) Electrical Relays
IEC 60068 (all parts) Environmental Testing
IEC 60282 Pt 1 High Voltage Fuses - Current Limiting Fuses
IEC 60282 Pt 2 High Voltage Fuses - Expulsion and Similar Fuses
IEC 60282 Pt 3 High Voltage Fuses - Determination of Short

Circuit Power Factor for Testing Current Limiting
Fuses and Expulsion and Similar Fuses
IEC 60269 Pt 1 Low Voltage Fuses - General Requirements
IEC 60787 Application Guide for the Selection of Fuse Links

of High Voltage Fuses for Transformer Circuit
Applications
IEC 60291 Fuse Definitions
IEC 61869 Instrument Transformers
IEC 60947 (all parts) Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
IEC 60898 Electrical Accessories - Circuit Breakers for Over-

current Protection for Household and Similar
Installations.
IEC 60687 Alternating Current Static Watt-hour Meters for

Active Energy (Classes 0.2S and 0.5S)
Moreover where control, metering and protection equipment and systems

supplied under this Contract must interface with equipment and systems being
supplied by others or integrate into systems being supplied by others the
Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the proposed design and
the proposed equipment is fully compatible and suitable for same and the
Bidder/Contractor shall co-operate fully with the Owner in this regard.
All equipment panels shall be floor mounted and of free-standing construction
with cable glands arranged for bottom cable entry
All equipment and components located on panels shall be suitably positioned to
facilitate easy and efficient operation in service.
The equipment shall be designed with due regard to providing an installation
with a high standard of appearance.
All panels in the same room shall have the same finish colour and the final finish
colour shall be subject to approval by the Owner
In all cases prior to dispatch the completed panels and equipment shall be
routine tested in the manufacturer’s works and the Bidder/Contractor shall give
at least two (2) months prior notice of such tests and shall submit at that time
the manufacturers Factory Test Protocol documentation for review and approval
by the Owner
Following completion of all tests the Factory Test Report shall be submitted by
the Bidder/Contractor and the equipment shall not be dispatched from the works
prior to its approval by the Owner.
The Owner reserves the right to attend all Factory Tests
The configuration, function, calculation and setting value of protection relay for
Generator, Generator Step Up Transformer, Excitation Transformer, Unit
Auxiliary Transformer, 500kV Overhead Line shall be complied and approved
by National Load Dispatching Center (NLDC or A0)
The calculation and setting value sheet shall show clearly the time, value and
zone for each function of protection relay.
The calculation and setting sheet of total plant (HV, MV, LV) shall be carried
out by only one party to ensure selectivity, speed, sensitivity, reliability,
simplicity, economy to release the fault, Protection Co-ordination and miss-
operation.
Contractor shall be responsible to combine and submit the calculation and
setting sheet of total plant (HV, MV, LV) into one document before Reliability
Run of last Unit.
The protection tripping matrix shall be submitted to Owner.
The fault monitoring system (FMS) shall be provided to monitor the event of
fault. The communication output ports of the numerical generator protection
systems (No.1 and No.2 schemes), excitation transformer, generator step up
transformer & unit auxiliary transformer protection systems, 500V overhead
line protection and of the protection relays used in MV (11kV) power system
shall be connected to the central monitoring, relay setting and recording station
which will be located in Electronic equipment room of the Central Control
Building (CCB)
This section established the criteria and minimum requirements for the
protection of the power station electrical system comprising the generator,
generator step up transformer, generator excitation transformer, unit auxiliary
transformer, 500kV OHL, 11 kV and 400 V A.C. auxiliary power systems. The
11 kV and 400 V auxiliary power systems comprise the main switchboards in
the CCB and other Control Buildings together with associated outgoing circuits.
The Bidder shall also provide a dual, fully duplicated unit synchronizing system.
It shall include duplicated automatic synchronisers, manual check synchroniser
and other indicating instrument to allow automatic and manual synchronizing
of the generator circuit breaker.
The Bidder shall also provide a station synchronizing system which includes a
manual check synchronizing relay for the 11 kV station incomers and unit-
station interconnector circuit breakers.
The electrical protection schemes shall be designed to promptly, precisely and
reliably isolate from service any element of the power system when that element
is subjected to an abnormal condition detrimental to its effective operation,
while leaving other unaffected elements in service. The protection schemes shall
also be designed so that they do not operate under load conditions or faults
external to the relevant zone.
The protection systems shall be based on digital, microprocessor based device
with monitoring, measurement and communication capability.
The communication output ports of the numerical generator protection systems
(No.1 and No.2 schemes), excitation transformer, generator step up transformer
& unit auxiliary transformer protection systems, 500V overhead line protection
and of the protection relays used in MV (11kV) power system shall be connected
to the central monitoring, relay setting and recording station which will be
located as close as possible to the CCR.
Suitable menu-guided software to communicate with these protective relays via
a personal computer shall be provided, installed and tested to a satisfactory
performance. This central monitoring and control station shall be connected to
the Station ICMS via a “Miscellaneous Station System” drop.
The protection relays and systems shall meet all requirements of IEC 60255 and
other IEC publications.
(a) Design philosophy
In general, the 11kV power system shall be non-effectively earthed via resistors
connected to the neutral points of 11kV windings of power transformers. These
resistors are to limit earth fault current to 400 amps and shall meet maximum
time duration of 30 seconds.
Neutral earthing transformers shall be provided for non-effective earthing of the
neutral points of the generators and the neutral displacement relays shall be
connected to the secondary side of these transformers.
Technical specification of relay:
 Frequency: 50Hz
 Input Current: 1A
 Input voltage: 110V
 Type: Numerical protection relay, microprocessor, event
recording/data display
The protection systems shall include at least the following:
Generator: - Overspeed (12)
The generator protection - Phase distance (21G)
system will have duplicate
systems (redundancy) for - Generator overfluxing (24G)
each unit, each system - Synchronizing checking (25)
shall have at least - Under voltage (27)
following protection:
- Reverse power (32)
- Loss of excitation (40)
- Negative phase sequence (46)
- Overload (49)
- Overcurrent/undervoltage (50/27)
- Breaker failure (50BF)
- Stator earth fault 95% (59GN)
- Stator earth fault 100% (64GN)
- Voltage balance (60)
- Generator rotor earth fault (64R or 64F)
- Different phase angle or Out of step
protection (78)
- Over/under frequency protection
(81O/81U)
- Differential (87G)
- Inter turn stator winding fault
- Subsynchronous resonance protection
- Lock out device (86)
- Trip circuit supervision (74)
Excitation transformer
The excitation transformer - Overload (49)
protection system will - Instantaneous overcurrent (50)
have duplicate systems
(redundancy) for each - Inverse time overcurrent (51)
unit, each system shall - Differential (87ET)
have at least following
protection: - Lock out device (86)
Generator Step Up Transformer: - Overfluxing (24)
The Generator Step up - Overload (49)
Transformer protection
system will have duplicate - Instantaneous overcurrent and earth
systems (redundancy) for fault overcurrent. (50/50N)
each unit, each system - Inverse time overcurrent and earth fault
shall have at least overcurrent. (51/51N)
following protection: - Restricted Earth Fault (87REF)
- Differential (87T)
Unit Auxiliary Transformers: - Overfluxing (24)
The Unit Auxiliary - Overload (49)
Transformer protection
system will have duplicate - Instantaneous overcurrent and earth
systems (redundancy) for fault overcurrent. (50/50N)
each unit, each system - Inverse time overcurrent and earth fault
shall have at least overcurrent. (51/51N)
following protection: - Restricted Earth Fault (87REF)
- Differential (87UT)
Non-electric protection for - Oil temperature (26O)
GSUT&UAT:
- Winding temperature (26W)
Non-electric protection for
GSUT&UAT of each unit shall - Pressure relief device Trip (63)
have at least following protection: - Sudden Pressure (63 OLTC)
- Oil level (71)
- Oil level OLTC (71 OLTC)
- Oil flow OLTC (80 OLTC)
- Cooler fault (95)
- Buchholz relay (96)
500kV EHV Over Head Line - Distance (21/21N)
Protection (Incoming)
- Under/Over voltage (27/59)
500kV EHV overhead line
protection system will - Breaker failure (50BF)
have duplicate systems - Instantaneous overcurrent and earth
(redundancy) for each fault overcurrent. (50/50N)
circuit, each system shall - Inverse time overcurrent and earth fault
have at least following overcurrent. (51/51N)
protection:
- Directional overcurrent (67/67N)
- Auto-recloser (79/25)
- Carrier or pilot-wire receiver/signal
(85)
- Differential (87L)
- Fault recorder/ Fault location (FR/FL)
11kV Switchgears: - Under voltage (27)
- Over voltage (59)
- Instantaneous earth fault overcurrent.
(50N)
- Inverse time overcurrent earth fault
overcurrent. (51N)
- Busbar protection (87B)
- Synchonization check (25)
- Local back up
11 kV Motors (More than 1MW): - Over speed motor protection (12)
- Under speed motor protection (14)
- Under voltage (27)
- Over voltage (59)
- Thermal overload (49)
- Instantaneous overcurrent and earth
fault overcurrent. (50/50N)
- Inverse time overcurrent and earth
- Number of Starts per hour (66)
- Differential (87M)
- Vibration Monitoring
- Switching Surge Protection
Other 11 kV motors: - Under speed motor protection (14).
- Over voltage (59)
- Single phasing and unbalance (47)
- Thermal overload. (49)
- Inverse time overcurrent and earth fault
overcurrent. (51/51N)
- Start/stall protection (51LR)
- Switching Surge Protection
11kV-Non Motor feeder - Instantaneous overcurrent and earth
11kV VT bus panel - Under voltage (27)
- Over voltage (59)
400 V Motors (above 110kW): - Under speed motor protection (14).
- Over voltage (59)
- Single phasing and unbalance (47)
- Inverse time earth fault overcurrent.
(51N)
- Start/stall protection (51LR)
400 V Motors (below 110kW): - Under voltage (27)
- Over voltage (59)
- ACB/MCCB/MCB
400 V Switchboards: - Under voltage (27)
- Over voltage (59)
Emergency Diesel Generator - Under voltage (27)
- Over Voltage (59)
- Reverse power(32)
- Overcurrent (51)
- Earth fault (51G)
- Loss of Excitation.(40)
- Negative sequence protection (46)
- Thermal overload (49)
- Over/Under Frequency (81O/81U)
- Differential (87DG)
Unit Overall Differential Overall Differential protection (87O)
protection
500kV EHV OHL protection
Two (2) 500kV EHV overhead line connections between the Generator Step-
Up Transformers gantries and the 500kV EHV Switchyard gantries shall be
provided with two (2) main protection (Main Line Differential Protection) fed
from separate current transformers. The scheme using the Generator step-up
transformer overall differential protections as main protections may also be
considered.
The differential protections shall be equipped fibre optic communication
channels, fibre optic cable and auxiliaries for connection.
The configuration, type and specification of protection relay and auxiliaries at
both side of 500kV Overhead Line shall be same, compatible and complied with
the Viet Nam standards, EVN regulation on the protection relay for 500kV OHL
with transmitted signal by Optical cable.
The auxiliary protection relays shall also be provided in accordance with the
related drawing and standards.
Both ends of the circuit shall be tripped by the Main protections.
Sufficient output contacts shall be included to operate separately, duplicate trip
coils on each circuit-breaker pole.
A feature shall be included to allow a direct inter-trip signal to be superimposed
on the protection scheme.
Evidence of through fault stability shall be provided and shall be subject to
approval by the Owner including current transformer knee point voltage
calculations related to maximum system fault levels and X/R ratios together
with relay type test reports to justify any formulae used.
The overall operating time of the differential protection or direct inter-trip
feature shall not exceed 30ms.
The protection shall be, as far as possible, self-monitoring and shall include end
to end supervision of the data channel with blocking of the protection if a defect
is detected.
Facilities shall be provided for routine testing of the equipment while in service.
Preference shall be given to relays with internal memory of data relating to
monitoring quantities and of fault data for three (3) or more fault operations.
The interface arrangement with the signal multiplexer shall be completely
compatible with other signaling requirements which may be required and all
interface cabling, fibre optic or otherwise and interface units shall be included.
A back-up time delayed overcurrent protection shall be included within the
digital differential relay or shall be provided by separate relays sharing the Main
1 protection current transformers
Generator Protection
Generator Impedance Relay (21)

A protection scheme using a two (2) stage impedance relay shall be provided,
the first stage being instantaneous and responding to stator circuit phase to phase
faults such that it shall provide virtually a third main protection.
The second stage impedance relay shall be set to overreach the GSUT and HV
busbar and shall be time delayed for discrimination with the HV protection.
Overfluxing Protection (24)
To prevent generator and auxiliary transformer overfluxing during run up, run
down, or on MVAr absorption from the power system, an overfluxing relay shall
be provided for connection to a voltage transformer located between the
generator and generator transformer.
The relay shall be a two (2) stage device. Stage 1 shall be arranged after a time
delay to lower the AVR, and prevent increase of AVR if the generator circuit-
breaker is open.
Stage 2 after a further time delay should be arranged to open the field circuit-
breaker if the generator circuit-breaker is open.
Operation of Stage 2 should also initiate shutdown of the machine via the low
forward power relay.
Stage 1 time delay settings should cover the range 1-10 seconds and Stage 2
time delay settings should cover the range 5-60 seconds.
The voltage/frequency ratio setting range should be continuously adjustable
between 1.0 and 1.25 times.
The relay should reset when the ratio of voltage/frequency drops to no less than
95% of the pick-up value.
The relay should provide alarms in the CCR for both Stage 1 and Stage 2.
Generator Reverse Power Protection (32-1 / 32-2)
Two (2) stage generator reverse power protection shall be adequately sensitive
to detect a motoring condition on complete loss of input to the turbine. In
addition the protection shall be as sensitive as practical to detect governor failure.
A time delayed trip output shall be provided such that there shall be no risk of
incorrect operation caused for example by rotor swings accompanying a system
electrical fault.
Generator Loss of Excitation Protection (40)
The loss of excitation protection shall be additional to any loss of excitation
devices included in the excitation system or automatic voltage regulator.
The protection shall monitor the generator terminal impedance vector and shall
have a negative reactance offset mho (circular) characteristic with adjustable
offset and adjustable diameter.
The relay shall be operative down to 5% voltage.
An adjustable time delay shall be provided.
Generator Negative Phase Sequence Protection (46)
The generator negative phase sequence protection shall comprise a two (2) stage
device.
Stage 1 (alarm) shall have an adjustable setting to match the generator
continuous negative phase sequence capability and shall include an adjustable
definite time delay or a fixed time delay of not less than 3 seconds.
Stage 2 (trip) shall have an adjustable thermal characteristic capable of being
set to match the generator short time negative phase sequence capability, based
on I22t = a constant.
It shall be possible to set Stage 2 to pick-up at a negative phase sequence current
equal to the generator continuous capability while still closely matching the
generator I22t capability.
Generator Under-Voltage Started Overcurrent Protection (51V)
The above relays shall be of the 3 phase microprocessor, multi-characteristic
inverse/definite minimum time current type in accordance with BS 142, 3
second curve, and shall be provided with adjustable current settings as specified
and time multiplier adjustments at intervals of 0.025.
The starting relay shall be of the 3 phase instantaneous under-voltage type with
a setting range of 50-80% voltage and a high drop-off/pick-up ratio of not less
than 90%. The relay shall be self reset with no flag indicator.
Generator Overvoltage Protection (59)
The generator overvoltage protection shall be supplied to detect overvoltages at
the generator terminals. Essentially the protection is a back-up device, operable
if the generator automatic voltage regulator is faulty.
The overvoltage relay shall have an adjustable setting range up to 1.4 per unit
rated voltage and shall have an adjustable time delay of 0.5-5 sec.
Busbar Earth Fault Protection (59NB)
These relays shall be connected to an open delta secondary winding of a voltage
transformer.
The relay shall have a minimum voltage setting of not greater than 10% of the
maximum residual voltage of the voltage transformer secondary windings
which energise the relay.
The relay shall have either a definite time delay or inverse definite minimum
time delay so that the minimum operating time may be set to not less than 3
seconds. The relay shall be insensitive to harmonic voltages.
Generator Stator Earth Fault Protection (59GN/64GN)
The stator earth fault protection shall detect earth faults on 95% of the generator
winding. The relay shall be insensitive to frequencies other than 50Hz. The relay
shall be instantaneous in operation and shall be rated for 5 minutes operation
with a full voltage earth fault on the system.
100% Stator Earth Fault Protection shall be achieved by the continuous injection
of a voltage on to the stator circuit at a suitable frequency other than system
frequency (or by other approved means).
The protection shall be functional with the machine on load, shut down or while
running up or down with or without excitation applied. The injected supply and
all input supplies shall be continuously monitored. The equipment shall include
any necessary injection transformers.
Rotor Earth Fault Equipment (64F/64R)
Equipment of an approved type shall be provided to indicate an earth fault on
the generator rotor winding whilst the machine is running.
An alarm shall be initiated in the CCR (CCR)if a single rotor earth fault, whether
transient or otherwise, occurs.
The equipment shall detect earth faults under any conditions of speed, load or
rotor temperature.
A double earth fault on the rotor winding shall cause instantaneous tripping of
the generator.
Full details of the equipment and the method of detection offered that is
potentiometer, A.C. or D.C. injection method shall be submitted with the Bid.
Out of step (78)
Pole slipping protection shall operate by monitoring the generator and system
impedance as viewed at the generator terminals. Adjustable ohmic settings shall
be available to accommodate the possible range of system condition.
A trip output shall be given if the generator slips one (1) or more complete poles
only if the impedance locus remains in the operate region for a minimum time
of 50ms.
Over and Under Frequency Relays (81)
These relays shall be of the microprocessor type and shall be provided with two
(2) adjustable over and under frequency settings and two (2) adjustable time
settings for each frequency setting. The relay shall be energised from an external
D.C. power supply and shall be capable of full operation over a measurement
voltage range of 60-120 percent of nominal voltage.
Generator Differential Circulating Current Protection (87G)
The differential circulating current protection shall be of the 3-pole high
impedance relay type using Class X current transformers.
Before approval of the scheme the Bidder/Contractor shall submit full details of
calculated performance including current transformer design data and full
details of any non-linear resistors and setting resistors proposed.
Low Forward Power Interlock Relays (37G)
Two (2) low forward power interlock relays shall be supplied for the steam
turbine generator to act as a permissive interlock in the generator tripping
circuits to reduce the risk of overspeed by delaying opening of the generator
circuit-breaker for certain non-urgent fault conditions. The relay shall be
designed to close its contacts when the level of real power output falls below a
preset level, and open on increase of real power output.
The relay shall be a three phase A.C. power measuring device, capable of
measuring both balanced and unbalanced power, capable of carrying 3 times
full load continuously, at rated voltage.
The relay setting shall be preset and have an operating value of plus 0.5% of
rated forward three phase power and the minimum pick up value shall be no less
than plus 0.2% three phase power and the maximum pick up value no greater
than plus 0.7% rated three phase power. These settings shall be the limiting
values and shall be effective over the range of phase angles 89” lag to 89” lead.
The combined phase angle error of CT’s and VT’s must not exceed 20 minutes
over the ranges 80% - 120% voltage and 5% - 120% current at any burden from
25% - 100% of rating.
To enable current and voltage transformer errors to be compensated, the relay
shall be fitted with a device to allow easy setting on Site to cover the whole
range of errors permitted for the current transformers and voltage transformers.
The power relay shall include a time delay on pick up capable of fine adjustment
between 1 and 10 secs.
At least two (2) output contacts shall be provided, which shall close when the
level of output power falls below the set value, and shall be suitable for initiating
a trip relay operating coil.
An operation indicator is not required.
The following protection relays shall initiate tripping of the machine via the low
forward power interlock relay:
Generator transformer and unit auxiliary transformer winding temperature trip,
field failure, stator earth fault 1 and 2, over fluxing stage 2, overvoltage and unit
auxiliary transformer MV earth fault.
Voltage Transformer Supervision Relays (60)
The main purpose of the voltage transformer supervision function is to indicate
the VT failure.
When a VT failure occurs on one or two phases, the voltage levels seen by the
protection become unbalanced.
The relays shall compare the secondary voltages of a pair of voltage
transformers and shall be arranged to block the protection tripping before it has
time to operate on loss of voltage.
Trip circuit supervision Relay (74)
Trip circuit supervision Relay are connected through resistors, are installed to
monitor all the trip circuits when CBs hay other automatic devices are at close
or trip position. This relay has the lag time to avoid inaccurate alarming cases.
Relay just only alarm if the voltage supplied for trip circuit or auxiliary source
are faulted
Sub-Synchronous Resonance protection
Contractor shall to provide the solution of protection relay, supplementary
excitation damping control, Blocking Filter…) for Sub-synchronous Resonance
(SSR) to ensure the safety and stability operation of Quang Trach I TPP as well
as Power Grid. Contractor shall submit all detailed calculation sheet, setting
sheet, solution, test to prevent the SSR phenomenon.
Other relays
Other relays shall be provided in accordance with the drawing of this Request
for Proposal Document and the related standards
Unit Overall differential Protection (87O)
Unit overall differential protection relays shall provide to protect the full range
of the Generator-Generator step up transformers-Unit auxiliary transformer
block to ensure the safety operation of Power Plant.
Generator Step-Up Transformer Protection
Transformer Biased Differential Protection (87T)

Transformer differential relays shall have a load current bias adequate to
overcome the effects of the full range of tap changing of the protected
transformer. Interposing current transformer ratios shall be chosen to achieve
exact overall balance with the transformer at the mid-point of the tapping range.
Second harmonic bias (or other approved means) shall be included to overcome
the un-stabilising effect of transformer magnetising in rush current. Delayed
operation is not an approved means and induction disc relays shall not be used.
Restricted Earth Fault Protection (87NT)
The restricted earth fault protection shall be of the high impedance relay type
using Class X current transformers shared with transformer biased differential
protection.
Before approval of the schemes the Bidder/Contractor shall submit full details
of the calculated performance including the effects of the biased differential
relays and interposing current transformers and including full details of all
setting resistors, non-linear resistors proposed and current transformer design
data.
The fault setting shall be within the limits 10-60% of the rated current of
transformer windings with solidly earthed neutral.
For transformer windings connected to impedance earthed systems the fault
setting shall be within the limits 10-25% of the minimum current available for
an earth fault at the transformer line terminals.
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection (50-51/50N-51N)
These relays shall be of the microprocessor, multi-characteristic inverse definite
minimum time/current type in accordance with BS 142 and shall be provided
with adjustable current settings as specified and time multiplier adjustments at
intervals of 0.025.
High set instantaneous elements shall be of the transient free type (i.e.: they
shall be insensitive to the direct component of fault current). All high set
elements shall be provided with a means of achieving an infinite setting.
Buchholz Relays (96B)
Transformers with the conservator type of oil preservation system shall be fitted
with gas and oil actuated relays (Buchholz type). These relays shall be of the
two (2) element type having alarm contacts for when gassing occurs and trip
contacts for when oil surging occurs. The relay shall include a lock-out device
(located inside the case) to lock out the Buchholz trip circuit.
Transformers with the sealed tank or positive nitrogen pressure oil preservation
systems shall be fitted with sudden pressure relays. These relays shall provide
trip contacts for abnormal rate-of-rise of pressure within the transformer tank.
Additionally each generator transformer and inter bus transformer with positive
nitrogen pressure oil preservation system shall be provided with gas analyser
relays.
These relays shall automatically test the combustibility of the nitrogen at regular
intervals and shall initiate an alarm circuit if the combustible content of the gas
over the surface of the oil exceeds a predetermined level.
All necessary flag indication tripping relays and alarm relays associated with
this protection shall be provided.
Pressure Relief Device (63)
A pressure relief device on the main tank and on the diverter switch oil
compartment set to open on excess pressure and to re-seal automatically
complete with trip contacts.
The oil flow shall be directed away from equipment, towards the ground and
the oil shall be contained within the transformer bund.
Winding Temperature (26W)
An eye level mounted dial thermometer to read HV and LV winding
temperatures fitted with a red maximum indicating pointer and with adjustable
trip and alarm contacts, adjustable from 70-100oC.
Oil Temperature (26O)
An eye level mounted dial thermometer to read top oil temperature fitted with a
red maximum indicating pointer and with adjustable trip and alarm contacts
adjustable from 70-100oC.
Two (2) additional temperature devices, either thermometers or thermostats,
with the same temperature adjustable range shall be provided as back-up.
Transformer Auxiliary Relays (overflux, overload,..)
Transformer auxiliary relays shall be provided for repeat of the Buchholz, oil
flow, oil level, pressure relief, winding and oil temperature alarms and trips.
 Over fluxing (24);
 Overload protection (49);
 Etc.
Other relays
Other relays shall be provided in accordance with the drawing of this Request
for Proposal Document and the related standards.
Unit Auxiliary Transformer Protection
Transformer Biased Differential Protection (87UT)

Transformer differential relays shall have a load current bias adequate to
overcome the effects of the full range of tap changing of the protected
transformer. Interposing current transformer ratios shall be chosen to achieve
exact overall balance with the transformer at the mid-point of the tapping range.
Second harmonic bias (or other approved means) shall be included to overcome
the un-stabilising effect of transformer magnetising in rush current. Delayed
operation is not an approved means and induction disc relays shall not be used.
Restricted Earth Fault Protection (87REF)
The restricted earth fault protection shall be of the high impedance relay type
using Class X current transformers shared with transformer biased differential
protection.
Before approval of the schemes the Bidder/Contractor shall submit full details
of the calculated performance including the effects of the biased differential
relays and interposing current transformers and including full details of all
setting resistors, non-linear resistors proposed and current transformer design
data.
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection (50/51; 50N-51N)
These relays shall be of the microprocessor, multi-characteristic inverse definite
minimum time/current type in accordance with BS 142 and shall be provided
with adjustable current settings as specified and time multiplier adjustments at
intervals of 0.025.
High set instantaneous elements shall be of the transient free type (i.e.: they
shall be insensitive to the direct component of fault current). All high set
elements shall be provided with a means of achieving an infinite setting.
Buchholz relay (96)
Transformers with the conservator type of oil preservation system shall be fitted
with gas and oil actuated relays (Buchholz type). These relays shall be of the
two (2) element type having alarm contacts for when gassing occurs and trip
contacts for when oil surging occurs. The relay shall include a lock-out device
(located inside the case) to lock out the Buchholz trip circuit.
Transformers with the sealed tank or positive nitrogen pressure oil preservation
systems shall be fitted with sudden pressure relays. These relays shall provide
trip contacts for abnormal rate-of-rise of pressure within the transformer tank.
Additionally each generator transformer and inter bus transformer with positive
nitrogen pressure oil preservation system shall be provided with gas analyser
relays.
These relays shall automatically test the combustibility of the nitrogen at regular
intervals and shall initiate an alarm circuit if the combustible content of the gas
over the surface of the oil exceeds a predetermined level.
All necessary flag indication tripping relays and alarm relays associated with
this protection shall be provided.
Pressure Relief Device (63)
A pressure relief device on the main tank and on the diverter switch oil
compartment set to open on excess pressure and to re-seal automatically
complete with trip contacts.
The oil flow shall be directed away from equipment, towards the ground and
the oil shall be contained within the transformer bund.
Winding Temperature (26W)
An eye level mounted dial thermometer to read HV and LV winding
temperatures fitted with a red maximum indicating pointer and with adjustable
trip and alarm contacts, adjustable from 70-100°C.
Oil Temperature (26O)
An eye level mounted dial thermometer to read top oil temperature fitted with a
red maximum indicating pointer and with adjustable trip and alarm contacts
adjustable from 70-100°C.
Two (2) additional temperature devices, either thermometers or thermostats,
with the same temperature adjustable range shall be provided as back-up.
Transformer Auxiliary Relays
Transformer auxiliary relays shall be provided for repeat of the buchholz, oil
flow, oil level, pressure relief, winding and oil temperature alarms and trips.
 Over fluxing (24);
 Overload protection (49);
 Etc.
Other relays
Other relays shall be in accordance with the drawing of this Request for
Proposal
Auxiliary Power Transformers protection
Power transformers are connected to the MV switchgears (above 400V) shall

have at minimum the following protection relays:
(1) Three-phase differential protection: the zone of protection shall include the HV
terminals of the transformer; the transformers and its LV connections up to LV
switchgear. (for rating of 2.5 MVA and above)
(2) Neutral earth fault protection in the neutral of the HV winding.

(3) Three-phase overcurrent protection (instantaneous and inverse definite
minimum time [IDMT] characteristics) on the HV side of the transformer. This
protection shall co-ordinate with the thermal capability of the transformer and
the overcurrent protection provided at the LV incoming circuit breaker at LV
switchboard.
(4) Neutral earth fault protection in the neutral of the LV winding. This protection
shall co-ordinate with the earth fault protection provided at the LV main
incoming circuit breaker at LV switchboard.
(5) Restricted earth fault protection for the transformer LV winding.

(6) The power transformer protection shall incorporate signals from the following
sources:
 Transformer winding hot temperature.
 Transformer Buchholz (oil surge) device (if applicable).
 LV switchboard busbar protection (if applicable).
 Hot oil temperature.
 Tapchanger overpressure.
(7) The power transformer protection shall provide trip signals to the following
sources:
 MV feeder circuit breaker at MV switchgear.
 LV incoming circuit breaker at LV switchboard
Emergency Diesel Generator Protection
The Contractor shall provide at least the following generator protections:

 Differential
 Overcurrent
 Earth fault
 Over Voltage
 Under voltage
 Over/Under frequency
 Reverse power
 Thermal overload
 Loss of Excitation.
 Negative sequence protection
 Lock out device
 etc
All protections listed above shall trip the 400 V circuit breaker (the lock out
relay shall also be provided this circuit breaker), generator excitation and the
diesel engine and raise an alarm, except for thermal overload which shall alarm
only.
The Bidder shall describe the proposed generator protections.
Test links shall be provided in current and voltage input circuits to electrical
protection relays. Trip isolation links or other means of providing isolation of
in-service protection relays for test shall be provided
11 kV Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary and Station)
(1) The incoming supplies from the Station and Unit Auxiliary transformers to their
corresponding 11kV switchboards shall be provided with three-phase
overcurrent protection (IDMT characteristics) and earth fault protection.
The three-phase overcurrent protection settings shall be coordinated with the
three-phase overcurrent protection provided on the HV side of Unit Auxiliary
transformers to ensure discriminative tripping and back-up protection. Similarly,
the earth fault protection settings shall be coordinated with the neutral
earth fault protection on the LV side of the respective transformers.
In addition, both three-phase overcurrent and earth fault protection shall be
coordinated with outgoing circuit protection.
(2) The Interconnector circuits between 11kV switchgear switchboard (Station

services and Unit Auxiliary) shall be provided with three-phase overcurrent
protection (IDMT characteristics) and earth fault protection.
The three-phase overcurrent protection and earth fault protection settings on the
interconnector circuits shall be coordinated to ensure tripping of these
interconnector circuits prior to the tripping of the incoming circuit breaker of
the Station switchboard or Unit switchboard.
coordinated with the protection provided on the switchboard outgoing circuits.
(3) Feeder circuits to load centres, and to step-down transformers associated with
the variable speed drives (if there are any variable speed drives) shall be
provided with three-phase overcurrent protection (instantaneous and IDMT
characteristics) and earth fault protection (instantaneous and IDMT
characteristics). The settings on these types of protection shall ensure co-
ordination and discrimination with the protection provided in the load centres
and also with the thermal capability of the protected transformers.
(4) Each 11kV Unit Auxiliary switchboards shall be provided with busbar
protection.
The busbar protection shall also provide trip signals to associated interconnector
circuits and all circuits connected to the 11kV Unit switchboard.
(5) Each 11kV Unit Auxiliary switchboard supplying one or more motors shall be
provided with under voltage protection. This under voltage protection shall
initiate load shedding to prevent connection of all the motor loads
simultaneously on the return of A.C. power source to the 11kV bus.
(6) If there are any variable speed drives connected to the 11kV switchboards (Unit
Auxiliary or Station), the need for protection from harmonics that will be
generated from the static power unit forming part of the variable speed drive
units will need to be evaluated. Consideration for 11kV harmonic filters and
their effect on the performance of the Unit Auxiliary transformers shall be
evaluated and provided if required
(7) Each section of the 11kV Station switchboard shall be provided with busbar
protection.
The busbar protection shall also provide trip signals to associated interconnector
circuits, incoming Station transformer and all outgoing circuits.
(8) If there are motors connected to any section of 11kV Station switchboard, that
section of 11kV station switchboard shall be provided with under voltage
protection. This under voltage protection shall initiate load shedding to prevent
connection of all the motor loads simultaneously on the return of A.C. power
source to the 11kV bus
(9) Under and over voltage protection relay (27/59)
(10) Synchronization and synchronizing check relay (25)
(11) Breaker failure protection relay (50BF)

400 V Distribution System (Unit Auxiliary and Station)
(1) The 11kV/400V Unit Auxiliary transformers, the 11kV/400V Station Auxiliary,
Station Emergency transformers shall be provided with winding temperature
detector for alarm. The neutral of the 400V windings shall be provided with the
inverse time neutral earth fault protection.
The incoming supplies from the 11kV/400V Station Auxiliary & Station
Emergency and Unit Auxiliary transformers to their corresponding 400V
switchboards shall be provided with three-phase overcurrent protection (IDMT
characteristics) and earth fault protection.
The three phase overcurrent protection settings shall be coordinated with the
three phase overcurrent protection provided on the 11kV side of the Station
Auxiliary, Emergency Station and Unit Auxiliary transformers to ensure
discriminative tripping and back up protection. Similarly, the earth fault
protection settings shall be coordinated with the neutral earth fault protection on
the 400V side of the respective transformer.
In addition, both three phase overcurrent and earth fault protection shall be
coordinated with the protection provided on outgoing circuits.
(2) The Interconnector circuits between 400V switchboard (Station Auxiliary,

Station Emergency and Unit Auxiliary) shall be provided with three phase
overcurrent protection (IDMT characteristics) and earth fault protection.
The three phase overcurrent protection and earth fault protection settings on the
interconnector circuits shall be coordinated to ensure tripping of these
interconnector circuits prior to the tripping of the incoming circuit breakers of
the 400V Station auxiliary switchboard.
coordinated with the protection provided on outgoing circuits.
(3) The load centre MCC feeder circuits shall be provided with three phase
overcurrent protection (instantaneous and IDMT characteristics) and earth fault
protection (instantaneous and IDMT characteristics). The settings on these types
of protection shall ensure co ordination and discrimination with the protection
provided on outgoing circuits in the load canters.
(4) The essential section of the 400V Unit Auxiliary switchboard shall be provided
with under voltage protection. On detection of under voltage, it shall trip the
normal power source breaker and automatically transfer to an alternative power
source (from 11kV/400V emergency transformer) to ensure an uninterruptable
power supply source.
(5) The non essential section of each 400V Unit Auxiliary switchboard shall also
be provided with under voltage protection. This under voltage protection shall
initiate load shedding to prevent connection of all the motor loads
simultaneously on the return of A.C. power source to the 400V switchboard.
(6) If there are any variable speeds drives connected to the 400V switchboard, the
need for protection from harmonics that will be generated from the static power
unit forming part of the variable speed drive units will be evaluated.
Consideration for 400V harmonic filters and their effect on the performance of
the Unit Auxiliary, Station Auxiliary and Station Emergency transformers shall
need to be evaluated and provided if required.
400 V Motor Control Centre (Unit Auxiliary and Station Services)
(1) The incoming feeder circuits shall be provided with three-phase overcurrent
protection (instantaneous and IDMT characteristics).
(2) Outgoing circuits shall be protected thermally and against short-circuit faults by
the following devices:
 Combination starters consisting of adjustable magnetic trip-only breakers and
thermal overload elements in each phase of the starter.
 MCCB/ MCB
Motor Protection
General
Motors shall be protected against short-circuit faults, overload, stall and surge
taking into account the following:
 Motor characteristics such as type, speed, voltage, kW rating, service factor,
thermal capabilities during starting, running and stall conditions.
 Motor starting magnitude and duration of inrush current.
 Inertia characteristics of the load (valve and high inertia loads).
 Switching surges and pre strike, re strike voltage magnitudes due to switching
by vacuum switchgear, exposure to harmonics when motors are powered
from variable speed drives.
 Motor service criticality of the motors for reliability and availability of the
overall plant.
The pickup settings and trip settings for each protection relay shall be calculated
in accordance with requirements of the respective manufacturer's instruction
manuals, maximum fault currents, load currents and proper co ordination with
the protection provided with the incoming supply feeders.
Motor Electrical Protection Functions
As a minimum, the plant drive motor protection shall comprise the following
protection functions:
(1) 11kV motors greater than 1 MW:

Motor three phase differential protection.
Motor protection consisting of thermal overload, instantaneous overcurrent,
instantaneous single phasing and unbalance, definite time delayed earth fault,
under voltage, stalling protection and number of starts per hour.
Three-phase surge absorbers to protect against switching surges and pre-strike
voltages associated with the making and breaking of currents using vacuum
circuit breakers.
(2) Other 11kV motors

instantaneous single phasing and unbalance, instantaneous earth fault, under
voltage, stalling protection and number of starts per hour.
Three-phase surge absorbers to protect against switching surges and pre-strike
voltages associated with the making and breaking of currents using vacuum
circuit breakers.
(3) 400V motors equal or above 110kW

instantaneous single phasing and unbalance, instantaneous core balance earth
fault, under voltage and stalling protection.
(4) 400V motors less than 110kW

For motors with ratings up to 110kW, the protection consists of MCCB/MCB
in each phase of the motor supply, core balance earth fault, under voltage and
thermal overload elements which are incorporated in the motor combination
starter units.
Revenue/Tariff Metering
General
The contractor shall be responsible for design, installation, test and
commissioning the tariff metering system in accordance with:
 Agreement document of tariff metering system with Electric Power Trading
Company (EPTC);
 Circular 42/2015/TT-BCT dated 1st of December, 2015 of MOIT –
Regulations on tariff metering in power system;
 Circular 30/2014/TT-BCT dated 2nd of October, 2014 of MOIT – Providing
for operation of competitive electricity generation market;
 Decision No. 1232/QĐ-EVN dated on 21 December, 2011" Regulation of
Metering Management at Terminal Point for tariff metering points.
 Decision No. 887/QĐ-EVN dated on 14 October, 2014" Technical
requirement for tariff metering using in Vietnam Electricity.
 Decision No. 103/QĐ-EVN dated on 21 June, 2017" Technical requirement
Tariff metering and data transfer equipment for metering using in Vietnam
Electricity
 Circular No. 23/2013/TT-BKHCN dated 26th September, 2013 Regulation
Calibration, verification and testing for group 2 measuring instruments
 Relevant National Technical Codes and Regulations;
 IEC 61869 Instrument Transformer
 IEC 62053 Electricity metering equipment
 International standards and codes in relation to tariff metering system.
The tariff metering shall include main tariff metering system and backup tariff
metering system.
 Main tariff metering system and backup 1 tariff metering system are located
at Quang Trach 500kV Switchyard (out of EPC’s scope)
 Location: 500kV Switchyard side
 Accuracy class of CT, VT: 0.2 for main and 0.5 for backup
 Accuracy class of metering (real energy): (0.2 for main and 0.5 for back-up) for
real energy and 2.0 for reactive energy
 Backup 2A tariff metering systems are located at high voltage side of
generator step up transformers
 Location: Quang Trach I side
 Accuracy class of CT, VT: 0.5
 Accuracy class of metering: 0.5 for real energy and 2.0 for reactive
energy
 Backup 2B tariff metering systems (for Vietnam Competitive Generation
Market) are located at high voltage side of unit auxiliary transformers and
generator circuit breaker side.
 Location: Quang Trach I side
 Accuracy class of CT, VT: 0.5
 Accuracy class metering: 0.5 for real energy and 2.0 for reactive energy
All three (3) sets of meters shall have solid state recorders (or latest technology
type recorders with high accuracy) and communication interface. For accurate
measurement of energy exported (kWh, kVArh),
Each identical set of tariff metering shall consist of one (1) import and export
MWh meter, one (1) import and export MVARh meter, accessories plus demand
meters, .
The data storage in MW and MVAR shall be auto-recorded each hour and shall
also be flexible enough to accommodate all without limits.
The meters shall combine voltage and current sensor technology with state of
the art A/D converters, filters and signal processors that accurately reproduce
voltage and current in a wide linear range per phase, to the 15th harmonic.
The meters shall have an accurate four-quadrant measurement technique with a
user defined kVA calculation. The data storage matrix shall be flexible enough
to accommodate all known tariff structures without yet testing the matrix limits.
The meters shall preferably use a typical Windows structure and method of use
with the communicating package and data handling packages merged into one
(1) user friendly installation.
The Power measuring data managing and collecting system:
 Power measuring data managing and collecting system shall complied with
the Decision No. 56/QĐ-ĐTĐL dated on 20th May 2011 Regulation on
technical standard for Metering Data Transmission system
 Metering data shall be monitored at power measuring data acquisition and
transmission computer at CCR of Quang Trach I TPP and Power metering
data management center of EVN (refer drawing No. QTI-RFP-CO-009).
 The Technical specification and software for Power measuring data
managing and collecting system shall be complied with the requirement in
Tariff Metering Agreement No. 1012/EPTC-KT&CNTT-KDBĐ on March
26th, 2018 signed between Electricity Power Trading Company (EVNEPTC)
and TPMB2 (Current name is EVNPMB2).
 Contractor shall be responsible to supply all related equipment and
accessories for installation, configuration, test and commissioning the Power
measuring data managing and collecting system.
 Contractor shall be responsible to provide all necessary equipment such as
Router, Converter, Switch, Card,…for connecting to Existing equipment
Power metering data management center of EVN.
The proposed design and the proposed equipment shall be subject to approval
by the Owner.
Meters shall comply with IEC 60687 standard with minimum acceptable
accuracies of (0.2 for main and 0.5 for back-up) for real energy meters and 2.0
for reactive energy meters. Transducers (kWh and kVArh) shall be provided.
The transducers shall have an output range of 4-20 mA. The outputs of the
transducers will be connected to the ICMS.
Various meters required are:
 MWh meter
 MVArh meter
 MW meter with demand indicator
 Voltmeter, Ammeter, Power factor and Frequency meters (for statistical
purpose).
The CTs, VTs and meter for tariff metering system shall be sampled, verified
and calibrated in accordance with the appropriate test Codes and Standards by
an approved independent testing authority in the local country (Circular No.
23/2013/TT-BKHCN dated September 26th 2013 issued by Ministry of Science
and Technology and current relevant regulation)
All acceptance stage of Tariff metering system shall be complied with EVN
regulation.
Metering Panels
Metering Panels will be installed in the Control Equipment Room of CCB. As
the meters require periodic access for reading purposes they shall be located in
positions where reasonable access is available
Measurement system
For 11kV switchboards measurement current transformers and associated

transducers (power and current) shall be provided for all incoming, outgoing
and motor circuits. The outputs of the transducers will be connected to the ICMS
(integrated control and monitoring system).
Reactive (VARs), voltage and frequency transducers are required for all 11kV
incoming circuits. The busbar connected voltage transformer shall be used. The
outputs of the transducers will be connected to the ICMS.
For LV switchboards (rated at 400 volts or below) measurement current
transformers and associated transducers (current) shall be provided for all
incoming, outgoing and motor circuits. The outputs of the transducers will be
connected to the ICMS.
Power (Watts) transducers are required for all LV incoming circuits and motor
circuits (rated at or above 110 kW). The outputs of the transducers will be
connected to the ICMS.
For each of 11kV switchboard and 400V switchboard, voltage transformer and
associated transducers (voltage and power factor) shall be provided. The outputs
of the transducers will be connected to the ICMS
All transducers shall have an output range of 4-20 mA. The transducers shall
have a live zero feature so that there is a greater than zero value of output for
the low limit of measurement, e.g. 4 to 20 mA AC output for zero to full value
of measurement. The live zero feature is to be used to detect signal failure.
Drawings to be provided by the Contractor during the Contract
The following drawings/data shall be provided by the Contractor during the

contract.
 Protection design calculations
 Relay settings
 Full ac/dc schematics and tripping sequence block diagram
 Overall protection co-ordination diagram
 Motor data sheet and specification
 Outline drawing
 Characteristic curves
 Wiring connection drawing
 CT, VT, Metering certificates
 Other related documents
7.9 AC SYSTEM
General
This section establishes the criteria for the switchgear to be incorporated in the
medium (11kV) and Low voltage (400/230V) power distribution systems.
11kV Switchgear, 400/230V switchboards and auxiliaries for each Unit load
and common load to ensure the safe, efficient and reliable operation of the
Quang Trach I Thermal Power Plant
Switchboard control switches shall be of three position spring return to neutral
type having all the necessary contacts. They shall have contacts of the wiping
type and shall have a mechanical endurance of at least 100,000 operations.
Control selector switches shall be of the four position rotary snap action type
having wiping contacts with a mechanical endurance of at least 100,000
operations. It shall be possible to rotate the switch in a clockwise direction only
and provision shall be included for locking the selector in any position using a
padlock.
The switchboards shall have the following degrees of protection (IP ratings to
IEC 60529) depending on the location of the boards:
 IP 4X (for Indoor, air-conditioning rooms);
 IP 54 ( for Indoor, without air-conditioning rooms);
 IP 56W (for Outdoor).
 IP 55 ( for Indoor Connection/Junction Box )
 IP 65W ( for Outdoor Connection/Junction Box )
 IP 65 ( Dust laden atmosphere)
The remote indication shall be provided to ICMS as below
 MV incoming : Voltage, Current, Power, Power Factor
 MV Bus : Voltage
 MV Tie : Current
 MV Motor Feeder : Current, Power, Power Factor
 MV Static Feeder : N/A
 Transformer Feeder : Power(kWh)
 LV Incoming : Voltage, Current
 LV Bus : Voltage
 LV Tie : Current
 LV ACB Motor Feeder : Current
 The above indication signals shall be enable at both locations (local/remote).
Inner lighting shall be equipped for control panels, power panels and panels
where is required to be lighting level for checking.
Each cubicle shall be provided with hygrostat controlled space heaters. Space
heaters shall be located near the floor so as not to pose any hazard to service
personnel.
Nameplates shall be furnished at each cubicle and at each instrument and device
mounted on or inside the cubicle. The material shall be stainless steel. Caution
notice on suitable metal plate shall be affixed both in front and at the back of
each vertical panel. All labelling, label sizes and colors shall be submitted to
Owner for approval.
This section establishes the criteria for the switchgear to be incorporated in the
high and main low voltage power distribution systems within the CCB of the
power station.
A 20% spare compartment shall be provided for motor control center,
distribution boards for each current rating with all equipment and hardware
provided to receive starter modules.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also provide the necessary 400V switchgear spares
to supply the 400VAC for Quang Trach II Power Plant Project in future for
maintenance.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also provide the necessary 400V switchgear spares
to supply the 400VAC at TT5 for interface with Quang Trach II to transfer coal
from Quang Trach I to Quang Trach II Power Plant and reverse way in the future.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide the necessary cable and accessories for
connection to 11kV incoming switchgear at electrical room of jetty
Manufacturer’s nameplate shall be provided. Nameplate shall show the
technical specification of switchgear (Manufacturer, Rated Voltage, rated
current, phase,…)
Medium Voltage Switchboards (11kV)
Standard
The switchgear shall be designed and tested to the following standards:
IEC 60694 Common clauses for HV switchgear standards switchgear
IEC 60056 HV Alternating Current Circuit Breakers
IEC 60470 HV a.c. Contactors
IEC 60129 AC disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC 61869 Instrument transformers
IEC 61869 Voltage transformers
IEC 60801 Monitoring and control
IEC 60282.1 HV Fuses (for Rated Voltages above 1000 V).
IEC 60420 HV Alternating Current Fuse Switch Combinations and Fuse Circuit
Breaker Combinations
IEC 60298 AC Metal enclosed Switchgear and Control gear >1kV to 52kV
IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures
IEC 62271 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear
Switchgear Types, rating and Requirements
(1) A spare circuit breaker/switching device shall be provided for each current
rating.
(2) The circuit breakers and switching devices shall be capable of meeting their
rated performance when the voltage at the closing device or at the shunt trip
coils is any value from 176V to 264V.
(3) Equipment Description/Ratings:

Circuit Breaker
Voltage: 11 kV
Phases: 3 phase
Frequency: 50 Hz
Current Rating: To be determined from load and the
specification requirements
Breaking and Short-Time three (3) second.
Current Capacity:
Circuit Breaker Type: Vacuum and sealed for life
Control Voltage: 220 V DC or 230VAC
Impulse Withstand 75 kV peak

Voltage:
Withstand Voltage:
The switchgear shall be indoor, metal-clad, floor mounted, draw-out type.
Circuit breakers of the same continuous current rating shall be interchangeable.
Likewise, switching devices of the same rating shall be interchangeable.
Circuit-breakers shall preferably be of the Vacuum type and shall be fully
withdrawal with power contacts, auxiliary contacts and other components as
specified and shall comply with the requirements of IEC 62271-100.
Circuit Breakers shall be provided SERVICE, TEST, and WITHDRAWN
positions, and positive indication shall be provided for SERVICE and TEST
position.
All relays, meters, switches, and lamps will be flush mounted on the respective
cubicle door or on a control cabinet built on the front of the cubicle.
The switchgear shall have motor feeders of rating including 200 kW and above,
feeders for LV auxiliary transformer and radial feeders to feed other 11kV
switchgear. Motors, Incoming, Interconnecting and Outgoing feeders of 11kV
switchgear shall be protected by Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB)
All circuit-breakers shall have two (2) trip coils fed through individual MCBs.
Each individual cubicle D.C. tripping circuit shall be monitored by a trip circuit
supervision relay which shall operate with the circuit-breaker in both the open
and in the closed position.
The circuit-breakers shall be capable of at least 10,000 operations in mechanical
endurance based on an in service life of 30 years with an operating sequence O-
0.3 sec-CO-3 min.-CO.
All circuit-breakers shall be fitted with motor charged spring, stored energy
operating mechanisms, complete with a means of manual charging. The motor
shall be interlocked so that it cannot operate when manual charging is selected.
A surge absorber is required for each phase of circuit breaker to protect the
equipment against possible re-striking voltages associated with the making or
breaking of currents using vacuum technology.
The circuit breakers and switching devices shall be capable of meeting their
rated performance when the voltage at the closing device is any value from
176V to 264V and the voltage at the shunt trip coils is any value from 110V to
264Vd.c.
Switchboards
The 11kV MV Unit Switchgears shall be supplied from their respective Unit
Auxiliary Transformer via bus duct. The 11kV MV Common Switchgears shall
be supplied from their respective 11kV Unit switchgear bus via bus duct or cable.
Each 11kV Bus section shall be supplied from two (02) respective power
supply
As part of the integrated control and monitoring system (ICMS) interface, the
Contractor shall provide a power (watts) and/or current transducer on each
circuit. These transducers shall have an output with a range of 4-20 mA. Supply
power for the transducer shall be obtained from the relevant switchboard control
circuit. Power transducers are required on all 11kV circuits and 400V incoming
circuits. The remaining circuits shall have current transducers.
Switchboard circuits shall be provided in accordance with the switchboard
single line diagrams and circuit schematic diagrams.
A 20% spare compartment shall be provided for each current rating with all
equipment and hardware provided to receive starter modules
Switchboard busbars shall consist of hard drawn high conductivity copper bar
of uniform cross-section throughout the length of the switchboard.
Interlocks shall be provided to prevent switchboard control of the switchgear
unless the switchgear is in the service and test (switchboard) positions.
Trip interlocks shall be provided to prevent racking-in or racking-out whilst the
switch is closed. Mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be provided to
prevent operation of the switchgear unless it is fully racked-in or racked-out.
The main busbars and all connections thereto and busbar supporting insulators
shall be capable of withstanding for one second the mechanical and thermal
stresses arising from the maximum possible fault currents.
All jointing surface on busbars and connections thereto shall be either electro-
tinned, solder-tinned or silver plated and shall be firmly bolted together with
suitably spaced bolt assemblies. The components of each bolt assembly shall be
fully machined and shall be stainless steel, phosphor or manganese bronze.
The busbar and busbar enclosure shall be arranged to facilitate extension of the
busbars for the connection of additional switchgear units.
The sheet metal switchboards shall be constructed of folded and welded sheets
of 2.0mm minimum thickness and where equipment is to be mounted on a panel
the thickness of the sheet metal shall be sufficient to prevent vibration affecting
the correct operation of the equipment.
If switchboards are located in areas where the floor may become wet it shall be
placed on 10 cm high concrete supports with an apron and ramp to facilitate the
rolling of circuit breakers up to, into and out of the compartments. In all cases
the switchboards shall be mounted on steel leveling channels.
The minimum size of the switchboard earth bus shall be designed to handle the
maximum expected fault level for a time determined by the maximum back-up
protection clearance time.
The switchboard cable entry facilities shall be designed to suit the proposed
cabling system (bottom entry preferred).
All switchboards shall be vermin, insect, animal and dust proof. Switchboards
requiring ventilation shall be constructed as dustproof except for the ventilation
louvers, which shall be backed with fine non-corrodible gauze filters. Filters
shall be able to be removed for cleaning.
Each outgoing circuit operating at 1,000V or above shall be provided with an
earthing switch. Earthing switches shall be mechanically interlocked with the
adjacent insolating switch and key interlocked with any remote isolating switch.
Each bus shall be provided with one earthing switch
maximum expected fault level for a time determined by the maximum back-up
protection clearance time or 300 mm2 conductor whichever is the greater.
The switchboards shall have been tested for arcing fault containment to IEC
(1) Bus and Bus Taps

 The main buses and connections shall be of high conductivity copper, sized
for specified current ratings.
 All bus connections shall be silver-plated or acceptable equal. Adequate
contact pressure shall be ensured by means of a bolted connection with plain
and spring washers and locknuts.
 Busbars and connection shall be fully insulated for working voltage with
adequate phase/ground clearances. Insulating sleeves for busbars and cast
resin shrouds for joints shall be provided. Bus insulator shall be flame
retardant, track resistant type with high creep age surface.
 All buses and connections shall be supported and braced to withstand stresses
due to maximum short-circuit current and to take care of any thermal
expansion
(2) Mechanical safety interlock shall be provided to prevent:

 All circuit-breakers shall be fitted with a mechanical operations counter
 The circuit breaker from being racked in or out of the service position when
the breaker is closed.
 Racking in the circuit breaker unless the control plug is fully engaged.
 Automatic safety shutters shall be provided to fully cover the female primary
disconnects when the breaker is withdrawn. Each breaker shall be provided
with an emergency manual trip button, mechanical ON-OFF indication, an
operation counter, and mechanism charge/discharge indicator.
 All circuit-breakers shall be provided with a mechanically driven position
indicating device which shall indicate whether the circuit-breaker is in the
open, closed, earthed, etc. position and shall be visible from the front of the
panel with the access door closed
(3) Control and Indication

The circuit breaker shall be wired up for local and remote operation.
Each breaker cubicle shall be equipped with following:
 One LOCAL / REMOTE selector switch maintained type with pistol
grip handle and key interlock.
 One TRIP / CLOSE selector switch.
circuit. The remaining circuits shall have current transducers.
The remote indication shall be provided as below:
 MV incoming : Voltage, Current, power factor
 MV Bus : Voltage
 MV Tie : Current
 MV Motor Feeder : power, current, power factor
 MV Protection Relay function
 Transformer Feeder : Power, current, power factor
 Status of circuit breaker : On/OFF
(The above indication signals shall be enable at both locations (local/remote).
(4) Current Transformer

Current transformers shall be cast resin type. All secondary connections shall
be brought out to terminal blocks where wye or delta connection shall be made.
For metering, CT secondary shall be rated for 1 or 5 ampere and for relaying, it
shall be preferably 1 or 5 ampere. Accuracy class of the current transformers
shall be:
 Class 5P20 for protection relay
 Class 0.5 for measuring
Feeders requiring remote metering and/or current monitoring shall be provided
with current transducers with calibration for full scale reading. Output shall be
4-20 mA DC.
(5) Voltage Transformer

Voltage transformers shall be cast resin, drawout or rugged plug type and shall
have an accuracy class of 0.5 for measuring, 3P for protection. High voltage
windings of voltage transformer shall be protected by current limiting fuses. The
voltage transformer and fuses shall be completely disconnected and visibly
grounded in fully draw-out position. Low voltage fuses, sized to prevent
overload, shall be installed in all ungrounded secondary leads. Fuses shall be
suitably located to permit easy replacement while the switchgear is energized.
(6) Ground Bus

A ground bus, rated to carry maximum fault current, shall extend the entire
length of the switchgear.
Each stationary unit shall be connected directly to the ground bus. The frame of
each circuit breaker and draw-out VT unit shall always be grounded through
heavy multiple contacts, except when the primary disconnecting devices are
separated by a safe distance. CT and VT secondary neutrals shall be earthed
through removable links so that earth of one circuit may be removed without
disturbing the other
Low Voltage Switchboards, Motor control center (400/230 V)
Standards
The switchgear shall be designed and tested to the following standards:
 IEC 60947 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear.
 IEC 61439.1 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
 IEC 60408 Low Voltage Air Break Switches, Air Break Disconnectors, Air
Break Switch Disconnectors and Fuse Combination Units.
 IEC 60269.1 Low Voltage fuses - General Requirements
 IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures
Switchgear Types, Ratings and Requirements
 The 400V power distribution shall be by means of Switchgears/Switchboards
and MCCs. 230V distribution shall be through 230V DBs. The Switchboards
shall be used to supply auxiliary power for normal and startup operation of
generation units. The MCCs / DBs shall be used to provide power, control,
and protection for AC and DC auxiliary services (motors and feeders) of
generating units. The ambient temperature to be considered for electrical
design shall be 40 deg C
 The 400 V circuit breakers shall be capable of meeting their rated
performance when the voltage at the closing device is any value from 176 V
to 264 V and the voltage at the shunt trip coils is any value from 110 V to
264 V d.c.
 Contactors shall be co-ordinated with the operating characteristics of
associated short circuit protection such that short circuits do not cause
welding of the contacts.
Circuit Breaker
Voltage: 400/230 V
Phases: 3 phase, 4 wire including neutral
Frequency: 50 Hz
Current Rating: To be determined by load requirements
Breaking and Short- Time Breaking current capacity (rms symmetrical)
Current Capacity: shall be verified at the detail design stage
according to the results of System Study.
Short time current capacity shall be one (1)
second.
Circuit Breaker Type: Air-Break
Control Voltage: 220 V DC or 230VAC
Power frequency Withstand 2.8kV
Voltage:
Impulse Withstand Voltage: In accordance with IEC 61439
 Contactors shall be co-ordinated with the operating characteristics of

associated short circuit protection such that short circuits do not cause
welding of the contacts.
 Each switchgear will have two (2) incomers and one (1) bus tie panel. Under
normal operating condition, LV auxiliary loads of the respective switchgear
will be fed from its own connected LV transformers. If one incomer is failure
due to fault of upstream condition, the respective incomer is opened, and the
bus tie is closed automatically to supply power to connect opposite bus by
logical ATS function of Digital Protection Relay. For the maintenance,
manual momentary parallel transfer under live bus condition shall be applied.
Breaker can be transferred in “Live” bus condition by manual close command
from DCS, if bus couple and other incomer are closed and synchronizing
permissive. LV system will be solidly earthed to ensure sufficient ground
current for protective relay operation scheme is provided such that failure of
one supply causes automatic transfer to the second source.
 The 400 V switchgears will be used to supply power to MCC, MLDB, LV
induction motors, and small package system such as HVAC. Motors rated
above 110kW and below 200kW will be fed from the 400VAC Air Circuit
Breaker (ACB), and motors ‘below and including 110kW’ will be fed from
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
 Equipment of like kind and of the same continuous current rating shall be
interchangeable.
 The number of chosen continuous current ratings for Circuit Breakers (ACB,
MCCB), Contactors shall be rationalized to avoid an unnecessarily high
number of different ratings and consequential spares requirements. The
chosen ratings shall be subject to agreement with Owner.
 All 400 V circuit breakers shall be of the withdrawable type, electrically
operated stored energy type circuit breaker.
 All circuit breakers, contactors of the same rating shall be interchangeable.
 The switchgear shall be equipped with all necessary interposing relays,
auxiliary relays, switches and contacts as required.
 The fixed live parts of the switches shall be fully and individually shrouded
to prevent, as far as possible, a fault developing between phases or to earthed
metal.
 Auxiliary contacts of the contactors shall be provided in accordance with the
appropriate schematic diagrams.
 All 400 V contactors shall be of the enclosed, electro-magnetically operated
air break type. The main contacts shall be silver inlaid or silver faces. The
utilisation category shall be AC4 for a.c. motors.
 With 70% voltage at the coil terminals, the contactors shall not chatter or part
when motor starting current is flowing.
 LV switchgears/MCCs/DBs shall be installed indoor and air insulated. LV
switchgears/MCCs shall be constructed Form 3b and DBs shall be Form 1
according to IEC 61439. LV switchgears/MCCs shall be draw-out type, and
DBs shall be fixed type. Generally, LV switchgears with ACB panels shall
be of single-front construction, and MCCs with MCCB panels shall be
single-front or double-front construction.
 Load rated above 100kW, Incoming feeder and bus-tie shall be fed from
400V ACB. Load rated below 100kW shall be fed from 400/230V
MCCB/MCB.
Switchboards
The switchboard cable entry facilities shall be designed to suit the proposed
cabling system (bottom entry preferred).
If switchboards are to be located in an area where the floor may become wet
they shall be placed on 10cm high concrete supports. Switchboards shall be
mounted on steel leveling channels.
The sheet metal switchboards shall be constructed of folded and welded sheets
of 2.0mm minimum thickness and where equipment is to be mounted on a panel
the thickness of the sheet metal shall be sufficient to prevent vibration affecting
the correct operation of the equipment
All switchboards shall be vermin, insect, animal and dustproof. Switchboards
requiring ventilation shall be constructed as dustproof except for the ventilation
louvres, which shall be backed with fine non-corrodible gauze filters. Filters
shall be able to be removed for cleaning.
Enclosures shall be arranged so that equipment requiring manual operation (e.g.
control switches) is at a height between 750 mm and 1600mm above floor level
for easy control and operation.
It shall be possible to install cables without dismantling any part of the enclosure.
All labeling, label sizes and colors shall be submitted to Owner for approval.
Interlocks shall be provided to prevent switchboard control of the switchgear
unless the switchgear is in the test (switchboard) position.
Trip interlocks shall be provided on the 400V circuit breakers to prevent
racking-in or racking-out whilst the switchgear is closed. Mechanical or
electrical interlocks shall be provided to prevent operation of the switchgear
unless it is fully racked-in or racked-out.
For breaker panels, all switches, lamps, and indicating instruments shall be flush
mounted on the respective compartment door whereas relays and other auxiliary
devices shall be mounted in a separate compartment. For MCC/ DB modules,
all push buttons, lamps, and indicating instruments shall be flush/ semi flush
mounted on respective module compartment. For double-front assemblies, two
full height vertical cable alleys with cable supports shall be provided in each
section, one on either front, to facilitate unit wiring. These chambers shall be
liberally sized to accommodate all cables and shall have a removable front cover
for access
Each main 400/230V switchboard in the Main Control Building shall be
provided with 20% spare compartments for each current rating with all
equipment and hardware provided to receive starter modules.
Each vertical section shall be provided with hygrostat controlled space heater.
In addition, motor starters rated 30kW and above shall be configured for feeding
the motor space heater through suitably rated breaker auxiliary NC contact
and/or contactor. Cubicle heater and motor heater circuits shall have individual
MCCB/MCB.
Each main 400V switchboard in the Main Control Building shall be provided
with spare compartments with all hardware provided to receive starter modules
as follows:
 ACB Feeder : One (1) motor type and One (1) non-motor type at each bus
 MCCB Feeder : 15% of total feeders regardless of feeder type
The main 400 V switchboards shall be directly connected by busbar and
enclosure to their respective 11kV/400 V dry type transformers.
The switchboards shall have been tested for arcing fault containment to IEC
61439 and shall have separate compartments for the following:
 Busbars
 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) or Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
 Contactors (where applicable)
 Control cable terminals, control fuses, current transformer links, protection
and auxiliary relay
 Voltage transformers
 Current transformers and power cable terminations
Arc fault containment shall be to IEC 61439
Compartmenting shall be such that maintenance can be carried out safely on one
circuit with the other adjacent circuits in service.
Power transducers and current transducers shall be provided for all 400V
incoming circuits. Current transducers shall be installed on all remaining 400 V
feeder circuits. The transducers shall have an output with a range of 420 mA.
The main busbars and all connections thereto and busbar supporting insulators
shall be capable of withstanding for 1 second the mechanical and thermal
stresses arising from the maximum possible fault currents.
(1) Bus and Bus Taps

All LV switchboards/MCCs/ACDBs are provided with 3 phase busbars and
neutral bus bar. All bus bar compartments shall be completely enclosed.
Horizontal and vertical busbars and bus connections shall be of high
conductivity coppery, sized for specified current ratings
maximum expected fault level for a time determined by the maximum
protection back-up clearance time.
The maximum temperature of busbars and bus connections shall be limited
according to IEC 61439-1.
All busbars and bus connections shall be fully insulated for working voltage.
Insulating sleeves shall be provided for all busbars. All joints and tap-off points
shall be shrouded. Bus insulators shall be non-hygroscopic, flame retardant,
track resistant, high strength, sheet molded compound or equivalent polyester
fiberglass molded type. Cross section of the busbars shall be uniform throughout
the length of the assembly. All busbars and bus connections shall be supported
and braced to withstand the stresses due to maximum short-circuit current and
also to take care of any thermal expansion.
(2) MCC modules

MCC modules shall have self-aligning power control disconnects. Modules of
same size shall be physically and electrically interchangeable. The design of
draw out modules shall be such as to permit easy withdrawal/reinsertion of the
unit with guide rails to ensure correct alignment. Modules shall house the
control components for a circuit such as MCCB/MCB, contactors, relays, push
buttons, lamps, meters, etc. Only the push-button actuators, lens of indicating
lamps, and meters shall be mounted on module door such that when module is
withdrawn.
(3) Control and indication

circuit. The remaining circuits shall have current transducers
Medium and Low voltage switchboard control and supplies
Where a control power supply for switchboards is required and the main
220VDC power supply is not available (i.e. remote from Main Control Building)
switchgear, circuit breaker and transformers shall be supplied as necessary. If
d.c. is needed, the Bidder/Contractor shall also supply the rectifiers
necessary. This Clause covers the following:
 Polyphase a.c. control transformers;
 D.C control system using three-phase transformers and bridge rectifiers;
 D.C control system using single-phase transformers and rectifiers.
The relevant standards associated with these power supplies are:
 IEC 60076 Power Transformers
 IEC 60146 Semiconductor Rectifier Equipment
Control voltage supplies shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated kVA.
Suitable tappings connected to the low or high voltage side of each transformer
shall be provided to permit adjustment over the range 95% - 105% Volts for
Low Voltage and 90% - 110% Volts on open circuit.
All external connections to the primary and secondary windings including
tappings and earthing points shall be solderless.
Single-phase control supply transformers shall have the centre point of the
secondary winding brought out to an earth terminal. For a.c. control systems,
the earth terminal shall be connected to the power station earthing system.
For direct current control systems three-phase star/star connected transformers
shall be used in combination with bridge connected rectifiers. The secondary
star points shall be connected to terminals but shall not be earthed unless
otherwise specified. Alternatively, single-phase transformer/rectifier units may
be provided together with smoothing networks sufficient to give an output wave
form at least as smooth as that of a three-phase bridge.
Transistors and diodes used in power supplies shall be adequately protected
against damage due to switching transients by resistor-capacitor networks, non-
linear resistors, selenium surge suppressors or other approved method.
Under the service conditions, maximum transient and operating stresses applied
to semi-conductor rectifiers shall not exceed 70% of the manufacturer’s P.I.V.
(Peak Inverse Voltage) operating ratings and the current transients shall not be
more than 70% of the manufacturer’s continuous or transient rating - whichever
is lower.
Duplicate power supplies, each rated to carry the full load, shall be provided. In
situations where failure of a power supply would result in a reduction of the
boiler-turbine load or would lead to a dangerous condition, the power supplies
shall be connected in parallel via an auctioneering arrangement or alternatively
automatic changeover of power supplies shall be provided sufficiently fast to
maintain the associated plant in service. Alarm initiating contacts shall be
provided to signal a failure of each power supply
Small multiple cooling fan systems shall be provided for electronic cabinet
(Relay protection, Generator Control Panels (GCP), Automatic Voltage
Regulators (AVR),…) . Each fan is individually protected by MCCB/MCB, is
provided with LED indication of fan failure.
Drawings to be provided by the Contractor during Contract
The following drawings and design documents shall be provided by the
Contractor during the contract:
(1) Detailed layout of all switch rooms.
(2) Detailed layout (inside and outside) of MV (11kV) and LV (400V)
switchboards including bill of material.
(3) Single line diagrams for all 11kV and 400V switchboards.
(4) Control schematics, termination and wiring diagrams for all 11kV and
400V switchboards.
(5) Load Flow and Fault calculation (three phase and single phase to earth
fault level) for the entire power system at all voltage levels.
(6) Operating and Maintenance Manual
(7) Training Manual
(8) Operation tools and special tools
(9) Technical specification
(10) Logic diagram
(11) Operation description
7.10 DC AND UPS SYSTEM
DC system
System Description
All necessary D.C. Systems and UPS for Unit, Station shall be provided by the
Contractor for all equipment requiring safe secure electrical supplies and the
proposed equipment shall comply with the appropriate IEC and IEEE Standards
as amended and supplemented by this Request for Proposal.
(1) Relevant Standards:

IEEE 485 – 1997, IEC60896; (2) System Configuration; SBA G 0603; Guide
for the Design of Battery Rooms.
(2) System Configuration:

The DC system shall comprise:
 220VDC system for Unit 1
 220VDC system for Unit 2
 220VDC system for Common
Each Unit DC system consist of 2x100% battery bank, and 2x100% battery
chargers, with 2500Ah capacity, 2x220VDC distribution group panels.
Common DC system consist of 2x100% battery bank, and 2x100% battery
chargers, with 1250Ah capacity, 2x220VDC distribution group panels
Each 100% battery should be capable of supplying the emergency loads that
apply when the normal AC power system has failed, or when the AC supply to
the battery chargers has failed.
The minimum acceptable level of reliability in the system is that it should meet
its full operational requirements with one battery out of service. Batteries shall
be rated such that one battery can meet the requirements of the generating unit
for a minimum period of 120 minutes in the event of a total loss of A.C. supplies.
This protects the security of the plant in the event of a battery failure and permits
off-line boost charging, discharge testing etc.
Each battery will be housed in a separate dedicated room incorporating
appropriate ventilation, showers, floor treatment and other safety features.
Each 100% battery charger shall be capable of supplying the continuous and
intermittent loads associated in the ‘float' mode of operation.
In addition each charger when off line shall be able to supply the necessary
current to enable boost charging of a battery.
During periods of intermittent loads, or when the battery is taking the full
emergency load (i.e. during the safe shutdown of a unit) the DC system voltage
shall not fall below a value which is injurious to any of the equipment connected
to the DC system. In any event the DC system voltage shall not fall below 198
volts, during the Duty Cycle following the complete loss of AC supply, with
one battery in service.
The power for DC system shall be supplied from Emergency bus of each Unit.
(3) The 220 VDC system will serve the following:

 D.C. supply for safe shutdown of turbine and boiler auxiliaries such as the
lubricating oil pumps etc. in the immediate aftermath of a total loss of normal
A.C. supplies;
 Controls and Instrumentation Equipment;
 Control power for Control of switchgear
 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system
 Control power for Protection system
 Generator Field Flashing.
 DC Emergency Lighting System
 Other aux. load(if required)
(4) The Contractor shall submit full details of proposed safe shutdown/emergency
loads for approval by Owner.
The DC system shall be designed with the following minimum requirements:
 Two radial feeders to each load to allow for maintenance on a switchboard
or a feeder, without loss of availability of a supply.
 Battery installation in accordance with the safety provisions of the latest
international standards.
 Routine off line maintenance capacity testing of a battery, in accordance with
international standards whiles the second battery remaining in service
supplying the requirements of the generating unit.
 The ripple to be maintained at less than 2%.
 Battery shall be sized in accordance with IEEE Standard 485 1997 and based
on the duty cycle diagram, showing the current versus time characteristic of
the DC system, following the loss of AC supply, with one battery in service.
The duty cycle diagram shall be submitted to Owner for approval prior to
manufacturing.
 The sizing of the battery shall use an end voltage of 1.75 volts/cell (battery
of Nickel-Cadmium type has the end voltage of 1.1 volts/cell and boost
charging voltage of 1.65 volts/cell typically) and a temperature of 25oC with
account being taken of the relatively high ambient of 30oC.
 To minimise the voltage drop on the DC system and to DC standby motors,
series resistance starters shall be used which limit the starting current to twice
the full load current.
 Voltage drop in all elements including cables shall be considered so that the
DC standby motors terminal voltage does not fall below 85% of the DC
nominal system voltage during starting.
(5) Separate D.C. Systems as required shall be provided for the following:
 220VD.C Systems as required for each Unit Auxiliaries and Station Common
Auxiliaries control, operation, synchronising, metering, protection etc. and
for the safe shutdown of the Plant including motor drives and for SCADA
and Communication Systems, coal handling system, CWP.
 Contractor shall equip the equipment to convert/ supply the 48V or 24V DC
in the panel/board if necessary.
 Individual D.C. power supply systems as required for the Emergency Diesel
 Generator, Station Communication, Fire Fighting/Detection Systems etc.
Batteries, Chargers
(1) Batteries
The batteries shall comprise cells of the valve regulated lead acid (VRLA)
batteries complying with IEC60896-1.
The batteries shall be sized in accordance with IEEE Standard 485 1997.
A performance test of the battery capacity shall be included as part of the
commissioning procedure.
(2) Battery Chargers

Two battery chargers and two Battery charger for common are required for each
generator unit and each battery charger shall be of the constant potential type.
Each battery charger shall be sized to supply the DC requirements of the inverter,
the recharging current of the batteries as well as supplying the standing DC loads
under all system conditions.
The battery chargers shall be suitable for operating in parallel with the batteries,
and operating on a stand alone basis with the batteries disconnected and the
battery chargers supplying the standing load.
The battery chargers shall also be capable of boost charging their respective
battery from the fully discharged condition to the fully charged condition within
a period not exceeding ten (10) hours with the emergency load disconnected.
The battery chargers shall operate from a 3 phase, 400V ± 10%, 50Hz ± 5%
supply, except for units with a rated output of 5 kW or less, which may operate
from a single phase 230V ± 10%, 50Hz ± 5% supply with the same tolerances.
The battery chargers shall be designed and sized accordingly including a design
margin of not less than ten (10) percent of the total D.C. load requirement.
They shall be silicon controlled rectifier (thyristor) type devices suitable for
either manual or automatic operation and complying with IEC 60146, as
amended and supplemented by this Request for Proposal.
The battery chargers shall be located indoors in a switchgear room or other
similar environment and shall have an enclosure classification of at least IP 42.
The room shall be an air conditioned room (non hazardous location) however
in the event of the air conditioning system failing the battery chargers shall be
capable of operating with an external ambient air temperature of 40°C.
All chargers shall be naturally air cooled (AN) using the air within the room and
all internal devices shall be designed with a temperature margin allowance to
address the build-up of heat inside the equipment enclosure in which these
devices are mounted.
Each battery charger shall normally operate automatically in the "Float" charge
mode and except in the case of battery chargers being used in conjunction with
valve-regulated (recombination technology) batteries, shall also be provided
with manual "Boost" charge and manual "Equalize" charge facilities.
The float operation shall have a constant voltage current limiting characteristic
(IU Characteristic in accordance with VDE 0510) and shall be rated for
supplying the maximum standing D.C. load while at the same time maintaining
both its associated batteries in the fully charged condition.
Following a full discharge and having reached the specified end of discharge
voltage, re-charging of the battery shall be achieved at the fastest possible rate
after initiation of the boost charge facility which when manually selected shall
connect the charger in boost mode and recharge the battery from the fully
discharged condition to the fully charged condition within a period not
exceeding ten (10) hours.
The boost operation shall have a constant voltage current limiting characteristic
to suit the battery type.
At the end of the ten (10) hour boost charge period the charger shall revert
automatically to float charge commencing from the knee point of the battery
recharge characteristic.
The charger shall also have the facility to deliver an equalising charge to the
battery. In this mode, which shall also be manually selected and supervised, the
charge shall follow a drooping (W) characteristic (VDE 0510) and the charging
current shall be limited within safe values specified by the battery manufacturer.
Boost charging and equalize charging, both of which shall be manually selected,
shall be carried out off line with the D.C. switchboard incoming supply
contactor open.
Failure of the A.C. supply during boost or equalizing charging shall
automatically restore the battery and battery charger to float operation and
reconnect them to the switchboard.
The above requirements are to be met within the limits specified for Immunity
Class B.
The voltage output of chargers for consumers shall be maintained within
nominal voltage (e.g.: 220V + 10%) and if required by the design voltage
dropping diodes shall be fitted in the charger together with any contactors or
voltage sensing relays required for their operation to protect consumers from
damage due to over voltages. The maximum continuous and short time rating
of the voltage dropping equipment shall be in accordance with the standing and
peak load requirements.
The charger rectifiers and output blocking diodes shall be current rated at least
50% greater than the charger maximum rating. The peak inverse voltage rating
shall be at least 2kV.
The chargers shall be short-circuit proof complete with adjustable voltage and
current limiting devices.
Each charger shall also be capable of sustaining without damage to itself, a
continuous permanent short-circuit across its output terminals..
Although it is not intended that chargers are operated without a battery
connected, the design of the charger shall, nevertheless, be such that without a
battery connected the chargers can supply directly all consumers continuously
without any detrimental effect to the charger itself or to the consumers and
maintain nominal system voltage as previously specified with a ripple voltage
no greater than 10% rms of the nominal output voltage.
Smoothing chokes shall be provided to decrease the ripple in the output voltage
under normal circumstances with the battery connected to a maximum of 1%.
In addition short term supply voltage dips of up to 20% nominal voltage (e.g.
due to motor starting) shall not cause the battery charger to trip. Within the
limits specified for Immunity Class B, the output voltage at any load shall be
controlled within the limits of ± 1% of the set value, and the output current shall
be limited within ± 2% of the set value, when operating under current limiting
conditions.
The output voltages and the current limits shall be set by means of adjustable
devices, which are accessible within the control panel.
Each charger shall include an A.C. contactor to automatically isolate the charger
from the A.C. supply should a fault develop within the charger.
The battery chargers shall be rated for Duty Class 1 unless otherwise specified.
Component failures within the chargers shall be indicated to the maximum
extent practicable.
Battery end-cell tapping arrangements will not be permitted.
The chargers shall incorporate the following alarm devices and indicating lamps
to identify main faults:
 Charger failure
 Float charge voltage high
 Boost charge voltage high
 Equalise charge voltage high
 Voltage low
A voltage free common repeat alarm shall be provided for remote indication.
Each battery charger shall incorporate at least the following equipment:
 Lockable incoming LV A.C. supply switch disconnector with Utilisation
Category AC23 complete with front door interlock ;
 Short-circuit protection ;
 Isolating transformer ;
 Phase reversal protection for semi-conductors ;
 Outgoing circuit breaker to battery D.C. distribution board ;
 A.C. input off/on indicating LED's ;
 Incoming A. C. voltmeter;
 Incoming A. C. supply ammeter;
 Float, Boost and Equalise change over selector switch;
 All necessary controls and alarms;
 D.C. charger output ammeter;
 D.C charger output voltmeter
 Voltage dropping diodes (if required)
 Output blocking diodes.
 Thermostatically controlled anti-condensation heater.
All instruments, lamps and switches shall be flush mounted on the front of the
cabinet and the arrangement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
DC Distribution
(1) Distribution Equipment

Each battery system shall include a D.C. switchboard mounted end suite with
the two (2) battery chargers in a switchgear room or other similar environment.
The room shall be an air conditioned room (non hazardous location) and in the
event of the air conditioning system failing the D.C. switchboard shall be
capable of operating with an external ambient air temperature of 40°C for a
period of not less than ten (10) hours. All internal devices shall be designed with
a temperature margin allowance to address the build-up of heat inside the
equipment enclosure in which these devices are mounted.
The D.C. switchboards shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61439 as
amended and supplemented by this Request for Proposal.
The D.C. switchboards shall incorporate separate lockable compartments for
each charger and its controls, for the distribution circuits and for the motor
starters, as applicable.
The D.C. switchboards shall be metalclad and shall have a minimum enclosure
classification IP 42. The floor of the switchroom shall not form part of the
enclosure. The busbars shall be insulated.
The switches and contactors shall comply with IEC 60947, as amended and
supplemented by this Request for Proposal.
The switches and contactors shall be rated 25% higher than the design circuit
load current, subject to a minimum rating of 25A.
Each battery D.C. switchboard shall have a centre point resistance earthed
battery earth fault scheme with test push buttons. The value of the resistances,
including that of the polarised earth fault relay shall be such that a solid earth
on one (1) pole of the associated battery will not cause operation of any control
or auxiliary relay used on the system.
The DC bus shall be equipped the transfer switch
Each D.C. switchboard shall incorporate the following equipment, as applicable:
 Incoming supply disconnector and contactor;
 Bus section switch-disconnector (or interconnector switches);
 Under and overvoltage alarm relays (one per busbar section);
 Busbar (one per busbar section);
 Centre point resistance earth detection scheme and positive/negative test
push buttons;
 Battery circuit centre zero ammeter with low reading push button;
MCCB/MCB for each ' D.C. outgoing circuit; + Motor starter units.
 Alarm indicating lamps shall be provided on each section of the D.C.
switchboards for the following conditions:
 Positive earth fault (for resistance earthed system)
 Negative earth fault (for resistance earthed system)
 Undervoltage fault
 Overvoltage fault
The setting of these fault relays shall be adjustable. No local audible alarms are
required.
A voltage-free common repeat alarm shall be provided for remote indication.
A lamp "test" push button shall be provided.
(2) DC Motor Starters

Each D.C. motor starter shall comprise at least the following:
 Switch-disconnector with auxiliary contacts for control and interlocking
purposes.
 Main double pole contactor with auxiliary contacts for control and
interlocking purposes.
 Set of stepped resistances with the necessary tapping contactors with
automatic controls to enable the motor to run up smoothly without excessive
starting current.
 Thermal overload device to operate indication and alarm.
 "Test (Run)/Normal (Standby)" switch with spring return to "Normal"
position.
 Ammeter with normal running current indicated.
 Monitoring circuit with alarm to monitor availability of the starter to function
correctly.
(3) Earth Fault Detection

The D.C. systems shall be earthed as specified. Where solid earthing is specified,
no earth fault detection equipment is required.
Where resistance centre point earthing is specified, a resistance shall be
connected between the two (2) poles and it shall be earthed at its mid-point
through an earth fault relay. The sensitivity of the earth fault relay and resistor
shall be 10-20 mA.
The relay shall identify on which pole the earth fault exists, and provide a
voltage-free remote alarm.
Where resistance earthing of one (1) pole is specified, a resistance shall be
connected between that pole and earth via an earth fault relay described above,
with a sensitivity of 10-20 mA.
Where high resistance earthing is specified, an approved scheme shall be
provided to trace the location of earth faults throughout the cabling connected
to the switchboard. It shall be non-intrusive and shall not require isolation or
disconnection of any circuits when in use. A fixed signal injection device shall
be permanently installed and connected to each section of the busbars. Any
fixed devices required for each circuit and a hand-held detector unit shall be
provided. Two (2) sets of portable equipment shall be provided for the plant. A
detailed description of the equipment offered shall be included with the Bid.
UPS system
General
The 400/230V UPS system shall supply the power for following loads:
 Plant DCS
 Fire alarm system
 PLC panel
 Control power for equipment
 Ect
The UPS system consists of two (2) independent systems as follows:
 400/230V UPS system for Unit #1 and half of Common loads
 400/230V UPS system for Unit #2 and half of Common loads
 Each UPS system consists of 1x100% charger, 1x100 inverter, static switch
and bypass transformer.
 The input voltage: 400V, 50Hz and 220V D.C. system
 Output voltage: 400/230VAC, 50Hz
 Capacity: not less than 25kVA
 Discharge Duration : 30 minute
UPS Units (others than Emergency Lighting Supplies)
Unless otherwise specified, each UPS system shall consist of two (2) 100%
rated UPS units which shall be provided as a "stand-by redundant UPS with
bypass" and each mains input circuit shall have a separately switched supply.
The A.C. UPS units shall comply with IEC 60146-4, as amended and
They shall be mounted indoors in an equipment room or other similar
environment and shall have an enclosure classification of at least IP 42.
event of the air conditioning system failing the UPS units shall be capable of
operating with an external ambient air temperature of 40°C for a period of not
less than ten (10) hours.
All internal devices shall be designed with a temperature margin allowance to
address the build-up of heat inside the equipment enclosures in which these
Each UPS unit shall comprise a rectifier, a battery and an inverter, each as
specified in this section of the Request for Proposal. The A.C. input and A.C.
output shall be isolated from each other and the A.C. output neutral point shall
be solidly earthed.
The UPS units shall be arranged with a mains bypass supply, an electronic
transfer switch and a maintenance bypass circuit.
Where the UPS input and output voltages are different, a dry-type transformer
complying with the applicable section of this Request for Proposal shall be
provided in the mains bypass and the maintenance bypass circuits. Three phase
transformers shall have a connection symbol Dyn11.
The Contractor shall optimise the rated voltage of the battery and its float
voltage, boost voltage and end voltage, unless there is a specified requirement
for a D.C. load to be supplied from the UPS unit.
The UPS unit(s), transfer switch (es) and A.C. output distribution board(s) shall
be supplied as a single suite of panels.
The A.C. output conditions and UPS units shall not be worse than the following:
 Frequency: ± 2%
 Voltage (steady state): ± 1%
 Voltage (dynamic response): ± 10% in response to a step load change
of 100% rated output, and shall be restored to within steady state limits within
1 second.
 Total harmonic voltage distortion: 5% when supplying a linear load.
The output UPS units shall be in synchronism with output maintenance bypass
circuit
The alarm of UPS units shall be displayed at UPS panels; the common alarm
(all failure and abnormal states) shall be display on operation console monitor
with active horn and beacon at center control room.
At UPS panel shall be displayed minimum of: Charger ON/OFF, inverter
ON/OFF, synchronous signal, static switch bypass ON/OFF, maintenance
transformer bypass ON/OFF, high temperature, rectifier failure, and inverter
failure.
failure.
Input and output voltage meters, output frequency meters shall be displayed on
DCS panel, the digital meter shall be used.
The A.C. loads may contain total harmonic current distortion of up to 50%, as
generated typically by switched mode power supply units (SMPS).
UPS Units for Emergency Lighting Supplies
Unless otherwise specified, each UPS system shall consist of one (1) 100% rated
UPS unit which shall be provided as a "stand-by UPS with bypass".
The A.C. UPS units shall comply with IEC 60146-4, as amended and
The UPS units shall be mounted indoors in a switchgear room or other similar
environment, and shall have an enclosure classification of at least IP 42.
event of the air conditioning system failing the UPS units shall be capable of
operating with an external ambient air temperature of 40°C for a period of not
less than ten (10) hours.
All internal devices shall be designed with a temperature margin allowance to
address the build-up of heat inside the equipment enclosures in which these
Each UPS unit shall comprise a rectifier, a battery and an inverter, each as
specified in this section of the Request for Proposal.
Each UPS unit shall be arranged with a mains bypass supply, an electronic
transfer switch and a maintenance bypass circuit.
Where the UPS input and output voltages are different, a dry-type transformer
complying with the applicable section of this Request for Proposal shall be
provided in the maintenance bypass circuit. Three phase transformers shall have
a connection symbol Dyn 11.
The Contractor shall optimise the rated voltage of the battery and its float
voltage, boost voltage and end voltage.
The UPS unit and A.C. output distribution board shall be supplied as a single
suite of panels.
The battery cubicles may be mounted alongside, where approved by the
Engineer.
The A.C. output conditions and UPS units shall not be worse than the following:
 Frequency: ± 2%
 Voltage (steady state): ± 2.5%
 Voltage (dynamic response): ± 10% in response to a step load change
of 100% rated output and shall be restored to within steady state limits within
1 sec.
 Total harmonic voltage distortion: 5% when supplying a linear load.
The output UPS units shall be in synchronism with output maintenance bypass
circuit
The alarm of UPS units shall be displayed at UPS panels; the common alarm
(all failure and abnormal states) shall be display on operation console monitor
with active horn and beacon at center control room.
failure.
failure.
Input and output voltage meters, output frequency meters shall be displayed on
DCS panel, the digital meter shall be used.
The A.C. loads may comprise any type of lighting source (e.g. tungsten filament,
discharge lighting, etc.) and may contain harmonic current distortion.
Inverters
Inverters shall have current limiting characteristics. They shall control the
output voltage in synchronism with the mains bypass voltage, while the mains
supply remains within the specified frequency limits. Outside these frequency
limits the inverter shall revert automatically to its own internal frequency
control. Following restoration of the mains frequency to within the specified
limits, the inverter shall automatically re-synchronise to the mains supply.
The inverter, when operating in isolation, shall be capable of producing
sufficient short-time current to cause a distribution circuit switch device with a
current rating not less than 10% of the inverter's rated output current to rupture
within 5 ms without initiating changeover of the transfer switch, where installed..
The inverter output, as measured at its output terminals, shall lie within the
specified limits, when operating continuously under the following conditions:
 With the types of load(s) specified or required
 With any load between no-load and rated output
 With any power factor between unity and 0.7 lagging
 With a d.c. input voltage between the battery boost voltage and end voltage.
Where 3-phase output is specified or required, and when supplying a linear load,
the mismatch between phase voltages shall not exceed 1% and the angular
displacement of the phase voltages shall not exceed 120° ± 1°.
Static Transfer Switch
The electronic transfer switches shall comply with IEC 60146-5 as amended and
The transfer switches shall be rated to match the outputs of the UPS units and
the mains bypass supply in terms of both continuous rating and short term time
rating.
The transfer time shall not exceed 1 ms. The transfer shall normally be
synchronous, but the transfer switch shall be capable of an asynchronous
operation. Transfer between UPS units and from a UPS unit to the mains bypass
circuit shall be initiated
automatically or manually. Transfer from the mains bypass circuit to a UPS unit
shall only be initiated manually.
A. C. Distribution Boards
Each UPS system shall be provided with an output distribution board, which
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60439, as amended and
The switchboards shall be metalclad and shall have a minimum enclosure
classification IP 42. The floor of the switchroom shall not form part of the
enclosure. The busbars shall be insulated.
The switches and contactors shall comply with IEC 60947, as amended and
supplemented by this Request for Proposal. The switches and contactors shall
be rated 25% higher than the design circuit load current, subject to a minimum
rating of 25A.
Switches shall have an utilisation category of AC22 for incoming and bus
section circuits, AC23 for outgoing circuits and AC3 for contactors.
Each A.C. switchboard shall incorporate the following equipment, as applicable:
+ Incoming supply switch-disconnector;
 Bus section switch-disconnector (or interconnector switch-disconnectors),
as applicable;
 MCCB/MCB for each outgoing circuit;
 Motor starters;
 Under and overvoltage alarm relays (one per busbar section);
 Busbar voltmeters (one per busbar section).
 Alarm indicating lamps shall be provided on each section of the switchboard
for the following conditions:
 Undervoltage fault + Overvoltage fault
The settings of these fault relays shall be adjustable. No local audible alarms are
required. A voltage-free common repeat alarm shall be provided for remote
indication.
A lamp test pushbutton shall be provided.
Motor starters shall comply with the requirements for LV motor starters as
specified under section for LV Switchgear.
Tests
(1) Type Tests

The batteries shall have been successfully type tested by a recognized and
approved testing center in accordance with the relevant codes and standards and
the type testing shall have been witnessed by an independent authority.
The chargers shall have been successfully type tested to prove rated operating
characteristics in normal, boost and equalise charging modes (e.g. check of DC
output voltages, delivery of rated output currents, current limiting, efficiency
and temperature rise tests) and the type testing shall have been witnessed by an
independent authority.
The type test certificates and results of the tests shall be included in the Bid.
(2) Routine Tests

Routine factory tests shall be performed at the works in accordance with the
relevant codes and standards as amended and supplemented by this Request for
Proposal and shall include insulation tests on the wiring of each battery charger
and
These tests shall consist of a 2.5kV power frequency test for one (1) minute,
measurement of insulation resistance, and a 5kV impulse voltage test in
accordance with IEC 60255-5.
The Engineer reserves the right to attend all Factory Tests and the Contractor
shall give at least two (2) months prior notice of same and shall submit at that
time the manufacturers Factory Test Protocol documentation for review and
approval by the Engineer.
Following completion of all tests the Factory Test Report shall be submitted by
the Contractor and the equipment shall not be dispatched from the works prior
to its approval by the Engineer.
(3) Site Tests

Site acceptance tests shall be performed on the completed installations as part
of the commissioning procedure. These tests shall include a capacity test on the
batteries, recharge test on the battery/charger units to check the recharge
characteristics, operation check on all instruments, protective devices,
signals/indications and insulation resistance tests
During the Site tests the Engineer shall select at random reference cells and the
voltage curves thereof shall be checked when the battery is discharged over
three (3) and ten (10) hour periods.
The alarm levels and the automatic voltage control feature of the charger shall
be demonstrated over the specified load range.
Where load changeover facilities are included integrity of the changeover
system without break or voltage variations during loading of the standby or test
charger shall be demonstrated.
Requirements for Battery Rooms
The battery room shall comply with the requirements of AS 3011.1-1992 and
AS 2676 1-1992.
This clause shall be applied for whole power plant where batteries are installed.
The battery room temperature shall be maintained at 20oC.
Battery Installation Safety Requirements
The battery installation shall comply with the requirements of AS 3011.1-1992

and AS 2676.1-1992
The emphasis shall always be on providing a safe installation.
Drawings to be provided by the Contractor during the Contractor
The following drawings shall be provided by the Contractor during the contract.
 Detailed layout of the battery room showing important dimensions including
distances between of batteries and door openings.
 Detailed layout of 220 V DC switch boards
 Detailed layout of DC switchroom
 Detailed layout of UPS modules
 Details of safety signs for battery room
 Single line Diagrams of the 220V DC and 230V AC UPS systems.
 Electrical diagram detail drawings of all control, distribution board and
power converter system.
7.11 CABLING, WIRING, CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM
Standards
IEC 60228 Conductors for Insulated Cables

IEC 60502 Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated Power Cables for Rated
Voltages from 1kV to 30kV
IEC 60614 Specification for Conduits for Electrical Installations
IEC 61238-1 Compression and Mechanical Connectors for Power Cables
with Copper or Aluminum Conductors - Test Methods and
Requirements
ISO 834 Fire Resistance Tests - Elements of Building Construction
IEC 60304-1 Standard Colours for Insulation of low Frequency Cables And
Wires
IEC 60331 Test for electrical cables under fire conditions. Circuit integrity
IEC 60332-1 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions -
Test for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire
or cable
IEC 60332-3 Test on electric cables under fire conditions - Test for vertical
flame spread of vertically-mounted bunched wires or cables
Scope of work
This section covers the general requirements to be implemented by the

Bidder/Contractor who shall supply install and terminate cables as part of the
extent of works.
Planning and Setting Out of Work
The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the planning and setting out of
all cabling work within his area of responsibility. The cabling installation shall
be confined to exclusive air spares in the principal cabling areas. Where
necessary, cables may be installed underground in which case a conduit system
shall be used. Directly buried systems shall not be used.
To achieve this requirement, the Bidder/Contractor shall design and submit for
approval an overall cabling strategy showing how the rationalisation of field
signals can be achieved.
When planning cable type and routes (racking, conduits etc) the
Bidder/Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
All control and instrumentation cables shall be marshaled as much as possible
in the fields to ensure that a minimum of cables will be routed to the control
system in the CCR Building.
All multi-core cables for control and instrumentation shall be terminated at the
I/O marshalling cubicles on the first floor. Then preformed cables shall be used
between the I/O marshalling cubicles and the ICMS control.
Cables shall also be segregated to ensure in the event of damage (e.g. fire) to a
section of a cable system that a minimum of plant is affected (e.g. duty and
standby supply cables shall be installed via separate routes).
Cables shall also be separated to ensure electromagnetic compatibility between
various types of cables. For this purpose all cables are to be categorised into
four types, namely:
 Type 1 : MV power cable (11kV cables)

 Type 2 : LV power cable (400/230V A.C. or 220V DC)
 Type 3 : Digital control cable
 Type 4 : Analogue cable + Communication cable
The minimum separation between the various ‘Types’ shall be as follows:
 Type 1 to Type 2: 300 mm
 Type 1 to Type 3 or 4: 600 mm
 Type 2 to Type 3 or 4: 300 mm
 Type 3 or Type 4: 300 mm
These separation distances may be smaller for short runs where cables enter
cubicles or crossover or encounter an obstruction (e.g. pipe):
Note 1 Types 1 & 2 may be installed on the same ladder/tray if they are
separated. Types 3 & 4 may be installed on the same ladder/tray if they are
separated. Any other combination to ‘Types’ on the same ladder/tray is not
permitted.
Note 2 The ‘Types’ in any combination shall not be installed in the same
conduit (i.e. each conduit shall be dedicated to a specific ‘Type’).
Where a number of cable ladders/trays is required within a particular cable run,
the minimum distance between adjacent ladders/trays shall be 300mm. This
distance may be smaller for short runs in areas where obstacles exist (e.g. pipe).
To ensure maximum efficiency of fire protection systems (e.g. sprinklers) on
ladder/tray arrangements, the order of cables from top to bottom shall be ‘Types’
1,2,3 & 4 respectively.
The Bidder/Contractor shall produce drawings showing cable ladder/conduit
allocation for each “Type” of cable.
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide and maintain a PC based Cable
Management System (CMS) as outlined in this Project.
All cable trays/ladders conduits and fittings shall be hot dip galvanized. The
coating thickness shall be complied with ASTM A123/A 123M.
Cable management system (CMS)
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide a PC based Cable Management System

(CMS) which shall satisfy the following minimum requirements:
(1) Maintain a database of cable types to be used with the details of cables including
but not limited to voltage rating, number of cores and core size.
(2) Maintain a database of each cable scheduled for installation including but not
limited to type, route, estimated length, actual length and reference drawings.
(3) Maintain a database of the scheduled cable details by functional groups

including power cables subdivided into voltage levels, control cables and
instrument cables.
(4) Produce tailored reports based on the above databases.

The system shall provide the following information:
 Unique cable identification number. A logical numbering system shall be
developed for each Unit plant and Station plant.
 Identification of the equipment to which each end of the cable is connected;
 Cable type (including cross section and number of cores);
 Installed length;
 Installed route;
 Date of installation and testing;
 Circuit operating voltage;
 Cubicle reference number.
The cabling information shall be in hard copy and on computer disc in a format
readable with the applicable Microsoft Software (the license shall also be
included).
Cable – manufacture
All cables shall comply with the following:
(1) Conductor material shall be untinned copper complying with IEC 60228.
(2) Cables shall be suitable for an unearthed system.
(3) Except in cables supplying movable plant such as trippers, control and power
conductors shall not be included in the same cable.
(4) All cables shall be suitable for correct and safe operation in the environmental
conditions in which they will be installed.
(5) Cables shall not be jointed except in long runs where production lengths cannot
be manufactured to the desired length
(6) Cables which are run underground shall be installed in conduits. Cables shall
not be direct buried except with the express approval of the Owner.
Where it cannot be demonstrated that a cable run is either directly
accessible/visible or that it is effectively contained and sealed (e.g. in a conduit
fire sealed at both ends), metallic armouring shall be used as a means of
preventing damage from attack by vermin (rodents). Armoured cables shall in
addition be provided with an overall PVC sheath. The armour shall be
galvanized steel wire armour except for single core cables in which case it shall
be aluminum wire armour.
Cables cores and earth wires shall be coloured as per current Vietnamese
standards, eg. red, yellow, blue and black for phase colour and neutral.
Selection of Cable Conductor Cross-Sectional Area
The cross sectional area of cables shall be selected by the Bidder/Contractor
using the following criteria:
(1) To ensure that cable temperatures do not exceed acceptable levels (as nominated
by the manufacturer). The cross sectional area shall be such that the continuous
current rating of the cable (in the most onerous part of the installation) is higher
than the rating of the device protecting the cable (e.g. miniature circuit breaker
etc.).
However, the Bidder/Contractor shall also pay special attention to the sizing of
cable cores (in particular to the control cables and instrumentation cables) to
ensure that they are not oversized and become a burden to the cabling system.
To achieve this requirement, the Bidder/Contractor shall estimate the required
size of cable cores for control and instrumentation cables and make a formal
submission to the Owner for approval prior to the ordering of cables.
(2) The voltage drop at equipment load terminals due to cable impedance shall be
less than 5% of nominal voltage.
(3) During the starting of large motors, short-term voltage excursions of up to 10%
may be experienced at the source of supply. The total allowable voltage drop at
equipment load terminals under these conditions including cable impedance volt
drop shall be limited to 15% of nominal voltage.
Note: For motor loads these requirements may need to be more stringent
depending on the nature of the process (e.g. conveyor belts, slurry pumps, valves
etc.) or the motor manufacturer requirements for the proper and safe operation
of any particular motor.
The cable shall be suitable to withstand without any damage the maximum
through fault current for the maximum duration. The duration shall be the
operating time of the secondary protection (i.e. back up relay) for relay protected
systems.
M.V. Power Cables - XLPE Insulated Power Cables
Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) cables shall be used in 11kV Systems. The
cables shall comply with the following:
(1) Single or three core cables of 12/24kV voltage grade shall be used on the 11kV
system.
(2) Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC60502, having compacted,

stranded copper conductor, thermosetting material semi-conductive conductor
screen, XLPE insulated, hand thermosetting material semi-conductive
insulation screen, fire retardant low smoke (FRLS), copper wire screen, PVC
sheath, galvanized steel or aluminum wire armour and PVC black outer sheath.
And, the FRLS characteristic of PVC sheath as per ASTM E662 will be applied.
These cables must have phase identification colour coding
(3) The adhesion between the semi-conductive insulation screen and the insulation
shall be designed to be hand stripped without preconditioning (i.e. no heating
required).
(4) The copper wire screen shall be sized for light duty. If 3 core high voltage cables
are used then the cores shall be individually screened.
(5) The cables shall be manufactured by competent companies for which type test
certificates shall be available to show compliance with IEC60502.
(6) The following tests shall be performed in accordance with IEC60502:

(a) Special tests
 Thickness of conductor screen.
 Thickness of insulation.
 Shrinkage test of insulation.
 Strippability of insulation screen
 Adhesion of insulation screen.
 Thickness of insulation screen
 Insulation resistance
(b) All routine tests.
(7) Single core cable should be applied for motor’s feeders of rating above 1500kW.
Multiple core cables should be applied for motor’s feeders of rating including
and less than 1500 kW.
L.V. Power Cables - XLPE Insulated Power Cables
The following requirements on XLPE insulated power cables shall apply:
 Cables shall be used on 400/230V A.C and D.C systems. PVC/XLPE
insulated cables shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC60502 having
stranded, copper conductors, grade PVC insulation, 0.6/1kV voltage grade,
separation tapes and black PVC sheath, fire retardant low smoke (FRLS),
with galvanized steel or aluminum wire armour and black PVC outer sheath.
And, the FRLS characteristic of PVC sheath as per ASTM E662 will be
applied.
These cables must have phase identification colour
Control Cables
The following requirements on control cables shall apply:
 Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC60502 having stranded
copper conductors, PVC insulation, 0.6/1kV voltage grade, separation taped,
black PVC sheath, fire retardant low smoke (FRLS), galvanized steel wire
armour and PVC outer sheath with circular cable construction.
applied.
These cables must have phase identification colour
 Cables shall have 25% (1/4 cycle) overlapped aluminum/polyester laminated
tape screen with 7/0.3 tinned copper drain wires. For relay/contact type
systems operating at 230V A.C. or D.C. the cables need not be screened.
 Cable cores shall be coloured and each core shall be uniquely numbered at a
spacing not exceeding 100mm.
 At least 2 cores or 10% of total number of cores of a cable (whichever is
greater) shall be provided as spares. This does not apply to a five-core cable.
 The conductor cross sectional area for relay/contact type systems shall be
sized to meet the max voltage drop of 5%.
 The minimum conductor cross sectional area for solid state type system shall
be 0.5mm2.
 The Bidder/Contractor shall pay attention to the sizing of cable cores to
ensure that they are not oversized and become a burden to the cabling system.
To achieve this requirement, the EPC Bidder shall estimate the required size
of cable cores and make formal submission to the Owner prior to the ordering
of cables.
Instrumentation Cables
The following requirements shall apply to instrumentation cables:
 The instrumentation cables shall have stranded, copper conductors with PVC
insulation, overall screened and PVC black sheath and galvanized steel wire
armour and PVC black outer sheath. The cores shall be formed a twisted pair
or twisted triples depending on the application.
 The cables shall have an overall screen. For added immunity against
electrical interference the individual pairs of triples may also be screened.
The screens shall be an aluminum/polyester laminate taped with a minimum
7/0.25mm tinned copper drain wire.
 Each twisted pair or twisted triple shall be colour and number coded.
 The minimum cross sectional area of the conductors shall be 1.5mm2 for
single pair or single triple cable and 0.5mm2 for multi pair or multi triple
cable. For “resistance temperature device” (RTD) circuits the cross sectional
area shall be such that voltage drop along the cable is minimised to ensure
the required RTD accuracy.
 At least 1 pairs (or triples) or 10% of total number of pairs (or triples) or a
cable shall be provided as spares. This does not apply to single pair or single
triple cable.
Communication Cables
Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 61158
(1) Co-axial cables
(a) Co-axial cables between switchyard line coupling equipment and
communications room (outdoors) shall have:
 75 ± 3  impedance 7/0.4mm bunched tinned copper conductor, solid
polyethylene dielectric, plain copper wire braid screen, PVC sheathed,
galvanized steel wire braid armour and PVC sheathed overall.
 The armouring shall consist of a single braid (94% coverage factor) of 0.5mm
galvanized steel wire.
 The outer PVC sheath shall have a normal radial thickness of 1.3mm.
 Maximum overall diameter of the cable shall be 14.6mm (14.3mm nominal).
(b) Co-axial cable within communications room (indoor) shall have:
 75 ± 3  impedance 7/0.2mm bunched tinned copper conductor, solid
polyethylene dielectric, plain copper wire braid screen and PVC sheathed
overall.
(2) Telephone cable

The following requirements shall need to be follows:
(a) Indoor cables shall have a solid, annealed copper 1/0.5mm conductor, PVC
insulation, screened and PVC sheath. A rip cord to facilitate stripping shall be
provided under the sheath of cables containing 6 or more pairs.
Exterior cables shall have a solid, annealed copper 1/0.64 mm conductor
polyethylene insulation, screened, black polyethylene sheath, galvanized steel
wire or aluminum armouring and black PVC outer sheath.
(b) The insulated wires shall be twisted into elements of 2 wires (pairs) and
assembled into concentric layers. The twisted pairs shall retain their twist when
the sheath is removed. Each 10 pair of wires shall be formed into a unit
identified in accordance with standard colours specified in IEC 60304-1.
(c) The screen shall be an electrically continuous aluminum/polyester laminate and
incorporate a 1/0.50 mm tinned copper drain wire.
Cable – Installation
Cables, cable supporting systems and cable accessories shall be installed in a

neat and professional manner. Special attention shall be placed on the
requirements of communication cabling to ensure electro magnetic
compatibility.
Cables to be installed
(1) On trays/ladders/racks/trunkings - shall be provided with cable rollers along the

cable run. Cables shall not be pulled along tray or over already installed cables
or over other structures which could damage the cable sheath.
(2) In conduits/ductbanks - shall be provided with dry lubrication to prevent
welding and scuffing of the cable sheaths.
(3) Cables installed:

 On trays/ladders/racks/ - Shall be such that not more than one layer of power
cables and two layers of control or instrumentation or communication cable
is installed on a tray. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all conductors
should not exceed 40% of the interior cross-sectional area of the cable
tray/ladder/rack
 In conduits/ductbanks - shall be such that the loadings do not exceed
approximately 40% of conduit capacity. M.V. cables,
control/instrumentation cables and communication cables shall not be mixed
in any combination in any conduit.
 Cable shall be installed in a neat and professional manner by orderly and tidy
rows/layers and straight line.
 Inside switchgears/ panels, cable shall not be bunched. The cable shall be
installed in row/layer to easily check the cable identification (KKS).
(4) Cable pulling shall not contravene the following:

 If the ambient temperature is below the critical level nominated by the cable
manufacturer, the cable shall not be handled. In such circumstances, the cable
shall be warmed to an approved temperature by an approved method before
it can be handled and installed.
 the bending radii during installation and in situ. shall not be less than the
minimum nominated by the cable manufacturer.
 the pulling force on the cable shall not exceed that nominated by the cable
manufacturer. Pulling of cable shall be by manual “push/pull” method using
a stocking or by a winch with a cut out feature when overtensioned. Cables
shall not be pulled from the cores.
(5) Cables shall be provided with supports located as close as is practicable to the
point of termination of the cable. Cables shall be fixed to trays/ladders by
approved clamps or cable ties . Cables in vertical risers shall be adequately
supported throughout the run at intervals not exceeding 2m to prevent undue
strain where the cables leave the riser. Cables shall be clamped at the point
where they enter or leave a cable tray ensuring that no high stress concentration
is placed on the cable sheath. Metal buckle slips shall not be used. Supports shall
be provided in cable pits to ensure cables do not sag, are kept off the bottom and
do not impede access.
(6) All power cables above 6 mm2 shall be individually supported. Power cables
6mm2 and less and control, instrumentation and communication cables may be
individually supported or supported in groups not exceeding ten.
(7) Single core power cables forming part of a three-phase system shall be rigidly
held in trefoil formation by approved metallic clamps. Such cable installation
shall be suitable to withstand the maximum short circuit forces for the maximum
duration without damage to ladder or clamp, or risk of injury to personnel. Type
test certificates of the installation (i.e. comprising cable, clamps, ladder supports
including straight runs and right angle bends) shall be available as proof of the
adequacy of the proposed system. The spacing of the clamps shall be in
accordance with the test certificates.
(8) Cables shall be identified at each end both of cable by identification tags. The
material shall be made of stainless steel.
(9) Where more than one single core cable per phase is used, each trefoil formation
shall contain a cable of each phase.
(10) The identification tags for cables of trefoil groups shall include a suffix
consisting of a letter to represent the phase of the cable (for example suffix A to
show phase A). A further suffix consisting of a number shall also be used when
more than one cable per phase is used (for example A1).
(11) Power cable installation at motor terminal boxes shall be provided with a
suitable support system for the cable and terminal box (if of the detachable type)
while the motor is removed for maintenance. Such support system must not
interfere with maintenance access for the motor, the driven device and
associated accessories.
(12) Joining of cables is not permitted unless otherwise approved. Any cable joint or
termination must be carried out by qualified personnel. The cable jointers must
be in possession of a valid jointing certificate from the respective manufacturer
of cable joints/terminations.
(13) The manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for the joints

terminations must always be followed.
(14) Where the use of cable changing boxes for power cables are approved the boxes
shall be capable of withstanding the appropriate short circuit forces due to the
maximum through fault for the maximum duration without damage. The boxes
shall be air insulated, provided with an earth terminal and a label identifying the
circuit origin..
(15) During installation cable drums shall be protected to ensure the cable is not
damaged. Additionally, to prevent the ingress of moisture, the cable ends on
drums shall be capped with a heat shrink cover whenever cable pulling is
suspended. The drum operation shall be either automatically or manual. It is not
allowed to just simply pull the cable off the drum. The cable must be always
rolled off the drum to avoid any coiling of the cable.
(16) When the cable comes of the drum, cable rollers have to be used. The rollers
shall ensure that the cable doesn’t touch the ground during pulling operation.
The following shall be observed with the use of cable rollers
(17) A sheet steel guard protective system shall be provided around cable
ladder/trays and other cable support systems in the following locations:
 Within two metres of the floor and in any location where cables may be
exposed to mechanical damage; or
 Where cables on tray pass under or adjacent to pipes containing fluids (other
than water);
 In areas which are subject to fire hazards (i.e. rubbish accumulation,
oil/grease areas, chemical areas).
 Where materials could accumulate onto cables in such quantities to cause a
de-rating or chemical attack of the cable (e.g. coal dust, ash etc.).
(18) Cable Trays/Ladders, Racking and fittings

 Sufficient supports shall be provided throughout the length of cables to
minimise sag and to prevent undue strain on the cable. In any case the spacing
of the supports shall not exceed 300 mm (for example the distance between
the two rows). Supports may be in the form of ladder trays or perforated sheet
steel trays.
 Cable trays shall be of welded or screwed type construction hot dip
galvanized and so constructed that there is no surface which cannot be
galvanized. The support shall be at maximum centres of 2 m. Cable trays
shall not deflect more than 100 mm when loaded with cables. Cable trays
shall be 150 mm, 300 mm, 450 mm and 600 mm or other wide. The
intermittent rungs shall have an effective support width of 250mm at a
maximum of 300mm centres. The cable trays may be fixed to support
brackets by using standard or hook bolts. Damaged galvanized surfaces shall
be repaired using cold galvanising paint. Cable trays for the support of single
core power cables of a three phase power system must also be capable of
withstanding the forces due to the maximum through fault for the maximum
duration without damaging.
 The load calculation of cable trays/ladders/racks shall be submitted to Onwer.
The procedure for Load test of cable trays/ladder at Site shall be also
submitted to Owner.
 Adjoining cable trays sections shall be electrically bonded at the splice by 16
mm2 /stranded earthing conductor. The cable trays shall also be electrically
bonded to the earth grid at intervals not greater than 30m (if a stack of trays
exist the earthing shall be looped from tray to tray, via a common lug for each
tray, prior to connection to the earth grid).
 Cable trays/Ladders shall be jointed connected to earthing grid at both end
and every 30m. Two earthing cable shall be run along and outside of
tray/ladders or one earthing cable shall be run along cable rack.
 Cable tray shall be identified on both sides of the tray except where cable
trays run along a wall then the cable tray shall be identified on the side that
is readily visible.
(19) Surface Electrical Cable Conduits
 Surface electrical cable conduits and fittings shall be galvanized steel or
heavy duty UPVC.
 All conduits shall be of sufficient size to permit the easy drawing in or
removal of any one conductor while others are in place. The minimum size
conduit permitted is 20mm.
 Conduits shall be concealed, where possible by installing in concrete slabs,
false ceiling or cavities or by chasing into walls. All conduit chases in walls
shall be vertical or horizontal; racked chases will not be permitted. Conduits
must be installed parallel to structural members, wall, doors, etc., and must
not be installed across tiled surfaces, not be diagonal, oblique, slanting,
 Where surface conduit is installed over painted surfaces, the conduit shall be
painted using primer, undercoat and finish coat to match the surrounding
surface finish. Surface run conduit shall be protected from mechanical
damage. Where rooms/location are required to be aesthetic/beautiful as CCR/
Office, Meeting room, Control room,.. the conduits installation shall be
embedded.
 Standard bends, sets or inspection type fittings shall be used and each
inspection fitting shall be provided with a gasket of an approved material. In
runs involving 4mm2 conductors or larger, standard bends or sets shall be
used in lieu of elbows. Conduits shall not be set more than twice between any
two inspection fittings or draw-in points. Where conduit runs exceed 25m
additional draw-in boxes shall be provided at intervals of 25m.
 Conduit shall be fastened in position by means of hot-dipped galvanized steel
double-sided saddles. Where conduit spans between two support points
double-sided saddles with removable fastenings shall be used. Method of
attachment to concrete surfaces shall be to an approved method. Saddles shall
not be spaced more than 2m apart.
 The ends of all conduit shall be free of burrs, slag, burrs, sharp edges, debris,
mill scale, swarfs, scobs). Threads on the ends of conduit shall be true and
clean. Running threads shall not be used.
 All metallic conduits shall be terminated by screwing into or securely lock-
nutting to the respective accessory.
 All conduits shall be installed complete with galvanized steel draw wires.
 All conduits shall be erected in position before the draw-in of conductors is
commenced. During construction, the Bidder/Contractor shall ensure that the
open ends of conduits are sealed with plastic or metal caps.
 All conduits terminating in masonry walls shall be terminated in single or
multiple gang flush mounted boxes. The wall boxes shall be complete with
standard phone outlet flush plates.
 Flexible metallic conduit may be used in ‘difficult’ areas where rigid conduit
is not practical. Flexible conduit and fittings shall be able to be coiled without
damage or reduction in cross sectional area and shall be suitable for the
environment in which they are installed.
 Galvanized steel conduits and fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized. The
conduit shall be earthed at the distribution board by means of an earth clip
and a direct connection to the main earthing conductor.
 Heavy-duty UPVC conduit joints shall be made using a solvent type glue as
recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit.
Underground Electrical Cable Conduits, Pits and Trenches
The following shall apply to underground electrical conduit systems:
 All conduits and fittings shall be heavy duty UPVC to comply with IEC
60614. Conduits shall be installed underground, rigidly encased in concrete
and backfilled to provide a neat surface finish. The top of the conduits shall
not be less than 600mm from the surface.
 The conduits shall be at 100 mm or 150 mm nominal size. Smaller size
conduits may be used in specific areas if there is no likelihood of future cable
installation.
 All conduit runs shall be straight. A cable pulling pit shall be constructed
every 50 metres or less and wherever conduits change direction. Bends shall
be used to terminate conduits into a haunching but generally shall not be used
elsewhere unless approved.
 For every conduit run at least one conduit shall be provided for
communications.
 For every conduit run at least one conduit or 20% of total number of conduits
(whichever is greater) shall be provided as spare for future use.
 Cable pulling pits shall be constructed of reinforced concrete of adequate size
and strength to cater for pulling practices and minimum bending radius of
cables. Pit covers shall be heavy duty to cater for expected loads, depending
on location.
Where cable trenches are provided inside buildings, they shall be of reinforced
concrete construction and fitted with heavy-duty metallic, sealed covers to cater
for the maximum traffic load expected.
All cable trench, pits shall be provided with drainage facility to keep them free
from water. Trenches and ducts shall be sloped to permit gravity drainage,
where possible, into the normal site drains. Where drainage by gravity is not
possible, the trench, duct or pit shall be provided with drainage sump(s) and
sump pumps. Sump pumps shall be complete in all aspects including discharge
piping which shall terminate at a location approved by the Owner. Two (2) nos.
sump pumps with 100% duty each shall be permanently installed at each sump
location and each pump designed to empty the trench. The sump pump operation
shall be controlled automatically from the water level in the sump.
Note. Contractor shall provide the cable trench from Quang Trach I TPP to
Quang Trach 500kV Switchyard to connect the cable for interlocking,
controlling and necessary cable, signal to complete the Project
Cables - Termination
Cable Glands
(1) Glands for electrical enclosures shall be metallic, metric, weatherproof and
flameproof suitable for the type of cable and having facilities to terminate the
cable wire armour. The seal receptacle shall be tapered to provide a tight seal
on to the cable as the gland nut is tightened. Concentric variable diameter
sealing rings are not acceptable. Each size (diameter) of cable shall be fitted
with the correct size gland as nominated by the supplier of the gland. Cable
glands shall be installed on gland plates provided with the enclosure. Correct
size holes shall be drilled to accept the various gland sizes.
(2) Wire armouring on power cables shall be earthed as below.
- All cables installed within 1,000m: Earthed at one end
- All cables installed over 1,000m: Earthed at both ends
(3) Wire armouring on control cable shall be earthed at one end only.
Crimping
(1) Crimping of a lug to the conductor shall be carried out using an approved type
tool. The tool shall be so designed as to prevent release until the correct degree
of crimping has been attained.
(2) Hexagonal crimps shall be used on cables 25 mm2 cross sectional area and
larger. The die identification code shall be impressed onto these crimp lugs. The
crimp shall take into consideration the fact that some conductor may be
compressed. To ensure a correct crimp, the compression tool, die and lugs shall
be compatible, preferably of the same manufacture.
(3) The crimping method shall meet the test methods and requirements of IEC
61238-1.
Power cable termination
(1) The type of lug used shall be suitable for the conductor size as nominated by the
manufacture taking into consideration that the conductor may be compressed.
The lugs shall be electro tinned copper except that bi-metallic lugs may be used
where one mating surface is aluminum. .
On equipment where there is a likelihood of contact with oils or compounds
(e.g. transformer cable boxes) all lugs shall be totally sealed (e.g. solder sealed)
to prevent ingress into the cable conductor.
(2) Low voltage power cables shall be terminated using shrinkable sleeves or self
amalgamating tape. The barrel of the lug shall be insulated.
(3) The following shall apply for termination of high voltage cables:
 The cables shall be terminated in dry (i.e. air insulated) type terminal boxes.
If electrical clearances are inadequate, subject to approval, a H.V. compound
shall be used. The compound shall be suitable for the type of cable used
 The cables shall be terminated using a dry type termination system having a
stress relief mechanism. The termination system shall be compatible with the
cable and lug being used and shall be capable of passing all relevant tests
stated in the standard appropriate to the cable (e.g. IEC 60502 for XLPE cable)
 Type test certificates for the complete termination system shall be made
available.
 The terminating procedure shall be performed strictly in accordance with
recommendations of the supplier of the termination kit.
 Cable copper wire screens shall be twisted together, taped, fitted with a lug
and terminated to earthing facilities as below.

Note: Where cables (and screens) pass through a current transformer, the
screens (when brought out of the cable) shall be passed back through the current
transformer before being earthed.
 After H.V. tests, phasing out and other appropriate tests, all power cable ends
shall be taped or sleeved (using appropriate colours for the phases) so that no
conductor is left exposed.
 Power cable shall be provided cable lugs and internal supports all suitable for
use with the cable to be provided. Cable lugs shall be suitable for use with
copper cable
Termination of C&I cable
The following shall apply to termination of control and instrumentation cables:
 cables shall be terminated in an approved manner using heavy duty pre-
insulated ring type crimp lugs or lipped blade terminals or by other means
depending on the type of terminating facilities.
 terminated cores shall be left sufficiently long and neatly looped to allow a
fresh termination should the original termination device break off. Spare
cores which are not required to be terminated, shall be left long enough to
reach the further most terminal of the row if the cable is terminated. The spare
cores shall be neatly laced to the cores being used.
 the unsheathed portion of the cable shall be laced neatly with an approved
non-flammable cable strapping (to be approved by the Owner).
 cable screens shall be bought out at one end of the cable and terminated.
When the screen length is longer than 15mm, an insulating sleeve shall be
placed over the barbed wire before termination.
 cable screens shall be bonded to an appropriate earth at one end only. This
end shall be at the end remote from plant mounted devices. At the other end
the screens shall cut and taped such that it is still possible to make a
connection to the screens for earthing purposes (if found necessary).
Terminations Using Plug and Socket Connections
Where plug/socket connections are approved the following shall apply:
 Components provided with solder-lug connection shall be mounted on plug-
in trays or shall be provided with a wiring harness arranged for connection to
stud type terminals.
 Plug and socket shall be of high contact pressure type with hard gold-plated
contact surface. Plug connectors shall have a permanent shroud to protect the
withdrawn plug. The plug and socket shall be capable of mating in one way
only.
 Multiple cores terminated on one plug shall be from the same source.
 Means of positive identification of pins with respect to cable core number
shall be supplied by the Bidder/Contractor.
 Clamping of the cable to the plug shall be provided to ensure individual pins
in the plug are not stressed
Testing of Cables after Installation
After the completion of installation and termination of power cables and prior
to energising, the cables shall be tested to ensure fitness for service. The
minimum tests required shall be an insulation resistance, continuity and H.V.
tests at levels appropriate to the grade of cable.
Fire and smoke stopping
(1) A fire and smoke stopping system shall be provided on all openings through
which cables penetrate. This shall include conduit ends, openings in walls,
floors or ceilings, cable risers, under all electrical enclosures and switchboards
and any other area which will prevent the spread of fire.
(2) On vertical cable systems (i.e. cable risers) the fire and smoke stopping system
shall be applied every 3 metre intervals to prevent a chimney effect.
(3) The fire and smoke stopping system shall be applied after all known cables have
been installed through a particular opening. During the construction phase (i.e.
during installation of cable) a temporary fire protection system shall be applied
(e.g. fire plug pillows). The temporary fire protection system shall be totally
removed just prior to the installation of the permanent fire and smoke stopping
system.
(4) If an additional cable needs to be installed through an existing fire and smoke
stopping seal then a minimum sized hole shall be drilled or cut (not bashed) to
accommodate the cable. The seal shall then be restored to its original
performance by applying the same fire and smoke stopping material in a manner as
recommended by the supplier of the material.
(5) The fire and smoke stopping system shall comply with the following
requirements:
 Compliance with ISO 834 for a 2 hour rating;
 The materials used shall not be affected by water, shall not emit nauseating
or toxic substances and shall be vermin proof and shall not deteriorate or
shrink with age;
 The materials used shall be of such composition and construction that they
can be penetrated to permit the installation of new cables and can be resealed
without the need for total replacements;
 The use of asbestos, asbestos products or ceramic fibres is prohibited;
 Any permanent damming or reinforcing material shall not reduce the rating
of the system;
 Any temporary damming material shall be removed;
 Any supporting steelwork shall be galvanized and installed such that a
magnetic circuit is not created around single core cables; giá đỡ mạ kẽm
 Cables shall be ‘unbundled’ to ensure that the interstices of cables will be
adequately sealed.
(6) Application of the system in openings under electrical enclosures (i.e.

switchboards, control cubicles etc) shall be performed without the need of
access through the electrical enclosure unless otherwise approved, in which case
access will be via ‘access’ plates of the enclosure only (i.e. not through cable
gland).
Wiring and its Accessories
This Clause covers all connections for voltages not exceeding 400 V nominal
and contained within enclosures such as switchboards, control cubicles and
interpanel wiring. It does not include connections within specific components
such as relays, circuit breakers etc.
Installation
 All wiring shall be carried out in accordance with wiring diagrams or
connection lists so that the arrangement of the wiring is consistent throughout
the plant and identical for those parts of the plant performing the same duties.
 Wiring shall be enclosed in ducts or conduits or supported on trays and shall
be neatly and securely bunched and cleated unless enclosed on all sides. The
bunching of wiring shall be accomplished by means of punched plastic string
lacing. Metal buckle type clips shall not be used. The total number of wires
in any one bunch shall not exceed 20 and the strapping or lacing of the wiring
shall be carried out at intervals of approximately 150 mm. Wherever wiring
is cleated to metalwork, it shall be insulated from the metal surface and shall
be cleated by means of insulated straps. All wiring shall be left sufficiently
long and neatly looped to allow a fresh termination to be made should the original
termination device break off. Joints in conductors shall be made only at terminals.
 As far as is practicable, wires operating at the same voltage shall be grouped
together at the terminals.
 Fuses shall be included in the wiring to provide adequate protection for all
circuits and sub-circuits.
Wire Construction
 Insulation shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60502 for each
voltage grade.
 All conductors shall be untinned annealed copper complying with IEC 60228.
Each conductor shall have at least seven strands.
 The conductor cross sectional area shall be suitable for each circuit ensuring
that temperatures do not exceed acceptable levels (as nominated by the
wiring manufactures) under any normal or abnormal mode of operation.
In all cases, the minimum size conductor shall be:
 1.5 mm2 for under 5 metre lengths
 2.5 mm2 for over 5 metre lengths
 0.5 mm2 for solid state type circuits
Termination
 Conductors shall be terminated onto terminals using crimped electrical
connectors.
 The connectors shall be manufactured from annealed copper and shall be
electro tin plated. The size and thickness shall be such as to provide a robust
and low electrical resistance connection.
The connector shall be compatible with the size of the conductor as nominated
by the manufacturer of the connector.
 The connector and the crimping tool shall be compatible. The tool shall be of
the type which cannot release until the crimping action is satisfactorily
completed.
 The variety of electrical connectors used will depend upon the terminal
facilities and shall comply with the following:
 Ring type termination lugs shall be used for terminating to stud type terminals.
No more than two terminations per stud may be made.
 Lip blade termination lugs shall be used for terminating to ‘insulation shrouded,
screw clamp’ type terminals. Two terminations per terminating facility may be
made.
 U shaped termination lugs may be permitted subject to specific approval on
selector switches, auxiliary contacts of relays and similar small equipment where
the terminating facility consists of a set screw screwing into a rectangular tab and
which is fitted inter alia with a rectangular washer. The rectangular washer is to
be formed to a shallow U shape and fitted to the rectangular tab terminal so that
it cannot rotate. The U shape termination lug shall be a force fit over the thread
of the set screw and shall be inserted between the tab terminal and the rectangular
washer.
 The wiring associated with external circuits shall be connected to terminal
strips which shall be conveniently arranged to facilitate the termination of the
incoming cables. This requirement shall apply to spare contacts on contactors,
relays, control switches, and similar equipment.
 Unless otherwise approved, not more than three earth leads shall be
terminated at one terminal. Where more than three earth connections are
required, an earth bar of cross sectional area not less than 25 mm x 3 mm
fitted with studs shall be provided. Control switches, instruments, relays and
similar equipment associated with any one circuit shall have their earth
terminals bonded together and connected directly to the earth bar or terminal
as applicable. Each such connection shall be identified clearly at the earth bar
of each terminal end. The earth connection for each current transformer (or
group of current transformers) and each voltage transformer shall be
connected to the earth bar or terminal through isolating links of an approved
type. Current transformer earth links shall be fitted in an approved position
adjacent to the associated sets of current test links.
 A current test link and a voltage test terminal shall be provided in each “phase”
and neutral connection of current and voltage transformers. The conductor
from the current transformer shall be connected to the bottom terminals of
the movable link (if panel mounted) or left hand side (if rail mounted).
Wire identification
 Both ends of every wire shall be fitted with approved white non-flammable
plastic ferrules having recessed identifying numbers and/or letters filled with
a suitable black paint to correspond with the numbering on wiring diagrams.
The ferrules shall encircle the wire. Stamped number tags, plain ferrules
marked on the surface only with ink or paint and similar methods will not be
accepted. All ferrules shall be fitted to read from left to right and be the
correct way up irrespective of the side from which the wire approaches the
terminal. Where the wire approaches the terminal from above or below, the
ferrule marking shall read from bottom to top.
 If a conductor identification is made up of more than one single ferrule, the
ferrules shall be of approved type which interlock or which grip the cable
insulation firmly.
 Ferrules used with crimp type terminals shall be of the “gripping” type, or
figure ‘8' type with slide in ferrules (i.e. they shall not require the cable
insulation to be stripped to permit installation.
 In addition red ferrules engraved TRIP or T shall be fitted to trip circuit
wiring as follows:
 At outgoing terminals of the circuit all wires connecting to the trip coil.
 At other panels or cubicles remote from the circuit cubicle, intertripping wires at
outgoing terminals connecting to a trip circuit.
Terminal Strips, Blocks, Plug Connectors
This clause covers the arrangements to be made for connecting between cables
and the internal connections of enclosures.
Terminal Block
 Terminal blocks shall be of the moulded insulation type suitable for mounting
on a rail via a snap action. The insulation shall be made from thermosetting
plastic material. The types shall be as follows:
 The terminal blocks shall be fully shrouded, fitted with screw clamps and spring
loaded. They shall be suitable to accept two back to back lip blade lugs at each
terminating point.
 Bolted connections shall be provided suitable to accept a ring lug at each
terminating point. A cover shall be provided to prevent contact with the otherwise
exposed parts of the terminal. Mounting of the connection assembly shall be
sufficiently secure to ensure that it cannot be pulled apart using the terminated
cable i.e. rail mounting is generally unacceptable. Đầu cốt vòng
 The terminals shall be suitable to withstand 2kV rms for 1 minute between
terminal to terminal and terminal to rail. The insulation resistance shall not
be less than 100 M (at 1kV).
Terminal strip
 Terminal strips shall be arranged in vertical rows. In the case of floor
mounting equipment, they shall be not less than 250 mm above floor level.
For ensuring adequate access for the termination of cables, the supports for
terminal rails within enclosures shall be designed such that the terminals
stand clear of the panelwork by approximately 100 mm. The terminals shall
be arranged so that at least 150 mm is provided between rows.
For ease of location of a terminal, a barrier shall be provided between every 10
terminal blocks. The terminal blocks shall be firmly secured in the mounting
rail using end plates and clamps.
 At least 10% spare terminal blocks shall be provided for future use.
 Each terminal strip shall be uniquely identified e.g. TS1, TS2 etc. Each
terminal in each strip shall be identified by numbers i.e. starting from ‘1' for
the top terminal and consecutively numbered downwards. Furthermore, those
terminals operating at potentials exceeding 110 volts (e.g. anti-condensation
heaters) shall be labeled to warn of the higher voltages.
Termination on Components
Termination provisions on components shall generally consist of studs, nuts and
lock washers. However, in certain instances where this is not practicable the
following shall apply:
 Screws with screwdriver slots and hexagon heads shall be provided. Screws
with alternative head types or requiring the use of tools other than a parallel
tip screwdriver will not be permitted unless specifically approved. Each
screw shall be provided with a spring washer.
 Components provided with solder-lug connections shall be mounted on plug-
in trays or shall be provided with a wiring harness arranged for connection to
approved terminals or high quality plug and socket connectors.
 If the use of plug and socket connectors is permitted, approved means shall
be provided to ensure that the plug is retained firmly in the socket and can be
inserted one way only. If several plug and socket combinations are located
together they shall be arranged so that incorrect connections cannot be made
Power and Control Cables
(1) General
For hazardous areas and directly buried cables, multi core cables must have
galvanized steel armour and single core cables must be aluminum wire armour.
Cables must be adequately sized with design margins for the factors of full load
current, short circuit current, voltage drops during starting and running
condition and derating factors due to ambient temperature and grouping /
method of installation. Motor starting conditions must be as specified in IEC
60034.
Minimum size of power cables must not be less than 2.5sq. mm for copper
conductor. Minimum size of control cables must be not less than 1.0 sq. mm.
20% spare cores must be provided in all control cables except two (2) cores or
one (1) pair cable.
Cables must be delivered in non-returnable cable drums having ends of each
length of cable properly sealed before dispatching.
All cable runs must be continuous. Control and instrumentation cables may be
interconnected for marshalling purpose in suitable enclosures.
Outdoor cables shall be laid in air in ductbank or cable trench or cable tunnel
and shall be supported by cable trays/ladder for their entire length or shall be
laid in concrete ductbank with manholes. Where manholes and cable trench or
cable tunnels can become flooded with water for extended periods the cable
construction shall be selected and designed to prevent the ingress of water
including the provision of water blocking tapes.
The cables must include measures to prevent insect damage e.g. cables exposed
to direct sunlight must have ultra-violet resistant over sheaths. Control and
instrumentation cables must be capable of withstanding the voltage transients
associated with unsuppressed coils etc.
Cables must have either copper or aluminum conductors with extruded
insulation/sheath in accordance with internationally recognized standards, and
be of the following or equivalent types:
 All MV cables must be of stranded annealed copper conductor, XLPE
insulated, screened, , fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) overall PVC sheathed
type with IEC 60502. And, the FRLS characteristic of PVC sheath as per
ASTM E662 will be applied. These cables must have phase identification
colour coding.
All LV(400V) power cables must be of 1100 V grade stranded annealed
copper conductor, XLPE insulated, extruded FRLS PVC outer sheath. And,
the FRLS characteristic of PVC sheath as per ASTM E662 will be applied.
These cables must have phase identification colour coding.
 Control cables must be of multi-core 600-volt, grade 1.0mm2 stranded
annealed copper conductor, PVC insulated, FRLS, and PVC sheathed type.
applied. These cables must have core identification coding.
 Fire resisting cable tested to the highest test temperature in IEC 60331 must
be used for essential circuits such as lubricating oil pump, turning gear motor,
jacking oil pump, control circuit for generator circuit breaker, turbine trip
locks out as a minimum required to remain functional in the event of a fire.
Mineral insulated cable must be used for fire detection and fire fighting
equipment.
 All cables supplied including signal, control, fibre optic, communication,
Ethernet and LAN cables shall be suitably protected against rodents and
insects. This specification is especially applicable to the outer PVC layer of
the cable.
(2) Cable Segregation

To limit economic loss in the event of a fire or similar incident segregation, a
fire barrier must be provided among cables in the following groups:
 Main and emergency supplies.
 Alternative tripping supplies.
Cables must be segregated between the following groups.
 Unit 1, Unit 2 and common services system.
 Main and standby plant.
 Duplicated essential supplies.
Segregation for minor routes in open areas may be achieved by isolating one
from the other by an adequate distance or physical separator. For buried cables
segregation, a minimum of one meter distance must be provided.
Fire barriers and penetration seals through walls, floors and ceilings must have
a minimum fire rating of at least one hour to ISO 83-4.
Adequate physical separation must be provided between power cables and
control and instrumentation cables to minimize the effects of electrical
interference and other disturbances including those associated with unbalanced
circuit working.
(3) Cable Support and Fixing System

Adequate provision must be made in buildings for cable flats and risers, steel
support structures, holes through walls/floors, ducts etc., for the accommodation
of cable routes and access to plant and equipment. Enclosed cable ways must
incorporate suitable personnel access and emergency escape routes and
emergency lighting.
Heavy duty galvanized steel ladder rack or perforated tray must be used for
cable support on major cable routes. For minor routes where the weight is not
high, a light duty galvanized steel cable support system may be used.
All cables must be installed in a neat and orderly manner as far as possible
arranged to allow removal of any single cable in a run without undue
disturbance to adjacent cables. Adequate support must be provided with bearing
surfaces free from sharp edges. The cables must be protected against mechanical
and other potential hazards e.g., heat sources, at vulnerable positions. Cable
minimum bending radii must not be exceeded.
Single core cable must be installed in either trefoil or flat formation and secured
using cleats. The method of cleat must ensure that cables are restrained to
prevent damage during short-circuit conditions whilst allowing movement due
to thermal cycling at bends.
(4) Cable Installation

Adequate precautions must be taken to prevent cable damage during installation.
Winch pulling of cables must be subject to Owner’s review.
Cables ducts must be free from debris and sharp edges. Following cable
installation the ducts must be sealed at both ends to prevent the ingress of water
etc.
Cable installation documents must be provided to clearly indicate the physical
locations, the connection, the termination of the individual core wires, the
terminal blocks of the cables at its two ends and intermediate marshalling kiosks
(if any).
(5) Cable Ends Identification

The two ends of all cables must be allocated with unique identification numbers
which must be clearly and securely fastened as soon as possible after installation.
All cables must be terminated using mechanical glands of the metallic or
insulated type. Non gland termination must be to the Owner’s review.
MV cable terminations must be fully insulated where the risk of failure due to
condensation is high e.g., outdoors and in plant areas. Air terminations must
have adequate clearance and creep age distances.
Cable termination boxes for high current single core power cables must have
nonmagnetic gland plates etc, to avoid cable heating due to closed magnetic
loops.
Conductors must be terminated using compression fittings. Solid aluminum
conductors may be terminated using formed termination techniques. Cores must
be adequately supported and arranged in a neat and orderly manner. All cable
cores must be identified with suitable ferrule labels.
Information to be provided
The following drawings and information shall be provided by the Contractor

during the contract.
 Cable route
 Cable list/cable schedule
 Short circuit/ Voltage drop calculation sheet
 Cable Management system
 Cable termination diagrams where required
7.12 EARTHING, LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Applicable standards
 IEEE Standard 80: IEEE guidelines for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

or VDE0101.
 IEEE Standard 665: IEEE guide for generating station grounding.
 IEEE Standard 81: “Guidelines for measuring earth resistivity, ground
impedance & earth surface potential of a ground system”.
 IEC standard 1024: Lightning protection.
 TCXD 9385-2012“Protection of Structures Against Lightning - Guide for
design, inspection and maintenance.
 Vietnam Electrical Equipment Regulation 2006 (Part I, II, III, IV)
General
The Bidder/Contractor, at an early stage in the Project before the Site works
commence shall undertake a survey of the ground resistivity over the whole Site
to ascertain general and specific values. The survey shall also establish
requirements for cathodic protection. A report of the values measured shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Based on the survey the Bidder/Contractor shall then prepare a detail design for
the complete above and below grade earthing system, lightning protection
system, bonding system and earth electrodes for the entire Project for approval
by the Owner.
The design shall be based on the interconnection to form one (1) complete
system of all of the metalwork forming part of the equipment or structures
associated with the Power Plant and with the 500kV EHV Overhead line tower
which is not normally live, the steel reinforcing in foundations and a buried
equipotential conductor laid round any structure which has not got a reinforced
foundation connected to the below grade earthing system.
The installation shall also embody the recommendations made in Vietnamese
standards and shall be designed to ensure that the earthing resistance prescribed
for operation under Vietnamese standards are not exceeded.
All steel frame and reinforcing steelwork shall be connected to this grid.
Cable screens and armour shall be earthed
Thereafter the Bidder/Contractor shall supply, erect, install, test and
commission the earthing system to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The installed earthing and bonding system shall fulfil the following basic
requirements:
 Maintain a low overall resistance of the earth mass to limit the Plant potential
rise and ensure protective relay operation in the event of an earth fault.
 Provide ground connections to all electrical apparatus, enclosures and
structural steelwork adequate to carry prospective ground fault currents
without excessive heating or fire risk.
 Limit potential differences within the Power Plant Site and within one (1)
meter thereof in the event of earth fault current originating from within or
outside the Plant to ensure the safety of Personnel and eliminate interference
or damage to sensitive electronic circuits.
 Provide lightning protection.
The installation shall be to modern engineering practice and shall embody the
recommendations made in IEEE 80 and IEEE 665 and shall be designed to
ensure that the maximum step and touch voltages prescribed in these standards
are not exceeded under fault conditions.
The installation shall also embody the recommendations made in Vietnamese
standards and shall be designed to ensure that the earthing resistance prescribed
for operation under Vietnamese standards are not exceeded 0.5 Ohm (Vietnam
Electrical Equipment Regulation 2006 (Part I))
The Bidder/Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the complete earthing
system and the connections to cover the whole Power Plant area including the
related parts of 500kV EHV Switchyard, perimeter fence and the associated
inter-connections to ensure that all Station apparatus is securely and safely
connected to the earthing system.
The Bidder/Contractor shall include facilities to isolate major sections of the
earthing grid such that the earth resistance of each section can be measured at
any time in the future
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide electrical isolation at all Site boundaries
for all metallic or conducting pipework by means of insulating flanges and the
pipes shall be wrapped in a suitable insulating material 2 meters either side of
the flange.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also ensure that any fencing connected to the
perimeter is not constructed of a metallic conducting material within 2m of the
Site fencing.
Any reference to the cross-sectional area of earthing conductors in this section
relates to the minimum size of conductors that will be accepted. Modifications
or improvements if called for by the Owner to ensure full compliance with this
Functional Requirement and the related stnadards shall be installed at no extra
cost.
All bonding wires shall have a yellow/green sheath
All underground in soil earthing conductors shall be bare stranded copper
conductor
All aboveground earthing conductors shall be PVC copper
The Bidder/Contractor shall also provide the necessary earthing pit to to connect
to the main earthing grid of Quang Trach II Power Plant Project in the future.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also provide the necessary earthing pit to to connect
to the main earthing grid of Quang Trach 500kV Switchyard
Earthing system for 500kV Tower of 500kV EHV Overhead Line from Quang
Trach TPP to Quang Trach 500kV Switchyard shall be provided.
Methods of installation
Joints and connections shall be made by welding techniques, such as "Cadweld".

Where bolted connections and links are necessary, they shall be made above
ground or in an inspection pit.
Bolted connections where used shall use the NEMA “two-hole” or “four-hole”
pattern and be complete with round brass and phosphor bronze double coil
spring washer. The surfaces shall be in contact and shall be carefully cleaned
and greased with petroleum jelly prior to assembly to eliminate air space and
consequential corrosion. If stranded conductors are used (but not thermal
welded) then approved crimped type lugs and bolts shall be used.
Straight through joints in stranded conductors shall not be permitted.
Where bars or tapes are to be fitted on the floor or ceiling the projection shall
be a minimum and the back straps shall be omitted at the discretion of the
Engineer.
Screwed metallic conduit and conduit fittings shall be electrically continuous
and effectively connected to the earthing system at one (1) or more points,
depending on the length of conduit run involved and at the discretion of the
Engineer. All joints and connections in conduit systems shall be clean and tight
to provide an adequate electrically continuous path.
Suitable earthing jumpers shall be installed at all junction boxes, pull boxes,
expansion fittings, and at flexible conduit sections in the conduit run to establish
adequate earth continuity in the conduit system.
Extreme care shall be taken by the Bidder/Contractor to prevent electrolytic
action when running the copper strip near aluminum.
Below grade earthing system
Main areas of the Plant shall be provided with a below grade earthing grid
consisting of bare stranded copper conductor or tinned copper-strip with minim
cross section 240 mm2 unless otherwise agreed by the Owner and the conductor
shall be buried at a depth of 0.6 - 0.8 metres. The mesh size shall depend on the
earth resistivity and the need to control step and touch voltages and may vary in
different parts of the Site.
To this main earthing grid, earth rods shall be bonded at intervals and at the base
of surge arrestors and lightning conductors and additional earth rods shall be
added to the system as required to reduce the earthing resistance and/or the
touch and step voltages to the required limits.
The earth rods shall consist of extensible solid copper rods, 20 mm diameter and
shall be driven to a total depth of at least 3m. The connection between the
individual sections shall be conductive throughout and this connection shall not
become loose or less effective once the electrode has been driven into the soil.
The rods shall have hardened steel tops, coupling pieces and caps to facilitate
driving by power hammer.
All earth rods shall be terminated in a junction test box . The box shall be
approximately 450mm x 300mm and 300mm deep. Each box shall have a
withdrawable concrete lid/cover. The required copper links and connecting
bolts shall be supplied with each box.
All metallic items of the Plant and structures shall also be connected and
integrated into the main earthing grid. This shall include steel reinforcing where
it is used in ground slabs for equipotential grading and arrangements shall be
made in good time for reinforcing in concrete foundations of steel columns, oil
tanks, transformers etc. to be bonded accordingly. Connections shall be by
copper strip, cable or flexible braid. The normal lapping and wiring together of
the reinforcing is considered adequate for electrical continuity provided that
each successive level of rebar is wired to the lower level at each junction.
Isolated sections of reinforcing will not be acceptable.
All steel frame and reinforcing steelwork shall be connected to this grid at
intervals of not more than 16m and at least two (2) in each case.
For large buildings which do not have a structural steel frame the
Bidder/Contractor shall design and install a system of supplementary copper
earth conductors. The supplementary earth conductors shall be copper bars or
cable which shall be bonded to the reinforcing steel at each floor and shall be
interconnected so that there are at least two (2) independent paths to the
outdoors earthing system from any piece of equipment. The size of the copper
bars and/or cable shall be subject to approval by the Owner.
Connections shall also be made to steel piping in the foundations of the Station
structures in such a way that this steelwork also functions as an earthing
electrode.
Large plant situated in buildings shall each be enclosed by an earthing conductor
(i.e.: equipotential conductor) connected to the main below grade earthing grid
at a minimum of two (2) points.
For large electrical plant and for main structures, cable or strip with the same
size as the main earthing grid conductor shall be used.
A conductor of minimum cross-section 240mm² (unless otherwise agreed by the
Engineer) shall be buried around any structure, tank, lamp-post or similar
equipment which has not got a reinforced foundation connected to the earthing
system. This conductor shall be approximately 1 m. from the equipment and 0.6
- 0.8 metres deep. It shall be connected to the below grade earthing system at
intervals of not more than 10m.
Two (2) fully sized inter-connections shall be provided to the earthing system
of the 500kV HV Switchyard/Quang Trach II. The earthing pit shall be provided
to connect the earthing cable.
All risers from the below grade earthing system to above grade equipment shall
be duplicated with a minimum of two (2) separate fully sized connections shall
be installed to address the risk of corrosion. The connections shall be provided
to different points of the earthing grid.
Above grade earthing system.
All electrical equipment shall be earthed by means of conductor of adequate

conductance which shall connect the earthing terminal of the equipment to the
earthing bar of the switchgear supplying it. The earthing bar in the switchgear
shall be connected to the earthing terminal of the transformer supplying the
switchboard.
The earthing conductor shall be routed to run alongside the cable or cables
supplying the equipment or it may form part of the cable. The earthing
conductor from one (1) plant part may be tied into that from another plant part
to reduce the number of conductors.
The earthing conductor shall be separate from the neutral conductor. The
earthing and neutral conductors shall be connected only at a transformer.
Several earthing terminals (earthing bars) shall be installed at strategic points,
which shall be made from tinned copper strips for future. These shall be linked
by way of copper conductor to main grid
Separate Earthing terminals for I&C equipment shall be provided and connected
to the main earth grid. Earthing for DCS, turbine control panel etc shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer recommendations
Detailed calculation shall be submitted for approval
Cable screens and armour shall be earthed:
 The cable screen/amour of medium voltage and low voltage cables shall be
earthed as below.
* All cables installed within 1,000m: Earthed at one end
* All cables installed over 1,000m: Earthed at both ends
 The screens of control cables shall be earthed at one ends.
 The screens of instrumentation cables shall be earthed at only one end.
Electrical enclosures and long runs of steelwork (e.g.: cable trays/ladders,
railings etc.) shall be bonded to the earthing system at intervals of not more than
30 meters. Copper bonding jumpers, with suitable cross sectional area shall be
used at expansion joints or sections of the cable tray system to ensure that an
electrically continuous path to the power source neutral and a substantial metal
ground is established.
Cable trays/ladders shall have two (2) copper earth wires running the length of
the trays/ladders on both outsides. These cables shall be bonded to each tray
layer.
Steel frame structures and steel tanks shall be bonded to the earthing system at
a minimum of two (2) diagonally opposite points. The steel frame of the main
station building shall be bonded to be earthing system on all four (4) sides of
the building and near the main switchgear cubicles.
Two (2) fully rated earthing conductors shall be used for generators, neutral
points, transformer tanks and main switchgear cubicles.
Two (2) fully rated earthing conductor shall be used for the generator
transformer marshalling boxes.
For surge diverters outdoor, a direct run of fully rated conductor shall connect
the diverter earthing terminal to an earth rod. At each location the three (3) rods
shall be connected and shall also be connected to the earthing electrode system
at two (2) points. The conductor shall be kept short and free from bends.
It shall be fastened to its support surface in other to withstand electrodynamic
forces and shall be protected against mechanical damage.
Two (02) earthing conductors shall be used for structural steelwork, relay and
control panels etc.
Rails, metal doors, Metal ladder, Lighting pole shall be earthed.
A flexible copper connection shall be provided on all joints of the fences.
Specific earthing conditions
The following specific earthing conditions shall apply:

Power transformers
Power transformer tanks shall be earthed at two (2) points diagonally opposite
each other.
Transformer neutral points shall be connected directly to the below grade
earthing grid via two (2) fully rated insulated conductors.
Neutral point of 22/11kV Transformer shall be earthed via earthing neutral
resistor.
Proper connection of the auxiliary equipment like instruments, control cubicles,
pipes, etc., to the earthed transformer tank or to the earthing grid, respectively,
must be ensured.
Switchgear, cubicles, panels etc.
Switchboards, control boards, etc. consisting of two (2) or more individual
panels shall be earthed at both ends.
All metal cases and conductive structures of circuit-breakers, isolating switches,
measuring transformers, busbars, etc. shall be connected to the earthing bar
inside the switchgear/panels. This earthing bar shall relate to the earthing grid
at two (2) points.
The housing of the operating mechanisms shall be earthed as near as possible to
the operating handle. Bolts and nuts provided for earth current carrying
connections of different cubicles shall be clearly marked.
Each LV equipment or compartment, if sheet metal enclosed, shall include
facilities for the connection of a portable earthing equipment of approved design
with flexible cables to be clamped on to the phase conductors by means of
insulated earthing poles for subsequent grounding.
Portable earthing equipment is not acceptable for MV switchgear.
Power cables
The armour or shield of power and control cables shall be earthed by connecting
a flexible braid to the shield.
Power cables shall be earthed as below.
And cable end boxes shall be earthed with copper connection on one (1) of the
mounting bolts.
Motors
Motors shall be earthed via separate earthing conductor of the power cable.
Motors shall relate to the earthing grid at two (2) points.
Lightning arrestors
Lightning arrestors shall be connected to the earthing grid with minimum of
(02) earthing cable connections (unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer). The
metal structure on which the arrestor is mounted shall be separately earthed.
In addition, earthing rods shall be driven adjacent to the lightning arrestor
connection to the earthing grid to provide the lowest possible earthing resistance
of the grid at this point.
Oil and water storage tanks and piping
The function of tank earthing is to provide discharge for static electricity and
lightning protection, and therefore requires a maximum earthing resistance of
0.5 ohm typically. However, if electrical equipment (e.g. : stirrers, are mounted
on the tanks) a normal low resistance connection shall be provided
All tanks shall be earthed to local earthing electrodes and to the main below
grade earthing grid at a minimum of two (2) diagonal points.
Piping shall be earthed at all service points. Flange connections shall be
provided with links to ensure earthing continuity. The relevant rules of IEC and
VDE shall be observed.
For earthing of trucks supplying oil, provisions shall be provided at every
unloading bay for quick fixing of a flexible connection to the earthing grid.
Structural steel
All structural steels shall be connected with the below grade earthing grid at
several points. A single structure shall be earthed at both legs, square structures
shall be earthed at two (2) points diagonally across from each other. For a
structure consisting of several bays, each leg shall be earthed.
Steel parts for local push-button stations, control cubicles, power sockets,
lighting fixtures etc. without conductive connection to other earthed steel
structures shall also be connected to the earthing grid with specified copper
conductors.
Lamp posts
Metallic lamp posts shall be earthed via the PE conductor of the feeder cables.
The lamp posts will be earthed at two points directly to the plant earthing system
via earthing GV copper conductor. However, with independent standing light
poles that cannot be connected to the plant earthing system at 2 points, an copper
earthing loop of about 2 metres diameter shall be buried
0.6 - 0.8 meters deep around each post and connect to lamp post via opposite
two point.
Emergency Diesel Generator
The diesel generator star point shall be connected to the station earth grid. The
body of EDG shall be earthed at least two points.
Main Generator
The main generator shall have its star point earthed through a high impedance
earthing system to limit the earth fault current to approximately 30 amp. The
high impedance earthing system shall be via a short time rated distribution
transformer loaded on the LV side by a resistor.
The turbo-generator unit shall be fitted with a shaft earthing monitoring system
which shall be connected to the station earth grid via one point only which shall
have a low impedance to high frequency currents
Isolated Phase Busduct (IPB), Generator Circuit Breaker (GCB)
The Structure of IPB and Generator Circuit Breaker (GCB), Earthing switches
of GDB shall be earthed at least 02 points
Fences
All internal fences shall be bonded to the main below grade earthing grid.
Steel fences surrounding electrical equipment/areas are to be protected in
accordance with the regulations of VDE-0141/7.76.
Safety considerations
The methods detailed in IEEE 80 and IEEE 665 shall be adopted to achieve a
safe installation. Touch potentials shall be limited to give a "let-go" body current
below 9mA. Additional earth connections shall be made as necessary. Outside,
crushed rock shall be used near electrical Plant to ensure high surface resistivity.
An electrode resistance of the main earthing grid system, separate from any
other earthing grid system, shall comply with the allowable touch and step
voltage in IEEE 80 and IEEE 665 and comply with the electrical regulations,
codes and standards including Vietnamese standards.
Cable trenches, tunnels, raceways and risers
A main copper earthing conductor shall be provided for each route and to which
all steelwork shall be bonded..
Pipelines
Pipelines entering the Site shall be fitted with a length of electrical insulation
over the pipe two (2) meters each side of the fence, and an insulating flange at
the boundary. This prevents dangerous potentials occurring between pipe and
earth both within and outside the Site.
Surge suppression devices or earthing cells shall be fitted across insulators.
Cathodic protection
Where pipelines are fitted with cathodic protection, motorised valves shall be
connected to the main earth grid and insulated from the pipeline with insulated
flanges. The two (2) pipeline flanges shall be bonded across the central insulated
portion.
Cathodic protection shall not be applied to the copper earthing circuits unless
unavoidable because of the build-up of electrolytic products which will tend to
insulate buried copper from ground.
If segregation of cathodic protection and copper earthing circuits is
impracticable a requirement to re-test earthing connections after a 12 month
period and install additional electrodes as necessary shall be a mandatory
requirement.
Earthing for control and instrumentation equipment
The earthing arrangements shall be divided into two (2) classes, one concerned
with personnel safety, the other with signal accuracy.
(1) Personnel Safety Earthing System

All non-current carrying metallic parts of plant, equipment components,
enclosures, etc., that could become energised with hazardous potentials shall be
connected to the main earthing system.
(2) Signal accuracy earthing system

The purpose of circuit earthing is to reduce the effect of electrical interference
on the signal being transmitted. A separate single point earthing connection to
the main earthing system shall be provided for all signal cabling and precautions
shall be taken to ensure that multiple earths are not inadvertently established.
Communication circuits
It may not be possible to limit the rise of Station earth potential to the maximum
of 650 V rms typically required by communication authorities. This will depend
on the fault currents and electrode resistance. Isolating devices shall then be
applied to the incoming lines as part of the communications installation.
Measurements
Earth resistivity shall be established prior to detailed design using a four-
electrode test set (Wenner method or similar).
The same method can be used to determine approximate values of total
electrode/grid resistance for small Sites, and shall be used to check work in
progress.
On completion a high current A.C. injection method shall be used to prove the
overall resistance of the main earthing grid to the main body of earth.
Contractor shall responsible to submit the procedure to Owner for testing of
Whole plant earthing resistance, step voltage, touch voltage test. The following
measurements shall be made to prove the effectiveness of the earthing systems:
 Step voltage checks
 Touch voltage checks
 Whole Plant Earth resistance
 Continuity of main earth busbar
 Resistance of joints in earthing systems.
During tests on the earthing system all or part of the system shall be isolated
from any external system as necessary to ensure tests are correctly performed.
Lightning protection system
The Bidder/Contractor shall provide a lightning protection system in accordance

with the appropriate codes and standards including British Standard Code of
Practice 665, NFPA 780 and with local Vietnamese safety regulations for all
equipment, buildings, structures and tanks supplied for this Project. The
proposed design and the proposed equipment shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer.
The following specific conditions shall be observed:
 Each building roof, civil works, stack, protective cover or outdoor structure
for which the Bidder/Contractor is responsible shall receive a lightning
protection system composed of roof and down conductors sufficiently sized
and spaced and connected to the main below grade earthing system or to
separate earthing electrodes with a maximum earthing resistance of two (2)
ohms.
 Each outdoor tank shall be connected to three (3) earthing electrodes evenly
distributed around the circumference if it is not connected to the main below
grade earthing system as described above.
 All conducting bodies having a plan area exceeding 1m2 or a volume of
0.1m3, shall be connected to a local earth rod unless located entirely within
a zone of lightning protection from an adjacent structure.
 All surge diverters shall be directly connected to earth rods. All earth rods
shall be connected to the main earth grid.
 The steelwork of ground slabs shall be used to form an equipotential system
bonded to the main earthing grid, but the alternative of using a separate
earthing mat bonded to the grid may be considered in some cases subject to
approval by the engineer.
 Lightning catching rods shall be made of copper.
 The Down conductors shall be duplicated from air-termination shall be
directly connected to main grid by copper conductor and they shall be
adequately protected from mechanical damage. They will be intended to
conduct lightning current from the air-termination system to the earth-
termination system. Test point shall be provided to check the lightning
protection system.
 The distance between conductor/ lightning strip/ air terminal and the roof
shall not less than 400mm.
 All ladder/handrail shall be earthed to main grid
All lightning protection systems shall be strongly interlinked with the below
grade earthing system at a minimum of two (2) points
Lightning Risk Assessment Calculation shall be submitted to Owner for
approval.
7.13 MOTORS
General
The LV motors shall be defined as the rotating electrical ones, suitable for the
operation on the 400/230V A.C rating less than 200kW, three phase, 50Hz or
D.C 220V supply. Some small motors may be defined as the rotating electrical
ones, suitable for the operation on the 400V/230 A.C, three phases, 50Hz
The MV motors shall be defined as the rotating electrical ones, suitable for the
operation on three phase, 50Hz A.C supply at voltages of 11kV or higher, rating
from 200kW and above.
Relevant standards
They include the following which relate to the manufacture and testing of
rotating electrical machines:
IEC 60034 Rotating Electrical Machines
IEC 60044 Current Transformers for Measurement and Protection
BS 4999 General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines
BS 5000 Specification for Rotating Electrical Machines of
Particular Types or for Particular Applications
IEC 60529 Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
IEC 60894 Guide for a Test Procedure for the Measurements of Loss
Tangent of Coils and Bars for Machine Windings.
All motors shall fully comply with technical requirements of this specification,
IEC 60034 and BS 5000 Part 40 whether they are essential or non-essential
drives.
Duty, rating and motor clarification.
Motors shall be suitable for maximum continuous rating. IEC 60034 or NEMA,
Duty Type S1. Motor enclosure and terminal boxes to be installed indoors and
outdoors shall have degree of protection as follows :
 Indoor : IP54
 Outdoor : IP56
Vacuum switchgear is used for 11kV motors and the Bidder/Contractor shall
design all 11kV motors to be equipped with surge absorber and with adequate
insulation margin between turns, for the motor design life, to cover the stress
and fatigues due to the re-striking voltages associated with the making and
breaking of currents using vacuum technology. Sample coils are to be tested to
IEC60034.15.
The AC motors shall be capable of continuous operation under the service
condition at any frequency between 47.5 and 52 Hz and rated voltage ±10%.
Unless otherwise specified, the motors shall be capable of continued operation
of 75% of the nominal voltage at 47.5 to 52 Hz for a period of 5 minutes without
injurious heating. In the event of loss of supply, all motors shall be suitable for
restarting against the full residual voltage in the motor winding during motor
run-down.
During the starting of large motors, short-term voltage excursions of up to 10%
may be experienced at the source of supply. The total allowable voltage drop at
equipment load terminals under these conditions including cable impedance volt
drop shall be limited to 15% of nominal voltage.
Unless otherwise approved A.C. motors shall be three-phase cage induction type
with a rated speed based on manufacturer's recommendation and suitable for
starting direct- on-line. If any special starting equipment is required, it shall be
provided by the Bidder/Contractor with the associated motor and
interconnecting cabling
The duty point load of the motor shall be not more than 90% of its nameplate
rating.
The frequency of starting requirement specified in Vietnamese standard and
IEC 60034 -12 shall be subject to the following conditions:
 The torque requirements shall be those service conditions likely to cause the
longest starting period.
 The terminal voltage shall be 85% of the rated supply voltage during the
starting.
If it is possible for a motor to be driven in the reverse direction e.g. by back flow
through the associated pump, the motor shall be suitable for starting safely when
it is running at maximum reverse speed.
Four consecutive starts from cold state up to full speed must be possible, the
second start must be possible immediately after the first, the third 20 minutes
after the second and the fourth 20 minutes after the third.
DC motors shall be suitable for operation on two-wire unearthed systems. They
shall be supplied for drives required to operate in an emergency (e.g. for
ensuring that main turbine-generator and steam generator auxiliary plant parts
such as bearings will not be damaged between failure of A.C. supply and the
plant coming to rest) or when otherwise specified.
DC motors rated at less than 1.0 kW shall be suitable for starting direct-on-line.
Larger D.C. motors shall be suitable for starting with two step or three step
starters. The Bidder/Contractor shall design the motor starters, to limit motor
starting current to twice rate full load current.
DC motors shall be capable of driving the associated plant continuously under
the most onerous service conditions when the voltage at the motor terminals
varies within the limits 90% and 110% of the system rated voltage, and of
running satisfactorily for one hour under the most onerous service conditions
when the voltage at the motor terminals is 85% of the system rated voltage.
Insulation systems
Unless otherwise approved the insulation system used on all motors shall be
rated at Class F (IEC 60034-1), but the limit of temperature rise shall not exceed
that nominated in IEC 60034-1 for Class B insulation.
For 11kV motors, the Bidder/Contractor shall design the insulation system used
on all motors to cope with the stress and fatigues due to the re-striking voltages
associated with the making and breaking of currents using vacuum technology.
For MV motors the insulation system used shall be vacuum pressure
impregnation (VPI) technology. The windings and connectons are isolated with
Mica-based tape. When the windings are in place the whole stator shall be
impregnated in the vacuum pressure impregnation process.
The insulation system shall not use natural rubber insulation around motor leads.
Windings
Medium voltage windings shall consist of rectangular shaped conductors made

up into preformed coils and installed in “open” slots. Random wound windings
shall not be used.
The material used for slot wedges shall not be subject to shrinkage in service.
The “magnetic” wedges are not acceptable. Slot wedges shall be either sealed
into position or suitably locked or trapped to prevent axial migration and
vibration.
For all medium voltage motors, steps shall be taken to eliminate corona
involving at least the application of semi-conductive tapes to the coils and the
use of semi-conductive slot liners.
Full details of proposed coil manufacture shall be given including the following
information:
 Type and thickness of strand and turn insulation material and method of
application.
 Type and thickness of main slot groundwall insulation and method of
application including pressing details, release tapes, pressure and
temperature.
 Corona protection details of the slot portion including coil tape details and its
application together with thickness and details of slot liners. Tapes shall
extend beyond the slot entrance.
 Stress grading at slot exit, details of tape and application and extent beyond
slot.
 End winding insulation, details of taping and curing method including sealing
tape.
 Bracing details of the end windings including gap filler between coils, surge
ring insulation and method to eliminate mechanical stress on coils at slot
entrance/exit.
The Bidder/Contractor shall describe the method of bracing end windings. The
quality of bracing on all high voltage motors shall be suitable for re-energising
the motor on to a supply at 105% rated voltage with a minimum of 85% of
residual flux in the stator. The windings and leads shall be braced and blocked
to prevent loosening of any part of the winding. In this regard attention shall be
given in vertical motors to prevent winding migration.
All motor windings shall be brought out to terminal boxes of approved type. On
high voltage motors all six ends of the windings shall be brought out, three on
each side of the motor.
Stator
The design of medium voltage motor stator cores shall be such that periodic re-
tightening to ensure tight cores is not required. It is preferred that welded
construction, spring-loaded bolts or dished cantilever type pressure plates be
used.
On medium voltage motors core tooth supports shall be positively anchored to
the stator pressure plates by welding or mechanical interlocking, e.g.
hammerhead. Heavy section tooth supports shall not be spot-welded to
laminations. However, the practice of spot-welding light I or L section spacers
to provide vent ducts is acceptable provided the quality control methods applied
are acceptable.
On medium voltage motors there shall be positive means of locating stator cores
against circumferential or axial movement. Any locking keys, dowel pins etc.,
should be so fitted that in the event of movement the locking device does not
fall out of its location.
Rotor
Attention shall be paid to the design of cage type windings. All welded
components or assemblies shall be stress relieved and cage end rings shall be
simultaneously brazed.
The Bidder/Contractor shall describe in detail the arrangement of the cage end
rings and cage bars on high voltage motors and shall provide information giving
service experience with the design offered.
On medium voltage motors the rotor lamination clamping plates shall be
positively anchored to the motor spider. Heavy section tooth supports shall not
be spot-welded to end laminations.
Motor enclosure and cooling
All motors shall be totally enclosed. The degree of protection to IEC 60529
provided by the enclosure shall be IP 54 for indoor motors and IP 56 for outdoor
motors.
In all cases except special instances, the primary coolant shall be air. The
preferred secondary coolant is air but water is acceptable, subject to the approval
of the Owner, where manufacturer’s standard or the overall pump/
motor/bearings system requires water to achieve an optimum standard design.
All motors provided with filtered air cooling or heat exchangers shall have a
contact making thermometer fitted in the internal air circuit at the outlet of the
air from the air cooler. Where contact-making thermometers incorporating
mercury switches are used, they shall be mounted away from the motor housing
to prevent mal-operation due to vibration. The contacts shall be rated for alarm
initiation.
Bearings
Motor bearings shall be suitable for the application and details shall be provided
for approval.
Thermocouples shall be provided by the manufacturer for monitoring the metal
temperatures of bearings of all auxiliaries and the associated driving motors
where the motor rating is 40 kW or above for indication, computer monitoring
and/or alarm raising purposes.
All motors rated at 2000 kW and above shall be fitted with sleeve type bearings
and all vertical motors rated at 1500 kW and above shall be fitted with segmental
pad type thrust bearings on the top and sleeve guide bearings at the bottom. The
bearings on the motor and the driven device shall be of similar design.
Bearing thermocouples shall be terminated in the same terminal box as the
winding temperature detectors.
All MV motors shall have one pedestal insulated from the frame. For motors
with double shaft extension a combination of one insulated bearing and one
insulated coupled is preferred.
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Strip heaters shall be provided in motors rated 20 kW and above to prevent

condensation in the motors.
Heaters shall be connected to a suitable single-phase A.C. supply derived from
a dedicated anti-condensation heater supply bus.
The heaters shall comprise at least two separate elements, each connected to its
own terminals in terminal box. The heater elements shall be paralleled at these
terminals. The rating of the heaters shall be such that, with one heater element
out of service and with a.c. supply on the terminals of the remaining heater(s),
the motor windings and insulating materials will be maintained at a temperature
not less than 6ºC above ambient temperature.
Heat shall be transferred to the windings by convection from heaters mounted
on the motor frame. Heaters fastened to the windings are not acceptable. The
surface temperature rise of the heaters shall not exceed 200ºC above ambient.
With the motor stopped and all heaters in service the temperature rise of the
insulation shall be within 10C - 30C.
The switchgear controlling the heaters will be arranged to Auto ON/OFF. A
permanent warning label shall be fitted in a prominent position on the motor
indicating that heater supply remains alive even when the main motor power
connections are disconnected
Winding temperature detectors
Motors rated 120 kW and above shall be provided with a copper constantan
thermocouple (which will be used in measuring winding temperature) in a coil
slot corresponding to each phase of the winding.
All MV motors shall be provided with six embedded temperature detectors to
provide stator winding temperature detection. These temperature detectors may
be the thermocouple or resistance type, two per phase placed between coil sides
within the slots at locations of greatest running temperature.
Connections to temperature detectors shall be terminated in a separate terminal
box.
The temperature shall be indicated on DCS for monitoring.
General construction
All screwed fastenings on motors installed outdoors or subject to severely

corrosive atmospheres shall be stainless steel or other approved corrosion-
resistant material.
Motors shall be installed with packing of approved thickness provided between
each motor and its bedplate to facilitate alignment. On motors 30 kW to 400
kW, side and end jacking screws shall be provided to facilitate alignment.
All devices needing attention while the plant is in service (e.g. thermometers
and flow indicators) shall be located on the same side of the motor as the power
cable terminal box.
Each motor shall be fitted with at least two (2) earthing terminal consisting of a
brass bolt or stud with brass washer outputs. Motor shall be earthed at main
body, terminal box. The metal base of motor shall also earth to ensure the safety
of personnel and equipment.
Terminal Boxes - General
A separate terminal box shall be provided for the power supply cables, each
group of secondary connections (e.g. thermocouples and current transformers)
and the anti-condensation heaters. They shall be mounted and facilities provided
to enable cables to approach on the right hand side of the motor when viewed
from the driving end.
Terminal boxes shall be of fabricated steel construction and shall provide the
same degree of protection as that of the associated motor.
Terminal boxes which are split in more than one direction and in which the
gaskets meet to form a “T” junction will not be accepted. Cover gaskets shall
be fixed firmly to either the cover or the box.
Cable entry of terminal box shall be metric type.
Power cable terminal boxes and terminals
Power supply cable terminal boxes shall comply with the requirements of BS
4999, Part 145.
For MV motors the power cable terminal boxes shall be the pressure relief type
with the vents arranged in such a way that the force of an explosion within the
box cannot cause injury to personnel. They shall be phase segregated type to
restrict any electrical breakdown to an earth fault. They shall be so rated that
they will safely carry through faults of the levels and times expected to be
present. They shall be fitted with dryness indicators using silica-gel or other
similar material.
For motors rated more than 1000kW at 11kV, the Bidder/Contractor shall
supply and install in the neutral terminal box a three-phase set of differential
protection current transformers to IEC 61869.
The current transformers shall be toroidal in shape and installed with suitable
brackets, clamping plates, removable sections of phase connections etc. A
secondary connections terminal box containing stud connections shall be
provided on the neutral terminal box in an approved position.
Rating plates for the current transformers shall be attached to the outside of the
neutral terminal box.
Low voltage motors shall have power terminals of the stud type of minimum
diameter 8mm.
Power supply cable terminal boxes shall be provided with cable sealing glands,
cable lugs and internal supports all suitable for use with the cable to be provided.
Cable lugs shall be suitable for use with copper cable.
Terminal boxes shall be suitable for dry type terminations
Secondary Terminal Boxes and Terminals
Terminal boxes for temperature detectors and anti-condensation heaters shall be

provided with removable blank gland plates.
Terminal boxes for temperature detectors shall be provided with stud or tunnel
type terminals. Each terminal shall be labeled to identify the thermocouples,
resistance temperature detectors or thermostats, their type and polarity. A
warning label shall be provided fixed to the outside of the box stating
“Temperature Detector Terminal Box. Do Not HV Test”.
The terminal box for anti-condensation heaters shall be provided with 8 mm
minimum diameter stud terminals for each heater element and means of
isolating from the supply the individual heater elements. A connection diagram
shall be included in the terminal box.
A suitable warning label shall be provided on anti-condensation heaters.
Brushgear, Sliprings and Commutators
Plant which includes brushes shall be kept to a minimum and shall be provided
only if specified.
Brushgear shall be arranged so that brushes may be changed quickly. The
tensioning gear shall be arranged so that brush pressure will not change
appreciably with brushwear. Current loading in all brushes connected in parallel
shall be effectively equal.
Screws or nuts which must be loosened in changing brushes shall be captive.
Under normal conditions of running and starting, the brushgear shall run
without sparking injurious to sliprings, commutators or brushes.
Bidder/Contractors shall describe:
 What provision would be made to guard against slipring and commutator
flashover and when the plant is required to start after extended periods at
standstill.
 What maintenance is necessary to prevent flashover?.
 What maintenance is necessary when the motor is subjected to long periods
of running at light loads and no load.
Brushgear compartments shall be separated from the rest of the machine. Their
ventilation system shall be such that the brushgear compartment is under
positive pressure. The ventilation system shall be arranged to remove carbon
dust and so prevent the dust being deposited on insulation surfaces, and shall be
provided with inlet filters to prevent pollution of cooling air. The air inlet and
discharge shall be arranged to prevent the ingress of water into the enclosure.
Such separate compartments shall be provided with their own anti-condensation
heaters
Name plate
Each motor shall have a permanent stainless steel nameplate. The information
shall include the number of phases, type of enclosure, output, kind of rating
(continuous, etc), angular speed in RPM, frequency, voltage, power factor, full
load current, serial number, model, insulation class and manufacturer’s name.
The Manufacturer Nameplate shall be also applied for all electrical equipment
such as: Generators, Switchgears, IPBs, Transformers, etc.
7.13.18 Motor Starting Current
The direct starting current ratio at Locked rotor status, rated voltage and rated
frequency shall never exceed the following values including tolerance.
Rated voltage Starting current Remarks
11kV 500% of In Boiler Feed Pump
System only
600% of In
400V or below 700% of In 20kW and above
800% of In Below 20kW
DC Motor 200% of In Based on 7.10.1.1 – (4)
(In = Motor rated current at full load)
7.13.19 Motor Speed Protection

Speed sensor(Inductive proximity probe or hall effect gear tooth sensor) shall
be provided for motor over speed/under speed protection for 11KV(more than
1MW).
Speed sensor(Inductive proximity probe or hall effect gear tooth sensor) shall
be provided for motor under speed protection for 11kV and 400V(above
110kW).
The sensor type shall be decided later.
7.14 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER
General
Bidder/Contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission lighting

system, small power and maintenance box and auxiliaries for Quang Trach I
Thermal Power Plant.
Bidder/Contractor shall design and provide one 400/230V electric system to
service the distribution of power to anti-condensation heaters at site.
Bidder/Contractor shall design and provide one lighting system for site to enable
the identification and safe operation of plant and equipment and movement of
personnel.
The lighting system will supply the illumination for office, control room,
electrical equipment, indoor/outdoor area, road, etc. of power plant.
The normal power will be supplied from 400/230VAC system.
The emergency lighting, EXIT lighting shall be supplied from DC (battery) or
UPS to ensure the illumination for the safe passage of personnel and for the
plant to be operated safely in the event of loss of normal AC source. This system
shall be so designed as a maintained system supplied normally from AC source
and switching over to UPS system when disconnecting to the normal source.
The small power, maintenance box shall be provided to supply the power for
small load, mobile equipment and maintenance through the single phase and
three phase power socket.
Lighting in hazardous areas shall be designed to service special usage purposes.
Light fittings and installations in hazardous areas shall comply with relevant
Vietnamese and international standards. Any area that contains combustible
or/and hazardous materials shall be considered as “hazardous area” such as:
 Coal handling area such as pulverizer and bunker floor.
 Hydrogen generation house area.
 Chemical area.
 Chemical laboratory.
 Fuel oil storage area
 Battery room
 Etc.
Air craft lights shall comply with Vietnamese standards and relevant
international standards issued by the International Civil Aviation Organization.
The power supplies for the stack lighting shall be dual supplies to be taken from
the 230Vac UPS system to ensure a continued operation in all system conditions)
Power and light circuits shall be spread over the three phases to minimise phase
current unbalance at the main switchboard.
The lighting and small power system will generally comprise as below: Normal
AC Lighting System, Emergency AC Lighting System, emergency DC lighting
system
PVC insulated wires of 450/750 V voltage grade shall be used for building
lighting (CCB, water treatment control building, ESP&FGD control building,
coal handling control building, …).
XLPE cables of 0.6/1 kV voltage grade shall be used for outdoor lighting
(turbine, boiler, steel structure of ESP, FGD, coal yard, transfer tower, belt
conveyor, ware house, work shop,..).
In case of failure of normal A.C. Supply, Emergency A.C. lighting and exit signs
shall be provided in all power plant such as buildings, boiler, turbine, coal
handling system, ESP, FGD, … etc for general visibility, safe movements and
operation of important auxiliaries.
EXIT lighting fixture shall be installed at the door/location where easy to escape
in case emergency condition. The emergency evacuation light or direction light
shall be installed at the cable gallery, corridor, conveyor,… where required to
evacuate to the EXIT way.
Lighting in hazardous areas shall be specifically designed for use in the Class,
Zone and Division of those areas. Lighting at hazardous areas shall be according
to the relevant International and Vietnamese standards for hazardous areas.
General requirements on lighting
Bidder/Contractor shall design and install one lighting system for the CCR of
the plant with the following features:
 Minimum glare to fit with the screen based control equipment.
 In combination with local lighting.
 Minimizing the light reflection.
 Lighting directly on to the control tables and panels.
 Light dimmers shall be provided for all lights.
The following lighting types shall be used:
 Tubular fluorescent lamps.
 Mercury vapour lamps.
 High pressure sodium lamps.
 Light fittings for hazardous areas
 Aircraft warning lighting
The light fittings of each type of lighting shall be of the same make and type
through out the entire site to achieve uniformity and minimize the number of
spare parts.
The LED light shall be priority using.
(1) For offices, meal rooms, locker rooms and W.C., tubular fluorescent lamps shall
be installed on the floor with light control louvre panels. Wall mounted switches
shall be provided at entrance/exit of offices, conference rooms and others.
(2) All lighting system shall be designed to fit with the operation in tropical
environment with the appropriate protection level of IP against the ingress of
insects, moisture and rainwater.
(3) All luminaires shall be positioned to allow reasonable access for lamp changing
and it shall be possible to change lamps with the assistance of a two metre step
ladder. Fittings in the ground level areas may be mounted at heights not in
excess of seven metres above floor level. Luminaries support brackets and
support columns shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication and shall be
designed to give adequate support for the luminaries.
(4) For turbine house, Workshop Areas and large open spaces, high pressure
sodium lamps shall be used with some fluorescent fittings to allow for discharge
lamps to run up.
(5) For areas where access is limited by plant and piping or where exposed to the
weather, mercury vapour reflector fittings in conjunction with fluorescent fitting
shall be used and mounted on columns
(6) Where using high pressure mercury vapour fittings are used they shall be
installed at the minimum height above the access way or working areas:
Capacity Height
less than 150 W 2.5 m
less than 200 W 3.0 m
higher than 200 W 4.0 m
(7) Roadway and outdoor lighting shall be controlled by photoelectric switches.

The circuitry shall prevent inadvertent switching due to electro-magnetic
interference from light or other sources. Lighting in other areas shall be
controlled by switches or time meters. Above lighting door of lighting pole shall
be equipped an edge to prevent the water can drop to insde.
(8) Lighting control equipment shall be located externally to the light fittings where
possible to reduce the generated heat and to provide better sealing against
insects.
(9) The installation of wiring and cable conduit shall be suitable with tropical
environment and shall provide the protection against the destroy of vermin.
(10) Strong lighting shall be provided in places where work is required to be carried
out regularly in locations outside the buildings. Lighting level shall be selected
based on functions.
Lighting level table:
Normal lighting Emergency
(Lux) lighting
(Lux)
CCR 500 50
Office 400 50
WC 300 10
Meal room 200 10
Laboratory 600 10
Workshop 320 10
Locker room 100 10
Switchrooms (electrical) 350 10
Cable floor 240 10
Turbine house
Main turbine house lighting 300 10
Walkway 100 10
Boiler house 160 10
Coal Plant Operational areas (ship 200 10
unloader, stacker, reclaimer, transfer
tower,)
Indoor plant building 160 10
Coal storage 150 10
Tunnels (if required) 50 10
Access and stairs 100 10
Outdoor storage tanks 20 10
External Plant Building,Control panel 160 10
Street Lighting Security 50 10
Telephone booths 320 10
Transformer yard 160 20
The lighting level of other areas shall be selected in accordance with the related
standards.
Lighting levels shall be achieved at a height of 1 meter from the floor.
Bidder/Contractor shall carry out the inspection of different locations selected
by the Owner during the construction phase and the last time when the unit be
put into operation.
Lighting in the power house area shall be switched at switchboard by circuit
breakers. Lighting shall be designed so that the lighting levels shall be gradually
increased when the breakers are closed.
Additionally, all local push button stations, control stations and panels,
instrument racks, hand-operated equipment like valves etc, shall if required due
to the low surrounding illumination levels, be lit separately by means of suitable
fluorescent lamps, mounted on poles or at adjacent structures, to obtain at least
200 lux illumination level
Illuminated Exit Signs and emergency lightings
The illuminated exit signs and emergency lighting shall include maintained self-
contained units and shall be designed and installed compliantly with relevant
IEC standards (with battery and charger included or connection to UPS or DC)
All floors of platforms, stairways, doors of the power house area shall be
classified as “requiring for exits” and “EXIT” signs shall be required to be
installed.
Each emergency lighting shall have two tubular florescent lamps. The
emergency lighting shall be connected to 230V busbar of the UPS system and
in case this source in trouble, one tubular florescent lamp shall be maintained
by internal battery.
All emergency lighting shall have the following features:
 Fittings shall be supplied with switch devive terminal blocks.
 Fittings shall be supplied with about 20,000 hours life time lamps.
 Fittings shall be implemented at safe height.
 Fittings shall be power factor corrected to 0.9 p.f.
 Fittings shall be supplied with electronic starters
 Fittings shall be provided with internal associated battery charger. The
battery shall be housed in a separate enclosure.
 Illuminated exit sign shall comprise battery in separate enclosure.
 All illuminated exit signs shall be fitted with switch devive terminal blocks.
 Emergency light, EXIT Light, emergency evacuation light or direction ligh
shall maintained at least two hours
Small power and maintenance box (Single and Three phase supply)
(1) Small power for office/meeting room/control room/relay room/switchgear

room/electronic equipment room, etc.
The power socket shall be 15A/230V. Each circuit shall be protected separately
by one earthed leakage circuit breaker 30mA
Power sockets shall be installed in room base on 3 sockets per 20 m2 area of
space
(2) Maintenance box

Contractor shall be responsible to calculate, provide and install the maintenance
box (including single and three phase industrial power socket), power plug and
auxiliaries every 50m at appropriate locations/areas of power plant to ensure
that all equipment can be used with the length of cable 35m.
Each maintenance box shall be equipped 16A/230V, 63A/400V, 125A/400V
and 200A/400V power socket. Each circuit shall be protected separately by one
earthed leakage circuit breaker 30mA
The neutral and earthing conductor of the power socket shall comply with IEC
60309. All power socket shall be equipped with appropriate cover
Power plug and power socket shall be fitted.
Maintenance box, power socket shall be designed to fit with the operation in
tropical environment with the protection level shall be at least IP56 against the
ingress of insects, moisture and rainwater
The appropriate locations of maintenance box shall be at least as follows:
 Every floor of Turbine
 Every boiler feed pump
 Generator step-up transformer compartment
 Every Unit Auxiliary Transformer
 Every floor of Boiler
 Every air heaters.
 Coal conveyor
 Coal storage
 ESP area
 FGD area
 Ash area
 Diesel area
 BOP
 CW pump station
 Warehouse/Workshop
 Fuel Oil area
 Other required location shall ensure the power for maintenance will nominate
by Owner
Other requirements.
 Final power sub-circuits to general purpose outlets and lighting shall be

switched by circuit breakers. Each final sub-circuit shall be provided with
residual current devices (safety switches) for personnel protection. Safety
switches shall not be used to service various circuits e.g boiler, etc..
 General purpose outlets shall be installed in rooms.
 Heavy-duty weatherproof outlets with snap action covers shall be used in
turbine/boiler areas and all external locations.
 Where rooms/location are required to be aesthetic/beautiful as CCR, Office,
Meeting room, Control room and the room required ceiling the conduits,
power socket installation shall be embedded.
Distribution board
Distribution board for lighting and power circuit using front wiring circuit
breakers shall be provided.
 The distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of wiring
regulations and shall be designed to fit with the operation in tropical
environment with the appropriate protection level of IP56 and against the
ingress of insects, moisture and rainwater
 Incoming supply module shall be segregated from the outgoing blocks and
the distribution busbars shall be insulated or shrouded to prevent accidental
contact with live bars.
 Separate outgoing blocks shall be provided for lighting, power and
emergency lighting.
 Separate grouping of circuit breakers shall be provided for lighting, power
supply and emergency lighting. Each busbar shall be protected by
MCCB/MCB.
 Distribution boards shall be suitable for bottom cable entry.
 Main insulators shall be centrally placed above its group of sub-circuits.
 Provision shall be made at each circuit breaker to enable attachment of an
isolation tag when the circuit is isolated for maintenance.
 In addition, circuit requirements for lighting and power detailed in this
section each distribution board shall have 25% of total number of poles
allocate as spares
 The Load of Distribution shall be assigned to ensure the balance load for
three phase.
7.15 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
General and standards
Corrosion is the deterioration of metal by an electrochemical reaction with the

environment, and is caused by an electrochemical cell action. To mitigate
against the consequences of corrosion over the lifetime of the power station, the
need for cathodic protection shall be investigated and protection provided where
investigations point to the need. This protection system shall be so designed to
control corrosion on equipment surface concern to Quang Trach I TPP as well
as .
Critical areas to be examined are:
 Underground structures and piping.
 Structural support members.
 CW system components (Cooling supply pipe, Cooling discharge pipe,
Intake screen system, Stoplog, sluice gate, pumps, …)
 Water tanks.
 Turbine condenser water boxes.
 Etc.
The system shall be fixed inside or adjacent to each area suitably and exposing
parts shall be protected from weather condition. A site corrosion survey broadly
in line with BSI CP1021 latest version shall be conducted to determine the need
for protection.
Description
Each fully automatic control cathodic protection system shall consist of the
following:
 Anodes, control electrodes, reference testing points with necessary racks and
insulation flanges;
 Control cubicle, rectifying transformer, control devices, instrumentation and
alarm;
 Connection cable between control cubicle, rectifying transformer and
anodes, control electrodes, reference points and fixed reference electrodes;
 Auxiliary anodes with junction boxes, testing piers and interconnection cable
at suitable positions;
 Mobile testing equipment/facilities including a measured device with
independent power and high impedance amperemeter and voltmeter.
Design criteria
A site corrosion survey broadly in line with BSI CP1021:1973 shall be

conducted to determine the need for protection.
The survey shall cover at least the following:
 Electrical Resistivity tests over the site to determine the average soil
resistivity at various soil depths.
 Chemical tests to determine moisture content, dissolved solids of (chlorides,
sulphate, bicarbonates, carbonates, nitrates and sulfides), soil pH and Redox
potential.
 Bacteria tests to determine the presence of sulfate reducing anaerobic
organisms.
 Stray current tests to determine if there are potentially dangerous voltage
gradients resulting from external sources of d.c. power. This is vital to find
out what other organisations are employing protection systems and to advise
all other parties that a protection scheme may be employed on the site.
 The results of the survey made then be used to determine the need for
protection (active or passive as appropriate) using CP1021:1973 as the guide.
 Surface treatment and coatings shall be provided on underground metalwork
regardless of cathodic protection schemes.
Where it is decided not to provide a protection system based on the survey an
adequate number of test points on underground structures shall be provided as
part of the works to facilitate conducting of field measurements after the
installation of the underground structures and piping.
All underground piping and structures shall be bonded to the station earth grid
to eliminate the possibility of hazardous potential during electrical system faults
or lightning. Where isolating joints are incorporated in the cathodic protection
design then discharge gaps shall be installed on the isolation sections.
All cathodic protection system shall be inspected, tested and commissioned at
site under the Owner’s witness.
Protection voltage
Each system shall ensure the protection voltage ranging from -0.85V to -1.5V
for Cu /CuSO4 battery for all structures and protected carbon steel equipment.
Designed lifetime
All cathodic protection equipment/facilities shall be designed and calculated

with the minimum lifetime of 30 years at continuous operation condition under
site weather condition.
Galvanic Anode/Impressed Current Systems
The selection of either the impressed current or galvanic anode system shall be
based on the current requirements and soil resistivity and accessibility of
components for maintenance.
Current requirements for cathodic protection shall be designed with an adequate
design margin such that adequate current distribution can be achieved with
small changes in parameters.
Galvanic Anodes
Galvanic anodes shall only be provided if the following parameters are satisfied
by calculation.
Soil resistivity is low.
Type of anode is capable of continuously supplying the maximum current
demand.
Because of the variation of performance over time special backfills (aimed at
providing a lower anode resistance to remote earth than the original soil) shall
be used.
For the calculation of anode resistance to remote earth reference to Clause 4.2.2
of CP 1021:1973 shall be consulted.
Sacrificial anodes shall be clearly marked with the type of material (trade name)
the anode mass.
Impressed Current Systems
Impressed current systems shall be fed from automatic potential control three
phase rectifiers/transformer sets. The output voltage shall be adjustable from
zero to maximum rated output. Instrumentation of voltage and current shall be
provided. Two 100% duty rectifier units shall be provided. The automatic
potential control shall be provided making use of suitable permanent reference
electrodes carried close to the structure being protected. Because of the risk of
an explosion due to hydrogen evolution, the potential shall be continuously
monitored and suitably alarmed. Ground beds shall be designed that satisfy the
following:
 Its mass and quality are sufficient to last for the design life of the system.
 Variation of soil conditions over the design life of the system.
 The resistance of the ground bed allows for the predicted current demand to
be met under all soil conditions.
 Remote from the structure being protected to provide uniform current
distribution.
 The top of the anode bed shall be at least 1 metre below ground level.
Calculations shall be provided to provide the basis of the chosen resistance to
remote earth of the ground bed.
Individual anode currents shall be monitored to determine their performance
and contribution to the entire bed.
Anodes provided shall have materials nominated, its trade identification, and
mass.
Anode materials shall be selected from the following:
 graphite
 high silicon iron/chromium alloy
 magnetite
 metal oxide plated metal
 platinised titanium/miobium.
The selection of the anode material shall be based on current requirements,
corrosion of anode by the soil and economic considerations.
Attention shall be given to the integrity of the insulation of interconnecting
cables to ensure that they do not themselves corrode.
Voltage reference points
Provision shall be made to reference testing points. The arrangement and

installation of these shall provide a convenient examination of structure electric
potential by immersed simple method controlled by Cu/CuSO4 battery and
open/closed of voltmeter.
Control and Instrumentation
Each system shall be automatically controlled by potential control electrodes

changing DC current rating of rectifying transformer to controlled anode groups
to ensure that all protected structures shall be within specified protection voltage
range.
Each system shall be fully controlled and measured and together with other
facilities to serve for regular examination of protection potential, especially
elements belong to minimum protection grade.
The regular examination shall be implemented from fixed electrodes indicated
on the control panel. In addition related facilities shall also need to be provided
to service manual examination using mobile Cu/CuSO4 battery and high
impedance voltmeter at specified testing points.
Individual anodes or anode group shall be adjusted, power disconnected and
measured to service the reading of total current and anode potential.
Maximum DC outfeeder of voltage rectifiers shall not exceed 50V and the
fluctuation of the maximum DC outfeeder shall not exceed 5%.
Protection methods for rectifying transformer shall protect it against effects
such as over-load, short-circuit of DC outfeeder. Impulse converter shall be
directly connected to each D.C outfeeding points.
Portable testing equipment
Two Cu/CuSO4 batteries with interconnection cables shall be so designed to

compare reference points for provision.
High impedance mobile digital voltmeter/amperemeter shall be so designed to
measure the protection potential and current of anode to be provided.
Auxiliary protection
Areas where continuous circuit is hardly or unlikely to be provided, forced

current system shall be additionally provided with more anodes of high quality
zinc. Places where suitable, anodes shall be mounted on to the structures via
junction box/testing piers.
Back up anodes shall be so designed with minimum lifetime of 30 years at the
current density of 100mA/m2 for all protected surface.
Testing piers shall be impermeable and be protected from weather condition.
These include dismantled circuit and interconnection points to serve for the
measurement of protection potential and anode outfeeder.
Interconnection cables
Cables shall be suitably insulated with clamps by polyethylene and covered by

PVC. All connection points between rectifying transformer and anodes or other
electrodes shall be implemented via fully impermeable junction box and be
protected from weather condition.
Where, if possible, cable/structure adhering points shall be done by thermal
welding or equivalent.
Underground pipework auxiliary cathodic protection system
General
All components of underground pipework or other iron structures shall be
provided with external cathodic protection via an independent system.
The total surface area of underground components is relatively small and one
cathodic protection system using magnesium anodes shall be provided.
However, if required by soil characteristics or systematic geology, one forced
current cathodic protection system need to be provided to achieve the protection
grades as specified.
Description
A complete set of cathodic protection system shall consist of the followings:
Anodes for underground parts, junction box/testing piers, interconnection cable,
continuous circuit and contact conjunction, necessary flanges or other insulation
sets, mobile testing equipment/facilities including high impedance voltmeter
/amperermeter and battery.
Designed cathodic current
For coated underground steel structures, the design of the system shall base on
the cathodic current of 1mA/m2 for all protected surface area.
For non-coating underground steel structures or being temporarily coated, the
design of the system shall base on the cathodic current of 30mA/m2 for all
protected surface area.
Designed protection potential
The system shall provide protection to all underground carbon steel pipework
or other structures at protection potential ranging from -0.85V to -1.5V for
Cu/CuSO4 battery.
Design lifetime
The cathodic protection system shall be so designed with the minimum lifetime
of 30 years at continuous operation condition at specific designed cathodic
current density and at site environmental condition.
Anodes
Anodes shall be of magnesium alloy and be covered by gypsum/white
clay/Na2SO4. Terminal between anodes and cable shall be implemented in
suitable hole which coated by epoxy cover as approved. Accessories shall be so
designed to avoid interference from iron sheath of metal electrode cable. These
cables shall be suitably insulated with clamps covered by polyethylene and PVC
outer sheath.
Quick fix on cable/piping shall be carried out by thermal welding method or
equivalent. On the completion, piping coating shall be recovered as before and
cable terminal shall be covered and coated by mixtures which compatible with
piping coating.
Junction box and testing piers
Terminal between anodes and piping shall be carried out by coordinating
junction box/testing pier which is totally impermeable testing piers and be
protected against weather condition.
Terminal and unity terminal shall be provided on testing piers to facilitate the
measurement of anode current and pipe potential by specific portable
measurement equipment.
Additional testing piers shall be provided at important points and others in the
system that contact conjunction, closed circuit conjunction or insulation sets
shall be installed.
Portable testing equipment
Two Cu/CuSO4 batteries with interconnection cables, together with specified
testing piers shall be provided.
High impedance mobile digital voltmeter/amperemeter shall be so designed to
use batteries as specified to facilitate the measurement of pipe protection
potential and outfeeder of anode current via specific testing piers
7.16 TEST AND INSPECTION
General
Unless otherwise specified all tests listed in the relevant Standard shall be
carried out together with any additional tests required by the Specification.
Despite anything to the contrary contained in the Standard, all Type Test,
Special Test, Routine Tests, Sampling tests and other tests shall be carried out.
Subject to the Owner agreement, type test certificates which are adjudged
satisfactory may be accepted in lieu of repeating type tests.
All instruments to be used, in connection with these tests shall be calibrated
before tests. The Bidder/Contractor is requested to provide the calibration
certificates for each instrument used during these tests.
The Electrical equipment shall be tested and certificated in accordance with all
the relevant provisions of the IEC standard and Vietnam's code and standards
listed in this Section. The test items, acceptance values/criteria and Standard
shall be shown clearly on the Test Reports.
The test and commissioning for electrical shall also complied with regulations:
 Decision No 25/QĐ-ĐTĐL dated 26th March 2019 issued by Electricity
Regulatory Authority of Vietnam (ERAV) regarding Testing procedure and
Testing supervision.
and Commissioning Procedure for Surge Arrester/ Lightning Arrester,
and Commissioning Procedure for AC Circuit Breaker
and Commissioning Procedure for Earthing system
All Type Test, Special Test, Routine Tests, Site Test, Sampling tests reports
shall be submitted to Owner.
Contractor shall be responsible to inform, submit the report of the root cause
analysis and remedial actions/ countermeasures for any
troubles/fails/damages/incident/defect work of electrical equipment to Owner
during the installation, testing and commissioning for information within 01
week after the trouble/incident occurred
Generator and auxiliaries
Generator
The generator shall be subjected to tests are required to prove compliance with
specified requirements including IEC60034 to prove that it has been
manufactured correctly and for the determination of characteristics
(1) Inspection and Test at Workshop

(a) General
Where no specific test is specified then the various items of plant, materials and
equipment shall be tested in accordance with the applicable standard, acceptable
to the Owner. Where no appropriate standard is available, tests shall be carried
out in accordance with the maker's standard practice, subject to the prior
approval of the Owner. In all cases, works tests shall include electrical,
mechanical and hydraulic tests in addition to any tests called for by the Owner
to ensure that the plant being supplied fulfills the requirements of the
Specification.
If considered necessary by the Owner, any multi-part assemblies shall be fully
erected in the Works prior to packing and dispatch to the Site.
(b) Tests on Materials
Representative samples of plates, bars and pipes, etc., which form components
of the plant shall be tested as required, to the relevant approved standard or code
or at the request of the Owner.
All test pieces shall be prepared and supplied by the Bidder/Contractor at his
own cost. If any test piece fails to comply with the requirements of the
specifications for the material in question, the Owner may reject the whole batch
of material represented by that test piece.
All important forgings are to be examined jointly at the maker's works by the
Owner, together with representatives of the manufacturer during forging and
heat treatment.
The test shall be carried out on the following but be not limited to:
(c) Generator Stator/Rotor
The generator shall be subjected to tests are required to prove compliance with
specified requirements including IEC60034 to prove that it has been
manufactured correctly and for the determination of characteristics.
(d) DC Winding Resistance measurement for Stator and Rotor windings
(e) High Voltage Tests (Power frequency withstand voltage test) for Stator and
Rotor windings
All parts of the generator shall be subjected to a high voltage test in accordance
with the requirements of IEC 60034.
(f) DC High voltage and leakage current test
(g) Temperature Rise
Tests shall be carried out to prove that the temperature rise of the various parts
of the generator is within the limits required by IEC 60034.
Temperature rise tests shall be carried out also at site in accordance with the
Requirements of Performance test to prove the guarantee of performance.
(h) Insulation Tests for Stator and Rotor windings
 The Insulation Resistance (IR) of the stator and rotor windings shall be
measured with the windings cold and at the completion of the temperature
rise tests.
 The Polarization Index (PI) of each stator phase winding and of the whole
winding shall be measured with the windings cold and hot.
 Repetitive surge tests shall be carried out on the rotor winding to confirm the
integrity of interturn insulation.
 The insulation of stator bars and coils shall be tested in accordance with IEC
60894.
 Each phase of the stator windings shall be tested to determine its capacitance
(in nanofarads) to earth and dielectric loss angle (in milliradians) in 0.2 Un
steps from zero to rated phase-phase voltage, both raising voltage and
lowering voltage. Each test will involve energizing one phase winding with
the other phase windings earthed.
The same tests shall also be carried out with the three phase windings connected
to measure combined valves.
The report of test results shall include a description of the testing technique used,
the plant conditions (including gas and water coolant arrangements and
temperatures) and the test equipment used.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit the proposed test procedure.
 Each phase of the stator windings shall be tested to determine the levels of
Partial Discharge (PD) (in picocoulombs) of insulation in 0.2 Un steps from
zero to rated phase-phase voltage both raising and lowering voltage. Each
test will involve energizing one phase winding with the other phase windings
earthed.
The report of test results shall include a description of the testing technique
used, the plant conditions (including gas and water coolant arrangements and
temperatures) and the test equipment used.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit the proposed test procedure
(i) Tests to Determine Generator Parameters
 The Bidder/Contractor shall determine the following parameters for each
generator. The Bidder/Contractor shall nominate the tests to be performed to
determine the parameters with reference to IEC 60034 standard. Where a
nominated test is not in accordance with IEC 60034 standard, the
Bidder/Contractor shall justify its use.
The Bidder shall nominate expected values of the generator parameters
Symbol Units (%) Parameter
Kc Shot circuit ratio

Xd (saturated) % Direct axis synchronous reactance
(saturated
Xd (unsaturated) % Direct axis synchronous reactance
(unsaturated)
Xq (saturated) % Quadrature axis synchronous reactance
(saturated)
Xq (unsaturated) % Quadrature axis synchronous reactance
(unsaturated)
X'd (saturated) % Direct axis transient reactance (saturated)
X'd (unsaturated) % Direct axis transient reactance
(unsaturated)
X''d (at 50% volts) % Direct axis subtransient reactance
(saturated)
X''d (at 100% volts) % Direct axis subtransient reactance
(saturated)
X''q (at 50% volts) % Quadrature axis subtransient reactance
X''q (at 100% volts) % Quadrature axis subtransient reactance
X2  Negative-sequence reactance
R1  Positive-sequence armature winding
resistance
X0  Zero-sequence reactance
R0  Zero-sequence resistance
Xp % Potier reactance
Ra  Armature winding direct-current resistance
Rf  Excitation winding direct-current resistance
Un % Rated voltage regulation

C3_ F Capacitance of windings to frame (all
windings connected)
C1_ F Capacitance of one winding to from (other
two windings connected to earth)
Z % Surge impedance
a sec Armature short-circuit time constant
'd sec Direct-axis transient short-circuit time
constant
''d sec Direct-axis subtransient short-circuit time
constant
'q sec Quadrature-axis transient short-circuit time
constant
''q sec Quadrature-axis subtransient short-circuit
time constant
'do sec Direct-axis transient open-circuit time
constant
''do sec Direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time
constant
'qo sec Quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time
constant
''do sec Quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit
time constant
j sec Acceleration time
Hgen MW Generator stored energy constant
sec/MVA
Hturb MW Turbine stored energy constant
sec/MVA
Hgen MW Combined turbine and generator stored
sec/MVA energy constant
Ifn A Rated excitation current
 Saturation Curves, Segregated Losses and Efficiency

 Open-circuit and short-circuit tests shall be carried out to determine:
 Open-circuit saturation curve and air gap line
 Short-circuit saturation curve
 Zero power factor overexcited saturation curve for rated Armature
current
 Segregated losses (core loss; stray-load loss; friction and windage
loss; armature and field losses)
 Efficiency
(j) Waveform Deviation
The waveform of the generated voltage shall be measured and analyzed in
accordance with IEC60034-1standard.
(k) Shaft Current/Shaft voltage
Tests shall be carried out with the generator at rated speed and excited to rated
voltage on open circuit to prove that circulating shaft currents are prevented by
the bearing insulation and shaft earthing provided.
(2) Inspection and Test at Site

(a) General
All equipment and plant shall pass such tests at Site as are required by the Owner
to prove compliance with the Specification independently of any tests which
may have already been carried out at the manufacturer's works.
The tests at Site shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, those specified
in this section.
All functional and pressure tests on fully assembled and complete items of plant
which have not been carried out at the manufacturer's works, shall be carried
out at Site.
The commissioning tests shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of this Part 2-Chapter VII-Section 1 General Technical
Requirements.
(b) DC Winding Resistance measurement for Stator and Rotor windings
(c) High Voltage Tests
 AC Power frequency withstand voltage test for Stator and Rotor windings
 DC High voltage and leakage current test for Stator windings
(d) Test for Generator Bushing Current Transformer
(e) Test for Neutral Grounding Transformer
(f) Temperature Rise
Temperature rise tests shall be carried out at site in accordance with the
Requirements of Performance test to prove the guarantee of performance and
the temperature rise of the various parts of the generator is within the limits
required by IEC 60034. (refer Part 2 – Chapter VII – Section 1 – General
Technical Requirements)
(g) Insulation Tests
 The Insulation Resistance (IR) of the stator and rotor windings shall be
measured with the windings cold and at the completion of the temperature
rise tests.
 The Polarization Index (PI) of each stator phase winding and of the whole
winding shall be measured with the windings cold and hot.
(h) Shaft Current/Shaft voltage
Tests shall be carried out with the generator at rated speed and excited to rated
voltage on open circuit to prove that circulating shaft currents are prevented by
the bearing insulation and shaft earthing provided.
(i) Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) measurement
(j) Short circuit and open circuit test
(k) Generator online partial discharge monitoring test
(l) Generator capacity curve/ Generator Operation Zone test
Contractor shall submit the procedure and test for Generator capacity curve/
Generator Operation Zone to verify the actual maximum operation zone of
Generator under leading phase and lagging phase conditions. The Active and
Reactive Power shall be tested corresponding to 0.85 Lagging/0.9 Leading
power factor to show the expected generator MW/MVAR operating limits at
rated hydrogen pressure, rated Power. P/Q limiter is used to prevent the
generator from entering the unsteady operation area. The limit curve of
Generator Operation Zone shall be tested such that five reactive power values
are corresponding to five active power levels respectively (i.e. P=0%, P=25%,
P=50%, P=75%, P=100%).
(m) Sub-Synchronous Resonance protection
Contractor shall to provide the solution of protection relay, supplementary SSR)
to ensure the safety and stability operation of Quang Trach I TPP as well as
Power excitation damping control, Blocking Filter…) for Sub-synchronous
Resonance (Grid. Contractor shall submit all detailed calculation sheet, setting
sheet, technical solution, test to prevent the SSR phenomenon that could
possibly arise.
Testing of measurement of inertial constant of rotating mass (consists of turbine,
rotor of generator
(n) Testing for reactances and time constants of generator, including direct axis and
quadrature axis synchronous reactance (Xd, Xq), direct axis and quadrature axis
transient reactance(X’d, X’q), direct axis and quadrature axis subtransient
reactance (X’’d, X’’q), stator leakage reactance (X1),open circuit direct axis
transient time constant (T’d0), open circuit quadrature axis transient time
constant (T’q0), open circuit direct axis and quadrature axis subtransient time
constant (T’’d0, T’’q0)
(o) Etc.
Excitation system

The Bidder/Contractor shall submit a list of proposed excitation system tests
including those listed below.
(a) Thyristor Bridge
Tests shall be carried out on the Thyristor bridge as required by IEC 60134
standard.
With reference to the temperature rise test, the temperature rise must remain
within limits for a duty cycle no less than that specified in this Request for
Proposal Document.
(b) Excitation Transformer
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out temperature rise tests at the works, using
a higher than rated current to prove that in-service rated temperature rises will
not be exceeded. The test current shall consider the extra losses due to
harmonics and shall be determined by reference to ANSI/IEEE C57.110.
(c) Complete Excitation System
The tests listed in the following sub-clauses, except for sub-clauses (a) and (b),
shall be carried out on both excitation systems. The tests listed din sub-clauses
(a) and (b) need only be carried out on the first manufactured system.
 A Transfer Function Test shall be carried out on the excitation system for the
determination of all time constants, gains, input/output limits and frequency
response curves. The block diagram Drawing T-showing the transfer
functions of the excitation system shall be amended from the results of these
test and included in the test report.
 An Excitation System Nominal Response Test shall be carried out to
determine the excitation system nominal response VE. The voltage error step
to be used in the test is 10% of rated voltage. Where the test is not in
accordance with IEC 60034-6-1standard, the Bidder/Contractor shall justify
its use.
 Checks shall be carried out on the operational features of the automatic
excitation regulator; including automatic changeover from one controller to
another; and to manual operation of limiters; follow-up controls and alarms.
 All other tests as necessary shall be carried out to prove compliance of the
excitation system with the specified requirements

(a) Tests shall be carried out to prove that the stability and damping of the
Automatic excitation regulator (AVR) complies with the specified requirements.
Tests with the stabilizing signals connected and disconnected shall be carried
out to demonstrate the effect of all stabilizing signals used in the AVR. The tests
shall be carried out with the generator operating on open circuit and rated
voltage, and with the generator on load.
(b) With the generator on-load and feeding into the system, the operation of the
AVR over and under excitation limiter, and limiter failure detectors shall be
proven.
(c) With the generator on open circuit and under AVR control, the generator
terminal voltage shall be measured at speeds corresponding to 47.50 and 52 Hz
without changing the voltage set point.
(d) The voltage drop compensation shall be proved effective. The Owner will
arrange for variations in system voltage to permit reasonable reactive load
changes to be made on the generator. The Bidder/Contractor will make electrical
measurements to confirm the degree of compensation.
(e) The control system for coordinating reactive power loading generators shall be
proved to be able to carry out its function by in-service test. The Owner will
arrange for variations in reactive power demand on the generators for this test.
(f) With the generator on open circuit and under AVR control, changeover of the
AVR from one control function to another (i.e. auto-auto, auto-manual) shall be
proven for each fault condition.
(g) Excitation Transformer test (Excitation Transformer, Current Transformer)
(h) Plant Power System Stabilizer (PSS) function test
(i) Over-Excitation Limit (OEL) test
(j) Under-Excitation Limit (UEL) test
(k) All necessary tests shall be carried out to check the excitation system transfer
function block diagram
(l) The other test following Decision No 25/QĐ-ĐTĐL dated 26th March 2019
issued by Electricity Regulatory Authority of Vietnam (ERAV) regarding
Testing procedure and Testing supervision.
(m) Conditions and Excitation tests:
This test shall be carried out under condition that excitation system is set up at
Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) mode. Measurement signals include
Generator voltage, Active Power, Reactive Power, Excitation voltage,
Excitation current, output signal of AVR and output signal of PSS. List of tests:
 Load Rejection test for Reactive Power
 Test condition: Generator is operating with minimum Active power, under
excitation (Leading power factor -receiving Reactive power).
 Test procedure: Carry out to open the Circuit Breaker (GCB). Measure the
Generator voltage and current, Excitation voltage and current,...
 Test on Step Response when Generator is not connected to grid.
 Test condition: Generator is operating in No-Load with GCB is opened
 Test procedure: Suddenly change the reference voltage (at least 5% of Generator
terminal voltage) of AVR and hold for at least 10 second in case of increasing
and decreasing reference voltage.
 Test on Step Response when Generator is connected to grid.
 Test condition: Generator is operating with GCB is closing and generating Active
power in range 80~100% of rated Active power.
 Test procedure: Suddenly change the reference voltage (at least 2% of Generator
terminal voltage) of AVR and hold for at least 10 second in case of increasing
and decreasing reference voltage. Carried out the test in two (02) cases: with
PSS put in service and without PSS put in service corresponding to two (02)
generating levels of Reactive power ( at least 40% difference of Reactive power)
 Impulse test
power in range 80~100% of rated Active power.
 Test procedure: Suddenly change the reference voltage (5% and 10% of
Generator terminal voltage) of AVR and hold for at least 100 milisecondes in
case of increasing and decreasing reference voltage. Carried out the test in two
(02) cases: with PSS put in service and without PSS put in service corresponding
to two (02) generating levels of Reactive power ( at least 40% difference of
Reactive power)
 Gain Margin test of PSS
power in range 80~100% of rated Active power. PSS put in service.
 Test procedure: Increase the stabilizer gain factor Ks of PSS until we observe the
fluctuation of the excitation voltage and current, generator voltage, active power,
reactive power.
 For each value of Ks, the time will be hold at least 1 minute to measure the Gain
Margin of PSS.
 Test on Frequency Response when Generator is not connected to grid.
 Test condition: Generator is operating with GCB is opened. Carry out the test
with and without response signal of generator terminal voltage to AVR of
excitation system.
 Test procedure: Put the frequency signals from 0.05Hz ~ 10Hz into AVR of
excitation system (maximum frequency step is 0.05Hz). Measure amplification
and phase angle deviation characteristic between generator voltage and reference
voltage of excitation.
 Requirements for test/measurement equipment
 Test equipment for excitation system test: recording equipment shall be had the
recording capacity at least 100 samples/second.
 Digital recording.
(n) Requirements for frequency of test record for excitation and governor control
system
 For excitation system tests:
 Display results for wave record have to / must have at least resolution is
100 samples/second.
 Results have to be showed by two (2) formats: hard-copy and soft-copy
(excel format or equivalent).
 For governor system tests:
 Display results for wave record have to / must have at least resolution is
10 samples/second.
Results have to be showed by two (2) formats: hard-copy and soft-copy
(excel format or equivalent).500kV EHV Overhead line
The tests shall be conducted in accordance with IEC, Viet Nam Regulation.

(a) Overhead Line conductor
least two reels. The test specimens of component wire before stranding shall be
taken from 10% length so that the following tests can be carried out:
a.1 Aluminum wire
 Appearance test
 Wrapping test Electric Conductivity
b.1 Hot-dip Galvanized Zinc-coating steel wire
 Appearance test
 Torsion test
 Elongation test
 Mass of zinc
c.1 Stranded Conductor
 Appearance test
 Weight
 Tensile strength Mass of grease
For each test the contractor shall bear the travel expenses for the Purchaser or
his Representative. Related costs shall be included in the material cost.
For the conductor, the Bidder shall provide certified test reports with the Bid
for:
 A stress-strain type test
 A breaking strength type test
 Test to demonstrate that jointing of individual aluminum wires meets the
requirements of IEC 61089
 Grease type test
 Creep test
(b) Overhead Grounding wire
at least two reels. The test specimens of component wire before stranding shall
be taken from 10% length so that the following tests can be carried out:
a.1 Hard Drawn Aluminum-Clad Steel wire
 Appearance test
 Diameter
 Tensile test
 Torsion test
 Elongation test
b.1 Concentric Lay Stranded Aluminum-Clad Steel Conductor
 Appearance test
 Weight
 Tensile strength
For each test the contractor shall bear the travel expenses for the EMPLOYER
or his Representative. Related costs shall be contained in material prices.
For the earthwire, the Bidder shall provide certified test reports with the Bid for:
 A stress-strain test
 A breaking strength test
 Test to demonstrate that jointing of individual steel wires meets the
requirements of IEC 61089.

 Earthing resistance test
 Insulator test
 Insulation Resistance test
 Power frequency withstand voltage test (keep the working voltage within 10
min)
 Operation of controls systems.
 Protection relay function check
 Etc.
Power Transformers

The testing shall be considered to apply to appropriate Transformer (oil or dry
Transformer. The following tests shall be conducted on each transformer but
not limited:
 Visual Inspection.
 Measurement of Winding and core Insulation resistance (1 minute readings
taken for 10 minutes)
 Dielectric dissipation factor (DDF-tan) and capacitance of winding and
bushing.
 Winding resistance on all taps and all windings
 No-load loss and No-load current, Excitation current at 100%, 105% and
110% voltage (Open circuit test)
 Measurement of impedance voltage/short circuit impedance (principal and
extreme tap) and Load loss (Short circuit test)
 Measurement of Zero Sequence Impedance of three phase Transformer
 Power Frequency Withstand tests
 Dielectric test:
 Separate-source voltage withstand test
 Induced Overvoltage withstand tests
 Partial discharge tests
 Switching Impulse voltage withstand tests
 Lightning impulse voltage withstand test
 Temperature Rise test on each rating for a minimum period of 12 hours.
Thermo vision monitoring of tank temperatures during the test shall be
carried out. (Type test)
 Harmonic components at no load current
 Tank Vacuum test to prove tank, conservator and cooling system can
satisfactorily withstand a full vacuum
 Jacking point deflection test
 Ratio and Polarity and Phase relationship/vector group
 Insulation Oil tests
 Control circuitry testing
 WTI, RTD, OTI and fiber optic calibrations
 Sound level test (Type test only)
 Oil overpressure test (pressure defection test) on transformer to check against
leakages past joints and gaskets
 On Load Tap Changer test
 Frequency Response Analysis test
 Bushing Current Transformer Test
 Bushing test
 Measurement of the power taken by the fans and oil pumps (Auxiliary losses)
 Tests on bought out components/accessories such as Buchhloz relay,
temperature indicators, pressure relief devices, oil preservation system etc
On completion of the component parts, the transformer shall be completely
erected at the Contractor’s works to permit a final inspection to be made of the
mechanical and electrical assembly and for overall testing.
For all tests during which a transformer is excited either at normal or higher
frequency all thermal and gas sensing devices shall be connected so that any
abnormality may be detected.
Dissolved gas analysis of oil shall be carried out prior to and after the power
frequency test, induced, partial discharge and the temperature rise test
Partial discharge tests shall be performed in turn upon each H.V. terminal. The
method of partial discharge measurement shall be one of the internationally
accepted methods employed to determine individual impulse magnitudes in PC
(apparent discharges as measured at the terminals), in accordance with the
relevant IEC recommendations.
The following partial discharge measurement shall be recorded during voltage
rising:
 partial discharge level at 120% of rated voltage;
 partial discharge level at 150% of rated voltage;
 at minimum induced over voltage;
 partial discharge level upon returning to 150% of rated voltage;
 partial discharge level upon returning to 120% of rated voltage.
 The test duration for recording the partial discharge measurements shall be
half (1/2) an hour for each measurement level.
The transformer will have failed the partial discharge test if the levels recorded
appreciably exceed:
 60 pC at 120% of rated voltage;
 300 pC at 150% of rated voltage
Other test (if any)

The testing shall be considered to apply to appropriate Transformer (oil or dry
Transformer. Following installation in its final position and full connection of
controls, each transformer shall be minimum subject to the following tests, but
not limited:
 Functional test of controls and cooling system.
 Insulation resistance at one minute intervals for 10 minutes
 Dielectric dissipation factor (DDF-tan) and capacitance of winding and
bushing.
 Winding resistance on all taps on all windings.
 Partial discharge (PD) test
 Ratio and phase relationships.
 Insulation oil test for dielectric strength and moisture content.
 WTI, RTD, OTI and fiber optic test and calibrations.
 Dissolved gas in oil analysis.
 Thermovision of connections following placement on load.
 Sweep frequency responsibility analysis (SFRA)
 Dielectric Frequency Response Analysis (DFR)
 No load current and power loss measurement
 High voltage test
 Bushing current transformer test
 On Load Tap Changer test
 Buchholz Relay test: The Operation for alarm and trip shall be checked by
injecting air to the test pocket provided in the relay
 Low Oil Level Alarm Test: The low oil level alarm of the magnetic oil gauge
should be checked
 Temperature Indicator Test: The contacts of the Oil Temperature Indicator
and Winding Temperature Indicator for alarm trip and control should be
checked and set at required temperature
 Generator step up transformer short circuit and open circuit test to check the
relay protection system.
 Generator step up transformer On-line Oil Analyzing System
 Generator step up transformer On-line partial discharge monitoring system
 Etc.
Generator Circuit Breaker (GCB)

(a) General
The Bidder/Contractor shall state what testing facilities he has at the works to
carry out:
 Electrical tests.
 Mechanical tests to prove the strength, hardness and other physical qualities
of the materials employed in construction.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit certified results of any design tests called
for in this Specification to which the works or any component parts thereof have
been subjected. the Owner/Engineer may accept any or all these tests in lieu of
those specified herein.
(b) Manufacturer
The Bidder/Contractor shall include in the proposal documents details of all
components which he proposes to have made by Manufacturer to the main
circuit breaker supplier and the names of such Manufacturer the place of
manufacture so that if required arrangements may be made for the necessary
inspection and testing of such components at the works of the Manufacturer.
(c) Complete Circuit Breakers - Design Tests
Design tests in accordance with IEEE Standard C37.013 shall be carried out.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit certified results for the design test to the
Owner/Engineer. The certified results shall conform to the guarantees stated in
the Contract.
If the design tests have already been carried out the Owner/Engineer may accept
certificates in lieu of repeating those tests.
(d) Complete Circuit Breakers - Production Tests
Production tests shall be made on every circuit breaker in accordance with IEEE
Std C37.013, subject to the following additions. The test values and results shall
conform to the guarantees stated in the Contract. Prior to shipping adequate
production tests should have been performed to ensure that every component of
every circuit breaker has been correctly assembled and is functioning correctly.
In addition to the production tests the following shall be carried out:
 An Ohmic resistance test on each trip and closing coil, and
 A timing test on the auxiliary contacts to demonstrate correct operation and
relationship with the main contacts.
 Insulation Resistance measurement
 Leakage test with SF6 gas
 Pressure test with SF6 gas
 Contact resistance test
 Resistance of coil
 Power frequency withstand voltage test for main circuit and control circuit
 Mechanical and Operation test
 Charging time for closing spring test
 Auxiliary equipment test (fan, motor,..)
 Voltage and Current Transformer test
 Surge Arrester test
 Capacitor test
 Interlock test
 Visual check (Name-plate, dimension,..)
 Etc.

(a) Tests by the Bidder/Contractor
On completion of erection of the circuit breakers and associated control panels
the Bidder/Contractor shall carry out the “Tests after delivery” in accordance
with IEEE Std C37.013 subject to the following additions:
 Insulation Resistance of control panel wiring;
 Confirm correct operation of tripping and closing circuits
 Confirm correct operation of auxiliary contacts.
 Contact resistance measurement test
 Mechanical Operation test
 SF6 gas pressure test
 Function check
 Etc.
The Bidder/Contractor shall advise any additional “Tests after delivery” he
proposes to carry out
Isolated Phase Busbar (IPB)

(a) Busbar Assemblies:
The capacitance of the fully assembled busbar system shall be measured on site.
(b) Busbar Conductors:
Busbar conductors shall be tested in accordance with BS 159, BS 1977 or BS
2898 as applicable.
(c) Busbar Support Insulators:
Busbar support insulators shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60168 or IEC
60137 as appropriate.
(d) Temperature Rise of Busbars and Evaluation of Losses
(e) Aluminum Welding Tests

 Visual Check
 Insulation resistance Check
 High Voltage Test (Power Frequency withstand voltage test)
 Air pressure test for IPB
 Etc.
Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG)
The tests shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60031-1, ISO3046-2

The following clauses are applicable.
(a) Performance tests of each diesel generator at the manufacturer’s works shall be
to ISO 3046/2. The tests shall be used to prove the performance guarantees. It
shall be witnessed by the representative of the Owner or nominated inspection
authority. All costs and expenses involved in conducting such tests shall be
borne by the Bidder/Contractor.
(b) The diesel generator shall not be dispatched until proved satisfactory in the
acceptance tests.
(c) All auxiliaries such as air compressors, receivers, fuel tanks, exhaust systems,
pumps, cooling towers, oil coolers, fuel consumptions, water temperature
(engine inlet and outlet), Intake air temperature, switchboards, etc. shall be
tested to relevant standards and approved before dispatch to the Site.
(d) Function test: Overspeed trip, Start/stop, Protection relay function, local/remote
control, load test 0~ 110%),..)

(a) Upon completion of erection, the Bidder/Contractor shall carry out all necessary
checks, adjustments and trial running. All costs (including diesel fuel and oil)
and expenses involved in conducting such tests shall be borne by the
Bidder/Contractor.
(b) Testing of auxiliaries such as air compressors, air receivers, fuel system, cooling
water system, air intake and exhaust system, battery and charger, fuel
consumptions, water temperature (engine inlet and outlet), Intake air
temperature, control panel and switchboard shall be individually carried out to
validate its performance and control settings.
(c) Starting tests shall demonstrate the capability to attain and stabilize frequency
and voltage within the limits
(d) Insulation Resistance measurement
(e) DC Winding Resistance measurement
(f) Current and Voltage Transformer test
(g) Protection relay function test
(h) Control and Sequence Operation function test
These tests will include, but not limited to the following:
 Open circuit test and automatic voltage regulator test.
 Synchronizing and loading for three repeat tests.
 Time duration from start to no-load, synchronization and full load
 Remote starting
 Local starting
 Auto mode
 Manual mode
 Rotation test
 Transfer test
 Load test
 Operation performance test
 Etc.
Protection and metering system

 Protection and metering relays and equipment shall be subject to type, sample
and routine tests in accordance with the relevant standards to which the
equipment is constructed. Predominantly this will be IEC 60255 covering
protection relays.
 Following assembly into shipping sections of switchboard equipment shall
be subject to operational tests.
 Wiring check
 Insulation resistance measurement
 Dielectric test
 Operation check of the relay
 Function check
 Etc.

Systems shall be subject to operational checks following installation of
switchboards and panels in their permanent position. Function tests shall be
carried out.
Protection systems shall then be subject to primary and secondary current
injection tests covering full calibration and placement in service.
 Wiring check
 Operation check of the relay
 Setting value check
 Function check
 Overall Interlock and Inter Trip Test
 Fault Monitoring check
 Secondary and Primary Injection test
 Etc.
The calculation and setting value of protection relay for Generator, Generator
Step Up Transformer, Unit Auxiliary Transformer, 500kV OverHead Line shall
be accepted by National Load Dispatching Center (NLDC or A0).
AC system (11kV switchgears and 400/230V Switchboards)

 HV and MV switchgear shall be type tested for arcing fault containment and
judged against Appendix AA, criteria 2 and 4 of IEC 60298.
 Low voltage CFS unit compartments shall be type tested to IEC 61439.1for
arcing fault containment where the energy level available to the terminals
exceeds 1,000,000 A2 seconds. Pass/fail shall be judged against Appendix
EE of AS 3439.1
 Complete shipping sections of switchboards shall be subject to at least the
following tests before leaving the works:
 Point to point wiring checks.
 Insulation resistance of switchboard and busbars.
 Circuit switch operational checks.
 Mechanical/Electrical interlock checks.
 Contact resistance checks on switch contacts and racking contacts.
 High Voltage (HV) Test
 Contact Resistance test for main circuit
 Function test
 Auxiliary circuit test
 Ect.
Following site assembly in final positions and the completion of connections,
testing shall include at least the following:
 Point to point wiring checks.
 Switch operational checks.
 Mechanical racking interlock checks.
 Primary circuit connections and phasing checks including power cabling.
 Protection primary and secondary injection tests, operation, calibration and
interface checks.
 Plant system functional checks including control, indication, alarms etc.
interface.
 Power frequency HV tests for main and auxiliary circuit
 Mechanical and Electrical interlock tests
 Insulation resistance measurement.
 Contact Resistance test
 Protection relay test
 (Voltage Transformer/ Current Transformer/Surge Arrester) Test
 Auxiliary circuit test
 Ect.
DC and UPS system
The tests shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 62040-3, 62046-1, IEC
60255-5
DC plant components shall be type, sample and routine tested in accordance
with the provisions of the relevant standards. In addition a discharge test to the
agreed Duty Cycle shall be carried out on each installed battery bank.
In addition to controlling and monitoring overall discharge current and voltage,
individual cell voltage shall be logged so that defective cells (if any) can be
identified. The metering accuracy shall be such that the overall battery bank
capacity can be declared to an accuracy of 0.5%.

The batteries shall have been successfully type tested by a recognized and
approved testing center in accordance with the relevant codes and standards and
the type testing shall have been witnessed by an independent authority
The chargers shall have been successfully type tested to prove rated operating
characteristics in normal, boost and equalise charging modes (e.g. check of DC
output voltages, delivery of rated output currents, current limiting, efficiency
and temperature rise tests) and the type testing shall have been witnessed by an
independent authority.
Visual & Dimension Check
Wiring check
Insulation resistance test
Input/ Output voltage and current
High voltage test for UPS (IEC62040-3)
Function test for UPS (IEC 62040-3)
Insulation test for UPS (IEC 62046-1)
Measurement of the total Distortion (THD) for UPS (IEC62040-3)
Temperature rise test (IEC62040-3)
The type test certificates and results of the tests shall be included in the Bid

Site acceptance tests shall be performed on the completed installations as part
of the commissioning procedure. These tests shall include a capacity test on the
batteries, recharge test on the battery/charger units to check the recharge
characteristics, operation check on all instruments, protective devices,
signals/indications and insulation resistance tests
During the Site tests the Engineer shall select at random reference cells and the
voltage curves thereof shall be checked when the battery is discharged over
three (3) and ten (10) hour periods.
The alarm levels and the automatic voltage control feature of the charger shall
be demonstrated over the specified load range.
Where load changeover facilities are included integrity of the changeover
system without break or voltage variations during loading of the standby or test
charger shall be demonstrated
Wiring check
Input/Output voltage and current
Charge/discharge for battery
Insulation test
Function test
Temperature check
Change over time check
Ect.
Cabling, wiring, cable support system
The at least following testing shall be included to test:

 Visual and Dimension Inspection
 Material component/content test
 Conductor resistance measurement
 Cable diameter measurement
 Measurement of insulation, layer thickness, overall diameter.
 Hot set test
 High voltage test
 Partial Discharge Test for MV cable and above
 Water penetration test
 Fire retardant test
 Color marking check
 Screen/ armour check
 Cable support check ( Material test for cable support, Thickness of coating,
welding line, diameter of conduit, )

 Visual and Dimension Inspection
 Conductor resistance measurement
 Insulation Resistance measurement
 High voltage test for MV cable and above
 Partial Discharge Test for MV cable and above
 Color marking check
 Screen/ armour check
 Cable support load test to ensure the safety of support.
 Etc.
Earthing, lightning protection system

 Material Verification
 Dimension & Visual, Wiring
 Welding material
 Earthing conductor (Material, Shape, Diameter,..)
 Copper bar test,
 Air terminal test
 Insulation Resistance Test
 DC Resistance

 Continuity check.
 Step Voltage check
 Touch Voltage check
 Area earthing resistance test
 Whole Plant Earthing Resistance test
 Etc.
Motor

(a) Tests during Manufacture
The coils shall be tested as follows during manufacture and prior to installation:
 Raw material test
 Random sample tests shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60034-15
on the main and interturn insulation.
 A type test on the main insulation shall be conducted in accordance with
Clause 5.2 of BS 4999 Part 144
 A routine quality control test shall be conducted in accordance with Clause
4.2 of BS 4999 Part 144 using the loss acceptance limits laid down in Table
2 of BS 4999 Part 144 and the test procedure of IEC 60894.
 The corona shield resistance shall be measured and recorded for each coil.
(b) Tests on Completion of Manufacture
 Basic, duplicate and routine check tests on the completed motor shall be
conducted in accordance with BS 4999 Part 143 or equivalent. A test
certificate shall be issued to The Owner within 2 weeks of the test completion.
 In addition to the tests specified above, for medium voltage motors, the
following tests shall be done for diagnostic information.
 Insulation resistance and polarization index tests
 Dielectric Dissipation Factor test using the test procedure of IEC 60894.
Heaters shall be in service for 24 hours prior to the test.
 Partial Discharge (PD) analysis.
 No Load test
 Winding Resistance test
 High Voltage test
 Temperature rise test
 Rotation check/ Phase sequence check
 Thermal coupler/Temperature detector/ heater check
 Lock rotor test
 Vibration test
 Overspeed test
 Overload (Overcurrent) test
 Shaft Voltage
 Painting Insspection
 In addition to the tests specified above, for low voltage motors, the following
tests shall be done for diagnostic information.
 Insulation resistance and Absorption Ratio
 No Load test
 Winding Resistance test
 Rotation check
 Thermal coupler/Temperature detector/ heater check (if any)
 Lock rotor test
 Vibration test

The following tests shall be carried out on motors following installation in their
final position:
 Winding resistance
 Insulation resistance, ( MV Motor shall be read 10 min to take polarization
index tests)
 Rotation and phase sequence checks
 Partial discharge (for MV Motor and above)
 SOLO/ Single No-Load running ( 2 hours)
 Loaded operational checks including thermovision when loaded
 Space Heater test
 Etc.
Lighting and small power

The at least following testing shall be included to test for lighting fixture, lamp,
lighting pole, etc. :
 Coating thickness measurement
 DC Resistance
 Withstand Voltage Test

 Function Test
 Continuity Test
 Sequence, function test
 Lighting level test
 Emergency lighting function test
 Etc.
Cathodic protection system

 Voltage/current measurement

 Function Test
 Continuity Test
 Protection Potential measurement
 Protection Current measurement
 Etc.
Current Transformer/ Voltage Transformer

 Rating check
 DC Resistance
 Key point and excitation current at rate key point
 Turns ratio check
 Partial discharge measurement
 Measurement of capacitance dissipation factor
 Leakage test
 Etc.

 Function Test
 Continuity Test
 DC Resistance
 Key point and excitation current curve
Turns ratio check
 Polarity check
 Etc.
Surge Arrester
 Leakage current test
 Counter check

 Leakage current test
 Counter check
 Etc.
Auxiliary Power Consumption
The Performance test for Auxiliary Power Consumption Load shall be complied
with Decision No. 52/QĐ-ĐTĐL dated on 04 August 2015 regarding the
procedure for measurement of Generator Characteristic of Coal Thermal Power
Plant in the Vietnam Competitive Generation Market.
The auxiliary power system shall be measured for unit and station load (11kV,
400/230V) that are being supplied from the Unit Auxiliary Transformer
(machine voltage to 11 kV). The total unit auxiliary kW load shall be measured
at the Unit Auxiliaries Transformer incoming power supply to a level of
accuracy is equal to or lower than 1.0% error. To achieve this, the necessary
incoming circuit metering current transformers, voltage transformer and meter
shall be class 0.2 accuracy for incoming power supply.
7.17 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
General
A list of spare parts, cross referenced to the various systems and items of
equipment (to include quantity recommended, quantity installed, drawing
reference number, drawing position and part number) and detailing the essential
operational spare parts supplied by the Bidder/Contractor for 2 years operation
from Provisional Acceptance Certificate of the plant, shall be provided in the
Schedules outlined in this Request for Proposal.
Contractors shall individually price major items in their spares lists, and provide
lump sums for minor groups of items. All spare parts and consumable lists shall
be provided in hard copy and electronic format.
The quantities of spares to be ordered and the time of placing an order shall be
at the discretion of the Employer.
The Bidder/Contractor shall also include in the Bid as an option a spare parts
agreement for 5 years of operation. This offer shall detail the scope of the spares
offered, guarantee delivery times to site, costs, form of agreement including
warranty of such parts.
As a guide only to the Bidder/Contractor, the following list is an example of the
coverage of spare parts that are expected by the Employer to be supplied for the
Power Plant to cover the first two years of operation. It is emphasized that the
list does not cover all the items that are likely to be required and consequently
it does not absolve the Bidder/Contractor from submitting their detailed
recommendations for all spares appropriate for the plant offered at the time of
Bid.
Essential spares shall comprise at least the items as listed below and as detailed
in the Essential Spares schedule for electrical plant. Optional spares shall be in
accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations for parts which may fail
and require replacement.
Essential Spares
The following items shall be provided:
(1) Generator
(a) One (1) generator set of shaft journal bearings, comprising top and bottom
halves, complete with bolts, nuts and lock washers.
(b) One (1) generator set of bearing and pedestal insulation.
(c) One (1) turbo generator set of shaft earthing and voltage sensing brushes.
(d) Sufficient top and bottom stator winding bars to repair a fault in the worst
location; supply to include all associated items necessary to effect the repair
including hoses, fittings, wedges, packers.
(e) One (1) turbo generator set of generator access door and shield gaskets.
(f) One (1) turbo generator set of brush gear including arms, brush boxes, springs.
(g) One (1) generator set of sliprings.
(h) One (1) generator terminal bushing
(2) Excitation System

(a) One (1) of each type of automatic excitation controller printed circuit card.
(b) Number of thyristor units equivalent to the amount of redundancy in one arm of
a thyristor bridge - refer to Volume 2; each unit consisting of the valve and
associated control and protection components.
(c) One (1) thyristor bridge cooling fan/motor unit
(d) One (1) field circuit breaker set auxiliary contacts.
(e) One (1) field circuit breaker set arcing tips.
(f) One (1) field circuit breaker set suppression resistors.
(g) One (1) field circuit breaker set closing and trip coils.
(3) Hydrogen Cooling System

Refer P2CVIIS5 BOP
(4) Seal Oil System

(a) Seal Oil Pumps
 One (1) set of bearings for each pump.
 One (1) set of wearing rings and bushes.
 Two (2) sets of packing and special gaskets for each pump
(b) Seal Oil Cooler
 3% of the cooling tubes.
 Tube plugs of number equivalent to 5% of the total number of tubes.
 Four (4) sets gaskets for the manholes and water boxes.
 Four (4) sets of special gaskets for each heat exchanger.
(c) Valves and Fittings
 Two (2) valves of each type and size.
 Two (2) sets of renewable parts of valves for each type and size.
 10% of sight flow indicator installed.
 One (1) set of filter basket for each type.
(5) Hydrogen Plant

Refer P2CVIIS5 BOP
(6) Medium (11kV) and Low (400V) voltage system

(a) One 11kV and 400 V circuit breaker of each type and rating.
(b) One 11kV switching device of each type and rating.
(c) One 11kV motor of each type and rating.
(d) One actuator of each type/function/rating.
(e) The 400V switchboards shall be designed to incorporate 10% more circuits than
the number specifically identified as being required for the plant. Spare circuits
shall be fully equipped wired and tested with all electrical equipment other than
current transformers. Spare circuit ratings shall include the complete range of
ratings used for plant operation but shall comprise mostly lower rated rather
than higher rated circuits. The ratings and numbers chosen shall be subject to
agreement with EVN.
(f) One transformer bushing of each type and rating.
(7) Control Devices
(a) Each type and rating of Switch device
(b) Four TRIP coils and four CLOSE coils of each type and rating
(c) Four control relays of each type and rating.
(8) Cables
One steel drum (wooden drums are not acceptable for spares usage) containing
250 metres of each type of 11kV cable. A separate steel drum shall be provided
for each cable size.
(9) Communication system

(a) Technical Services
Spares shall cover:
 Rapid restoration spares comprising replaceable sub units such as power
supplies and printed circuit cards - 10% of total, with a minimum of one (1).
 Component parts to enable a faulty sub unit to be repaired in a central
workshop - 5% of total.
(b) Radio Paging, UHF Radio and Emergency Warning Systems
Radio paging system:
 Pagers, vibrating type - unit 2
 Pagers, audible type - unit 3
UHF Radio System:
 Radios, hand-held mobile - unit 1
 Radios, fixed - unit 1
(c) Emergency Warning System:
Spares shall cover
 Rapid restoration spares comprising replaceable sub-units such as power
supplies, printed circuit cards, microphones, speakers etc. - 10% of total of
each sub-unit with a minimum of one (1).
 Component parts to enable a faulty sub-unit to be repaired in a workshop -
5% of total of each part with a minimum of one (1).
Optional Spares
These shall be subject to agreement between the Contractor and the Owner and
shall be based on manufacturers’ recommendations.
Those optional spare parts which it is recommended should be purchased in
additional to those listed for Essential Spares to maintain the plant in an
operational condition.
These shall be subject to agreement between the Contractor and OWNER and
shall be based on manufacturers’ recommendations.
(1) Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB)

(a) The Contractor shall list in the pricing schedule of the Specification the
individual prices of the spare parts (if any) included in the Proposal Document
together with the prices of all other spare parts that the manufacturer
recommends should be held. Unit prices should be stated and the price given
shall be valid for any reasonable quantity required under the Contract by EVN.
(b) OWNER may order all or any number of the parts at its discretion. The
Contractor shall supply the parts selected at the individual prices stated in the
Schedule.
(c) All parts ordered shall be interchangeable and suitable for use in place of
corresponding parts supplied with the plant. They shall comply with the
Specification and shall be suitably marked or numbered for identification and
prepared for storage in an approved manner to prevent deterioration. Packing
and identification of spare parts shall be in accordance with the requirements of
this Specification.
Special and Maintenance Tools
As specified in Section 1, the Contractor shall list in Annex A those tools and
appliances which are essential for the maintenance of the plant.
The Contractor shall also list in Annex A those additional tools and appliances
which it is recommended should also be purchased.
Tools for maintenance of the Generator and the auxiliaries shall be provided as
follows:
(1) Generator
One (1) apparatus to maintain a breathable atmosphere inside the generator
during personnel access via manholes also to prevent the condensation of
moisture within the generator when the generator is de-gassed but not otherwise
open to atmosphere. A description of the proposed apparatus shall be included
in the Proposal Documents.
(2) Hydrogen Plant

(a) One (1) set of special tools for repairing valves.
(b) One (1) set of spark - proof tools.
(3) Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB):

(a) One complete set of all SPECIAL spanners, tools and appliances including
special slings and lifting equipment necessary for maintaining the whole of the
plant including that plant supplied by Subcontractors, shall be provided. The
spanners and tools supplied under this Clause shall be new and shall not be used
during the erection of the plant. A list of such spanners, tools and appliances
shall be given in the appropriate Schedule of the Specification.
(b) The spanners shall include two spanners to fit the nuts of all bolts 25 mm
diameter and over. Grease guns, spanners and tools which are of a size and
type which could be reasonably expected to be readily available to
tradesmen are not required to be provided under this Clause.
Consumables
The Contractor shall supply consumables required for the equipment and
systems being provided under the Contract in accordance with Volume 2
and as generally listed below.
The Contractor shall add to these list consumables which it is considered
should also be purchased to maintain the plant in an operational condition.
(1) High Voltage Switchyard system

No. Item Qty
(a) Insulation oil - litres 1000
(b) SF6 gas - 42 kg cylinder 1
(c) SF6 gas cylinder - 42 kg empty 1
(d) Seals - sets 2
(e) Grease - each type, litres 10
(f) Lubricating oil - each type, litres 100
(g) Fuse cartridges - each type 10
(h) Lamps - each type 10
(2) Generator Circuit Breaker Scheme (GCB):

Consumable spares which will require replacement at intervals of less
than 24 months, shall be provided as part of the Contract and the price
included in the Proposal Document. The consumable spares shall be
sufficient for one year's normal usage, where an item is not listed in the
appropriate schedule and requires replacement in less than 24 months
from the date of Practical Completion.
Part 2 – Chapter VII – Section 8 – Control and instrumentation

VOLUME 5 – PART 2 – CHAPTER VII

SECTION 8: CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION

8.2.15 CCTV System

8.2.15.6 General Requirements
Closed circuit colour TV (CCTV) cameras shall be supplied, installed and
commissioned by the contractor in locations as indicated below:
 Unit 1 and Unit 2 turbo-generator left and right side
 All of Boiler feed pumps
 Oil storage tanks
 Boiler area
 NH3 storage area
 Important Plant fences
 Stack/Chimney Smoke Emission
 Gate House
 Boiler furnace flame
 Coal Handling Plant Conveyors and coal yard
 Water and waste water area
 Fire Protection Pump House
 Diesel house
 Bottom ash
 Circulating water pumping Station
 FGD discharge basin
 Ash Yard
 Stacker/reclaimer
 Hydrogen generating plant
 Chlorine station
 Power Transformers area
 CCR
 Power supply rooms and electric/electronic device rooms
 Fuel Oil pump station
 Ash pump houses
 Main internal streets
 Auxiliaries Boiler

 Other required positions suggested by Owner
In addition, a separate surveillance workstation which shall be designated to
do camera selection, switch over, monitor, and manage each video camera
scope and system software configuration shall be provided and installed by
the Bidder/Contractor in locations as follow:
 CCR: three (03) 49 inches LEDs and associate equipment (e.g.: Control Keyboard
etc...);
 Main Gate House: two (02) 32 inches LEDs and associate equipment (e.g.: Control
Keyboard etc...);
 Director Room (in Administration building): two (02) 49 inches LEDs and associate
equipment (e.g.: Control Keyboard etc...);
 Coal Handling plant comprising the Coal Feed Control House: two (02) 49 inches
LEDs and associate equipment (e.g.: Control Keyboard etc...);
 Furnace Flame: two (02) 49 inches LEDs and associate equipment for each Unit.
 And where required (if any)
The contractor shall connect the above CCTV cameras to the relevant
monitors as stated in clause 8.2.15.1 It shall be possible to manually select
any monitored area via pushbuttons or other suitable means.
The CCTV shall be available interface to Coal Jetty Area cameras system.
When not in manual select mode, a sequential switch shall produce
automatic

video switching for the relevant video images at a pre-set time interval. It
shall be possible to set independent dwell time separately for each camera.
All cameras shall be IP camera type with available remote control Rotation,
Tilt, lens zoom and weatherproof camera housing to provide an electrical
enclosure classification of at least IP66. The housing shall incorporate
automatic lens washing (except the furnace flame viewing cameras which
will be air cooled and purged). Water supply points of 75 mm diameter shall
be taken at locations up to 50 metres away from each camera. Bidders shall
allow for breaking into the pipework and providing a local isolating valve.
For exterior cameras, the supply point shall be considered as underground
and approximately 30 metres shall be taken as underground.
Each system of cameras shall be arranged such that the whole of the area
under surveillance is viewed.
Each camera system shall be suitable for continuous operation. Where

applicable, The Contractor shall provide minimum illumination of 20 lux
during the periods of darkness. The cameras shall be incorporated with
automatic light control to give clear pictures in dim interiors or bright
sunlight, and that there shall be no need for periodic adjustment of beam
throughout the life of the camera tube.
Camera identification labels shall be provided on the monitor screen and

shall automatically brighten as the scene brightens for greater legibility.
For each camera, provision shall be made for initiating alarms in the CCR
on the failure of power supply to the cameras, on high temperature in the
camera and on loss of cooling air pressure to the camera (where applicable).
Two local indicating lights, with electrical enclosure rating of IP66, shall
be provided local to each camera to indicate:
 Power on (red)
 Camera in alarm (amber).
Prefabricated plug-in cables for interconnecting TV camera, power supply,
TV monitors etc. shall be provided.
Cameras shall operate normally under conditions of high vibration and noise.
Each camera shall be equipped with a suitable pick-up tube, noise
suppression circuits, all necessary filters, iris control, automatic gain
control and automatic adjusting devices to provide an optimum video signal
for maintaining a high signal to noise ratio.
(1) Furnace Flame Viewing Cameras
In addition to the foregoing requirements, the furnace flame viewing
cameras shall provide direct viewing of the flame pattern in each furnace
by the operator in the CCR.
The cameras shall be mounted in such positions that all PF burners, all oil
burners and all ignitors, which are in service, can be identified on the
monitors.
Automatic light level adjustment shall be provided to give a clear picture
of the furnace flame at all boiler loads and with all combinations of burners
in service. Means to focus the camera remotely shall be provided.
The Contractor shall ensure that the camera is suitable for operation at the
highest air temperature likely to be experienced at the location where the
camera is mounted.
The optics shall be supplied with purge air to ensure that cleaning of the
windows is not required more frequently than every three months. The
optics shall be designed so that they may be cleaned quickly and safely by
operating staff without the necessity to use tools.
a) Cooling Equipment Requirements

For the furnace flame cameras, the Contractor shall include all air cooling,
purging and filtering equipment necessary to maintain the temperature at
the camera, camera lenses and viewing window within safe limits. Any fans
necessary for cooling/purging purposes shall be backed up by standby units
suitable for operation on dc. It is preferred that the cooling air be supplied
from an existing source such as flame scanner cooling air fans, specified in
the “Process Protection” section of the specification, in preference to a
separate system.
(2) The cameras and monitors systems shall be fitted with high quality components to ensure
reliable long life and trouble free operation. All equipment in the cameras and monitors
shall be solid state.
(3) The cameras and monitors shall be suitable to operate on single phase 230V ac power
supply. It shall be assumed that the power supply connection point is approximately 50
metres away for each of the cameras and approximately 15 metres away for each of the
monitors.
(4) Each monitor picture tubes shall be approximately 34 cm in size and shall produce a
clearly defined image when viewed by the operator seated at the control desk
approximately 1.5 m away. The picture non-linearity shall be less than 1%. The bezel
colour shall be to OWNER’s approval.

(5) The complete system shall be suitable for operation in a power station environment and
it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide suitable screens for all signal
cables, equipment, etc. such that the complete system is free from interference.
(6) The installation under the contract shall be complete and include all necessary fittings,
mounting poles (as necessary), foundations for the poles, power and signal cabling,
power supply units, any other electrical equipment, etc.
8.2.15.2 Digital Video Management (DVM) system
The CCTV system shall be provided a DVM system which shall have at
least the following functions:
 Camera selection can start DVM video recording
 DVM video recording parameters are based on the selected camera.
 Separate configurable alarm for video recording functions
 The video record should have event triggers: time, event and manual request.
 It should be possible to embedded user diagrams into real time video pictures.
 Tree menu structure to explore and select video cameras
 On line adjustment for all video camera parameters
 Small, middle and large size display windows
 Grouping possibility for the camera windows on the screen (e.g.: four ¼ windows
shown at the same time).
 Support for multi monitor displays
 Easy review of video recording
 Camera positioning, focus adjustment, and zooming function only from definable
workstations.
8.2.15.3 The thermal imaging camera
The thermal imaging cameras shall be provided including but not limit
NVRs (network video recorder), DVRs (digital video recorder) and display
station. The display station shall be installed at coal handling control room.
Eight (08) thermal imaging cameras shall be provided for total coal yard.
The signal shall be connected to coal handling control room.
The thermal imaging cameras shall be in accordance with the following:
 Protection of degree At least IP66
 Digital output for alarm (available for setting)
 Camera positioning, focus adjustment, zooming function
 Built-in 25 degree lens or better with both motorized focus and autofocus.

 Thermal sensitivity 0.05 oC at + 30 oC /50 mK or better
 IR resolution 320x240 pixels or better
 Object Temperature range: 0 oC to +350 oC
8.2.15.4 Installation and Commissioning

Experienced staff from the manufacturer of the equipment shall be
available to install, calibrate and commission the CCTV systems.
8.2.16 Clock system
8.2.16.1 General
Clock system have been provided by Quang Trach I EPC Contract,
including: the complete clock system and shall comprise the following
items:
 One GPS master clock comprising a GPS receiver, a GPS master clock and a
display unit
 a standard time signal unit, an AC power frequency signal unit, a frequency
comparison unit, and a time indication unit.
 Digital and analog slave clocks.
The contractor should provide the Digital and analog slave clocks, and
related workw to comply with Quang Trach I. These slave clocks will be
connected master clock, all equipment should be synchronizing with it.
(1) System Description, Characteristics and Operating Condition

This clause mention about the Clock system of Quang Trach I.
General
A GPS clock system shall perform the following functions:

a) Time indication
b) Time signal output to speed control of the turbine governors
c) Control for slave clock drive
d) Monitoring for power frequency
One (1) GPS system have been provided in Quang Trach I project as a
master clock for time synchronization system in the power station. The
clock system equipment shall be housed in a floor-standing, metal-enclosed
cubicle and installed in the relay room (behind the CCR) of the
powerhouse.
Particulars
For the clock system shall be as follows:
(2) GPS receiver
 Receiver type : Multi-channel (8-CH) all-in-view
 Frequency : 1575.42 MHz+1MHz (C/A code)
 Data output : Signal output port, NAMA0183
 Input voltage : 10.8 to 16 V D.C.
: Less than 3 W
 Power consumption
 Component : Water-proof
(3) GPS display
 Display data : Date and time in local or UTC,

and others
 Input voltage : 10.8 to 16 V D.C.
: Less than 6 W
 Power consumption
(4) Standard time signal unit
a) Time signal to governor system
 Output signal : Binary coded decimal
 Interface : Logic signal or mechanical contact
 Signal composition : 15 bits (1 min., 1 sec., 1/10 sec.

and 1/100 sec.)
b) Slave clock driver
 Output signal : Polarized signal emission at 30-

second interval
(5) Power frequency signal output

a) : 50 Hz
Frequency
b) Counter
 Output : Binary coded decimal
 Interface : Logic signal
c) Indication : 3 digits (1 digit for 1 min., 2 digits for 10 sec.

and 1 sec.)
(6) Frequency (time comparison)
a) : In time difference
Frequency comparison
b) : 5 digits with monitoring
Output
c) : 0.01 second
Minimum digit
3 digits (1 digit for 1 min., 2 digits
d) Indication of time
for 10 sec. and 1 sec.)
difference
8.2.16.2 Products, Components and Sub-assemblies
This clause mention about the Clock system of Quang Trach I.

(1) GPS Master clock
The GPS master clock shall include:
a) A GPS receiver to receive the signal from orbiting satellite,
b) A display unit to indicate position, date and time in the system mimic board
c) An interface to output position, date and time for supervisory control system and
clock system
d) A power supply unit such as DC-AC inverter for GPS units in case of AC power
failure.
(2) Slave clocks

Slave clocks shall be shall be designed to gain 30-second at a time.
a) Digital switchboard type slave clock for mounting on the system mimic board,
b) Analog type slave clock with two-pointer for wall-mounting (approx. 500 mm in
diameter).
(3) Spare Parts and Special Tools

The Contractor shall supply the following spare parts and special tools, if any:
a) 1 digital clock.
b) 1 analog clock
c) 1 set of recommendable spare parts, if any
d) 1 set of special tools
8.2.16.3 Execution
(1) Erection
The master clock has been installed in the relay room of Quang Trach I.
Slave digital (D) or analog (A) type clocks shall be installed at the following sites:
a) One (A) in the hall of the powerhouse,
b) One (D) in the AC station service cubicle room,
c) One (D) in the generator hall,
d) One flush-mounted clock (D) in each unit local control room,
e) One (D) in generator voltage equipment room,
f) One flush-mounted clock (D) in the control board inside the switchyard control
room.
g) One (A) in all rooms in the Administration Building, Workshop and Warehouse,
Security Centre/ Gatehouse and all other remote buildings.
(2) Field Quality Control

After erection and connection, the clock system shall be tested to check the
operation and synchronism of the clocks.


PART 2 – CHAPTER VII

SECTION 9: COMMUNICATION AND SCADA/EMS SYSTEM
9.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 2

9.2 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM....................................................................... 2
9.2.1 Scope of supply .................................................................................................................... 2
9.2.2 Equipment Operating Conditions ......................................................................................... 3
9.2.3 Requirements for Communication and SCADA system ...................................................... 6
9.2.4 Equipment specifications ...................................................................................................... 7
9.2.5 Optical Equipment Supplied and Installed Under this Contract ......................................... 19
9.2.6 Installation and Cabling ...................................................................................................... 20
9.2.7 Sub–contractors Suppliers .................................................................................................. 21
9.2.8 Workshop test ..................................................................................................................... 21
9.2.9 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................... 21
9.2.10 TEST AND INSPECTION ................................................................................................. 21
9.3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM .................................................................................. 22
9.3.1 General................................................................................................................................ 22
9.3.2 Scope of Supply .................................................................................................................. 23
9.3.3 Gateways for SCADA/EMS ............................................................................................... 24
9.3.4 Datalist for SCADA/EMS .................................................................................................. 25
9.3.5 Interconnection to the Communications Systems ............................................................... 25
9.3.6 Interface Requirements ....................................................................................................... 25
9.3.7 SCADA/EMS system Integration ....................................................................................... 25
9.4 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS ..................................................... 31
Part 2 – Chapter VII – Section 9 – Communication and SCADA/EMS System page 1 of 34

9.1 GENERAL
This section includes design, manufacture, factory test, inspection, supply,
delivery, unloading at Site, erection, installation, testing, commissioning and
guarantee by the Bidder/Contractor as part of this Contract for Communication
and SCADA/EMS system. Training on Site, and/or in the manufacturer’s works
for the Owner shall also be included for major items of Communication and
SCADA/EMS system.
The design and installation shall comply with the recommendations and
standards following:
 ITU : International Telecommunication Unit
 IEC : International Electrotechnical Commission
 EIA/TIA : Electronic Industries Alliance/ Telecommunications Industry
Association Engineering Standards
 IEEE : Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
 Data transmission protocol from Quang Trach I TPP (Quang Trach I TPP) to
Central Region Load Dispatch Centre (A3), National Load Dispatch Centre
(A0) have to obey IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
 Stipulating the technical requirements and operation management of the
SCADA system are attached to the Decision No.55/QĐ-ĐTĐL dated August
22nd, 2017 of Direction of Electricity Regulatory Authority.
 Decision No. 432/ĐĐQG-CN dated March, 20th 2017 Guiding and
Stipulating the agreement on connection of the communication system
operating the electric system.
 The optical communication equipment has to adjust to the existing EVN
system and EVN regulation.
 SCADA/EMS and Communication Agreement No. 215/ĐĐQG-CN+PT on
31st January 2018 signed between National Load Dispatch Centre (NLDC-
A0) and TPMB2.
9.2 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
9.2.1 Scope of supply
Communication and SCADA/EMS system for Quang Trach I TPP shall be
provided the items including but not limited to the following:
 Switchboard system and subcriber net: Main IP-PBX and Back-up Private
Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) possible of synchronous dial up with
the EVN PABX Networks
 UHF wireless communication system
 Public Address system (message transfer)
 Intrusion Alarm System

 Local Area Network (LAN)
 Optical interconnecting system from Quang Trach I TPP to Electricity
Communication system: Fibre Optical Transmission System (FOTS)
comprises: SDH/STM – 1 optical transmitters (for Quang Trach I TPP),
optical fibre cable (Non-Metallic Optical Cable – NMOC), FE/E1 converter,
Encode/decode equipment, router equipment, firewall equipment, etc
 Power supply, earthing and lightning protection for above communication
systems.
 Supplying the transmitting channels for GATEWAY to connect to EVN’s
SCADA system, hotline-IP, teleprotection signal of relay protection system
and transmitting channels for Tariff metering system.
 Supplying the transmitting chanel for Fault Recorder and Phasor
Measurement Unit System (FR&PMU System) from Quang Trach I TPP to
A3.
The supply, installation and commissioning of Optical Transmission Equipment
and associated Supervisory Equipment and other related communication
materials of Quang Trach I TPP are implemented at:
 Quang Trach I TPP
 500kV Quang Trach Switchyard
 National Load Dispatch Centre (A0)
 Central Region Load Dispatch Centre (A3)
The Contractor shall make provision for these equipment and materials in the
design of the Communication Room. The Contractor shall co-operate with the
other Contractors regarding installation of the equipment, shall supply all
associated equipment specified in this Section of the Specification and carry out
all other work necessary to put these systems into operation.
The Contract includes for the supply and installation of communication
equipment and networks required for remote data acquisition, communications,
protection inter-tripping, remote supervision and operational control of the
Power Plant, A0 and A3.
The Contract also includes the integration of the new works within the existing
external SCADA systems and communication networks to establish seamless
communications between the Power Plant and A0, A3.
The Contractor may offer more cost effective solutions and higher configuration
to meet the required specifications than the example design detailed on the
drawings of the Request for Proposal Document.
Design shall be performed to assure extension of Quang Trach II thermal power
plant in the future. Capacity of all equipment shall be assure operation of Quang
Trach I TPP and Quang Trach II thermal power plant. All cubicles (MDF, IDF,
etc) shall have spare space for Quang Trach II thermal power plant.
9.2.2 Equipment Operating Conditions

(1) Operating Conditions
a) Working temperature range
Performing to Specification : 0°C to +50°C
Operational : -10°C to +60°C
Relative Humidity : < 95%
b) Supply output voltage range
Performing to Specification : -46 to -58 V
Operational : -44 to -64 V
No damage : 0 to -68 V
c) Current consumption: (Bidder to state)
d) Noise potentials impressed by equipment onto the -48 V D.C. power supply:
 Fascicle IV.4, 1988: less than 0.5 mV
 Flat above 3 KHz: less than 1.0 mV
e) No damage to equipment if equipment is subjected to an impulse on the supply
of 5.0 kV peak 1.2/50 microsecond of either polarity with a source energy of
0.5 joules.
f) Equipment tolerance to EM radiation better than:
 10 KHz to 250 MHz : 2 mV/m
 Over 250 MHz : 0.5 mV/m
g) Be immune to, or be fitted with ancillary equipment to protect against the effects
of:
 Lightning strikes;
 Stray electromagnetic fields;
 Electrostatic fields;
 D.C. voltage surges on external lines;
 Earth grid voltage rise;
 Low frequency induction on external lines;
 Power supply voltage and current surges;
 Card failure or mal-operation on extraction/insertion with power applied.
Terminals carrying potentially lethal voltages (greater than 32 V A.C. or
115 V D.C.) shall be covered and have a caution label attached.
All equipment must comply with relevant technical regulations and standards
and must be approved by EVN.
(2) Equipment Racks and Cubicles
All equipment shall be supplied mounted on steel equipment racks or cubicles

of maximum height of 2750 mm. All non-equipped space on the racks or
cubicles shall be covered with blank panels.
All equipment racks or cubicles shall be supplied complete with mounting
hardware appropriate to the height of the rack or cubicle and the overhead cable
runways. Suitable arrangements shall be made for the support of all cables
leaving the cable runway to the equipment rack or cubicle.
All racks and cubicles shall be earthed to the plant earthing system.
(3) Equipment Alarms
All equipment shall include (where applicable):
Local alarm/status/control display;
Interfaces for extension of alarm/status/control to remote Master; and
Group (urgent/non-urgent) alarm interfaces for local extension within the Site.
(4) Communication Room Facilities
a) Communication Room in the Central control Building (CCB)
The room shall be designed to minimize dust ingress. Access doors and
corridors shall be of sufficient size and layout to allow access for 2750 mm
communication racks and other communication equipment.
Racks shall be arranged in the room 1.5 m apart for ease of rack manoeuvring
and access to the front and rear. The room shall accommodate the Main
Exchange, a duplicated power supply and an alarm system.
Plinths shall be placed under the racks, packed to keep them level.
Access shall be provided for cables entering and leaving the room.
b) Cable Runways
Cable runways, cable trays or cable mesh to run cables between racks shall be
provided in the room over each bay line, and shall be interconnected with each
other and extended to the Main Distribution Frame and to the cable entry points
to the room. Separate runways or conduit shall be provided for A.C. mains
cables.
All cable runways shall be earthed to the plant earthing system. The Contractor
shall provide earthing details for approval by EVN.
c) Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
The Main Distribution Frame shall be installed in the room and shall use
insulation displacement technology in modular format. Sufficient 600 pair
verticals shall be supplied and installed to provide for the termination of all
multiplex channels. Provision shall be made in the design to provide for the
number of jumper wires interconnecting the services to the multiplex channels.
The MDF shall be earthed to the plant earthing system.
d) Miscellaneous Equipment Racks
Miscellaneous Equipment Racks (MERs) shall be placed strategically in the bay

lines to accommodate the D.C. distribution panels, alarm panels, and any other
general apparatus that may be required.
e) Power Supply
The Contractor shall be responsible to supply the 230VAC and 48VDC power
for Communication system. Main power supply AC230V is taken from the AC
voltage power supply cabinet in the Communication Room of the plant.
230VAC/48VDC rectifier shall be supplied. Stand by power supply is 48V DC
battery. The 220VDC/48VDC converter shall be also supplied, the 220VDC is
connected directly to 220VDC switchboard. Suitably rated circuit breakers shall
be supplied and installed to provide for the AC loads and DC loads. (Refer
drawing No. QT1-RFP-CO-011)
50% spare capacity of circuit breakers shall be provided.
General purpose 230V/10A twin socket wall outlets shall be provided at each
end of each bay line to power test equipment etc.
f) 48 VDC Distribution
Distribution shall be through circuit breaker panels and further distribution for
minor circuits through fuse panels. Spare capacity shall be provided.
9.2.3 Requirements for Communication and SCADA system
9.2.3.1 Communication and SCADA service supplies
(1) Protective relay system services
Communication channels which connect function between both protective relay
equipment at the end of each electrical line are enable to trip, select and quick
disconnect with high reliable.
(2) Load Dispatching services for electrical system
As load dispatching decentralization, Quang Trach I TPP is controlled and
managed by A0 and A3, therefore it necessary to establish the communication
lines between A0, A3 and Quang Trach I TPP. The communication equipment
at the relevant nodes shall be configured to obtain the following functions:
 Establishment of IP Hotline telephone channel: direct communication
(without dial) from Plant controllers to Operational shift staves at A0, A3.
The hotline has capability of instantaneous, urgent and separately in
operational works of electrical system.
 Establishment of the channel SCADA/EMS to transfer the data, information:
instrumental signal transfer, state indication, regulation, remote control etc.
between two Gateways (computerized system) of the plant and the centres
(A0, A3) which it belong to.
(3) Services for administrative management
The telephone, fax is connected between the self plant sections and plant site to
internal/external Electric professional offices by direct dial via Auto Digital
electronic switchboard in Electric profession.
(4) Services for FR&PMU system
Establishment of the FE channel to transfer the data, information from
FR&PMU cabinet (cabinet belong to scope of electrical equipment section)
located in power plant to A3.
9.2.4 Equipment specifications
(1) Optical transfer devices
To execute the function of communication links between Quang Trach I TPP
and Communication Systems of Electricity Industry, the Contractor shall
provide the following devices:
 At Quang Trach I TPP: Equipped with 02 optical transmitter SDH/STM-1
with Add/Drop configuration.
 At 500kV Quang Trach Switchyard: Connect to existing 02 optical
transmitter SDH/STM-1 of 500kV Quang Trach Switchyard via existing 02
STM-1 optical module.
(2) SCADA transmission channel
In order to send and receive signals of SCADA/EMS system ingoing and
outgoing from the Load Dispatching Center (A0, A3) serviced for Load
Dispatching. SCADA, Hotline signals, etc. the Contractor shall provide the
following devices:
 At Quang Trach I TPP: Equipped with 02 firewall, 02 router, 02
encode/decode equipment, 02 FE/E1 Converter.
 At A0: Equipped 01 FE/E1 Converter
 At A3: Equipped 01 FE/E1 Converter
(3) Transmision channel for Tariff metering system.
In order to send and receive signals of Tariff metering system to Metering data
Management Unit via VCGM (Vietnam Competitive Generation Market) -
WAN network system, the Contractor shall provide the following devices:
 At Quang Trach I TPP: Equipped 01 router.
 At Metering data Management Unit: Use existing equipment.
a) Firewall equipment
 05 port Ethernet 10/100Mbps, full duplex;
 Support OSPF route and static route;
 Support Firewall function; IPS function;
 Support IPv4, IPv6;
b) Router for SCADA/EMS and Hotline
 Interface:
 Fast Ethernet:  3 ports
 Data Transfer Rate: 10/100 Mbps, E1 ports (2 ports at least)

 Support OSPF route and static route
 Function: QoS
 IPv4, IPv6
c) Router for Tariff metering system
 Interface:
 Fast Ethernet:  4 ports
 E1 (2Mbps) – 120 Ohm:  2 ports
 Support OSPF route and static route
 Function: QoS
 IPv4, IPv6
d) Encode/ decode equipment
 03 port Ethernet 10/100Mbps, full duplex;
 Encoder VPN IPSec (AES/3DES);
e) Switch for Tariff metering system
 Interface:
 Fast Ethernet:  16ports
 Support VLAN, QoS
 Function: QoS
(4) Transmision channel for FR&PMU system
In order to send signals of FR&PMU system from power plant to A3, the
Contractor shall provide the following devices:
 At Quang Trach I TPP: Equipped 01 FE/E1 Converter.
 At A3: Equipped 01 FE/E1 Converter.
(5) Switchboard PBX and subscriber net
a) Switchboard IP-PBX
Quang Trach I TPP is provided a digital electronic switchboard with latest
modern technologies. The switchboard can be capable executed all the functions
as a IP-PABX stronger. The hardware configuration of switchboard shall be at
least includes:
 Main card part
 Number of ports: 500 ports
 Console desks, PC, Printer, cables, software, and accessories,….

 Connecting cable from switchboard outlet to distribution rack at least 10m
In order to service for internal Plant communication, IP-PBX Central Office will
first be installed with 500 analogue subscriber ports. Quang Trach I IP-PBX
Central Office will be Network Synchronizing and Dial-up Synchronizing with
Central Office System of Electricity Industry through IP trunking and 2Mb/s
trunking channels (communicate with Central Offices of 500kV Quang Trach
Switchyard, A3 and A0, etc.). CO trunking channels allow for communicating
IP-PBX Central Office with Telephone Central Office through residential Post
Office (in the scope of this Project, just consider installing CO ports for
communicating with Telephone Central Office, not consider the methods and
required devices for connecting)
General characteristics:
 Processor 32 bit or better Processor
 Open configuration (in case of extension only need to add hardware)
Numbering plan: a minimum of 7 digits, Programmable and flexible
 Use Flash ROM technology
Hardware:
The IP-PBX system should be able to maximum provide to:
 Subscriber port: 500
 Digital subscriber port: 16 ports
 4W E&M trunk port (tie-line) TYPE 5: 32 ports
 CO trunk port: 16 ports
 162 Mb/s trunk port with signalling protocol R2-Q421 and SS7.
The IP-PBX should be equipped with an integrated modem in order to do
configuration changes and maintenance from a remote location.
Interface port with PC: RS-232/9600bps
Software:
 IP-PBX should provide the variable services (Short code dialling, follow me,
group call, call-back, conference facilities.)
 Call barring facilities shall be provided on per subscriber, subscriber group,
each trunk and trunk group.
 Minimum routing ability: 32 directions
 The system shall allow for a programmable time schedule
 Has maintenance and management program (checking subscriber and trunk
status, the periodical automatic equipment test program that test the entire
system or every part on display alarm and warning, keep a diary of such
display alarm and warning, log of access attempts (LOGIN attempts).
 Access from the service terminal shall be password controlled: minimum of
2 security levels used for network manager and switchboard operator.
 The IP-PBX switchboard can use two methods of power supply: AC230V
and DC48V. Main power supply AC230V is taken from the AC voltage
power supply cabinet in the Communication Room of the plant. Stand by
power supply is 48V DC battery which is connected directly to DC port of
the switchboard.
b) Connection of switchboard trunks via transmission channels
 The connection of the 2Mb/s trunk ports between switchboard of the IP-PBX
of Quang Trach I TPP and the existing switchboard at 500kV Quang Trach
Substations. The CO trunks of switchboard are connected to the Post office
network via two subscriber lines
 2 Mb/s trunks will be connected to 500kV Quang Trach Switchyard through
optical Communication links from Quang Trach I TPP –500kV Quang Trach
Switchyard
c) Console table
 To furnish two console tables for dispatching duty table of Quang Trach I
TPP.
 Console table’s functions:
 To be able to connect to hotline channels (Hot-line)
 Display on LCD about busy or idle statuses of hotline channels
 The shift operator shall be possible to selectively answer incoming calls to
the console table. The other calls will remain in the call announcement
queue until they are answered.
 Voice-recording devices will be associated for recording calls.
 Allow Hotline connecting with telephone, voice channel
 Exchanging call come from PSTN for subscriber of Central Office.
 Connecting console table to hotline channels:
 Digital subscriber ports of the exchange are connected to MDF. One of
that is connected to console table by 5x2x0,5 cable which is zinc-covered
cable to guard against interference. To be able to connect to hotline
channels (Hot-line)
 02 Hot-line channels transfer to A0 and A3 are connected with VoIP
 The hotline channels which will be used to communicate with the
dispatching centres from the plant are connected to the exchange’s
subscribers and can be short dialling programmed
d) Subscriber network
 The IP-PBX switchboard subscriber network come out from main
distribution frame (MDF rack) located at the Communication room in the
CCB.

 In order to protect the switchboard gates against the lightning through
subscriber routes, the subscriber lightning protection units shall be provided
with the connection paddings on MDF.
e) The public address system shall be tied into the IP-PBX telephone system for
dial-up access to the public address system.
f) The Bidder shall provide a communications system cable block diagram.
g) Back-up Telephone Exchange
The Back-up Exchange (PABX) shall be located in the CCB as agreed with
Owner during the design phase. The exchange shall be connected to Managers
and operating staff generally as listed in (n) below. The selected personnel
would then have two handsets, one for the Main IP-PBX and the other for the
Back-up Exchange. The capacity of back-up Exchange shall be at least 64
subscribers.
The Back-up Exchange will provide voice communications within the Power
Plant as well as to the external General Carrier network.
h) Telephones (Main and Back-up)
Standard telephones shall have at least the following features capabilities:
Approved for connection to the public telephone network;
Capable of pulse or tone dialing with 0-9, * and # keys;
A 100 millisecond loop-break PABX recall key;
Be capable of storing at least 10 x 20 digit telephone numbers;
Stored telephone numbers are to be retained when the telephone is removed
from its socket for a period of up to 4 hours (internal battery backup systems are
not acceptable);
Be capable of being wall mounted; and Switchyard telephones shall be of
ruggedized, weatherproof construction.
i) Telephone Boxes
Four (4) sound-proof telephone boxes shall be provided on each of the three
floor levels in the boiler/turbine areas. A large flashing blue light shall be
mounted on the outside of the box to indicate in this noisy environment that the
phone is ringing.
j) Telephone Cables
The supply and installation of telephone cables is covered under Section 7
Subscriber Networks will be divided into 02 main parts:
 Subscriber Networks in the Main Plant Region: From MDF cable racks,
subscriber cables of 50pairs, 30 pairs, 20 pairs, etc. will be routed to other
working areas of the Plant. Operation areas, water-treatment areas, and etc.
in these areas, cable routed between building blocks will utilize existing cable
racks, cable trays inside the plant or use underground plastic conduits. In each
building, subscriber cables and signal cables (sound, video) will be put in
spiral conduit routed along the wall to reach working offices. Especially in
the Administration Buildings, telephone cables and signal cables will be
undergrounded (following electrical part design).
 Subscriber networks in the External Plant Region: comprises telephone
subscriber placed at Cooling-water Pump House, Return Water Pump House,
Oil Pump House, etc. Telephone subscriber will be routed by acoustic
frequency cable.
k) IDFs and FDPs in Locations other than Communications Room
Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDFs) and Final Distribution Points (FDPs)
shall consist of 2 verticals (of various sizes) consisting of 10 pair KRONE
disconnection modules. They shall be mounted in a communication cabinet or
contained in a wall mountable plastic box and be accompanied by a suitable
termination record book.
l) Telephone Sockets
Telephone sockets shall be provided at each required terminal equipment
location and shall consist of a flush mounted RJ 45 socket and matching
faceplate with suitable icon indicating its function.
m) IP telephone
Monochrome backlit display – 4 lines x 20 Characters or better
LED for speaker, mute, call history, message etc
Hard button for Hold, Mute, Conference, Drop, Transfer, Speaker, Redial,
Volume (Up and Down), messages, Menu, contacts, headset, etc
Omni direction microphone and echo cancellation, Message waiting indicator
Full duplex Dual Ethernet Ports (10/100 Mbps), PoE Class (IEEE 802.3af)
registers as class 1 (or higher) device, Support SIP/H.323 protocol
The IP phone should be powered via external power adapter, power patch panel
or in line power of the switch
n) Location of Telephones
Extension telephones from the Main IP- PABX shall be provided generally as
follows:
Plant Control Room 2
Managers Offices 1 each
General Offices 1 per 10 m2
Switch/Control Rooms 2 each
Equipment/Plant Rooms 1 each
Turbine Floor 4 per floor level
Gate House 1
Storage Areas 1 per 100 m2
Workshops 1 per 50 m2
Chemical Laboratory 2
Library, Medical Room, Shop, Reception 1 each
VIP and Staff Dining Rooms 1 each
Coal jetty area 4 each
Extension telephones from the Back-up Exchange shall be provided as follows:
Plant Control Room 2
Station Manager’s Office 1
Shift Manager’s Office 1
Gate House 1
Coal Handling Control Room 2
Other Manager’s Offices 1 each
Final quantities and locations of phones will be determined during the detailed
design phase.
Selected telephones will be types that work well in the tropical climate condition.
For telephones that will be installed in Turbine House must ensure of good-
working in the high noises environment conditions, high-temperature, vibration,
etc. and must have cabinets to lower down the surrounding noise to under 60dB
to help the talking person can talk. Outdoor installed telephones must have
casings that can bear the impacts of environment, must have cabinets reach IP65
protection standard to resist direct impacts of raining, sunlight, humidity, and
dust.
(6) UHF Radio Communication System
a) Organization solution
The mobile radio communication system includes one base station UHF 40W
and hand-phones and be communicated to each other through UHF 40W radio
set.
The UHF radio system is equipped with voice communication to fixed station,
on car or hand-held radio. The system consists of hand-held radios, mobile car
radios, fixed radios and plant amplifiers in the plant area, battery chargers for
portable radios and antennas, power cables and other accessories required for
the system to work.
The UHF radio system must comply with Vietnamese broadcasting regulations
and have good coverage in all areas of the plant, including turbines, boilers, coal
handling systems, circulation water pump station, pump station for ash disposal,
gas chlorination plant, especially coal jetty area.
The UHF 40W radio set has function as a based station and providing the
following services:
 Group calling
 Broadcast calling
 Selection and priority call
Broadcast calling: when setting up a call, for example base station call any radio
subscriber, the others can listen this call at the same time.
Selective calling: only called site can know and dialog, the others can’t
recognize and hear this call.
The calling subscriber will select one of two that system working statuses.
The base station has special function that is priority call, remove the
implementing call to connect priority dialog.
The UHF 40W radio set is located at Communication room in the CCB and
connected to the switchboard. The set antennas are putted on the antenna pile
with the height of 10m on the roof of CCB. The hand-held units which moving
in the plant shall be communicated via this based station.
The UHF radio communication system shall be erected, installed, tested, and
commissioned completely and handed over to Owner before commissioning
period of power plant.
b) Technical requirements of equipment
Technical functions:
 Working mode: half-duplex
 Operating frequency: (403  470) MHz
 Central antenna: multi-directional 2x7/8 6,7dB 50 frequency range UHF
installed on antenna pile.
 Feeder cable of antenna: type 10D-FB with Surge voltage protector for
FEEDER
 Electricity charger: use converter battery charger cabinet 230VAC/13,8VDC
 40 UHF Radio machine has interface port with the PABX switchboard
through 2-wired subscriber cable
(7) Public Address System (message transfer)
a) Organization solution
Loudspeaker system includes two parts:
 A Multi-channel amplifier is placed in the Communications room located at
the 2nd Floor of the CCB. Its power is 400W the equipment must have an
interface port with the PABX switchboard through 2-subscriber wired cable
as well as ports which connect to speakers in parallel mode.
 Announcing Coordination Console table will be placed at 03 positions as
follows the CCR and Propaganda Room in the Administration Buildings and
Main gatehouse.
Power of speaker: 3W, 10W, 25W. They are hung on the walls of the working
rooms or on towers.
The note magnifier is connected to speakers by copper cable with section of 2.5
mm2, specific connector sets, and connection boxes.
The means of paging shall be by dialing followed by the selected paging zone
code

A selector system shall be provided such that it is possible to call specific areas
individually or collectively.
Following call types will be signaled by a tone: Selective Call, Group Call of
several Loudspeaker lines and Collective Call of all loudspeaker lines.
Loudspeaker system is located around plant site and in the specific locations.
 At Central control Building
 Steam Turbine building
 Boiler Area
 Water treatment area
 Waste water treatment area
 Hydrogen generation house
 Coal Handling Control & Electrical Building
 ESP & FGD & Ash handling Building
 Admin building and common service buiding
 workshop and warehouse
 CW pump station
 Security gate
 Fire water pump house
 Auxiliary boiler house
 Chlorination house
 Chimney
 Others locations (such as coal jetty…)
Final quantities and locations of loudspeaker will be determined during the
detailed design phase
Outside areas of plant: The outside of plant such as: Oil pump station, return
water pump station and Coal & Oil unloading jetty: Provided loudspeaker is
type of 10W and 25 W at stipulate locations.
Amplification devices: comprise two blocks
 Mixer Amplifirer Blocks
 Booster Amplifier blocks
Electrical properties of Amplification devices.
 AC voltage input: 230/240VAC  10%, 50/60 Hz
 DC voltage input: 24VDC
 Range of volume control: 0  70dB
 Speaker voltage output: 70/100V
 S/N ratio: >80dB
 Input Impedance : 20k
 Output Impedance: 8
 The arrangement of loudspeakers at particular locations will be presented by
the contractor in the Bid document.
(8) Intrusion Alarm System
In order to enhance security for Quang Trach I TPP, the project shall be
equipped 01 intrusion alarm system. This system includes:
 Central Processor Unit.
 The infrared ray sensors protected the fence walls are specially designed for
outdoor, withstand sunny, heavy rain and extreme weather conditions, 01 set
includes 02 devices: one infrared emitter and one infrared receiver which are
installed the two ends of the fence, when the intruder broke through the
infrared beam, the system will detect and alarm to the alarm process center.
The infrared sensors are mounted on the rack and mounted on the fence
 Alarm Sirens
Signals from the alarm process center will be sent to the center control room,
security room and also to the control center (in the future) via the WAN.
(9) Power Supply for communication equipment requirements
The telephone system shall be powered via a battery/charger system to maintain
the PABX in normal operation for a period of no less than 5 hours in the event
of a failure of battery charging current.
Communication equipment using DC-48V power supply from 01 AC-230V /
DC-48V / 50A and from DC-220V auxiliary power through 01 DC-220V / DC-
48V / 100A converters
Equipped with 01 DC-220V / DC-48V / 100A converters at Quang Trach I TPP
Equipped with power supply 01 AC-230V / DC-48V / 50A, 01 lightning
protection box for source AC230V/16A, 01 battery 48V / 200Ah at Quang
Trach I TPP
Use existing DC-48V power supply at 11 Cua Bac and A3
Technical Specification of Power supply devices and Lightning Protection
devices
a) Power source converter DC220V/DC48V-100A
Operation type: SMPS (Power source of switching type)
 Input voltage: 220VDC
 Output voltage: DC-48V
 Output current: 100 A
(a) Power source AC230V/DC48V-50A

Operation type: SMPS (Power source of switching type)
 Input voltage: 230VAC, single phase
 Output voltage: (30  58V), can be adjust in 0.25V step.
 Measured parameter: U, I, T will be measured and indicated on the Display
Screen.
 Protection: Protection type of overcurrent, overvoltage (auto shutdown) and
over limitation temperatures.
 Remote accessing: Capable of remote accessing to change parameters.
 Maximum output current: 50 A
i. Insulation
 3KVAC between input and earth
 3 KVAC between input and output
 500VDC between output and earth
Protection boxes: IP20
ii. Lightning protection box for source AC230V/16A
 Function: Lightning impulse cut-off and filter
 Structure: Comprises of 2 parts:
 Source-overvoltage impulse cut-off set.
 Source-overvoltage impulse filter set
 Type of circuit can be protected: Phase-neutral, Phase-earth, Neutral-Earth.
 Rated working voltage: 230V AC, 1 phase
 Maximum working voltage : 275V AC
 Operating current : 16A
 By-pass current with 8/20s impulse : 135kA
 By-pass current with 10/350s impulse:
 First impulse : 35kA
 20th impulse : 20kA
 Have devices to indicate the number times of electric-discharge protection.
 Minimum warranty times : 5 years
iii. Battery Nickel-Cadmium 48/200Ah
 Type: Nickel-Cadmium, maintenance-free, not affecting the environment.
 Rated voltage : 48V
 Cell voltage : 2V or 12V
 Capacity : 200 Ah
 Operating temperature : 5oC  40oC
 Full-charged voltage limit : 2,23V/cell
 Average value of auto-electric discharge of battery in 24 hours :0,5%
Earth-grounding, Fire and explosion protection for Communication devices
b) 48 V D.C. Supplies
In the Communication Room, the power supply philosophy adopted is that a
failure of one power supply, for whatever reason, shall not affect the other and
shall not cause a total loss of protection signaling systems.
To meet this philosophy, independent duplicated power supplies shall be
provided. Supplies to equipment, such as OLTEs, multiplex equipment, and
protection signaling equipment, and shall be duplicated, with one set connected
to the A supply and the second set to the B supply.
A non-duplicated supply shall be provided for the back-up telephone exchange,
the paging and UHF radio systems and this shall be located adjacent to this
equipment.
The -48 V D.C. modular power supplies shall be supplied mounted in their own
19" racks/cubicles, complete with batteries. Modules shall be accessible and
removable from the front of the rack.
c) A.C. Input
400 V three phase/230 V single phase A.C. supplies the Communication
Room for input to the D.C. modular power supplies.
d) Control Module
A control/distribution module shall be provided to monitor and control each
rectifier to ensure correct operation, and initiate various alarms.
e) Rectifiers
Rectifiers shall be high frequency switched mode technology. Switching
frequency shall be 200 kHz or higher. All connectors shall be accessible from
the front of the module.
The number of modular rectifiers shall be sufficient to supply all equipment in
the room as detailed below, plus any further load installed or to be installed in
the room at the time of commissioning, while recharging the battery at the 10
hour rate. One redundant rectifier module shall also be supplied to provide for
increased reliability. A charge/discharge ratio of 1.2:1 shall be taken into
account.
For the Communication Room, the rectifiers shall be sufficient to supply the
main Exchange and the alarm system provided under this Contract as well as
equipment supplied and installed under this Contract i.e. optical fiber equipment,
protection signaling equipment, and multiplex equipment.
Rectifiers shall be mounted in the CCB and be sufficient to supply the Back-up
Exchange, the paging and UHF radio systems.

The systems shall be capable of being expanded to double the above capacity.
f) Batteries
Batteries shall be sealed Nickel-Cadmium recombination batteries. Batteries
shall be mounted horizontally to allow access to the terminals. Each battery
string shall be able to be individually isolated.
The capacity of the batteries shall allow for:
 Supply of all equipment mentioned in Clause 9.2.4 under continuous power
failure condition for a minimum of 3 hours
 End voltage of batteries of 1.96 V per cell (47 V for the battery).
(Manufacturers Specifications usually assume a lower end voltage)
 Ageing of batteries
The systems shall be capable of being expanded to double the above capacity.
g) Battery Monitor Module
A battery monitor module shall periodically test the batteries by switching the
rectifiers off and monitoring the battery voltage under operating load.
Unsatisfactory operation shall initiate an appropriate alarm.
h) Alarms
Appropriate alarms shall be available for fault and high and low voltage
situations.
(10) Local Administration LAN
A local administration LAN shall be designed and installed throughout the
CCB, and other dedicated locations. The LAN shall have the following features
 The LAN will be design to be based on structural cable system with support
CAT 6E.
 Outlets to be RJ-45 type
 Designed and installed to provide at least 04 outlets for each room in CCB
and each room in the administration Building, detail will be approved in
detail design stage.
 Be wired back to a patch panel located in the Communications Room or other
suitable location in each building
 Provide for interconnection to the Control system (ICMS) main system
hub/router to allow remote display of operator graphics on selected
workstations (supervisors PC’s)
 Shall comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
The cabling system and terminations shall be tested and certified according to
international standards.
9.2.5 Optical Equipment Supplied and Installed Under this Contract

The following optical equipment will be supplied and installed in the
Communications Room
(1) Optical Fibre Equipment
Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)
 ODF for the following transmission lines: Quang Trach I TPP to 500kV
Transmission substation.
(2) SDH Multiplex Equipment
155.52 Mbit/s multiplex equipment (STM-1) will be installed, as follows:
 Quang Trach I TPP
9.2.6 Installation and Cabling
(1) Power Cables
The total voltage drop from the power supply to the apparatus shall be less than
1 Volt. Power supply cabling shall be of sufficient size to produce less than
0.5 V drop between the power supply and the distribution panel in each MER,
and 0.5 V drop between the distribution panel and the apparatus.
(2) Miscellaneous Equipment Racks
The MERs, power circuit breaker and fuse panels shall be installed as
appropriate. Circuit breaker and fuse panels shall be connected to the power
supply using cables that conform to Clause 9.2.6. (1) above.
Alarm panels shall be connected to a master alarm panel according to the
suppliers’ instructions. The master alarm panel alarm extension relay shall be
connected to the Power Plant Alarm System.
(3) Other Equipment
The Contractor shall:
 Erect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to be supplied under this Contract.
 Connect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to the Communication Room
earthing system.
 Connect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to 50 V circuit breaker or fuse
panels as appropriate.
 Connect all equipment racks and/or cubicles to the appropriate alarm panel.
 Inter wire all multiplex equipment to the MDF.
 Jumper MDF to services and IDFs and telephone extensions.
For equipment being supplied under the separate Substation Contract, Items (a)
to (e) above will be carried out by that Contractor.
The Contractor shall carry out such tests as are necessary to prove that the
equipment installed is performing according to the manufacturer's
specifications.
After all cables have been installed and the equipment commissioned, the cable
entries to the Communication Room shall be sealed against vermin entry. The
sealant used for the cable entries shall be removable to allow for the addition,
or removal, of cables at a future date without impairing the effectiveness of the
vermin proofing.
The vermin proofing method adopted shall be subject to approval by the EVN.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
9.2.7 Sub–contractors Suppliers
Should some parts or components of the equipment be supplied by sub-
contractors, the Manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with all references of
the sub-contractor on the quality of purchased equipment.
9.2.8 Workshop test
The shop tests shall guarantee stable functioning of all systems.
9.2.9 SUBMITTALS
Detailed documentation on equipment.
Completed work drawings.
9.2.10 TEST AND INSPECTION
(1) Power Supply
The modular power supply shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with
the manufacturers’ installation manual. Voltage limit levels for alarm conditions
shall be set, and time intervals shall be set for the battery monitor module to test
the batteries.
The panel shall be tested in accordance with the suppliers’ instructions. An earth
shall be placed on the alarm wire at each apparatus to verify that the alarm
operates correctly

(2) Exchanges and Telephones
The exchanges shall be tested and commissioned to meet the approved signal
levels for the connection to the public Network, to the multiplex channels on the
OPGW and to individual extensions. All features shall be tested and
demonstrated and operating satisfactory.
(3) 30 Day Test
At the completion of the equipment and system tests, a 30 day operational
system test shall be carried out covering the Main and Back-up Exchanges, the
Paging and UHF radio systems.
During this period, faults affecting more than 20% of users shall terminate the
test. The fault shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Consultant and another
30 day test restarted.
These tests shall be completed prior to the pre-commissioning tests for the
Power Station.
9.3 SCADA/EMS system
9.3.1 General
This section describes requirements for the network communications and
SCADA system of the power plant for the integration the power plant into the
Vietnam power network.
Load Dispatch Centers (A0 and A3) monitor and control power distribution and
power generation in the national and central grid. For this purpose, the necessary
data and information to and from A0 and A3 through the existing transmission
SCADA system will be provided through gateways and related equipment.
These will be redundant.
The contractor shall design, supply, install and commissioning the entire
SCADA/EMS works in according with the current regulations and standards.
The protocol IEC-60870-5-104 shall be implemented during the design of the
interface between Quang Trach I power plant and existing EVN’s SCADA/EMS
system according to Decision No. 432/ĐĐQG-CN dated 20/3/2017.
The Gateways shall be located in plant control building – Communication
Equipment Room and interconnected to the DCS (Distributed Control System).
The contractor shall design, supply, install and commission two (02) gateways
(04 ports per gateway (01 port to A0, 01 port to A3, 01 port for EVN ‘s smart
power grid in the future, 01 port for spare)) with EVN/SCADA network and
associated equipment.
Time synchronizing of the Gateways internal real time clock back to the DCS
shall be implemented by synchronizing to the master clock.
Power supplies of the Gateways and related equipment shall be derived from
safe power supplies.
Based on the agreement documents signed between the owner and the
competent agencies (such as Load Dispatch Centers, National Power

Transmission, Electricity Power Trading Company, v.v…), the Contractor shall
be responsible for contacting these agencies to update, supplement the
specifications of the relevant equipment, modification concerned (if any) in this
section and complete the necessary procedures/requirements before power
receiving / power energizing."
A0 include A0-Main and A0-Backup and their location are specified as below:
 A0-Main: Head office of A0, 8th floor of Tower A – 11 Cua Bac Street – Ba
Đinh District – Ha Noi Capital
 A0-Backup: Backup Head office of A0, 4th floor of Tower C – 18 Tran
Nguyen Han Street – Hoan Kiem District– Ha Noi Capital
The list of signals to be exchanged between Quang Trach I power plant and A0
and A3 should include but not limited to the list below.
No Type of signals
1.From the Quang Trach I power plant to A0 and A3
1 Signals of circuit breaker, disconnectors, earthing switches.
2 Signals of alarm relay protection, operation and control mode of units.
3 Measured signals of voltage, current, active power and reactive power,
frequency, high/low adjust limit of units.
4 Measured signals of voltage, current, active power and reactive power and
tap changer positions of transformers.
2. From A0 and A3 to Quang Trach I TPP
1 Raise/Lower signals for tap changer positions of transformers.
2 Operation orders (open/close/trip) for the circuit breakers, Disconnectors,
Earthing switches.
3 Raise/Lower signals or setpoint for active power and reactive power of
units.
The contractor shall implement latest Data Signal List for SCADA/EMS system
approved by A0 and A3.
9.3.2 Scope of Supply
This contract includes for the following equipment as a minimum:
 A network operational telephone system as specified elsewhere.
 02 Gateways (01 main/01 back up) and 04 ports per gateway (01 port to A0,
01 port to A3, 01 port for EVN ‘s smart power grid in the future, 01 port for
spare) for the integration of SCADA/EMS systems.
 Host Computer, Workstation, printer A4, A3, Switch, cabinet, Multi mode
Fiber Optic Cable, dual LAN network, spare parts and software…
 Tele-protection signaling equipment as specified elsewhere.

 Hardware & software installation, modification and commissioning work for
communication and data transfer between A0-Main (location as specified
elsewhere) and Quang Trach I TPP will be provided by the Contractor
 Configuration, modification and commissioning work for communication
and data transfer between A0-Backup (location as specified elsewhere) and
Quang Trach I TPP will be provided by the Contractor
 Hardware & software installation, modification and commissioning work for
communication and data transfer between A3 and Quang Trach I TPP will be
provided by the Contractor
9.3.3 Gateways for SCADA/EMS
Gateways shall be provided so that the power plant can be successfully
integrated into the various power applications software packages to be provided
in the future.
The scope of supply shall include for all signals to be available at Gateways
located within the plant control building.
Gateways, compatible with standard power network SCADA/EMS systems
The size of the Gateway interfaces shall include a minimum of 400% spare for
unallocated future use.
The Gateways shall generate signals to implement the remote commands issued.
These signals shall be pulses whose length is adjustable to the Plant
requirements. The pulses shall alter the reference point for generator operation.
External set point values shall be transmitted to the Gateways and DCS system
for output as analogue or binary coded signals. Set point values shall be discrete
values of MW and MVAr which the Plant shall automatically achieve. Set point
controls on both a Unit basis shall be provided.
Response time of the signal
 Tele-signaling single (TSS), Tele-signaling double (TSD): 10 ms
 Tele measuring value TM : 2s
Measurement error of SCADA system ≤ 1% in the full scale
Delay of TSS, TSD, TM signal not exceed 4s
Status changes must be transmitted with the full-year-month-date, hour-
minutes-sec-milliseconds time label (CP56Time2a of IEC 60870-5-104), which
reflects accurately the time of state changes.
Have a buffer to store status change information in case of loss of connection to
the LDC for at least 10 days. This information will be transmitted after the
connection is restored.
In case of auxiliary power of power plant in failure, the power supply for the
Gateway must be guaranteed to maintain a minimum of 10 hours.
The database memory of the Gateway shall be continued for at least 30 days in
case power of Gateway is failure. If a power failure occurs during the 30 day

period, the Gateway shall restart without reloading the database.
9.3.4 Datalist for SCADA/EMS
All data/signals required for operational and non-operational purposes shall be
collected and communicated to the SCADA/EMS of A0/A3 via an IEC60870-
5-104 protocol. This data shall include, but not be limited to:
 Measured signals of frequency, 3 phase amperes, megawatts, megavars, tap
changer.
 Operation mode remote/supervisory
 Status of switchgears
 Tap-changers position, status and alarm.
 Relay protection status and alarm.
 All common status and alarm such as DC/AC power supply system for
communication, communication system, fire alarm… etc.
 Sequence-of-Events (only when events occur).
 Power Quality Events (only when events occur).
 Tele-control (CBs, DSs, Tap changer set-point, generator active power set-
point, etc…).
The datalist for SCADA/EMS system have been specified in Appendix 1.
9.3.5 Interconnection to the Communications Systems
The communications system shall be used to communicate between the power
plant and the A0/A3.
The Gateways shall be supplied under this Contract suitable for connection to
duplicated communications systems.
9.3.6 Interface Requirements
(1) Communications Interface
All facilities specified, requiring dedicated communications channels from the
power plant to the power network shall be wired through main distribution
frames (MDF).
(2) Gateways Interface
The arrangement of Gateways to supervisor information system network shall
be as shown on the drawings of this Request for Proposal Document.
9.3.7 SCADA/EMS system Integration
(1) General Operation
The operational control described below is that which shall be in place for the
commissioning of works in the Project.
It is the prime requirement of this contract to ensure that the data acquisition,
supervisory facilities and controls are in place to enable the effective
supervision, monitoring and control the Power Plant from A0 and A3. As part
of the Contract the Contractor shall also provide an expert to assist EVN in
building and commissioning the necessary augmentations to the master station
databases and displays at A0 and A3.
(2) SCADA Architecture and Control Center Links
The architecture shall consist of two computers (Gateways) with distributed
intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) or numerical relays.
The Plant gateways shall be directly linked to the master station facilities at A0
and A3.
The overall security of the monitoring and control facilities shall be improved.
The communication path route shall be different for each link. The links and
path routes are detailed in technical specifications of the communications
systems.
The central computers shall be connected to the distributed devices by a fibre
optic based LAN. A separate Human Machine Interface (HMI) shall be provided
at the Plant that shall allow monitoring and control of the Plant and equipment.
The integrity of the control system shall not be jeopardized by failure of the
HMI.
(3) Human-Machine Interface
The HMI facilities shall already exist at the remote Control Centers; however
the Contractor shall be required to augment the communication links to those
facilities using compatible signaling protocols so as to enable the remote
controls to work seamlessly with the existing controls to other Sites.
The HMI shall provide facilities for remote control, monitoring and supervision
of the HV Switchyards and the Power Plants. It shall be possible to access all
intelligent electronic devices, numerical relays and communication links from
this HMI.
The selection criteria for workstation hardware are life cycle cost, continuing
availability of stand-alone and personal productivity applications, and the
continuing ability to provide easy access to corporation applications and data.
At least a 24 inch full graphics monitor with high resolution shall be provided.
It shall be possible to connect other peripheral units such as printers to the
operator workstation. It shall be possible to run more than one operator
workstation at each location. The Contractor shall nominate the maximum
number of workstations that can be connected.
The system provided shall be user-friendly and allow multi-tasking.
The base system software provided in power plants shall be similar in all
systems and independent of the hardware configuration. Engineering and
system handling tools for the operator workstations shall be included.
The application software running on the operator workstations shall be written
in a high level language. The Contractor shall nominate in which high level
language the application software is written. It shall be possible for the Engineer
to enhance the application software should this be necessary at a future date.
The Contractor shall detail his recommended methodology for achieving this
outcome.
A library of standard application functions shall be available to simplify the
application engineering. When these standard functions are installed, any
necessary database objects shall be automatically created.
HMI Display Capacity:
The following displays shall be provided as a minimum:
 HV Switchyard Overview
 Single Line Diagrams
 Generator data
 Transformer data
 Control Summary
 I/O Points List (displays point name, status and whether the point is
transmitted to A0/A3.)
 A0 / A3 Link Derived Alarm Lists
 Tag Summary
 Control and Communication System Displays.
The main functions to be performed from the HMI are:
 Data Display, including:
 Switchyard one-line diagrams for control, status display and data display
 Operator access information
 Alarm review lists
 Events List (time tagged)
 Data Entry, including:
 Operator notes page and comments
 Total data base maintenance
 Time and date entry
 Indicated status, (e.g. opened, closed or indeterminate states).
 The quality of that indication, (e.g. maximum demand indication, first
good value, last good value, bad data quality, etc).
 Any work tags, (e.g. danger board, under access, plant not in service, plant
on test, etc).
 Whether the point is controllable and if so whether controls are enabled
 Whether the point is control blocked.
 Operator Control, including:
 Some HV switchgears (select and execute)
 Local Control enable/disable
 Remote Access Facility controls enable/disable
 Console audible alarm enable/disable
 Cancellation and acknowledgment of alarms.
(4) SCADA exchange and protocol
a) IEC61850 Protocol
The protocol for exchange between the switchyard and power plant via
Gateways in all cases shall be IEC61850.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that only objects and functions
supported by the IEC61850 protocol are used in his design. The
“Interoperability Table” shall be made available by the Contractor for review
and approval by the Owner.
b) IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
The protocol for exchange the power plant and A0/A3 via Gateways in all cases
shall be IEC60870-5-104.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that only objects and functions
supported by the existing IEC60870-5-104 protocol are used in his design. The
“Interoperability Table” prepared by the Contractor for the master station
currently being installed at A0 and A3 shall be made available by the Contractor
for review and approval by the Owner.
(5) Link Characteristics
Each link shall transfer HV switchyard and Plant information to and from the
remote central control centers. The data shall consist of status, alarms and
analogue information. This data may be obtained from any of the intelligent
electronic devices connected to the control system and include data from
parallel input/output units, protection relays, power meters, etc.
The alarms shall include information to indicate any momentary change in
status (i.e. fleeting alarm) that has occurred since last being scanned by A0 and
A3.
In addition, the link shall transport:
 Control commands from A0 and A3 for action on the Power Plant.
 Sequence of event information
 Derived alarms (i.e. alarms logically grouped together)
(6) Response Times
The SCADA/EMS system should be designed to provide acceptable response
times during:
 Normal operation;
 When the communication system is heavily loaded;

 When a significant power system incident has occurred.
The Contractor shall calculate and justify the response times that can be
achieved and shall state the turn-around times for communications with the
master stations.
The response times shall not exceed the following:
 Control operation with back indication: 2 seconds
 Update of analogue quantities: 5 seconds
 Status and alarms: 2 seconds
 Fully update all data from a Substation/Plant: 2 minutes.
(7) Remote Access
Remote access to the power plant control system shall be required to perform
maintenance and engineering functions. The communications systems are
required to support this access in a manner that enables the control system
supplier to deliver the following functionality:
(8) Security
a) Password security shall be implemented in a logical fashion to ensure that:
 No unauthorized person shall have access to the system.
 Only authorized maintenance staff can view alarms and control power plant
and some equipment of HV switchyard. This class of user shall be prevented
from making changes to protection relay settings.
 Only authorized engineering staff can view alarms and change relay/control
settings. This class of user cannot control Power Plant and HV equipment
switchyard.
Remote access of any kind must not be able to crash the system. In other words,
the system must continue to perform its functions even after accidental or
malicious file deletion.
b) Physical access control
Use magnetic card or Biological authentication to allow access the
SCADA/EMS system.
c) Bidirectional Security Gateways (BSG) shall be equipped with a security
solution that supports the testing of protocols: IEC60870-5-104 with processing
capacity from 500 Mbps to 1000 Mbps. The installation location of these
devices are shown on drawing No.QT1-RFP-CO-001.
d) Network firewall & Intrusion Prevention Solution (IPS-Intrusion Prevention
Systen) shall be supplied with the next-generation firewall system for
processing speeds (NGFW throughput) from 10 Gbps to 20 Gbps. The
installation location of these devices are shown on drawing No.QT1-RFP-CO-
001.
e) Security Software

SCADA/EMS shall be protected from any security threat and virus, the
contractor shall be responsible to provide solution for SCADA/EMS protection
including but not limited:
 End Point Security for Operation Work Stations, Host computers.
 Software logs with speed from 1000 EPS to 2500 EPS for Management
Station.
 Antivirus software shall be equipped for all stations.
All software provided to meet the requirements of this specification shall be
provided completely and without any further or ongoing license fees.
(9) Maintenance Access
EVN's maintenance staff shall be required to remotely access the control and
protection systems to obtain information. It shall be possible to obtain this
access either through a console port on the front of the control system or through
a dial-up modem. It shall be possible through a remote PC to view the displays
or to interrogate the database.
The displays available through this facility shall be the same as those on the
local HMI.
By default, control actions shall be disabled within the control system. It shall
be a simple, but deliberate process to enable these if required.
(10) Engineering Access
EVN's engineering staff shall be required to remotely access the control and
protection systems to alter engineering data and parameters, including:
 Protection relay settings
 Control system settings
 Gather fault recordings
 Execute and interpret control system diagnostics
 View alarms and HV switchyard status including one line diagrams.
Engineering access shall not be able to activate nor perform controls on any
items of the power plant.
(11) Time Synchronization
The time resolution of the internal clock circuitry to the control system shall be
±1 millisecond.
The internal clock circuitry shall accept the time being set in any of the
following three (3) ways:
 An external Intel x64 compatible PC running in the maintenance mode.
 Date and time setting messages originating from A3 or A0.
 Date and time setting messages originating from an external time reference
system (e.g. GPS).

The Contractor shall provide and install a system to synchronize time to a GPS
time base.
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that all devices that time tag
alarms or events are synchronized to within ±1 millisecond with respect to
Universal Time Co-ordinated (UTC) time with local offset.
The GPS time code receiver used shall be capable of synchronizing to a
minimum of four (4) satellites simultaneously. The specified accuracy of ±1
millisecond shall be maintained at all times including times when intermittent
satellite signal loss occurs.
9.4 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
a) Technical Services
Spares shall cover:
 Rapid restoration spares comprising replaceable sub units such as power
supplies and printed circuit cards - 10% of total, with a minimum of one (1).
 Component parts to enable a faulty sub unit to be repaired in a central
workshop - 5% of total.
b) Radio Paging, UHF Radio and Emergency Warning Systems
Radio paging system:
 Pagers, vibrating type - unit 2
 Pagers, audible type - unit 3
UHF Radio System:
 Radios, hand-held mobile - unit 1
 Radios, fixed - unit 1
c) Emergency Warning System:
Spares shall cover
 Rapid restoration spares comprising replaceable sub-units such as power
supplies, printed circuit cards, microphones, speakers etc. - 10% of total of
each sub-unit with a minimum of one (1).
 Component parts to enable a faulty sub-unit to be repaired in a workshop -
5% of total of each part with a minimum of one (1).
d) Special tools
The Bidder shall provide all special tools as required for plant maintenance.

APPENDIX 1: MINIMUM DATA LIST OF SCADA/EMS

QUANG TRACH 1 THERMAL POWER PLANT PROJECT
Generator Transformer GT1

HV of Transformer GT1
LV of Transformer GT1
SIGNAL
TYPE No DATA TYPE NAME
S/S COMMON
Busbar1-22 kv
Busbar2-22 kv
Signal Total
UAT1A
UAT2A
UAT1B
UAT2B
G1
G2
1 F FREQUENCY 3 1 1 1
2 A MWh 0
3 A AMPERE 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 KV VOLTS 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 MW MEGAWATTS 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6 MX MEGAVARS 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7 LL P LOWLIMIITP 2 1 1
8 HL P HIGH LIMITP 2 1 1
ATM 9 LL Q LOW LIMIIT Q 2 1 1
10 HLQ HIGH LIMIT Q 2 1 1
11 TMW TOTAL MW 1 1
12 T MX TOTAL MVAR 1 1
13 TC TEMPARATURE 0
14 TPI TAP CHANGER 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
TOTAL PER BAY : 61 3 4 4 4 4 1 1 8 8 5 5 5 5 2 2
ATM-Total 61
1 ALARM DC SYSTEM 48V 1 1
2 ALARM DC SYSTEM 220V 1 1
3 ALARM AC SYSTEM 220V/ 380 1 1
4 ALARM SWITCHING EQUIPMENT NOT READY (AIR / OIL / SF6/MECHANICAL) 2 1 1
5 ALARM EQUIPMENT FAULT 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6 OPERATED BUSBAR PROTECTION - MAIN 2 1 1
7 OPERATED BUSBAR PROTECTION - BACK-UP 0
8 OPERATED BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION (FROM F86BF) 0
9 OPERATED OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 0
10 OPERATED UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 0
11 OPERATED DISTANCE PROTECTION ZONE 1/TELEPRO. - MAIN (21 Z1 main) 0
12 OPERATED DISTANCE PROTECTION ZONE 2 - MAIN (21 Z2 main) 0
13 OPERATED DISTANCE PROTECTION - MAIN (21) 0
OPERATED DISTANCE PROTECTION ZONE 1/TELEPRO - BACK-UP (when applicable) (21 Z1 backup) 0
14 OPERATED DISTANCE PROTECTION ZONE 2 - BACK - UP (When applicable) (21 Z2 backup) 0


SIGNAL
S/S COMMON
Busbar1-22 kv
Busbar2-22 kv
Signal Total
UAT1A
UAT2A
UAT1B
UAT2B
G1
G2
15 OPERATED DISTANCE PROTECTION - BACK - UP (When applicable) (21 Z1 backup) 0
16 OPERATED LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (87L) 0
17 OPERATED DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (67/67N) 0
18 OPERATED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (50/50N) 0
19 OPERATED INTERTRIP SENT (85) 0
OPERATED INTERTRIP RECEIVED (85) 0
20 OPERATED AUTORECLOSE ORDER (79/25) 0
21 OPERATED EQUIPMENT OVERLOAD PROTECTION TRIP (49TRIP) 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
TSS-1B 22 OPERATED EQUIPMENT OVERLOAD PROTECTION ALARM (49 ALARM) 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
23 OPERATED EQUIPMENT (VOLTAGE) UNBALANCE PROTECTION 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
24 OPERATED EQUIPMENT DIFF. PROTECTION : DIFFERENTIAL STAGE (87) 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
25 OPERATED EQUIPMENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
26 OPERATED EQUIPMENT OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
27 OPERATED EQUIPMENT RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
28 OPERATED BUCCHOLZ (96) 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
29 OPERATED WINDING TEMP. TRIP (26) 12 2 2 2 2 2 2
30 OPERATED WINDING TEMP. ALARM (26) 12 2 2 2 2 2 2
31 OPERATED OIL TEMP. TRIP (26) 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
32 OPERATED OIL TEMP. ALARM (26) 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
33 OPERATED PRESSURE RELIEF RELAY 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
34 OPERATED EQUIPMENT TRIP 4 1 1 1 1
35 LOCAL OPERATION MODE REMOTE / LOCAL 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
36 DISABLE RTU REMOTE CONTROL 1 1
37 OPERATED GENERATOR. DIFFERENTIAL 2 1 1
38 OPERATED GENERATOR. EARTH FAULT 2 1 1
39 OPERATED GENERATOR. OVERLOAD 2 1 1
40 OPERATED GENERATOR. EARTH FAULT 2 1 1
41 ALARM GENERATOR. OVERLOAD 2 1 1
TOTAL PER BAY : 128 4 0 0 0 0 18 18 9 9 17 17 17 17 1 1
TSS - TOTAL : 128
1 OPEN / CLOSE EARTHING SWTCH 4 2 2
2 OPEN / CLOSE DISCONNECTOR 2 1 1
TSD-2B 4 OPEN / CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 6 1 1 1 1 1 1

TOTAL PER BAY : 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 1 1 1 1 0 0


SIGNAL
S/S COMMON
Busbar1-22 kv
Busbar2-22 kv
Signal Total
UAT1A
UAT2A
UAT1B
UAT2B
G1
G2
TSD - TOTAL : 12
1 OPEN / CLOSE DISCONNECTOR 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
2 OPEN / CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
4 SETPOINTVALUE GENERATOR. ACTIVE POWER CONTROL 2 1 1
5 SETPOINTVALUE GENERATOR. REACTIVE POWER CONTROL 2 1 1
6 SETPOINTVALUE GENERATORTERMINALVOLTAGE CONTROL 2 1 1
RCD-2B
7 START/STOP DIESEL GENERATOR START/STOP 0
8 RAISE / LOWER TAP CHANGER 6 1 1 1 1 1 1
TOTAL PER BAY : 16 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 5 5 1 1 1 1 0 0
RCD - TOTAL : 16

[APPENDIX #1]
ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA

TWO(2) x 700 MW QUANG TRACH I THERMAL POWER PLANT
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL Rev. F
CONTENTS
1.0 PURPOSE OF DOCUMENT................................................................................................ 1
2.0 DESIGN CONDITION .......................................................................................................... 1

2.1 TEMPERATURE ..................................................................................................................... 1
2.2 HUMIDITY ............................................................................................................................. 1
2.3 WIND & SEISMIC .................................................................................................................. 1
3.0 ELECTRICAL VOLTAGE CRITERIA ............................................................................. 2

3.1 SYSTEM VOLTAGE AND GROUNDING ............................................................................ 2
3.2 EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE ....................................................................................................... 2
4.0 VARIATION .......................................................................................................................... 3

4.1 FREQUENCY ......................................................................................................................... 3
4.2 VOLTAGE ............................................................................................................................... 3
5.0 DEGREE OF ENCLOSURE PROTECTION (IP CODE) ................................................ 4
6.0 CT / VT APPLICATION CRITERIA ................................................................................. 5
7.0 COLOR CODE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ................................................................ 6

7.1 POWER CABLE ..................................................................................................................... 6
7.2 CONTROL & INSTRUMENT CABLE .................................................................................. 6
7.3 SWITCHGEAR BUS-BAR / BUS-DUCT .............................................................................. 7
7.4 PANEL INTERNAL CIRCUIT ............................................................................................... 8
7.5 INDICATING LAMP .............................................................................................................. 9
7.6 PUSH BUTTON ...................................................................................................................... 9
8.0 MINIMUM CABLE & WIRE SIZE .................................................................................. 10
9.0 PROTECTION RELAY MONITORING AND SETTING STATION .......................... 11
10.0 PANEL FABRICATION..................................................................................................... 12

10.1 Electrical clearance among secondary circuit live objects or between live objects and
grounding objects shall not be less than 4mm, and creepage distance shall not be less than 6mm. ..... 12
10.2 The Supplier shall provide preventative measures for prevention of intrusion by insects. ... 12
10.3 Sunshade ................................................................................................................................ 12
10.4 Multi-Cooling fan system ...................................................................................................... 12
10.5 Sheet metal thickness ............................................................................................................. 12
10.6 Panel Opening Plate ............................................................................................................... 13
10.7 CT and VT test terminal block ............................................................................................... 13
11.0 CABLE INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 13

11.1 POWER CABLE LUG .......................................................................................................... 13
i
11.2 CABLE ENTRY LOCATION................................................................................................ 13
12.0 THREAD TYPE ................................................................................................................... 13
13.0 EMERGENCY LIGHTING POWER CONCEPT ........................................................... 14

13.1 Three different types of emergency lighting fixtures shall be designed. ............................... 14
ii
1.0 PURPOSE OF DOCUMENT
This Design Criteria is provided to make uniform engineering application guide for QUANG
TRACH I THERMAL POWER PLANT PROJECT. If there is any discrepancy between this
addendum and ‘QT1-GTR-E-001 GTR-E’, Supplier should submit clarification to Purchaser
or Supplier should consider more stringent requirement.
All equipment shall be designed for an operating life of at least 30 years and shall be suitable
for continuous maximum rating operation.
2.0 DESIGN CONDITION

Electrical equipment shall be designed, manufactured and/or installed following site
conditions.
2.1 TEMPERATURE
- Average ambient temperature: 24.5ºC
- Maximum ambient temperature: 41ºC
- Minimum ambient temperature: 6.8ºC
2.2 HUMIDITY
- Average relative humidity: 84.2%
- Maximum relative humidity: 100%
2.3 WIND & SEISMIC
Supplier should consider WIND & SEISMIC condition in ‘Clause 4.3 Site and Design
Conditions of QT1-L-M-100-04-00001 PLANT GENERAL DESIGN CONDITIONS’ for
Supplier’s design and clarify it for Client if Client asked.
Supplier shall submit anchor bolt / structural support strength calculation based on these data.
1 of 15
3.0 ELECTRICAL VOLTAGE CRITERIA
3.1 SYSTEM VOLTAGE AND GROUNDING

SYSTEM NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE GROUNDING
1) EHV SYSTEM 500kVAC, 50Hz, 3PH Solidly grounded
ST GENERATOR Grounding TR
2) 23.5kVAC, 50Hz, 3PH with NGR grounded
(INC. GCB / IPB)
3) MV SYSTEM 11kV AC, 50Hz, 3PH Resistance grounded
4) LV SYSTEM
- 3PH CONSUMER 400V AC, 50Hz, 3PH Solidly grounded
5) UPS SYSTEM
6) DC SYSTEM 220V DC Resistance grounded
7) EMERGENCY DG 400V AC, 50Hz, 3PH Resistance grounded
3.2 EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE

EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE CB TYPE
[3 PHASE]
* P ≥ 200kW 11kV AC, 50Hz, 3PH VCB
* 200kW > P > 110kW 400V AC, 50Hz, 3PH ACB
MOTOR
* 110kW ≥ P 400V AC, 50Hz, 3PH MCCB
[1 PHASE] 230V AC, 50Hz, 1PH MCCB
[DC MOTOR] 220V DC MCCB
[3 PHASE]
* P > 100KVA 400V AC, 50Hz, 3PH ACB
* 100kVA ≥ P 400V AC, 50Hz, 3PH MCCB
NON-MOTOR
[1 PHASE] 230V AC, 50Hz, 1PH MCCB or MCB
[DC LOAD] 220V DC MCCB
[MOV] 400V AC, 50Hz, 3PH MCCB
UPS CONTROL 230V AC, 50Hz, 1PH MCCB or MCB
CONTROL DC CONTROL 220V DC MCCB or MCB
NORMAL AC CONTROL 230V AC, 50Hz, 1PH MCCB or MCB
2 of 15
4.0 VARIATION
4.1 FREQUENCY
MIN. SUSTAINABLE OPERATION

RANGE (Hz)
MOTOR OTHER SYSTEM
46 ≤ f ≤ 47.5 NO REQUIREMENT NO REQUIREMENT
CONTINUOUS
47.5 < f ≤ 48 10 MIN.
(including 47.5 Hz)
48 < f < 49 CONTINUOUS 30 MIN.
49 ≤ f ≤ 51 CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
51 < f ≤ 51.5 CONTINUOUS 30 MIN.
51.5 < f ≤ 52 CONTINUOUS 1 IMN.
4.2 VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE VARIATION RANGE
CONDITION
* Un : System Nominal voltage
STEADY-STATE ± 10% of Un
TRANSIENT-STATE During motor starting : 15% at motor terminal
3 of 15
5.0 DEGREE OF ENCLOSURE PROTECTION (IP CODE)

IP 41
SYSTEM / EQUIPMENT LOCATION IP DEGREE REMARKS
Indoor electrical or control room

with air-conditioning
Min. IP 41
Indoor area
Min. IP 54
without air-conditioning
Electrical / Control panel
Outdoor area Min. IP 56W Note.1
Indoor or outdoor area
with dust laden atmosphere
Min. IP 65 Note.2
Indoor area Min. IP 55

Indoor area
Connection / Junction box with dust laden atmosphere
Min. IP 65 Note.2
Outdoor area Min. IP 65W Note.1
DC / UPS system panel Indoor area Min. IP 42
Indoor area Min. IP 54

Motor & Termianl box
Outdoor area Min. IP 56
Container of
Outdoor area Min. IP 56
Emergency Diesel Generator
[Note]
1. The significance of supplementary letter ‘W’ : Provided with rain-hood as an additional

protective features at least. Additional protective feature other than rain-hood shall be
approved by Client.
2. Following areas are classified as dust laden atmosphere area.
- Coal handing system
- Ash handling system
4 of 15
6.0 CT / VT APPLICATION CRITERIA
EQUIPMENT GROUP ACCURACY CLASS

POWER GENERATING SYSTEM [CT]
- GENERATOR * FOR PROTECTION : 5P20 or CLASS X
- GEN. CIRCUIT BREAKER * FOR MEASURING / TARIFF METERING : 0.2FS10
- GENERATOR STEP-UP TR [VT]
- UNIT AUX. TR * FOR PROTECTION : 3P
- 500KV OHL * FOR MEASURING / TARIFF METERING : 0.2
* FOR GENERATOR SYNCHRONIZING : 0.2
MV POWER DISTRIBUTION [CT]

* FOR PROTECTION : 5P20
* FOR MEASURING : 0.5FS10
[VT]
* FOR PROTECTION : 3P
* FOR MEASURING : 0.5
* FOR SYNCHRO CHECK : 0.5
LV POWER DISTRIBUTION [CT]
* FOR PROTECTION : 5P20
* FOR MEASURING : 0.5FS10 or share the CT for
protection
[VT]
* FOR PROTECTION : 3P or share the VT for measuring
* FOR MEASURING : 0.5
* FOR SYNCHRO CHECK : 0.5
[NOTE]
1. CT and VT secondary wiring terminals shall be housed in Junction Box, Mashalling

Panel, Control cubicle or SWGR.
2. CT terminal block should be convenient shorting type and shorting device shall be
integrated with terminal not to be lost.
3. Each VT secondary circuit shall have separate MCB and have separate terminal block
which is not shared with other signals.
4. The application of Current transformers manufactured by GE is not allowed for
all voltage level as per Owner Instruction.
5 of 15
7.0 COLOR CODE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.1 POWER CABLE
PHASE COLOR CODE
A Yellow
B Green
3 PH C Red
Black (for direct earthing)
NEUTRAL
White (for isolated earthing)
LINE Yellow
NEUTRAL Black
1 PH
Note. If the busbar is tapped from 3ph busbar, color marker shall be
same with tapped busbar of 3ph.
+ Red
DC - Blue
NEUTRAL White
Yellow-Green
PROTECTIVE (longitudinally striped throughout the length)
EARTH (PE) Note. Sky-blue marking at the termination shall be made using
shrinkable tube.
7.2 CONTROL & INSTRUMENT CABLE

CORE
CABLE TYPE COLOR
IDENTIFICATION
Number (1,2,3... n) is printed on

MULTI-CORE White for all core
individual core with black letter
Number (1,2,3... n) is printed on

MULTI-PAIR Black / White for each pair
individual core of each pair
Black / White / Red for each Number (1,2,3... n) is printed on

MULTI-TRIAD
triad individual core of each triad
6 of 15
7.3 SWITCHGEAR BUS-BAR / BUS-DUCT
PHASE COLOR CODE
A Yellow
B Green
3 PH C Red
Black (for direct earthing)
NEUTRAL
White (for isolated earthing)
LINE Yellow
NEUTRAL Black
1 PH
Note. If the busbar is tapped from 3ph busbar, color marker
shall be same with tapped busbar of 3ph.
+ Red
DC - Blue
NEUTRAL White
YELLOW-GREEN
PROTECTIVE EARTH (PE)
Transversally Striped throughout the length
[NOTE]
1. Switchgear bus-bar will be arranged based on following order.
1) Vertically arranged bus-bar : A-B-C-(N), 'Top to Bottom' order
2) Horizontally arranged bus-bar : A-B-C-(N), 'Far to Near' or 'Left to Right' order when
viewed from operating corridor.
2. Color code application for Switchgear bus-bar and bus-duct will be as follows:
1) Switchgear Busbar : Color paint shall be applied as per color code.
2) Bus-duct : bushing base will be painted according to above color code.
7 of 15
7.4 PANEL INTERNAL CIRCUIT
PHASE COLOR
CT CIRCUIT YELLOW
VT CIRCUIT BLUE
230V AC CIRCUIT RED
220V DC CIRCUIT GREY
GROUNDING CIRCUIT YELLOW-GREEN
BY
OTHER CIRCUIT
MANUFACTURER
8 of 15
7.5 INDICATING LAMP
LAMP COLOR EQUIPMENT STATUS
ENERGIZED or OPERATIVE CONDITION
RED - CIRCUIT BREAKER or ISOLATOR CLOSED
- MOTOR RUNNING
DE-ENERGIZED or IN-OPERATIVE CONDITION
GREEN - CIRCUIT BREAKER or ISOLATOR OPENED
- MOTOR STOPPED
YELLOW FAULT or ABNORMAL CONDITION
WHITE HEALTHY or NORMAL CONDITION
7.6 PUSH BUTTON
BUTTON COLOR OPERATION RESULT

ENERGIZING or STARTING THE EQUIPMENT
RED - CIRCUIT BREAKER or ISOLATOR CLOSE
- MOTOR START
DE-ENERGIZING or STOPPING THE EQUIPMENT
GREEN - CIRCUIT BREAKER or ISOLATOR OPEN
- MOTOR STOP
9 of 15
8.0 MINIMUM CABLE & WIRE SIZE

MINIMUM
TYPE
ALLOWABLE SIZE
POWER CABLE 2.5mm2
CONTROL CABLE
* For Current Transformer 4mm2
* For Voltage Transformer 4mm2
* The Others 1.5mm2
INSTRUMENT CABLE
* Single pair / triad cable 1.5mm2
* Multi pair / triad cable 1.5mm2

tiết diện dây
WIRE FOR LIGHTING & SMALL POWER
* For building lighting & receptacle 2.5mm2
WIRE FOR PANEL INTERNAL
* For panel internal connection 1.5mm2
* For panel internal power supply 2.5mm2
* For solid state type circuits 0.5mm2
10 of 15
9.0 PROTECTION RELAY MONITORING AND SETTING STATION
According to GTR-E clause 7.8.1, all protection relay of Supplier’s MV/LV SWGR system
shall communicate with RMS Station (Relay Monitoring and Setting Station). Configuration
diagram with scope of supply are shown as follows.
SCOPE OF RMS STATION SUPPLIER

SCOPE OF MV SWGR SUPPLIER
SCOPE OF PURCHASER
RMS STATION
MAIN/BACKUP COMMUNICATION LINE

- IEC 61850 WITH TIME SYNCHRO SIGNAL
RELAY SET T ING

RELAY SET T ING &
& SYST EM ST AT US MONITORING
SYST EM ST AT US MONITORING
[NOT E.1]
FDF FDF LS scope??

(IF NECESSARY) (IF NECESSARY)
ETHERNET S/W ETHERNET S/W

(REDUNDANT) (REDUNDANT)
GSUT & UAT MV SWGR

PROTECTION RELAY PROTECTION RELAY
SUPPLIER'S PROTECTION PANEL SUPPLIER'S SWGR
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL IEC 61850

PROT. RELAY MAKER GE (MICOM)
NETWORK TYPE OF RELAYS RING NETWORK
[NOTE]
1. If Package Supplier supply MV SWGR with PLC system, relay setting shall be done by
RMS STATION as shown on configuration diagram but system shall be monitored by
PLC using hard wire & communication.
11 of 15
2. Based on configuration diagram, Supplier shall provide all necessary device including
FDF, adaptor, converter, patch code, connection materials of Purchaser’s cable connection
and etc.
Fibre Distribution Frame
3. All patch code should be breakout type.
4. Fiber optic cable shall be SM (single-mode) type.
5. All necessary Software & licence for protection relay shall be provided by Supplier.
6. MV SWGR Supplier shall provide technical support for design coordination with RMS
STATION Supplier.
7. MV SWGR Supplier shall provide Serpervising service during site test period between
RMS Station and MV SWGR.
10.0 PANEL FABRICATION
10.1 Electrical clearance among secondary circuit live objects or between live objects and
grounding objects shall not be less than 4mm, and creepage distance shall not be less than
6mm.
10.2 The Supplier shall provide preventative measures for prevention of intrusion by insects.
10.3 Sunshade
The normal operational areas of outdoor panel/equipment shall be provided with sunshades.
The sunshades shall be adequately sized to protect the areas from direct sun radiation down to
45ºC to the horizontal. The sunshades shall give sufficient head clearance to permit walking
and working space for normal maintenance with adequate artificial lighting as necessary.
10.4 Multi-Cooling fan system
Small multiple cooling fan systems shall be provided for electronic control / protection cabinet.
Each fan is individually protected by MCCB/MCB, is provided with LED indication of fan
failure.
10.5 Sheet metal thickness
The sheet metal switchboards shall be constructed of folded and welded sheets of 2.0mm
minimum thickness and where equipment is to be mounted on a panel the thickness of the
sheet metal shall be sufficient to prevent vibration affecting the correct operation of the
equipment.
12 of 15
10.6 Panel Opening Plate
All cable entry of panels shall be equipped with non-magnetic blind plate. The plate shall be
sized enough for installation of cable gland of armoured cable and shall be partitioned into
minimum two or three as required by Purchaser.
10.7 CT and VT test terminal block
All control panel, protection panels and SWGR/MCC shall have CT and VT test terminal
blocks (CTT & VTT). The CTT and VTT shall be mounted at front door and convenient for all
necessary test. Plugs and accessories for all CTT and VTT shall be provided considering
necessary test methods.
11.0 CABLE INSTALLATION
11.1 POWER CABLE LUG
1) POWER CABLE
- Cable size ≤95mm2 : One hole type lug
- Cable size > 95mm2 : Two hole type lug with 45mm hole distance
2) EARTHING WIRE
: One hole type lug
11.2 CABLE ENTRY LOCATION
Unless approved by Client, bottom entry shall be applied.
12.0 THREAD TYPE
The thread type of rigid steel conduits, cable gland and all the others equipment including
Motor cable entry shall be Metric.
Exception may be allowed for package equipment when manufacturer request based on their
design standard for normal operation of package equipment. But in this case, the Supplier
should provide adaptors for Metric type connection.
13 of 15
13.0 EMERGENCY LIGHTING POWER CONCEPT
13.1 Three different types of emergency lighting fixtures shall be designed.
Emergency
Description Power Supply Remark
Lighting Type
Essential AC power from

Emergency lighting for EDG with
Type 1
'Main Building Area' self-contained battery
pack (2 hours)
Normal AC power
Emergency lighting for with
Type 2
‘Other Area’ self-contained battery
pack (2 hours)
Normal AC power
with
Type 3 All EXIT lighting
self-contained battery
pack (2 hours)
1) Type 1 - Emergency AC Lighting (1) for ‘Main Building Area’
- The emergency lighting for ‘Main Building Area’ where operators are regularly
resident will be powered from essential AC power source generated by emergency
diesel generator.
* Main Building Area
- Central control building
- Turbine house
- Laboratory & Water treatment building
- ESP/FGD control & Ash pump control building
- Coal handling control building
- Boiler (Boiler Tower)
- Fly Ash Silo
- Stack/Chimney (Internal Light)
- Under failure of normal power, lighting fixtures will still remain on for 2 hours via
self-contained battery pack. And, If the emergency diesel generator start power
supply to essential switchgear, the emergency lighting will be continuously operated
without interruption.
2) Type 2 - Emergency AC Lighting (2) for ‘Other Area’
14 of 15
The emergency lighting for ‘Other Area’ will be powered from normal AC power source
with self-contained battery pack (2 hours).
3) Type 3 - All EXIT Lighting
The EXIT lighting will be powered from normal AC power source with self-contained
battery pack (2 hours).
15 of 15

For Quotation: General Technical Requirement FOR Electrical

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

For Quotation: General Technical Requirement FOR Electrical

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEQ.

F 2021.11.04 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN

E 2021.09.17 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN

D 2021.08.25 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN

C 2021.07.26 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN

B 2021.06.29 ISSUE FOR QUOTATION S.H.LEE S.H.LEE B.G.HAN

A - ISSUE FOR INFORMATION - - -

REV DATE DESCRIPTION DESIGNED CHECKED APPROVED

QUANG TRACH 1 THERMAL POWER PLANT

DESIGNED BY DATE TITLE :

S.H.LEE 2021.09.17 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

APPROVED BY DATE PROJECT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV.

REV. SEQ. ISSUE

F 1 19-NOV-2021 7.4.1.2 – 14) Updated

7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 6

1. ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA

7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All studies, design calculations and equipment sizing calculations shall be

For further information, please see Circular 25/2016/TT-BCT

Voltage Distribution and regulation

The configuration of the 11 kV and 400 V networks shall be constrained by

Note: The auxiliary power system design calculations and

(1) The winding shall be of an approved type in which replacement of a damaged

The Bidder shall provide the following generator condition monitoring

(2) Excitation Transformer

(3) Slip rings and Brush gear

(2) Duplication of Automatic Control and Manual Control

(3) Operation of Duplicate Circuits

(3) Range of Control

(5) Low and High Frequency Operation

(2) Automatic Run-up and run-down

(3) Reactive Power and Voltage Control

(4) Stabilizing Controls

(5) Over-Excitation Limit (OEL)

(6) Under-Excitation Limit (UEL)

(7) Stabilizer Output Monitoring

(8) Automatic Follow-up Device (AFU)

(9) Power System Stabilizer (PSS)

(1) Generator voltage transformer Failure Protection

(2) Rotor Over-Current Protection

(3) Overvoltage/ Overfluxing (V/Hz) Protection

(4) Under excitation Protection

(2) Manual Restrictive Limit

(1) Synchronizing Equipment

(3) Manual Synchronizing

(4) Automatic Synchronizing

(5) Synchronization at 500kV CB of 500kV Switchyard

(2) The generator hydrogen pressure shall be maintained automatically at a set

(6) Control equipment shall be provided to automatically maintain generator

(2) Intrinsically safe circuits shall be employed in areas where an explosive

Embedded temperature detectors (ETD), resistance temperature detectors

Current transformers (CT’s) and voltage transformers (VT’s) shall be provided

(5) An interposing CT shall not be used in conjunction with a metering CT.

(8) The earthing switch shall be situated in the VT cubicle.

(2) The transformers shall be of the air natural cooling type.

(4) The transformers shall comply with the following requirements:

Rated voltage Primary: Generator line to line voltage

Secondary: Secondary: 400 V

Cooling AN (Enclosed type)

Tapping Not required

System earthing Effectively earthed on HV and LV sides

230 kVA for 1 minute and accordance with earth